Factory Workshop Manual
Make
Ford
Model
Escape 4wd
Engine and year
L4-2.5L (2010)
Please navigate through the PDF using the options
provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar.
This manual was submitted by
Anonymous
Date
1st January 2018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Delay Relay: Locations
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory
Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 9
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Locations Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 25
Communications Control Module: Locations Audio Control Module (ACM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 28
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 29
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 30
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 31
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 32
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 33
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 34
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) >
Page 35
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 38
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after Step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 39
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The satellite radio receiver ESN displays on the screen.
3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Audio Systems With Navigation
1. Turn the ACM on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 40
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 41
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Without Navigation
With Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 42
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Programmable
Module Installation (PMI) in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
6. Remove the ACM.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is
being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment >
Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 43
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. For additional
information, refer to Information Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-4 > Jul >
10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn
Directions
TSB 10-13-4
07/19/10
SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT
VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010
FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic,
directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions
and/or unable to pin point vehicle location.
ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using
IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr.
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10E893 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: >
10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - No
Turn-By-Turn Directions
TSB 10-13-4
07/19/10
SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT
VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010
FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic,
directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions
and/or unable to pin point vehicle location.
ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using
IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr.
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10E893 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global
Positioning System Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 67
Global Positioning System Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 68
Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 69
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global
Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 70
Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Module (GPSM)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
2. Release the clip and remove the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr
> 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
TSB 10-6-3
04/12/10
SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with
Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN
number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not
delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT.
a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010.
b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes:
(1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD.
(2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD.
(3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS.
2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT.
NOTE
IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr.
System
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr
> 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 79
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio
Concerns
TSB 10-6-3
04/12/10
SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with
Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN
number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not
delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT.
a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010.
b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes:
(1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD.
(2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD.
(3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS.
2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT.
NOTE
IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr.
System
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: >
10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 85
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking Assist
Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space
Recognition
TSB 09-26-4
01/04/10
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built
on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize
a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for
a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module
(PAM) prior to performing this procedure.
a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2.
b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B.
2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking
Space Recognition
TSB 09-26-4
01/04/10
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built
on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize
a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for
a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module
(PAM) prior to performing this procedure.
a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2.
b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B.
2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 99
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 100
Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 101
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 102
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 107
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 108
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay
Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 113
Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 116
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 117
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 118
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 121
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 122
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 123
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 127
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 131
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 132
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 137
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 138
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 139
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicle shown, hybrid vehicle similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles. The ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 140
2. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Brakes
and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 146
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 147
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 150
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 151
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 152
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 153
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor
Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 154
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 159
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 160
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 164
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 165
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC
Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 170
Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 173
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 174
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 175
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: >
10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 194
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 195
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations
Interior Lighting Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 199
Interior Lighting Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 200
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle
3. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
5. Remove the floor console storage bin.
6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 205
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 206
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 209
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 210
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 211
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 212
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 213
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution
Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power
Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 232
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 233
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 234
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 239
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 240
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 241
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 242
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 243
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 246
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 247
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 248
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 249
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 250
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 251
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 252
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 253
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 254
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 257
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 258
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box >
Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 259
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that
As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices
must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the
configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs,
successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and
a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 265
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The
clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new
SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer
to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming
instructions, if necessary.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step clears DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This makes sure that all displays are visible under
all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body
(ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the
throttle opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
(IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel
to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle,
increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at
approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control
Components
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 269
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1)
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 270
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 271
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins >
Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's
Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All
Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
293
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
294
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
295
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
296
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
297
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
298
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
299
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
300
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
301
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
302
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
303
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page
304
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block are displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the
second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes
made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it
has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 307
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures >
Page 308
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information,
refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 312
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 313
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 318
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 319
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 320
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 324
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 325
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 330
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 331
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 332
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 333
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 334
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Always make sure the correct Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component is being
installed. Parts released for other vehicles may not be compatible even if they appear physically
similar. Check the part number listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent to make
sure the correct component is being installed. If an incorrect SRS component is installed, DTCs
may set.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with the SYNC(R) feature which contains the 911 assist option.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. For additional
information, refer to Information Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 335
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 336
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 337
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air
Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI). For additional information, refer
to Information Bus.
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 341
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 346
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 347
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 353
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 354
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 355
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 361
Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules
- Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 362
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 367
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element
Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 368
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 375
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 376
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 377
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 378
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations
Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 379
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 380
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 381
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 382
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 383
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 386
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 387
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 388
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 389
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 390
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 391
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams
Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 392
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 393
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 394
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 395
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 396
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 397
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 398
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 399
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 400
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 401
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Active Park Assist Sensor
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal
1. Remove the fender splash shield screws and lower bolts.
2. Position the fender splash shield aside and disconnect the electrical connector.
3. With a suitable tool (such as a flat-blade screwdriver) gently pry the retaining tabs to remove the
active park assist sensor(s).
- Remove the active park assist sensor(s) from the front bumper cover.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. After installing the sensor(s), use the scan tool to verify that the active park assist sensor PIDs
responding correctly. Carry out the Azimuth System
Check See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist. If
the active park assist sensor does not respond correctly, refer to Active Park Assist. See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 405
Parking Assist Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking
Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 406
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Active Park Assist Switch
Removal
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the active park assist switch from the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 412
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 415
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 416
Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 417
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 418
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 419
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 420
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior
Door Handle - Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 424
Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 425
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 426
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 427
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 428
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 429
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Power Seat Switch: Exploded Views
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 435
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 436
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 437
Power Seat Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 438
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 439
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 440
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 444
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the release switch electrical connector.
3. Press the tab and remove the liftgate release switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 447
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 452
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 453
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 454
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See: Body
and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 458
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 459
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 460
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 461
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 465
Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch
> Component Information > Locations > Page 466
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 470
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 471
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 476
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid
Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 477
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal Angle Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake pedal bracket. For additional information, refer to Brake Pedal and Bracket Hybrid See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake
Pedal Assy/Service and Repair.
2. Remove and discard the 2 brake pedal angle sensor screws.
3. Remove the brake pedal angle sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new brake pedal angle sensor screws.
5. Carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 484
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 485
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake
Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 486
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 490
Traction Control Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 491
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 492
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior
Moulding / Trim.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 497
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 498
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 499
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 502
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 503
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 504
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 505
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 506
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 509
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 510
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 511
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 512
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 513
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 514
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately. For additional information, refer to Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch.
Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 524
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 528
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 529
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 530
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 531
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 534
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant
Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
535
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Page 540
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Locations > Page 541
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control)
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 544
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch
NOTE: Non-hybrid shown, hybrid similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cruise control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch > Page 552
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Deactivator Switch
Cruise Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the cruise control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the cruise control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the cruise control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the cruise control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 557
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 558
Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 559
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 560
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 568
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 569
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 570
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 574
Blower Motor Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 575
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 576
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 580
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 581
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown, in-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 584
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 588
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on non-hybrid vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle
the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below
acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 592
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 596
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch,
HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 597
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Solar Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 601
Solar Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster
/ Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Door Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 609
Door Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 610
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the
FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP
module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve
located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A
flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the
fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 615
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 618
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 619
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 620
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 621
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 625
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 626
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 627
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 633
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp/Sunload Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 636
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp/Sunload Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 637
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 641
Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 642
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 646
Brake Light Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 647
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 650
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 651
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch can occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Door Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 655
Door Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 656
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 660
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 663
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 664
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Illumination Dimmer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 665
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 666
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 667
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 668
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 672
Headlamp Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 673
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 674
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 675
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Horn Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Interior Light Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 682
Interior Light Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 683
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 684
Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle
3. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
5. Remove the floor console storage bin.
6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 688
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 689
Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 690
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 691
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 697
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 698
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 702
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 703
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 704
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 705
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 706
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure.
Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor
is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 714
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 719
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 720
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor > Page 723
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor > Page 724
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 725
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 726
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 734
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
738
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
739
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
740
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
741
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
742
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
743
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
744
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
745
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
746
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
750
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
751
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
752
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
753
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 756
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 757
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 762
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 763
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 764
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 765
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
769
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
770
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Typical In-tank FTP Sensor
Typical In-line FTP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
774
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
775
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
776
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC)
efficiency.
The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM)
uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide
input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is
integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
777
Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor
Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 782
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 783
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 786
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 787
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 788
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 789
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 790
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 791
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 795
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 796
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 797
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses
the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input
used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral
with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor.
Typical MAP Sensor
Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 798
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 806
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 807
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 808
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 809
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 810
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 813
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 814
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 815
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop
operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical HO2S
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 818
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 821
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 822
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 827
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 831
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 836
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 840
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 841
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 842
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 843
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 844
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 845
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 846
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 851
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling.
Typical VSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 856
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 861
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 862
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 866
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 867
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 868
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 869
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 870
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure
difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies
between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts
corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the
output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after
several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is
energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome
light does not affect the FP module control.
The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail
pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and
pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with
the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control
system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump.
Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is
de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi)
lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if
the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379
kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 875
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 882
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 883
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 884
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is
retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum
shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch
is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle.
Typical IFS Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 885
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 890
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 896
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 897
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
> Page 900
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
> Page 901
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 902
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 903
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 907
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 908
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 909
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 910
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 911
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 912
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 913
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 914
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 915
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder > Page 925
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 931
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 932
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to
Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 937
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 938
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 941
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 942
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 943
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 944
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 945
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 946
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 951
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 956
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 957
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 958
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 959
Impact Sensor: Locations
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 960
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 961
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 962
Front Impact Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 963
Front Impact Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 964
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 967
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 968
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 969
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 970
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 971
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Front Impact Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 972
Front Impact Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean
and free of foreign material before installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 975
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 976
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and
Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 981
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 984
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 991
Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 994
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a
new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM)
must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 995
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 996
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 997
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Do not prove out the SRS within the seat
installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to
carry out the system reset procedure.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
See: Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound
in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 998
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 999
Removal
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM
electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1000
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat
cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1001
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the correct seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1002
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Do not prove out the SRS within the seat
installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to
carry out the system reset procedure.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 1003
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1007
Seat Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1008
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1014
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1015
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1016
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1019
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 1020
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1030
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 1036
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1037
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to
Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 1044
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and
Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1050
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1051
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire
Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP)
Switch
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP)
Switch > Page 1058
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive.
Typical Stalk Mounted TCS
Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1065
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1066
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1067
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1068
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1069
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1070
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1071
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 1076
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1077
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1078
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1081
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1082
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1083
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and
Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly,
continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1084
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1085
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1086
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed
(OSS) Sensor > Page 1087
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and
Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1097
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1098
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1099
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1102
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1103
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1104
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1105
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1106
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1107
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1110
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1111
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1112
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1113
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 1114
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1115
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1120
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1121
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1122
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1123
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1124
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 1125
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1129
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1130
Wiper Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1131
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1132
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1134
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
NOTE: All alignment specifications are with the vehicle fuel tank full.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 1140
Alignment: Specifications General Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications >
Page 1141
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1144
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1145
Alignment: Description and Operation Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1146
Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1147
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1148
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Wander
Wheel Alignment Angles
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy
Wheel Alignment Angles
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Nibble
Wheel Alignment Angles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation > Camber > Page
1149
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Poor Groove Feel
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
- Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
- In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Difference From Standard Position (LH side)
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Difference From Standard Position (RH side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1152
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering
Diagnosis and Testing for steering wheel position
sensor calibration. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1153
Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 2).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1154
5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement 2).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt
(measurement 3).
3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1155
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable
holding device.
3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nut(s).
6. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the inner tie rod is rotated.
Rotate the inner tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut or damage to the
boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster
Adjustment > Page 1156
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing portion of Steering.
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct
clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
- Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing portion of Steering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 1161
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect
Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and
Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 1162
All vehicles
7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system
pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP module fuse.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Filter Element: Diagrams
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1167
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component
Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1176
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1181
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1182
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1183
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1184
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of
electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating,
wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump
pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1187
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1193
Crank the engine as follows:
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1194
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System
Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1195
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Cylinder Leakage Detection
When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in
pinpointing the exact cause.
The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center
(TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted.
Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of
leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive.
While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the
intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the
tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing
through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug
hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into
the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Adjustments
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Engine, Cooling
and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Accessory Drive
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as:
- Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
- WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur:
- if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
- the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
- if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
- if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
- if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
- if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
-
NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt Noise/Flutter > Page 1204
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following:
- Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
- With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
- Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
- Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory
Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1207
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the
accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley.
- Remove the accessory drive belt from the engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information >
Diagrams
Air Filter Element: Diagrams
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 1213
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air
filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and
Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1226
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1227
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant
for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the
hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and
contaminate the refrigerant system.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1228
4. Remove the evaporator-to-compressor suction line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
9. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of
any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will
damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Add the correct amount of clean electric A/C compressor oil to the refrigerant system.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1229
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1230
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line
Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line.
6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1231
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket.
8. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US)
Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US)
Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Coolant ................................................................................................................................................
............................................. 7.4 Quarts ( 7.0 Liters )
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1243
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with bittering agent (yellow-colored)
Ford Part Number - VC-7-B
Ford Specification - WSS-M97B51-A1
Note: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T
- Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1248
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transaxle ............................................................................................................................
.................................................... 9 quarts (8.5 liters)
NOTE: Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler
size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should
be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1251
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON LV ATF
Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV
Ford Specification - MERCON LV
NOTE: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use
of any fluid other then the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specified for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental
transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products could cause internal
transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission.
NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing and cleaning will be performed using the
Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions
included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present
before proceeding.
NOTE: If the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent is not available, install a new
transmission fluid cooler and/or an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an in-line transmission fluid filter, remove and discard the
in-line filter.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the cooler line flusher with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the transmission fluid in the cooler line flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F)
before using.
3. If equipped, remove and discard the in-line transmission fluid filter.
4. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler tubes.
5. Attach the cooler line flusher red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick
disconnect fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1254
6. Attach the cooler line flusher blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick
disconnect fitting.
7. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission
fluid cooler prior to starting the flushing
procedure.
8. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission fluid cooler
in a normal flow direction for an additional
10-15 minutes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1255
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3
times.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A
small amount of metal or friction particles may be
found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the
transaxle will need to be overhauled.
Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear
position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times.
After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level
for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 1256
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Exchange
Transmission Fluid Exchange
NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental
transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal
transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Use the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to change the fluid.
3. Connect the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to the transmission
fluid cooler tube after the transmission fluid
cooler on the return tube. This will help remove any foreign material trapped in the transmission
fluid coolers.
4. Perform the transmission fluid exchange using the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power
Steering Fluid X-Changer. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions included with the machine.
5. Once the transmission fluid exchange is completed, disconnect the Heavy-Duty Transmission
and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer. Reconnect any
disconnected transmission fluid cooler tubes.
6. Using the scan tool with the engine running, check and make sure that the transmission is at
normal operating temperature 66-77°C (150-170°F).
Check and adjust the transmission fluid level and check for any leaks. If transmission fluid is
needed, add transmission fluid in increments of 0.24L (0.5 pt) until the correct level is achieved.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A
small amount of metal or friction particles may be
found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal
service will be required.
Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
6. NOTE: After the transmission fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a
small amount of thread sealant to the threads.
Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. NOTICE: Use only clean transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any
supplemental transmission fluid additives or
cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal transmission components to fail,
which will affect the operation of the transmission.
Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the
fill plug hole.
8. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug, removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on
the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
1260
Install the fill plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
9. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transaxle ................................................................................................................................
................................................. 2.4 quarts (2.3 liters)
NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1265
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Ford Part Number - XT-4-QGL
Ford Specification - WSS-M2C203-A1 and GL-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1266
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.
5. Fill the transmission with gear oil through the fill level inspection plug hole, until level with the fill
level inspection plug hole.
6. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity
Rear Axle .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L )
Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1271
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Part Number - XY-80W90-QL
Ford Specification - WSP-M2C197-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Power Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................
........................................... 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 1276
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) Fluid (4X4)
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant.
Ford Part Number - XY-75W140-QL
Ford Specification - WSL-M2C192-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 5.0 Liters (5.3 Qt)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1281
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)*
Ford Part Number - XO-5W20-QSP (US) - XO-5W20-QFS (US) - CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada)
Ford Specification - WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification Mark
*Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity.................................
..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08
kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1286
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity.................................
..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08
kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1287
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken
directly from the refrigeration system or storage
containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the
sample for testing.
2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
- If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with
Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the
Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is
98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt
the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered
refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system
flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1290
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried
out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery
equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment
manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment
that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant
system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer
to Refrigerant Identification Testing See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification Testing.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil
removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once
repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF
the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the
vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum
Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that
the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1291
5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump
and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the
Vacuum Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least
99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service
gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If
vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition
of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant
system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or
electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil
Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1292
refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and
gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition
of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant
system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or
electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil
Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a
supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select
MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge
to complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1293
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Installation
Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) and any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to
filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible
to correctly remove any foreign material/debris. These components are typically discarded after
A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged
with foreign material. The F8VZ-19E773-AB filter is intended for use on one vehicle only.
All vehicles
1. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seal.
2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit (219-00074) are
designed for low-pressure flushing and
are not designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting
connections using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant
will occur.
NOTE: Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
Using the correct adapters and service hoses, install the pancake filter between the condenser and
the condenser outlet fitting.
3. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition
of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant
system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or
electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil
Adding See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 1294
Non-hybrid vehicles
5. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Start the engine
and allow it to idle briefly. Select A/C operation and
set the blower speed to HI. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly.
6. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at
800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at
1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating.
7. Stop the engine.
Hybrid vehicles
8. Start the vehicle and select A/C operation. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly.
9. Run the A/C system for one hour.
All vehicles
10. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
11. Remove the pancake filter, hoses and adapters from the vehicle.
12. Install a new gasket seal and connect the condenser outlet fitting.
13. Install a new receiver/drier.
14. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity.....................................
..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid
325 ml (11 fl oz)
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification.......................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......- Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................................
.............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz)
Refer to the Refrigerant Oil Adding / Procedures. See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 1299
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity.....................................
..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid
325 ml (11 fl oz)
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification.......................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......- Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................................
.............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1300
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant Oil Adding
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTICE: During normal Air Conditioning (A/C) operation, oil is circulated through the system with
the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the
system are removed, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original
total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the
new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
a If an excessive amount of refrigerant oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage,
the total system refrigerant oil capacity must be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1301
added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
refrigerant oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement - Non-Hybrid
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 full rotations (clockwise) while collecting the PAG oil
in a clean measuring cup.
- Add the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After Electric A/C Compressor Replacement - Hybrid
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTE: Service electric A/C compressors are shipped with 60 ml (2 fl oz) of electric A/C
compressor oil already installed.
1. Drain the oil from the old electric compressor into a clean measuring cup.
- If the amount of oil drained is less than or equal to 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the amount of oil collected
by the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine during refrigerant recovery to the low-side service
port after the new electric A/C compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated.
- If the amount of oil drained is greater than 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the difference between the amount
collected and 60 ml (2 fl oz), plus the amount collected by the R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine during refrigerant recovery, to the low-side service port after the new electric A/C
compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTICE: Do not add liquid based R-134a Leak Detection Dye to the refrigerant system on hybrid
vehicles equipped with an electric A/C compressor. Liquid based dyes are mixed with PAG oil, and
will contaminate and damage the hybrid refrigerant system. Dye can only be added to hybrid
vehicles by installing a new receiver/drier which includes a fluorescent dye "wafer" which will
dissolve after approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation.
NOTE: The dye/lubricant injector is included as part of the 219-00069 R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set.
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging.
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct adapters to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1302
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of new refrigerant compressor oil.
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the
refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1307
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1308
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1309
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1310
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap.
- Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1311
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1312
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap.
- Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
4. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component
Bleeding > Page 1313
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. For additional
information, refer to Brake System Bleeding.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1318
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1319
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1320
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1321
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1322
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1323
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1328
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1329
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1330
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1331
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1332
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair >
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1333
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1340
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1341
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1345
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and
ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1346
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1351
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1352
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1353
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1354
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations
> Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1355
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1358
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1359
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1360
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1361
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1362
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1363
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1364
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1365
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1366
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1367
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1368
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1369
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1370
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1371
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1372
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1373
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1374
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1375
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1376
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1377
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1378
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1379
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1380
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1381
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1382
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1383
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1384
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1385
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams
> Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1386
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1391
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1392
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1393
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1394
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1395
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1398
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1399
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1400
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1401
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1402
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1403
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1404
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1406
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1409
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1410
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application
and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1411
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset > Page 1417
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster (IC) and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
Information And Message Center
Setup Displays
The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of
the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or
metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or
to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life.
On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the
appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the
autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver
selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK ON [OFF]. For
additional information on configurable items, refer to the Owner's Literature.
The setup display modes are:
- Reset to English (if set in another language)
- System check
- Oil life reset/oil life starting value
- Units English/metric
- Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped)
- Autolock on/off
- Auto-unlock on/off
- Language
Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value
The oil life is displayed in percentages and is preset to a maximum of 12,070 km (7,500 miles)/180
days (non-hybrid) or 12,070 km (7,500 miles) one year (hybrid). The oil life start value is used to
increase or decrease the starting point of the oil life. The value can be changed back to the
maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to
lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. Each 10% reduction lowers the oil life in both
mileage and the days.
For example, if the oil life start value is lowered to 50%, the maximum mileage is 6,035 km (3,750
miles)/90 days (non-hybrid) or 6,035 km (3,750 miles) 6 months (hybrid). The oil life remains at the
selected setting (50% in this example) until the driver changes the oil life start value. When the oil
life (not oil life start value) is reset back to 100% following an oil change, the oil life resets to 6,035
km (3,750 miles). For configuration of the oil life and oil life start value, refer to Message Center
Configuration See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Service
and Repair/Reset Procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 1424
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXXs in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1434
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 1435
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1441
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1442
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1447
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1448
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1449
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1450
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1451
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star/cross pattern. Tighten to....................................................................
...............................................................................................................................135 Nm (100 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
- Discard the wheel stud.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1461
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud
serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to
allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange.
Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made
by the original wheel stud.
- Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard
wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Suspension > Page 1462
against the washers.
- Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub
flange.
4. Remove the wheel nut and washers.
5. Install the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Towing Information > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 1467
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Service and Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing
Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's
P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve
Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough
Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1489
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1490
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1491
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1492
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information.
For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System -
General Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for
that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning
information in 10 degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1493
couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the
chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either
an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 1498
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 1499
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve
Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1500
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Engine.
2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information >
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System
Diagnosis > Compression Test
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System
Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1506
Crank the engine as follows:
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System
Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1507
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System
Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1508
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Cylinder Leakage Detection
When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in
pinpointing the exact cause.
The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center
(TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted.
Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of
leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive.
While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the
intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the
tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing
through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug
hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into
the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft
Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft sprocket bolts Tighten the bolt to.........................................................................................
.................................................................................................72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Camshaft: Procedures
Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal
clearance.
Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions.
- Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter.
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft end play.
2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head.
3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play.
- If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play.
- If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head.
Camshaft Surface Inspection
Camshaft Surface Inspection
1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable
outside the contact area.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1517
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions.
Camshaft Lobe Lift
Camshaft Lobe Lift
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Use the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift.
- Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial
Indicator Gauge reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift.
Camshaft Runout
Camshaft Runout
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1518
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, measure the camshaft runout.
- Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest Dial Indicator Gauge reading from the highest Dial
Indicator Gauge reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1519
Camshaft: Removal and Replacement
Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket
Camshaft Phaser and Sprocket
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Do not rotate the camshafts or crankshaft unless instructed to do so in this procedure.
Rotating the camshafts or crankshaft with timing components loosened or removed can cause
serious damage to the valves or pistons.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
3. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. For additional information,
refer to Computers and Control Systems.
4. Check the valve clearance. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check See:
Adjustments.
5. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the
normal direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
- The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1520
6. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed,
rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
7. Remove the engine plug bolt.
8. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning
past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be
rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during
the camshaft removal and installation.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
9. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1521
10. Remove the lower timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
11. Remove the upper timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
12. Reposition the Camshaft Alignment Plate to the slot on the rear of the intake camshaft only.
13. NOTE: Releasing the ratcheting mechanism in the timing chain tensioner allows the plunger to
collapse and create slack in the timing chain.
Installing the M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole will lock the tensioner arm in a
retracted position and allow enough slack in the timing chain for removal of the exhaust camshaft
gear.
Using a small pick tool, release the timing chain tensioner ratchet through the lower front cover
timing hole.
- Have an assistant rotate (using the flats of the camshaft) the exhaust camshaft clockwise to
collapse the timing chain tensioner plunger.
- Insert the M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole to hold the tensioner arm in the
retracted position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1522
14. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust
camshaft drive gear.
15. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
16. Remove the timing chain from the intake camshaft drive gear.
17. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for installation reference.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1523
18. NOTICE: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the intake
camshaft.
Remove the intake camshaft from the engine.
- Loosen the intake camshaft bearing cap bolts, in the sequence shown, one turn at a time until all
tension is released from the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the bolts and the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the intake camshaft.
19. Mark the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft for reference during installation.
20. Place the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser and
sprocket.
Installation
1. NOTE: If new parts are installed, transfer the reference marks made during disassembly to the
new parts.
Position the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Install the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the bolt.
- Align the reference marks on the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft. Tighten the
bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
2. NOTICE: Install the intake camshaft with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the
Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed
without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position
as noted in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or
installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and
pistons.
NOTE: Lubricate the intake camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil.
Install the intake camshafts and bearing caps. Tighten the intake camshaft bearing caps in the
sequence shown in 3 stages:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1524
- Stage 1: Tighten the intake camshaft bearing cap bolts until finger-tight.
- Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (142 lb-in).
3. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
4. Install the timing chain on the intake camshaft drive gear.
5. NOTE: The timing chain must be correctly engaged on the teeth of the crankshaft timing
sprocket and the intake camshaft drive gear in order to
install the exhaust camshaft drive gear onto the exhaust camshaft.
Position the exhaust camshaft drive gear in the timing chain and install the gear and bolt on the
exhaust camshaft.
- Hand-tighten the bolt.
6. NOTE: Releasing the tensioner arm will remove the slack from the timing chain.
Remove the M6 x 30 mm bolt from the upper front cover timing hole to release the tensioner arm.
7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the exhaust camshaft drive
gear bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1525
8. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
9. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
10. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
11. Install the upper timing hole plug in the engine front cover.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
12. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the threads of the lower timing hole plug.
- Install the lower timing hole plug in the engine front cover. Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1526
13. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
14. Install the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
15. Install the VCT oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control
Systems.
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Camshafts
Camshafts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1527
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
NOTICE: Do not rotate the camshafts unless instructed to in this procedure. Rotating the
camshafts or crankshaft with timing components loosened or removed can cause serious damage
to the valves and pistons.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the accessory drivebelt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
3. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. For additional information,
refer to Computers and Control Systems.
4. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
5. Check the valve clearance. For additional information, refer to Valve Clearance Check See:
Adjustments.
6. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the
normal direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
- The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1528
damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed,
rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
8. Remove the engine plug bolt.
9. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning
past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be
rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during
the camshaft removal and installation.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
10. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
11. Remove the lower front cover timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1529
12. Remove the upper front cover timing hole plug from the engine front cover.
13. Reposition the Camshaft Alignment Plate to the slot on the rear of the intake camshaft only.
14. NOTE: Releasing the ratcheting mechanism in the timing chain tensioner allows the plunger to
collapse and create slack in the timing chain.
Installing an M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole will hold the tensioner arm in a
retracted position and allow enough slack in the timing chain for removal of the exhaust camshaft
gear.
Using a small pick tool, unlock the chain tensioner ratchet through the lower front cover timing hole.
- Using the flats of the camshaft, have an assistant rotate the exhaust camshaft clockwise to
collapse the timing chain tensioner plunger.
- Insert an M6 x 30 mm bolt into the upper front cover timing hole to hold the tensioner arm in the
retracted position.
15. Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust
camshaft drive gear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1530
16. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
17. Remove the timing chain from the intake camshaft drive gear.
18. Mark the position of the camshaft lobes on the No. 1 cylinder for installation reference.
19. NOTICE: Failure to follow the camshaft loosening procedure can result in damage to the
camshafts.
NOTE: Mark the location and orientation of each camshaft bearing cap.
Remove the camshafts from the engine.
- Loosen the camshaft bearing cap bolts, in sequence, one turn at a time until all tension is
released from the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the bolts and the camshaft bearing caps.
- Remove the camshafts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1531
20. If removal of the camshaft phaser and sprocket is necessary, mark the sprocket and camshaft
for reference during installation.
- If necessary, place the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Remove the bolt and the camshaft phaser
and sprocket.
Installation
1. NOTE: If new parts are installed, transfer the reference marks made during disassembly to the
new parts.
If necessary, position the camshaft in a soft-jawed vise and install the camshaft phaser and
sprocket and the bolt
- Align the reference marks on the camshaft phaser and sprocket and the camshaft. Tighten the
bolt to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
2. NOTICE: Install the camshafts with the alignment slots in the camshafts lined up so the
Camshaft Alignment Plate can be installed
without rotating the camshafts. Make sure the lobes on the No. 1 cylinder are in the same position
as noted in the removal procedure. Rotating the camshafts when the timing chain is removed, or
installing the camshafts 180 degrees out of position can cause severe damage to the valves and
pistons.
NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft journals and bearing caps with clean engine oil.
Install the camshafts and bearing caps in their original location and orientation. Tighten the bearing
caps in the sequence shown in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten the camshaft bearing cap bolts one turn at a time, until finger-tight.
- Stage 2: Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 16 Nm (142 lb-in).
3. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1532
4. Install the timing chain on the intake camshaft drive gear.
5. NOTE: The timing chain must be correctly engaged on the teeth of the crankshaft timing
sprocket and the intake camshaft drive gear in order to
install the exhaust camshaft drive gear onto the exhaust camshaft.
Position the exhaust camshaft drive gear in the timing chain and install the gear and bolt on the
exhaust camshaft.
- Hand-tighten the bolt.
6. NOTE: Releasing the tensioner arm will remove the slack from the timing chain.
Remove the M6 x 30 mm bolt from the upper front cover timing hole to release the tensioner arm.
7. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts.
- Tighten to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
8. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1533
9. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
10. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
11. Install the upper front cover timing hole plug.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
12. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the threads of the lower front cover timing hole plug.
- Install the plug and tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
13. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
14. Install the accessory drivebelt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets
and Accessories.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine
> Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1534
15. Install the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
16. Install the VCT oil control solenoid. For additional information, refer to Computers and Control
Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Procedures
Valve Tappet Inspection
Valve Tappet Inspection
1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Install new components as necessary.
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection
1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found,
inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash
Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1539
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Removal and Replacement
Valve Tappets
Valve Tappets
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts.
3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their
original positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil prior to installation.
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm
Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1544
Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable Valve Timing
Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's
P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Variable Valve
Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough
Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1560
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1561
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 1562
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1563
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information.
For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System -
General Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for
that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning
information in 10 degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve
Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1564
couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the
chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either
an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Balance Shaft: Service and Repair
Balance Shaft Backlash
1. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the
crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft
TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at Top Dead Center (TDC).
2. Mark the balancer unit and shafts on the top for reference that the balancer unit is at TDC.
3. NOTE: Due to the precision interior construction of the balancer unit, it should not be
disassembled.
Remove the 4 bolts and the balancer unit.
4. Remove the adjustment shims from the seat faces of the balancer unit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1569
5. NOTICE: Visually inspect the balancer unit gear for damage and verify that the shaft turns
smoothly. If there is any damage or
malfunction, replace the balancer unit.
Install the master adjustment shims (No. 50) on the seat faces of the balancer unit.
6. With the balancer unit shaft marks at the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the
cylinder block to avoid interference between the
crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear.
7. Install the balancer unit bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
8. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
- Rotate the crankshaft to confirm that there are no meshing problems between the balancer unit
gear and the crankshaft gear.
9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the
crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft
TDC Timing Peg. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1570
10. NOTE: Measure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following 6
positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees,
190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment
between measurements.
NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a
5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm
(3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not
touching the balance shaft housing.
NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as
shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction
with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown.
Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash.
- Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in)
above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit.
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10
degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees.
11. NOTE: If maximum backlash exceeds 0.101 mm (0.003 in), install a new balancer unit.
Using the backlash measurement, select the proper shims from the Adjustment Shim Selection
Table.
- Remove the balancer unit from the cylinder block.
- Install the selected adjustment shims on the seat faces of the balancer unit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1571
12. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the
crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft
TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at TDC.
13. With the balancer unit shaft marks in the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the
cylinder block to avoid interference between the
crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear.
14. Install the balancer unit bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Balance Shaft >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1572
15. NOTE: Remeasure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following
6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees,
190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment
between measurements.
NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a
5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm
(3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not
touching the balance shaft housing.
NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as
shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction
with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown.
Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash.
- Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in)
above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit.
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10
degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees.
- If the backlash exceeds the specified range of 0.005 to 0.101 mm (0.00019 to 0.0039 in), install a
new balancer unit and repeat the procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Connecting Rod Bearing: Service and Repair
Bearing Inspection
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects:
1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating
3. Imbedded dirty engine oil
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1579
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Rod Bearing Cap
Install the connecting caps and bolts. Tighten the bolts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to....................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......29 Nm (21 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten an additional............................................................................
.....................................................................................................90 degrees.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the crankshaft connecting rod journal diameters in 2 directions perpendicular to one
another at each end of the connecting rod journal.
The difference in the measurements from one end to the other is the taper. Verify measurement is
within the wear limit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1582
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal
clearance.
1. Remove the crankshaft main bearing caps and crankshaft main bearing.
2. Lay a piece of Plastigage across the face of each crankshaft main bearing surface.
3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure.
Install and remove the crankshaft main bearing cap.
4. Verify the crankshaft journal clearance.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1583
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bend
Connecting Rod Bend
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the connecting rod bend on a suitable alignment fixture.
Follow the instructions of the fixture manufacturer.
Verify the bend measurement is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1584
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter
Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Use a telescoping gauge to determine the ID of the connecting rod bushing, if equipped.
2. Measure the telescoping gauge with a micrometer. Verify the diameter is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1585
Connecting Rod: Service and Repair
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the crankshaft connecting rod journal diameters in 2 directions perpendicular to one
another at each end of the connecting rod journal.
The difference in the measurements from one end to the other is the taper. Verify measurement is
within the wear limit.
Connecting Rod Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal
clearance.
1. Remove the crankshaft main bearing caps and crankshaft main bearing.
2. Lay a piece of Plastigage across the face of each crankshaft main bearing surface.
3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure.
Install and remove the crankshaft main bearing cap.
4. Verify the crankshaft journal clearance.
Connecting Rod Bend
Connecting Rod Bend
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1586
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the connecting rod bend on a suitable alignment fixture.
Follow the instructions of the fixture manufacturer.
Verify the bend measurement is within specification.
Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter
Connecting Rod Bushing Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Use a telescoping gauge to determine the ID of the connecting rod bushing, if equipped.
2. Measure the telescoping gauge with a micrometer. Verify the diameter is within specification.
Connecting Rod Cleaning
Connecting Rod Cleaning
NOTICE: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or damage to connecting rods can occur.
1. NOTE: The connecting rod large end is a matched set. The connecting rod cap must be installed
on the original connecting rod in the original
position. Do not reverse the cap. Parts are not interchangeable.
Mark and separate the parts and clean with solvent. Clean the oil passages.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1587
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
Connecting Rod Large End Bore
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Tighten the bolts to specification, then measure the bore in 2 directions. The difference is the
connecting rod bore out-of-round. Verify the
out-of-round is within specification.
Connecting Rod to Crankshaft Side Clearance
Connecting Rod to Crankshaft Side Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the clearance between the connecting rod and the
crankshaft. Verify the measurement is within specification.
Connecting Rod Twist
Connecting Rod Twist
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Connecting Rod Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1588
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the connecting rod twist on a suitable alignment fixture.
Follow the instructions of the fixture manufacturer.
Verify the measurement is within specification.
Connecting Rod-to-Piston Clearance
Connecting Rod-to-Piston Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the clearance between the connecting rod and the piston.
Verify the measurement is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1592
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1593
a No. 3 Journal - Supported by No. 1 and No. 5 journals.
Main Bearing Cap
Install and tighten the 10 main bearing beam bolts. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3
stages. Stage 1: Tighten to...................................................................................................................
.......................................................................5 Nm (44 lb-in). Stage 2: Tighten to..............................
...........................................................................................................................................................2
5 Nm (18 lb-ft). Stage 3: Tighten an additional.....................................................................................
............................................................................................90 degrees.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1594
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1595
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair
Bearing Inspection
1. Inspect bearings for the following defects:
1. Cratering - fatigue failure
2. Spot polishing - incorrect seating
3. Imbedded dirty engine oil
4. Scratching - dirty engine oil
5. Base exposed - poor lubrication
6. Both edges worn - journal damaged
7. One edge worn - journal tapered or bearing not seated
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure each of the crankshaft main bearing journal diameters in at least 2 directions at each
end of the main bearing journal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1600
Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal-to-Bearing Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
NOTE: Crankshaft main bearing journals must be within specifications before checking journal
clearance.
1. Remove the crankshaft main bearing caps and crankshaft main bearing.
2. Lay a piece of Plastigage across the face of each crankshaft main bearing surface.
3. NOTE: Do not turn the crankshaft while carrying out this procedure.
Install and remove the crankshaft main bearing cap.
4. Verify the crankshaft journal clearance.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1601
Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft End Play
Crankshaft End Play
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture.
2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block.
3. Zero the Dial Indicator Gauge.
4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Taper and Out-of-Round > Page 1602
Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter
Crankshaft Main Bearing Journal Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure each of the crankshaft main bearing journal diameters in at least 2 directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair
Block Heater
2.5L
3.0L
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
2. NOTICE: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot
components, or damage to the wiring
can occur.
Disconnect the block heater electrical connector.
3. Remove the block heater.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft) (2.5L).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1606
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft) (3.0L).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to......................................................
.................................................................................................................................100 Nm (74 lb-ft).
Stage 2: Tighten an additional..............................................................................................................
...................................................................90 degrees.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1610
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Pulley
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
3. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
4. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
5. NOTICE: Failure to position the No. 1 piston at Top Dead Center (TDC) can result in damage to
the engine. Turn the engine in the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1611
normal direction of rotation only.
Using the crankshaft pulley bolt, turn the crankshaft clockwise to position the No. 1 piston at Top
Dead Center (TDC).
- The hole in the crankshaft pulley should be in the 6 o'clock position.
6. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
NOTE: The camshaft timing slots are offset. If the Camshaft Alignment Plate cannot be installed,
rotate the crankshaft one complete revolution clockwise to correctly position the camshafts.
Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate in the slots on the rear of both camshafts.
7. Remove the engine plug bolt.
8. NOTE: The Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg will contact the crankshaft and prevent it from turning
past TDC. However, the crankshaft can still be
rotated in the counterclockwise direction. The crankshaft must remain at the TDC position during
the crankshaft pulley removal and installation.
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
9. NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the Top Dead Center (TDC) position during removal of
the pulley bolt or damage to the engine
can occur. Therefore, the crankshaft pulley must be held in place with the Crankshaft Damper
Holding Tool, and the bolt should be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1612
removed using an air impact wrench (1/2-in drive minimum).
NOTICE: The crankshaft sprocket diamond washer may come off with the crankshaft pulley. The
diamond washer must be replaced. Remove and discard the diamond washer. If the diamond
washer is not installed, engine damage may occur.
Use the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and a suitable 1/2-in drive hand tool to hold the
crankshaft pulley. Use an air impact wrench to remove the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Remove and discard the crankshaft pulley bolt and washer.
- Remove the crankshaft pulley.
- Remove the diamond washer and discard.
Installation
1. Install a new diamond washer.
2. NOTE: Do not install the crankshaft pulley bolt at this time.
NOTE: Apply clean engine oil on the seal area before installing.
Position the crankshaft pulley onto the crankshaft with the hole in the pulley at the 6 o'clock
position.
3. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
NOTE: This step will correctly align the crankshaft pulley to the crankshaft.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
4. NOTICE: The crankshaft must remain in the Top Dead Center (TDC) position during installation
of the pulley bolt or damage to the
engine can occur. Therefore, the crankshaft pulley must be held in place with the Crankshaft
Damper Holding Tool and the bolt should be installed using hand tools only.
NOTE: Do not reuse the crankshaft pulley bolt.
Install a new crankshaft pulley bolt. Use the Crankshaft Damper Holding Tool and a suitable 1/2-in
drive hand tool to hold the crankshaft pulley, tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt in 2 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 100 Nm (74 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1613
- Stage 2: Tighten an additional 90 degrees.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
6. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
7. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
8. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise one and three-fourths turns.
9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
10. NOTE: Only turn the engine in the normal direction of rotation.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1614
11. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Using the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt, check the position of the crankshaft pulley.
- If it is not possible to install the bolt, the engine valve timing must be corrected by repeating this
procedure.
12. Install the Camshaft Alignment Plate to check the position of the camshafts.
- If it is not possible to install the Camshaft Alignment Plate, the engine valve timing must be
corrected by repeating this procedure.
13. Remove the Camshaft Alignment Plate.
14. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
15. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1615
16. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
17. Install the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
18. Install the front RH wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
19. Install the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
20. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Piston: Procedures
Piston Inspection
Piston Inspection
NOTICE: Do not use a caustic cleaning solution or a wire brush to clean the pistons or damage can
occur.
1. Clean and inspect the (1) ring lands, (2) skirts, (3) pin bosses and the (4) tops of the pistons. If
wear marks, scores or glazing is found on the piston
skirt, check for a bent or twisted connecting rod.
2. Use the Piston Ring Groove Scraper to clean the piston ring grooves.
- Make sure the oil ring holes are clean.
Piston Pin Bore Diameter
Piston Pin Bore Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. NOTE: Piston and piston pins are a matched set and should not be interchanged.
Measure the piston pin bore diameter in 2 directions on each side. Verify the diameter is within
specification.
Piston Diameter
Piston Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1620
1. Measure the piston diameter 90 degrees from the piston pin and 42 mm (1.65 in) down from the
top of the piston at the point indicated.
Piston To Cylinder Bore Clearance
Piston To Cylinder Bore Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Subtract the piston diameter from the cylinder bore diameter to find the piston-to-cylinder bore
clearance.
Piston Selection
Piston Selection
NOTE: The cylinder bore must be within the specifications for taper and out-of-round before fitting
a piston.
1. Select a piston size based on the cylinder bore.
2. NOTE: For precision fit, new pistons are divided into 3 categories within each size range based
on their relative position within the range. A paint
spot or specific size grade on a new piston indicates the position within the size range.
Choose the piston with the correct paint color or specific size grade.
Piston Ring End Gap
Piston Ring End Gap
NOTICE: Use care when fitting piston rings to avoid possible damage to the piston ring or the
cylinder bore.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1621
NOTE: Piston rings should not be transferred from one piston to another.
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
NOTE: The cylinder bore must be within specification for taper and out-of-round.
1. Use a piston without rings to push a piston ring in a cylinder to the bottom of ring travel.
2. Use the Feeler Gauge Set to measure the top piston ring end gap and the second piston ring
end gap.
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
Piston Ring-to-Groove Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Inspect the piston for ring land damage or accelerated wear.
2. Using the Feeler Gauge Set, measure the piston ring-to-groove clearance.
Piston Pin Diameter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1622
Piston Pin Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the piston pin diameter in 2 directions at the points shown. Verify the diameter is within
specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1623
Piston: Overhaul
Piston
Disassembly
1. Remove the piston rings from the piston.
- Discard the piston rings.
2. Remove the 2 piston pin retainers and the piston pin.
3. NOTE: If the piston and connecting rod are to be reinstalled, they must be assembled in the
same orientation. Mark the piston orientation to the
connecting rod for reassembly.
Separate the piston from the connecting rod.
4. Clean and inspect the piston and connecting rod. For additional information, refer to Engine.
Assembly
1. NOTE: The arrow on the top of the piston points towards the front of the engine.
Align the piston-to-connecting rod orientation marks, and position the connecting rod in the piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1624
2. Lubricate the piston pin and pin bore with clean engine oil.
3. Install the piston pin in the piston and connecting rod assembly.
4. Install the piston pin retaining clips in the piston.
5. Lubricate the piston and the new piston rings with clean engine oil.
6. NOTE: The piston compression upper and lower ring should be installed with the paint mark on
the outside diameter circumference of the ring to
be positioned on the right side of the ring gap. The lower compression ring can also be installed
with the undercut side downward.
NOTE: The upper and lower compression ring gaps are not controlled for installation.
Install the piston rings onto the piston as shown.
1. Piston pin
2. Upper oil control ring gap location
3. Lower oil control ring gap location
4. Center line of the piston pin bore and the expander gap
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System
Information > Adjustments
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components - Exploded View and Valve Tappets
See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release >
System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rocker Arm Assembly: Procedures
Roller Follower Inspection
1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft
lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1636
Rocker Arm Assembly: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
Valve Cover
Valve Cover (View 1 of 2)
Valve Cover (2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1640
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. Remove the oil level indicator.
2. Remove the ignition coil-on-plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System.
3. Disconnect the crankcase vent hose.
4. Disconnect the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor electrical connector.
5. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the radio capacitor electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) solenoid electrical connector.
8. Detach all of the wiring harness retainers from the valve cover studs and position the harness
aside.
9. Remove the 14 valve cover retainers, the valve cover and gasket.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
2. NOTE: The valve cover must be secured within 4 minutes of silicone gasket application. If the
valve cover is not secured within 4 minutes, the
sealant must be removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal surface prep.
Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the locations shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1641
3. NOTE: Clean and inspect the gasket. Install a new gasket, if necessary.
Install the valve cover, gasket and retainers.
- Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Position the wiring harness and attach all of the wiring harness retainers to the valve cover
studs.
5. Connect the VCT solenoid electrical connector.
6. Connect the radio capacitor electrical connector.
7. Connect the CMP sensor electrical connector.
8. Connect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
9. Connect the crankcase vent hose.
10. Install the ignition coil-on-plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System.
11. Install the oil level indicator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Valve Guide: Service and Repair
Valve Guide Inner Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into
the combustion chamber side of the valve guide, if
necessary.
Use a ball gauge to determine the inside diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top,
middle and bottom of the valve guide.
2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer.
3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
Valve Seat Inspection
Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance.
1. Check the valve head and seat.
- Check valve angles.
- Check margin width.
- Be sure margin width is within specification.
2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if
abnormalities are found.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1649
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Width
Valve Seat Width
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification.
- Measure the intake valve seat width.
- Measure the exhaust valve seat width.
- Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve
springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements > Page 1650
Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Runout
Valve Seat Runout
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Valve Spring: Procedures
Valve Spring Installed Length
Valve Spring Installed Length
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Free Length
Valve Spring Free Length
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the free length of each valve spring.
Valve Spring Squareness
Valve Spring Squareness
1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring.
- Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square.
Valve Spring Strength
Valve Spring Strength
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1655
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Use the Valve/Clutch Spring Pressure Gauge to check the valve spring for correct strength at the
specified valve spring length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1656
Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Springs
Valve Springs
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1657
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters
and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts.
3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their
original positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. Remove the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System.
5. NOTICE: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed
air from the cylinder until the valve spring,
valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed. Any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall
into the cylinder.
Connect the compressed air supply to cylinder No. 1.
6. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side.
Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring.
- Using the Valve Spring Compressors, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet,
using some multi-purpose grease and a small screwdriver.
- Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
Installation
1. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet.
Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring.
- Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer.
- Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some multi-purpose grease and a
small screwdriver.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1658
2. Disconnect the compressed air supply.
3. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders.
4. Install the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System.
5. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them.
6. Install the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Camshafts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter
Valve Stem Diameter
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the
diameter is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1663
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection
Valve Inspection
1. Inspect the following valve areas:
1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring.
2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores.
3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking.
4. The valve margin for wear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1664
Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance
Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Engine for the specification.
NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve
guide clearance.
1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base.
Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve
guide.
2. Move the Valve Guide Clearance Gauge toward the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture
and zero the Dial Indicator Gauge. Move the
Valve Guide Clearance Gauge away from the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture and note
the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Diagrams
Drive Belt: Diagrams
Accessory Drive
Accessory Drive Belt Routing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
Accessory Drive
Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter
NOTICE: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any
fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping
mechanism may occur.
Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of
a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley.
To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area
with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft
direction or at an angle to the straightedge.
Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on
an accessory pulley under certain conditions.
A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start up and shut down or during very rapid
engine acceleration and decelerations, such as:
- Wide Open Throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back-out shifts on automatic
transmissions.
- WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions.
These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias
required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or
reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur:
- if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged.
- the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked.
- the A/C anti-slugging strategy executes after a long hot heat soak.
- if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after
several minutes) exceeds specifications.
- if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All
accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory.
- if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has
been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power
steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with
clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a
localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt
and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and
rinsed with clean water.
- if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive
belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will
release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal
installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt.
-
NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding.
Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter > Page 1671
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation
NOTICE: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may
cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys.
Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt
tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive
belt.
Incorrect Installation
Correct Installation
With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the
accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur.
Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking
condition exists, proceed with the following:
- Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting
pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the
mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of
alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises.
- With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the
pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary.
- Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any
interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference
condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
- Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware
to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1674
Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt
Accessory Drive Belt
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the
accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley.
- Remove the accessory drive belt from the engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Description and Operation
Drive Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
Accessory Drive
Belt Tensioner
NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit.
Automatic tensioners are calibrated to provide the correct amount of tension to the belt for a given
accessory drive system. Unless a spring or damping band within the tensioner assembly breaks, or
some other mechanical part of the tensioner fails, there is no need to check the tensioner for
correct tension.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Belt Tensioner - Mechanical
The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind.
1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under
Accessory Drive See: Description and Operation in
the Description and Operation.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to
release.
Release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out
the following tests:
- Move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed
position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the
tensioner spring.
- Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition.
- Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and
repair any leaks.
3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new
tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner
meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. See: Belt
Tensioner - Dynamics
4. If the tensioner is saturated with oil and grease internally, install a new tensioner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Belt Tensioner - Mechanical > Page 1680
Drive Belt Tensioner: Testing and Inspection Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
Accessory Drive
Component Tests
Belt Tensioner - Dynamics
The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows:
1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory
drive tensioner should move (respond) when the
A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive
belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt
rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive
accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If
excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt
tensioner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive
Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View >
Page 1683
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit.
Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the
accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley.
4. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner must be replaced as a complete unit.
Remove the 2 bolts and the accessory drive belt tensioner.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Mount: Procedures
Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing
NOTE: Refer to the appropriate system and procedure for special instructions on loosening and
tightening mount fasteners.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
3. Lower the vehicle.
4. NOTICE: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may
occur.
Start the vehicle and move it in forward 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). Then move the vehicle in reverse the
same distance.
5. Raise and support the vehicle.
6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners.
7. Lower the vehicle.
8. Test the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1688
Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement
Engine Mount
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Install the Engine Support Bar.
3. Remove the engine mount bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Use the Engine Support Bar to raise the engine 25 mm (0.98 in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories >
Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1689
5. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine mount bracket.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine mount.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler
Pulley > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View > Page 1694
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley
Removal and Installation
All idler pulleys
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Using the hex feature, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner clockwise and remove the
accessory drive belt from the coolant pump pulley.
Smooth idler pulley
4. Loosen the bolt and remove the smooth accessory drive belt idler pulley.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Grooved idler pulley
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the grooved accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm) ...........................................................................................................
..............................................200-268 kPa (29-39 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1699
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine.
2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the
specification chart in the appropriate engine system.
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
- Insufficient oil
- Oil leakage
- Worn or damaged oil pump
- Oil pump screen cover and tube
- Excessive main bearing clearance
- Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
- Chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair
Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Spin-on Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles
NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar.
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1703
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick
Tube > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1704
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil
With Filter ............................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 5.0 Liters (5.3 Qt)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1709
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil (US) - Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil (Canada) Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil (Canada)*
Ford Part Number - XO-5W20-QSP (US) - XO-5W20-QFS (US) - CXO-5W20-LSP12 (Canada) CXO-5W20-LFS12 (Canada)
Ford Specification - WSS-M2C930-A and API Certification Mark
*Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the
requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Filter Adapter > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Oil Filter Adapter: Service and Repair
Oil Filter Adapter
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the spin-on oil filter.
- To install, lubricate the spin-on oil filter gasket with clean engine oil and tighten the oil filter
three-fourths turn after the oil filter gasket makes contact with the oil filter adapter.
5. NOTE: Discard the gasket.
Remove the 4 bolts and the oil filter adapter.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Spin-on Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles
NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar.
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1717
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1718
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1719
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1720
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1721
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan
Oil Pan
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
3. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the transmission, do not loosen the transmission-to-engine bolts
more than 5 mm (0.19 in).
Loosen the 2 upper bellhousing-to-engine bolts 5 mm (0.19 in).
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
4. Working from the top of the vehicle, loosen the 2 RH engine-to-bellhousing bolts 5 mm (0.19 in).
5. Working from under the vehicle, loosen the 2 RH engine bracket-to-Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
bolts 5 mm (0.19 in).
All vehicles
6. Remove the 7 retainers (5 shown) and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1722
7. Loosen the 2 LH bellhousing-to-engine bolts 5 mm (0.19 in).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
8. Loosen the 1 (manual transaxle) or 2 (automatic transaxle) RH engine-to-bellhousing bolt 5 mm
(0.19 in).
All vehicles
9. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-bellhousing bolts.
10. Remove the 2 bellhousing-to-oil pan bolts.
11. Slide the transaxle rearward 5 mm (0.19 in).
12. Drain the engine oil.
- Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft).
13. Remove the 4 engine front cover-to-oil pan bolts.
14. Remove the 13 bolts and the oil pan.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces
of sealant.
Clean and inspect all mating surfaces.
2. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 10 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be
removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal
surface prep. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 10 minutes, whichever is longer.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan-to-engine block and to
the oil pan-to-engine front cover mating surface.
3. Position the oil pan onto the engine and install the oil pan bolts finger-tight.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1723
4. NOTE: The engine front cover-to-oil pan bolts must be tightened first to align the front surface of
the oil pan flush with the front surface of the
engine block.
Install the 4 engine front cover-to-oil pan bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
FWD vehicles
6. Alternate tightening the 1 LH bellhousing-to-engine and 1 RH engine-to-bellhousing bolts to slide
the transaxle and engine together.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. Tighten the 1 remaining LH bellhousing-to-engine bolt.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
8. Tighten the 1 remaining RH engine-to-bellhousing bolt (automatic transaxle).
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
AWD vehicles
9. Alternate tightening the 1 RH engine-to-PTU bracket bolt and 1 LH bellhousing-to-engine bolt to
slide transaxle and engine together.
- Tighten the PTU bracket bolt to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft).
- Tighten the LH bellhousing bolt to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
10. Tighten the remaining RH engine-to-PTU bracket bolt.
- Tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft).
11. Tighten the 1 remaining LH lower bolt.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
All vehicles
12. Install the 2 bellhousing-to-oil pan bolts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
13. Install the 2 oil pan-to-bellhousing bolts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
14. Install the LH splash shield and the 7 retainers (5 shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1724
AWD vehicles
15. Working from the top of vehicle, tighten the 2 RH engine-to-bellhousing bolts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
All vehicles
16. Tighten the 2 upper bellhousing-to-engine bolts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
17. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
18. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1728
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1729
Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1730
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender >
Component Information > Locations > Page 1731
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Filter Adapter, Spin-on Oil Filter and Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Vehicles
NOTE: Automatic transmission shown, manual transmission similar.
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1736
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1737
Oil Pump
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1738
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Exploded View - Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup
Tube
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube, All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1739
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube - Exploded
View
Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View
Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View > Page 1740
Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the oil pan. For additional information, refer to Engine Lubrication Components Exploded View See: Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View and Oil Pan See: Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Oil Pan.
3. NOTE: Discard the gasket and clean and inspect the gasket mating surfaces.
Remove the 2 bolts and the oil pump screen and pickup tube.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications
Oil pressure (hot @ 2,000 rpm) ...........................................................................................................
..............................................200-268 kPa (29-39 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil
Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1745
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Oil Pressure Test
1. Disconnect and remove the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch from the engine.
2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port.
3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached.
4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading.
5. The oil pressure should be within specifications; for additional information, refer to the
specification chart in the appropriate engine system.
6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources:
- Insufficient oil
- Oil leakage
- Worn or damaged oil pump
- Oil pump screen cover and tube
- Excessive main bearing clearance
- Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance
- Chain tensioner leak
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch,
Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Intake Manifold Bolts Tighten to...........................................................................................................
.........................................................................................18 Nm (159 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1752
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
Intake Manifold
Intake Manifold (View 1 of 2)
Intake Manifold (View 2 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1753
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the fuel rail. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3. Disconnect the vacuum supply hose.
- Depress the quick release locking ring.
- Pull the vacuum hose out of the quick release fitting.
4. Disconnect the fuel vapor return hose from the intake manifold.
5. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the electronic throttle control electrical connector.
8. Disconnect the Knock Sensor (KS) electrical connector.
- Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer.
9. Detach the heater hose pin-type retainer.
10. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the intake manifold and position the wiring
harness aside.
11. Loosen the clamp and disconnect Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe from the Throttle Body (TB).
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
12. Remove the intake manifold lower bolt.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
13. Remove the 6 bolts and position the intake manifold aside to access the crankcase vent oil
separator tube and the EGR tube.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
14. Squeeze the 2 crankcase vent oil separator tube tabs and disconnect the tube from the intake
manifold.
15. Remove the EGR tube.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 1754
16. Remove the intake manifold and gaskets.
17. NOTICE: If the engine is repaired or replaced because of upper engine failure, typically
including valve or piston damage, check the
intake manifold for metal debris. If metal debris is found, install a new intake manifold. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in engine damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Inspect and install new intake manifold gaskets if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Seal
Crankshaft Rear Seal
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the flexplate or flywheel. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flexplate or Flywheel See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Flywheel.
3. Drain the engine oil.
- Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 28 Nm (21 lb-ft).
4. NOTICE: If the oil pan is not removed, damage to the rear oil seal retainer joint can occur.
Remove the 17 bolts and the oil pan.
5. Remove the 6 bolts and the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate.
Installation
1. Using the Crankshaft Rear Main Oil Seal Installer, position the crankshaft rear oil seal with
retainer plate onto the crankshaft.
2. Install the crankshaft rear oil seal with retainer plate and bolts.
- To install, tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1760
3. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges, which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove traces
of sealant.
Clean and inspect all the oil pan and cylinder block mating surfaces.
4. NOTE: If the oil pan is not secured within 4 minutes of sealant application, the sealant must be
removed and the sealing area cleaned with metal
surface prep. Allow to dry until there is no sign of wetness, or 4 minutes, whichever is longer.
Failure to follow this procedure can cause future oil leakage.
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the oil pan. Install the oil pan.
Install the 2 oil pan bolts finger-tight.
5. Install the 4 bolts.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. Install the remaining oil pan bolts and tighten the oil pan bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm
(18 lb-ft).
7. Install the flexplate or flywheel. For additional information, refer to Flexplate See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Flex Plate/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Flexplate or Flywheel See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Flywheel.
8. Fill the engine with clean engine oil.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing
Seal > Component Information > Service and Repair > Crankshaft Rear Seal > Page 1761
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal Exploded View
Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Front Seal
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft
Front Seal See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Diagrams and Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block
Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair.
2. NOTICE: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the
seal.
Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove the crankshaft front oil seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Remove the through-bolt from the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer.
NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft front oil seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1765
2. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Lower End Components Exploded View, Crankshaft Pulley and Crankshaft
Front Seal See: Cylinder Block Assembly/Diagrams and Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder Block
Assembly/Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Valve Train Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1770
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair Valve Seals
Valve Seals
Removal
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1771
2. Remove the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters
and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Camshafts.
3. NOTE: If the camshafts and valve tappets are to be reused, mark the location of the valve
tappets to make sure they are assembled in their
original positions.
NOTE: The number on the valve tappets only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the thickness of 3.650 mm.
Remove and inspect the valve tappets. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. Remove the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System.
5. NOTICE: Use compressed air at 7 to 10 bars (100-150 psi). Do not disconnect the compressed
air from the cylinder until the valve spring,
valve spring retainer and valve collet is installed. Any loss of air pressure will allow the valve to fall
into the cylinder.
Connect the compressed air supply to cylinder No. 1.
6. NOTE: Place all parts in order to one side.
Apply compressed air to the cylinder and remove the valve spring.
- Using the Valve Spring Compressors, compress the valve spring and remove the valve collet,
using some multi-purpose grease and a small screwdriver.
- Remove the valve spring retainer and the valve spring.
7. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove and discard the valve seal.
Installation
1. Install the valve stem seal installation sleeve.
2. Using the Valve Stem Oil Seal Installer, install the valve seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Valve Guide Seal >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Train Components - Exploded View > Page 1772
3. NOTE: Check the seating of the valve collet.
Using the Valve Spring Compressors, install the valve spring.
- Insert the valve spring and the valve spring retainer.
- Compress the valve spring and install the valve collet using some multi-purpose grease and a
small screwdriver.
4. Disconnect the compressed air supply.
5. Repeat the appropriate removal and installation steps for all of the other cylinders.
6. Install the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Ignition System.
7. Coat the valve tappets with clean engine oil and insert them.
8. Install the camshafts. For additional information, refer to Camshafts See: Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Camshafts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1777
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1778
Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1779
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender
> Component Information > Locations > Page 1780
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature
Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Balance Shaft: Service and Repair
Balance Shaft Backlash
1. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the
crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft
TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at Top Dead Center (TDC).
2. Mark the balancer unit and shafts on the top for reference that the balancer unit is at TDC.
3. NOTE: Due to the precision interior construction of the balancer unit, it should not be
disassembled.
Remove the 4 bolts and the balancer unit.
4. Remove the adjustment shims from the seat faces of the balancer unit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1788
5. NOTICE: Visually inspect the balancer unit gear for damage and verify that the shaft turns
smoothly. If there is any damage or
malfunction, replace the balancer unit.
Install the master adjustment shims (No. 50) on the seat faces of the balancer unit.
6. With the balancer unit shaft marks at the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the
cylinder block to avoid interference between the
crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear.
7. Install the balancer unit bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
8. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
- Rotate the crankshaft to confirm that there are no meshing problems between the balancer unit
gear and the crankshaft gear.
9. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the
crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft
TDC Timing Peg. Remove the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1789
10. NOTE: Measure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following 6
positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees,
190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment
between measurements.
NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a
5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm
(3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not
touching the balance shaft housing.
NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as
shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction
with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown.
Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash.
- Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in)
above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit.
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10
degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees.
11. NOTE: If maximum backlash exceeds 0.101 mm (0.003 in), install a new balancer unit.
Using the backlash measurement, select the proper shims from the Adjustment Shim Selection
Table.
- Remove the balancer unit from the cylinder block.
- Install the selected adjustment shims on the seat faces of the balancer unit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1790
12. Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and rotate the crankshaft slowly clockwise until the
crankshaft balance weight is up against the Crankshaft
TDC Timing Peg. The engine is now at TDC.
13. With the balancer unit shaft marks in the TDC position, slowly install the balancer unit to the
cylinder block to avoid interference between the
crankshaft drive gear and the balancer unit driven gear.
14. Install the balancer unit bolts.
- Tighten in the sequence shown in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Balance Shaft > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1791
15. NOTE: Remeasure the backlash and verify that it is within specified range at all of the following
6 positions: 10 degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees,
190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees. It will be necessary to reset the measuring equipment
between measurements.
NOTE: The measurement must be taken with the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, a
5-mm Allen wrench and worm clamp set up as shown. Mark the Allen wrench with a file 80 mm
(3.149 in) above the driven gear shaft center. Make sure the worm clamp and Allen wrench are not
touching the balance shaft housing.
NOTE: For an accurate measurement while measuring the gear backlash, insert a screwdriver as
shown into the crankshaft No. 1 crankweight area and set both the rotation and the thrust direction
with the screwdriver, using a prying action as shown.
Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture as shown. Measure the gear backlash.
- Position the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture (1) on the Allen wrench 80 mm (3.149 in)
above the driven gear shaft center (2) on the balancer unit.
- Rotate the crankshaft clockwise and measure the backlash at all of the following 6 positions: 10
degrees, 30 degrees, 100 degrees, 190 degrees, 210 degrees and 280 degrees.
- If the backlash exceeds the specified range of 0.005 to 0.101 mm (0.00019 to 0.0039 in), install a
new balancer unit and repeat the procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Camshaft Gear/Sprocket >
Component Information > Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft sprocket bolts Tighten the bolt to.........................................................................................
.................................................................................................72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain > Component
Information > Diagrams
Timing Chain: Diagrams
Timing Chain Alignment
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in the procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
NOTE: Install a new crankshaft sprocket diamond washer on both sides of the crankshaft sprocket.
Install the crankshaft sprocket, new crankshaft sprocket diamond washers, oil pump chain and oil
pump sprocket.
- The crankshaft sprocket flange must be facing away from the engine block.
NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent
engine rotation can result in engine damage.
Install the camshaft sprockets and the bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
Install the timing chain.
NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to prevent
engine rotation can result in engine damage.
Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Install the timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. Remove the paper clip to release the piston.
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
........................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1801
Timing Chain Tensioner: Service and Repair
Timing Drive Components
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign
material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces, that enters the oil
passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Cover/Service and Repair.
3. Compress the timing chain tensioner in the following sequence.
1. Using a small pick, release and hold the ratchet mechanism.
2. While holding the ratchet mechanism in the released position, compress the tensioner by
pushing the timing chain arm toward the tensioner.
3. Insert the paper clip into the hole to retain the tensioner.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and timing chain tensioner.
5. Remove the timing chain tensioner arm.
6. Remove the timing chain.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1802
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the timing chain guide.
8. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the exhaust
camshaft sprocket.
9. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshaft to prevent camshaft rotation, remove the bolt and the camshaft
phaser and sprocket.
Installation
1. Install the camshaft sprockets and the bolts. Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
2. Install the timing chain guide and the 2 bolts.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1803
3. Install the timing chain.
4. Install the timing chain tensioner arm.
NOTE: If the timing chain plunger and ratchet assembly are not pinned in the compressed position,
follow the next 4 steps.
5. NOTICE: Do not compress the ratchet assembly. This will damage the ratchet assembly.
Using the edge of a vise, compress the timing chain tensioner plunger.
6. Using a small pick, push back and hold the ratchet mechanism.
7. While holding the ratchet mechanism, push the ratchet arm back into the tensioner housing.
8. Install a paper clip into the hole in the tensioner housing to hold the ratchet assembly and the
plunger in during installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 1804
9. Install the timing chain tensioner and the 2 bolts. Remove the paper clip to release the piston.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
10. NOTICE: The Camshaft Alignment Plate is for camshaft alignment only. Using this tool to
prevent engine rotation can result in engine
damage.
Using the flats on the camshafts to prevent camshaft rotation, tighten the bolts.
- Tighten to 72 Nm (53 lb-ft).
11. Install the engine front cover. For additional information, refer to Engine Front Cover See:
Timing Cover/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications
Timing Cover: Specifications
Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following
specifications: Tighten the 8-mm bolts and stud bolt to........................................................................
................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in). Tighten the 13-mm bolts to.......
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1808
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Engine Front Cover
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1809
Removal
NOTICE: Do not loosen or remove the crankshaft pulley bolt without first installing the special tools
as instructed in this procedure. The crankshaft pulley and the crankshaft timing sprocket are not
keyed to the crankshaft. The crankshaft, the crankshaft sprocket and the pulley are fitted together
by friction, using diamond washers between the flange faces on each part. For that reason, the
crankshaft sprocket is also unfastened if the pulley bolt is loosened. Before any repair requiring
loosening or removal of the crankshaft pulley bolt, the crankshaft and camshafts must be locked in
place by the special service tools, otherwise severe engine damage can occur.
NOTICE: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material
(including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages,
coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the accessory drive belt and the smooth idler pulley. For additional information, refer to
Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories.
3. Remove the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See:
Cylinder Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1810
4. Remove the engine mount. For additional information, refer to Engine Mount See: Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine
Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
5. NOTICE: Use care not to damage the engine front cover or the crankshaft when removing the
seal.
Using the Oil Seal Remover, remove the crankshaft front oil seal.
6. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
7. Remove the 2 bolts and the accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket.
8. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
9. Remove and the 2 bolts and the CKP sensor.
10. Remove the bolts, stud bolt and the engine front cover.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive disks or other abrasive
means to clean sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths.
Clean and inspect the mounting surfaces of the engine and the front cover.
2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of
applying the silicone gasket and sealant.
Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the cylinder head and oil pan joint
areas. Apply a 2.5 mm (0.09 in) bead of silicone gasket and sealant to the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1811
3. Install the engine front cover. Tighten the bolts in the sequence shown, to the following
specifications:
- Tighten the 8-mm bolts and stud bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Tighten the 13-mm bolts to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Install the accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Install the coolant pump pulley and bolts.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Remove the through bolt from the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer.
NOTE: Lubricate the oil seal with clean engine oil.
Using the Camshaft Front Oil Seal Installer, install the crankshaft front oil seal.
7. Install the engine mount. For additional information, refer to Engine Mount See: Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Engine
Mount/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
8. Install the crankshaft pulley. For additional information, refer to Crankshaft Pulley See: Cylinder
Block Assembly/Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 1812
9. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
10. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
11. Using the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner, adjust the CKP sensor.
- Tighten the 2 CKP bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
12. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
13. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt.
14. Install the accessory drive belt and smooth idler pulley. For additional information, refer to Drive
Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories.
15. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Variable
Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's
P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough
Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page
1829
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page
1830
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page
1831
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1832
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information.
For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System -
General Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for
that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning
information in 10 degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1833
couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the
chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either
an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Variable Valve Timing Filter: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System Oil Filter
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid. For additional information,
refer to Computers and Control Systems.
2. Remove the VCT system oil filter plug and the VCT system oil filter from the intake camshaft
thrust cap.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 >
Page 1841
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 >
Page 1842
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing >
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid > Component Information > Locations > Page 1843
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Engine.
2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1848
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect
Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and
Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel
Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1849
All vehicles
7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system
pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP module fuse.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Filter Element: Diagrams
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air
Cleaner Housing > Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1854
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter
> Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing
Order > Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 1863
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 1868
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1869
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1870
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1871
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of
electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating,
wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump
pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark
Plug > Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 1874
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See:
Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1880
Crank the engine as follows:
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1881
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks >
Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1882
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Cylinder Leakage Detection
When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in
pinpointing the exact cause.
The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center
(TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted.
Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of
leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive.
While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the
intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the
tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing
through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug
hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into
the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve
Clearance > System Information > Adjustments
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components - Exploded View and Valve Tappets
See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Install the coolant pump and bolts. Tighten to......................................................................................
................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications
> Page 1889
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Coolant Pump - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Cooling System/Service and
Repair.
2. Loosen the 3 coolant pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
3. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
5. NOTICE: Make sure the coolant pump is correctly seated to the engine block before installing
and tightening the fasteners, or damage to
the coolant pump may occur.
Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Cooling
System/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System.
3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 1894
- Fill the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair
Bypass Tube - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Disconnect and remove the coolant bypass tube.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Coolant ................................................................................................................................................
............................................. 7.4 Quarts ( 7.0 Liters )
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information >
Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1902
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant with bittering agent (yellow-colored)
Ford Part Number - VC-7-B
Ford Specification - WSS-M97B51-A1
Note: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair
Degas Bottle
Removal and Installation
1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew
the coolant pressure relief cap when the
engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and
hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one-half turn
counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap.
2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the degas bottle-to-radiator hose.
3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle.
4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the degas bottle.
5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose.
- Remove the degas bottle.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
8. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding See: Service and
Repair for the recommended coolant mixture and
fill level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 1911
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations Engine Cooling Fan Motor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1914
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1915
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1916
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1917
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1918
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1919
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1920
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1921
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1922
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1923
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1924
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1925
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1926
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1927
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1928
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1929
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1930
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1931
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1932
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1933
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views
Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1934
Engine Cooling Fan Motor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1935
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1936
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1937
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fan Control
The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C
on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs.
For variable speed electric fan(s):
The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable
(FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives
the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power
applied to the fan motor).
EDGE/MKX, FLEX, MKS, MKT, TAURUS, FUSION/MILAN/MKZ, CROWN VICTORIA/GRAND
MARQUIS, TOWN CAR: FCV DUTY CYCLE OUTPUT FROM PCM (negative duty cycle)
For relay controlled fans:
The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC), (single speed fan applications),
low fan control (LFC) and high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some applications have the xFC circuit
wired to 2 separate relays.
For 2-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low and high fan control, cooling fan
speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the following tables.
2.0L Focus And Transit Connect (With A/C): PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds
2.5L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1938
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2.5L vehicles only
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1939
All vehicles
3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Restraint
Systems.
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support.
9. Remove the center support bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2.5L vehicles only
10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside.
All vehicles
12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers.
13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2.5L vehicles only
15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1944
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1945
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1948
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1949
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1950
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1951
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 1952
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams
Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1956
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch.
Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fan Clutch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cooling Fan Clutch
The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of 3 main elements: a working chamber
- a reservoir chamber
- a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS)
The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working
chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation.
The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output
signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling
fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is
monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation.
The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature
(EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning
requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM
monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM
outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase.
Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1963
Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment
Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005
Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan.
2009 Suggested user price: $41.20
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder
Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder
Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 1969
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1973
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1974
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1975
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1976
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
Sensor > Page 1979
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch
> Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1980
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fan Shroud: Service and Repair
Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2.5L vehicles only
2. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 1984
All vehicles
3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
4. Remove the 2 front impact severity sensors. For additional information, refer to Restraint
Systems.
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts.
Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the radiator support.
9. Remove the center support bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2.5L vehicles only
10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside.
All vehicles
12. Disconnect the 2 cooling fan electrical connectors and wire harness retainers.
13. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
2.5L vehicles only
15. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater
core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as
follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1989
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet
hoses to see if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1990
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the
heater core.
7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the
heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Heater Core > Page 1991
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Page 1992
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. For additional information, refer to Cooling
System &/or Engine Block Heater.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
2. Remove the dash panel seal.
3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the heater core.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
Engine Cooling
Component Tests
Radiator Leak Test, Removed From Vehicle
NOTICE: Never leak test an aluminum radiator in the same water that copper/brass radiators are
tested in. Flux and caustic cleaners may be present in the cleaning tank and they will damage
aluminum radiators.
NOTE: Clean the radiator before leak testing to avoid contamination of tank.
1. Leak test the radiator in clean water with pressurized air to the maximum pressure listed in
Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 1996
Radiator: Service and Repair
Radiator - 2.5L
Radiator Hoses
Radiator
Removal and Installation
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. For additional information, refer to Cooling Fan Motor
and Shroud See: Radiator Cooling
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 1997
Fan/Radiator Cooling Fan Motor/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the radiator.
4. Disconnect the lower degas bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator.
5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator.
6. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts and position aside the A/C condenser.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
7. Remove the radiator.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2003
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 2004
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Locations Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2007
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2008
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2010
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan Relay > Page 2011
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fan Speed Sensor (FSS)
The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a
waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a
relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch
speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the
frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan
clutch. For additional information on the cooling fan clutch, refer to the Cooling Fan Clutch.
Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2021
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2025
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2026
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2027
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2028
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control
Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2031
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System >
Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2032
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 2036
Thermostat: Testing and Inspection
Engine Cooling
Component Tests
Thermostat
A new thermostat should be installed only after the following tests and checks have been carried
out:
- Pinpoint Test A, B or C
- Thermostat Visual Inspection
Thermostat Visual Inspection
1. Remove the thermostat.
2. Examine the thermostat for signs of damage including:
- Valve not fully seated (light visible through the valve)
- Foreign material lodged in the main valve
- Bent or broken frame or flange
- Bent or broken spring
- Bent or broken valve or valve stem
- Wax leaking from wax reservoir or a bulge in the reservoir
- Any other damage or distortion
3. NOTE: If no damage is found during the inspection, do not attempt to open the thermostat using
hot water or other heat sources. This method is
not an accurate means to test the function of the thermostat and may damage the thermostat.
If damage is found during the inspection, remove any foreign material or broken pieces and install
a new thermostat.
4. If no damage is found during the inspection, continue troubleshooting the system concern. Go to
the Symptom Chart for further instructions. See:
Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair
Thermostat Housing - 2.5L
NOTE: The thermostat and thermostat housing are serviced as an assembly.
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the heater hose from the thermostat housing.
3. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing.
4. NOTE: The view of the thermostat housing bolts is obstructed by A/C and other engine
components. However, the bolts can be removed by using
1/4-in drive hand tools.
Remove the 3 bolts and thermostat housing.
- Remove and discard the gasket.
- To install, tighten the bolts to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gasket.
6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Install the coolant pump and bolts. Tighten to......................................................................................
................................................................................................................10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 2043
Water Pump: Service and Repair
Coolant Pump - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling
and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
2. Loosen the 3 coolant pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
3. Remove the accessory drive belt. For additional information, refer to Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories.
4. Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump pulley.
5. NOTICE: Make sure the coolant pump is correctly seated to the engine block before installing
and tightening the fasteners, or damage to
the coolant pump may occur.
Remove the 3 bolts and the coolant pump.
- Remove and discard the O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Lubricate the new O-ring seal with clean engine coolant.
7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Overview
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N),
carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of
nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants
of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the
description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
Only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the
catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the sensors after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22)
are used to monitor catalyst efficiency.
Typical V-Engine
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2048
Typical In-Line Engine
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The
concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as
close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the
exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located
under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion
efficiency for that catalyst.
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of gasoline (14.7:1),
for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be
tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
For vehicles using E85 the required air/fuel ratio is 9.8:1. Other gasoline/ethanol mixtures require a
variable air/fuel ratio between 14.7:1 to 9.8:1 dependent on the percentage of ethanol content.
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
Exhaust System
The exhaust system conveys engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere.
Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter
through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst.
The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust
emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic
converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler.
Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Description and Operation > Page 2049
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming
a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific
vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view.
Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter
The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The
TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of
NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio
at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2Ss provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with information related to the oxygen
content of the exhaust gas. For additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control
Components. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and
Operation/Engine Control Components
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter - 2.5L Manifold, Hybrid
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Pipe/Service
and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe.
3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts.
4. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS)
electrical connectors.
5. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold nuts.
6. Remove the catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle.
- Discard the catalytic converter manifold gasket.
7. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold studs.
8. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
Installation
1. Install the 7 new catalytic converter manifold studs.
- Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification before installing
the converter bracket bolts will cause
the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification a second time will
cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
Using a new gasket, install the catalytic converter and the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. Tighten in 2
stages in the sequence shown.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Connect the HO2S and the CMS electrical connectors.
4. Install the 2 exhaust bracket bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Install the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Pipe/Service and
Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2052
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2053
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2054
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2055
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2056
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a 1-piece construction. The
service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2.5L vehicles
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
All vehicles
3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately
loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts.
4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts.
5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe.
Do not pry under the gasket or damage
to the flange may occur.
Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
2.5L vehicles
6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2057
3.0L vehicles
7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
2.5L hybrid vehicles
8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Installation
NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct
specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur.
NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger
insulators as required.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad.
1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section.
2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2058
3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required,
perform Steps 4 and 5.
4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange.
5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe
flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls
with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7.
6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange.
7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 2059
8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers.
9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand.
10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand.
12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts
and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in
sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Install 7 new exhaust manifold studs in the cylinder head. Tighten to..................................................
..................................................................................................................................................17 Nm
(150 lb-in).
NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence shown in 2 stages.
Position the exhaust manifold and tighten the 7 new exhaust manifold nuts in the sequence shown
in 2 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to............................................................................................................
.............................................................................48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to.......................
..............................................................................................................................................................
....48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Install the exhaust manifold heat shield and the 4 bolts. Tighten to.....................................................
.................................................................................................................................................10 Nm
(89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Exhaust Manifold: Procedures
Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection
1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the
gasket sealing surfaces.
2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an
exhaust manifold is serviced.
NOTE: Use a Straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm
(0.0002 in) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On(R) GA438A or equivalent. For example, if
the Straightedge is 61 cm (24 in) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
from end to end.
Using the Straightedge and a Feeler Gauge Set, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for
warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 in), install a new exhaust manifold.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2065
Exhaust Manifold: Removal and Replacement
Exhaust Manifold
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the exhaust downpipe and exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to
Exhaust System &/or Catalytic Converter.
3. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
4. Remove the 4 exhaust manifold heat shield bolts and the heat shield.
5. Remove and discard the 7 exhaust manifold nuts.
6. Remove the exhaust manifold and discard the exhaust manifold gasket.
7. Remove and discard the 7 exhaust manifold studs.
8. Clean and inspect the exhaust manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
Installation
1. Install the 7 new exhaust manifold studs.
- Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the
converter bracket bolts will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the
converter to develop an exhaust leak.
Install a new exhaust manifold gasket, the exhaust manifold and 7 new nuts in the sequence
shown in 2 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2066
- Stage 2: Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the exhaust manifold heat shield and the 4 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Connect the HO2S electrical connector.
5. Install the exhaust downpipe and exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to
Exhaust System &/or Catalytic Converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Downpipe
Exhaust Downpipe - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe.
3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 2 exhaust downpipe-to-exhaust manifold nuts and the exhaust downpipe.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gaskets and nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2071
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2072
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2073
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2074
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2075
Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Intermediate Pipe
Exhaust Intermediate Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2.5L
2. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust intermediate pipe-to-exhaust downpipe nuts.
2.5L hybrid
3. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust intermediate pipe-to-catalytic converter manifold nuts.
All vehicles
4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust intermediate pipe flange
studs.
NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from
side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts
and remove the intermediate pipe.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
2. If replacing the exhaust intermediate pipe flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw
Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange.
3. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate flange, make sure to
line up the new stud seat knurls with witness knurl
grooves in the exhaust intermediate flange.
If replacing the exhaust intermediate pipe flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to
push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Exhaust Downpipe > Page 2076
4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe gasket by hand.
5. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate pipe spring nuts and
alternately tighten RH side to LH side in sequence in 3
stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2.5L hybrid
6. Install 3 new exhaust intermediate pipe-to-catalytic converter manifold nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
2.5L
7. Install 3 new exhaust intermediate pipe-to-exhaust downpipe nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 2085
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Pipe/Muffler Hanger: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 2091
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View
Muffler: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2096
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2097
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2098
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Exhaust System - Exploded View > Page 2099
Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler
Muffler
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The production 2.5L catalytic converter, resonator and muffler assembly is a 1-piece
construction. The service catalytic converter and
resonator/muffler is a 2-piece construction.
NOTE: The production 3.0L and 2.5L hybrid catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a 1-piece
construction. The service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
The muffler and catalytic converter are serviced together. For additional information, refer to
Catalytic Converter - Underbody See: Catalytic Converter/Service and Repair/Catalytic Converter Underbody.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair
Resonator
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator spring nuts.
3. NOTICE: Remove the resonator-to-muffler gasket by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the
gasket off the pipe. Do not pry under
the gasket or damage to the flange may occur.
Detach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers and remove the resonator.
- Discard the gasket.
Installation
1. Inspect the resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
2. If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push
the 8-mm stud(s) out of the flange.
3. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
If replacing the resonator flange stud(s), use a C-clamp and a deep well socket to push the 8-mm
stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Page 2103
4. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket.
5. Install the resonator and attach the 2 resonator exhaust hangers.
6. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that
As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices
must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the
configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs,
successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and
a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
2110
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The
clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new
SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer
to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming
instructions, if necessary.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step clears DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This makes sure that all displays are visible under
all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body
(ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the
throttle opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
(IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel
to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle,
increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at
approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Computers and Control
Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2114
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1)
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2115
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2116
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh
Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2138
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2141
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2142
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2143
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2144
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2145
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2146
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2147
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2148
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2149
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block are displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the
second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes
made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it
has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 2152
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 2153
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information,
refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2157
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2158
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2163
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2164
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2165
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2169
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and
Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2170
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2176
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2177
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2181
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2182
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2183
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2184
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2185
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure.
Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor
is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2193
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 2198
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft
Position Sensor 1 > Page 2199
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor > Page 2202
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft
Position Sensor > Page 2203
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2204
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
2205
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Computers
and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2213
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2217
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2218
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2219
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2220
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2221
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2222
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2223
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2224
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2225
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2229
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2230
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2231
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2232
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Computers
and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Powertrain Control Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2235
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 2236
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2241
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2242
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2243
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel
Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2244
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2248
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2249
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Typical In-tank FTP Sensor
Typical In-line FTP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2253
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2254
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2255
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC)
efficiency.
The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM)
uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide
input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is
integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page
2256
Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor
Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2261
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2262
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2265
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2266
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2267
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 >
Page 2268
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2269
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2270
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2274
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2275
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2276
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses
the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input
used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral
with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor.
Typical MAP Sensor
Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2277
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2285
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2286
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2287
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2288
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2289
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2292
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2293
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2294
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop
operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical HO2S
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2297
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2300
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 2301
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2306
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 2310
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 2315
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2319
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2320
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2321
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2322
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2323
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2324
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 2325
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 2330
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling.
Typical VSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Page 2335
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2340
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 2341
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2345
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2346
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2347
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2348
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2349
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure
difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies
between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts
corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the
output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after
several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is
energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome
light does not affect the FP module control.
The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail
pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and
pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with
the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control
system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump.
Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is
de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi)
lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if
the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379
kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 2354
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2361
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2362
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2363
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is
retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum
shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch
is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle.
Typical IFS Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2364
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 2369
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 2375
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor
1 > Page 2376
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
> Page 2379
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
> Page 2380
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2381
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2382
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2386
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2387
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2388
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2389
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2390
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2391
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2392
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2393
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2394
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder > Page 2404
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2410
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 2411
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to
Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2416
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2417
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2420
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2421
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2422
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2423
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2424
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and
Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2425
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2430
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Line Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System
Information > Specifications > Page 2431
All vehicles
7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system
pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP module fuse.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Filter Element: Diagrams
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing >
Air Filter Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2436
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel
Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order >
Component Information > Specifications > Firing Order > Page 2445
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Gap > Page 2450
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2451
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2452
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 2453
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of
electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating,
wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump
pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 2456
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition
System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Compression Test - Hybrid
The compression test requires cranking the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes with the
throttle plate in the wide-open position for each cylinder. The engine cranking diagnostic mode
must be used to crank the engine and the brake/accelerator pedals must be used to position the
throttle plate during the compression test. The engine cranking diagnostic mode is a PCM strategy
which is separate from the normal operating strategy. It allows the engine to crank in a similar
fashion as a conventional vehicle with the fuel disabled. When in this mode, the PCM commands
the Transmission Control Module (TCM) to spin the generator, which cranks the engine with the
speed between 900 and 1,200 rpm. The engine will crank as long as the traction battery state of
charge stays greater than 35%.
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level. Operate the
vehicle until the engine is at normal operating
temperature.
2. Using the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM), access the Battery Control Module (BCM) and
monitor the traction battery state of charge
PID. If the monitored PID displays the state of charge below 45%, start and idle the engine with full
A/C ON. When the traction battery state of charge exceeds 45%, the engine cranking diagnostic
mode can be activated.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs.
4. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
5. Activate the cranking diagnostic mode as follows:
- Apply the parking brake.
- Place the gear selector in the PARK position.
- Verify the key is in the OFF position.
- NOTE: Do not crank the engine.
Turn the key to the ON position with the engine OFF.
- Within 5 seconds of the key in the ON position, fully apply the accelerator pedal and hold for 10
seconds.
- Within 5 seconds release the accelerator pedal, shift the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position
and fully apply the accelerator pedal.
- Hold the accelerator pedal fully applied for 10 seconds.
- Release the accelerator pedal and shift the gear selector to the PARK position. If the sequence is correctly executed, the instrument cluster hazard indicator (red triangle) flashes
once per second when the gear selector is shifted to the PARK position. The PCM exits the engine
cranking diagnostic mode when the traction battery state of charge drops below 35%, the gear
selector is shifted to any gear other than PARK or when the ignition key is turned to the OFF or
ACC position.
6. NOTE: If the ignition key stays in the START position for 15 seconds or longer, the PCM may set
DTC P2535.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is not depressed and held prior to depressing the accelerator pedal, the
throttle plate will fail to open.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2462
Crank the engine as follows:
- Depress and hold the brake pedal.
- Fully depress and hold the accelerator pedal.
- Turn the key to the START position and crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes
and record the highest reading. Return the key to the ON position.
- Release the accelerator pedal.
- Release the brake pedal.
7. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
8. Position the key to the OFF position to deactivate the cranking diagnostic mode.
9. Clear all DTCs.
Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid
1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the
battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle
until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position,
then remove all the spark plugs.
2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position.
3. Install a compression gauge in the No. 1 cylinder.
4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank
the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the
approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading.
5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of
compression strokes.
Compression Test - Test Results
The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading
cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart.
Compression Pressure Limit Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2463
If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford
specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure
check on these cylinders.
Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings
1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged.
2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly.
3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does
not increase compression, the head gasket may be
leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Use
the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so the lowest reading
is within 75% of the highest reading.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check >
System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2464
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Cylinder Leakage Detection
Engine
Component Tests
The following component tests are used to diagnose engine concerns.
Cylinder Leakage Detection
When a cylinder produces a low reading, use of a cylinder leakage tester will be helpful in
pinpointing the exact cause.
The leakage tester is inserted in the spark plug hole, the piston is brought up to Top Dead Center
(TDC) on the compression stroke, and compressed air is admitted.
Once the combustion chamber is pressurized, the leakage tester gauge will read the percentage of
leakage. Leakage exceeding 20% is excessive.
While the air pressure is retained in the cylinder, listen for the hiss of escaping air. A leak at the
intake valve will be heard in the Throttle Body (TB). A leak at the exhaust valve can be heard at the
tailpipe. Leakage past the piston rings will be audible at the PCV connection. If air is passing
through a blown head gasket to an adjacent cylinder, the noise will be evident at the spark plug
hole of the cylinder into which the air is leaking. Cracks in the cylinder block or gasket leakage into
the cooling system may be detected by a stream of bubbles in the radiator.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance >
System Information > Adjustments
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance Check
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Valve Cover See: Engine, Cooling
and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Valve Cover.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Turn the engine clockwise only, and only use the crankshaft bolt.
NOTE: Before removing the camshafts, measure the clearance of each valve at base circle, with
the lobe pointed away from the tappet. Failure to measure all clearances prior to removing the
camshafts will necessitate repeated removal and installation and wasted labor time.
Use a feeler gauge to measure the clearance of each valve and record its location.
4. NOTE: The number on the valve tappet only reflects the digits that follow the decimal. For
example, a tappet with the number 0.650 has the
thickness of 3.650 mm.
NOTE: The nominal clearance is: intake: 0.25 mm (0.0095 in).
- exhaust: 0.30 mm (0.0115 in).
The acceptable clearances after being fully installed are:
- intake: 0.22-0.28 mm (0.008-0.011 in).
- exhaust: 0.27-0.33 mm (0.010-0.013 in).
Select tappets using this formula: tappet thickness = measured clearance + the existing tappet
thickness - nominal clearance.
elect the closest tappet size to the ideal tappet thickness available and mark the installation
location.
5. If any tappets do not measure within specifications, install new tappets in these locations. For
additional information, refer to Valve Train
Components - Exploded View See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Train Components Exploded View and Valve Tappets See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Lifter / Lash Adjuster/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Valve Tappets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2472
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor
> Component Information > Locations > Page 2473
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and
Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2477
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2478
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2479
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2480
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2481
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2485
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2486
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2487
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC)
efficiency.
The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM)
uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide
input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is
integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2488
Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor
Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure.
Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor
is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that
As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices
must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the
configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs,
successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and
a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Body Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2495
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The
clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new
SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer
to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming
instructions, if necessary.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step clears DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This makes sure that all displays are visible under
all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Brake Pressure
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Brake Pressure
Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2501
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2506
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 2507
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2510
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 2511
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2512
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2513
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description
and Operation/Powertrain Control Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature
Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT)
Sensor > Page 2521
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2525
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2526
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2527
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2528
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2529
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2530
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2531
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2532
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2533
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations
Data Link Connector: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2537
Data Link Connector: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2541
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2542
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC)
The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM. There are 2 designs for the TAC, parallel
and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor
housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. An
internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default
position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. The closed throttle
plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This hard stop setting is not
adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. For
additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic
Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Typical In-Line TAC Design
Typical Parallel TAC Design
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body
(ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the
throttle opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
(IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel
to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle,
increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at
approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Description and
Operation/Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2546
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1)
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2547
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2548
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10
> A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10
> Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9
> Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: >
10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2570
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2571
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2572
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2573
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2574
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2575
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2576
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2577
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2578
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2579
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2580
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2581
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block are displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the
second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes
made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it
has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2584
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2585
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information,
refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2589
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2590
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2591
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2592
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description
and Operation/Powertrain Control Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2595
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2596
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2601
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2602
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2603
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2604
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2608
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 2609
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Typical In-tank FTP Sensor
Typical In-line FTP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned.
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: no touch start
- cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
- idle (corrects for engine load)
- stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- over-temperature idle boost
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2617
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2618
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2619
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2620
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2621
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2622
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2623
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2624
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2625
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2626
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2627
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2628
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2629
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2630
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2631
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2632
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2633
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2634
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2635
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2636
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
14-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2637
14-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2638
14-3
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2639
Information Bus: Description and Operation
Communications Network
Multiplexing is a method of sending 2 or more signals simultaneously over a single circuit.
Multiplexing is used to allow 2 or more electronic modules (nodes) to communicate simultaneously
over a twisted-wire pair [data (+) and data (-)] network. The information or messages that can be
communicated on these wires consists of commands, status or data. The advantage of using
multiplexing is to reduce the weight of the vehicle by reducing the number of redundant
components and electrical wiring.
The vehicle has 2 module communication networks which are connected to the Data Link
Connector (DLC), located under the instrument panel:
- High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
- Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
Network Topology
Network Termination
The Controller Area Network (CAN) uses network termination to improve communication reliability.
Termination modules are located at both ends of the network. As network messages are broadcast
in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the termination
resistors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2640
Each termination module has an internal 120 ohm resistor that bridges across the positive and
negative bus connection. With two 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the
total network impedance, or total resistance, is 60 ohms.
Network termination improves bus message reliability by:
- stabilizing bus voltage.
- eliminating electrical interference.
Gateway Module
The Instrument Cluster (IC) is the gateway module, translating messages on the HS-CAN to
MS-CAN and vice versa. This allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The IC
is the only module on this vehicle that has this ability.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Communications Network
Principles of Operation
Communications Network
Principles of Operation
Both the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) and the Medium Speed Controller Area
Network (MS-CAN) use an unshielded twisted-pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The
HS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for applications
in which modules must respond as rapidly as required by the driver or needed by the process being
controlled. The MS-CAN operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus
messages and is designed for general information transfer.
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Modules
The following modules are on the HS-CAN:
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid only)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid only)
- Instrument Cluster (IC) (gateway module)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped)
- PCM
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid only)
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Modules
The following modules are on the MS-CAN:
- APIM (if equipped)
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2643
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) (if equipped)
- HVAC module (if equipped)
- IC (gateway module)
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Controller Area Network (CAN) Fault Tolerance
NOTE: The oscilloscope traces below are from the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
oscilloscope taken using the IDS pre-configured Controller Area Network (CAN) settings. The
traces are for both data (+) and data (-) taken simultaneously (2-channel) at a sample rate of 1
mega-sample per second (1MS/s) or greater.
Traces below are viewed at 500mV per division (vertical axis) and 20 microseconds (20A■µs) per
division (horizontal axis). Readings taken with a different oscilloscope vary from those shown.
Compare any suspect readings to a known good vehicle.
Normal CAN Operation
The data (+) and data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or
rested network traffic. As messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by
approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a
message is sent.
Successful communication of a message can usually be identified by the slight spike at the end of
a message transmission. Any signals that are significantly different than the normal CAN waveform
may cause network DTCs (U-codes) to set or may cause a complete network outage.
CAN Circuits Shorted Together
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2644
In the event that the data (+) and data (-) circuits become shorted together, the signal stays at base
voltage (2.5V) continuously and all communication capabilities are lost.
CAN (+) Circuit Shorted To Ground
In the event that the data (+) circuit becomes shorted to ground, both the data (+) and data (-)
circuits are pulled low (0V) and all communication capabilities are lost.
CAN (-) Circuit Shorted To Ground
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2645
In the event that the data (-) circuit becomes shorted to ground, the data (-) circuit is pulled low (0V)
and the data (+) circuit reaches near-normal peak voltage (3.0V) during communication but falls to
0V instead of normal base voltage (2.5V). Communication may continue but at a degraded level.
CAN (+) Circuit Shorted To Battery Voltage
In the event that the data (+) circuit becomes shorted to battery voltage, the data (+) circuit is pulled
high (12V) and the data (-) circuit falls to abnormally high voltage (above 5V) during communication
and reaches battery voltage (12V) for peak voltage. Communication may continue but at a
degraded level.
CAN (-) Circuit Shorted To Battery Voltage
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2646
In the event that the data (-) circuit becomes shorted to battery voltage, both the data (+) and data
(-) circuits are pulled high (12V) and all communication capabilities are lost.
CAN Circuit Signal Corruption
Rhythmic oscillations, inductive spikes or random interference can disrupt the network
communications. The corruption signal source may be outside electrical interference such as
motors or solenoids or internal interference generated from a module on the network. In some
cases, an open in either the data (+) or data (-) circuit to a network module may cause the module
to emit interference on the one circuit which is still connected. The trace shown is an example of a
"sawtooth" pattern transmitted from a module with one open network circuit.
Other corruptions may be present when a module is intermittently powered up and down. The
module on power up may initiate communication out of sync with other modules on the network
causing momentary communication outages.
Controller Area Network (CAN) Multiplex Messages
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2647
Modules on the CAN utilize simultaneous communication of 2 or more messages on the same
network circuits. The following chart summarizes the messages sent and received on the network.
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Non-Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2648
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2649
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2650
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2651
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2652
CAN Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2653
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2654
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2655
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2656
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2657
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2658
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2659
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2660
Inspection and Verification
Communications Network
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
- If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
Visual Inspection Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2661
3. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- GO to Pinpoint Test W, to diagnose No Power To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Pinpoint
Test W: No Power To The Scan Tool
4. Establish a scan tool session.
NOTE: The scan tool first attempts to communicate with the PCM, after establishing
communication with the PCM, the scan tool then attempts to communicate with all other modules
on the vehicle.
If an IDS session cannot be established with the vehicle, (IDS may state "No communication can
be established with the PCM"):
- Choose "NO" when the scan tool prompts whether or not to retry communication.
- Enter either a PCM part number, tear tag or calibration number to identify the vehicle and start a
session (the PCM part number and 4-character tear tag are printed on the PCM label).
- GO to Pinpoint Test A to diagnose the PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool. See: Pinpoint
Tests/Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
5. Carry out the network test.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs and proceed to Step
6.
- If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to diagnose the failed communication network.
See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2662
- If a module fails to communication during the network test, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
6. Retrieve and review the DTCs.
- If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC
diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all
other DTCs, refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See:
Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
- If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Module Configuration
Inspection and Verification
Module Configuration
Inspection and Verification
This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the Programmable Module
Installation (PMI) procedures when another diagnostic/repair information directs to carry out
configuration or when DTCs from the below list are present: See: Programming and Relearning
Principles of Operation
Module Configuration
Principles of Operation
Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many
unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a
repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the
settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in incorrect
operation and/or DTCs setting.
The following are the 3 different methods of configuration:
- Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
- Module reprogramming ("flashing")
- Programmable parameters
Some modules do not support all 3 methods.
Definition of Terms
The following are definitions of configuration terms:
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI
process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session
is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may
prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually
selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/calibration update is
available. To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation (PMI) See: Service and
Repair.
NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to
removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order
to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning
Module Reprogramming
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2663
Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the
strategy/calibration in a module. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not
improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. Module reprogramming is automatically
carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available.
NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published TSB
procedure recommends doing so.
NOTE: A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while
being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other
modules during the reprogramming process.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) programming is a process that updates the APIM
Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) and Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) software. The VIP
programming updates the calibration files in the portion of the APIM which interfaces with the
Controller Area Network (CAN). The CIP programming updates calibration files in the portion of the
APIM that interfaces with mobile phones and other customer devices.
APIM programming uses the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) to read and program the VIP
software through the Data Link Connector (DLC). A web-based On-Line Automotive Service
Information System (OASIS) application is used to read and program the CIP software via a
Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable between the scan tool and vehicle USB port. Both the VCM and
OASIS application must be running on the scan tool during APIM programming. To carry out APIM
programming, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming See:
Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS).
Programmable Parameters
Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via
scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle
Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these
options are programmable parameters.
Adaptive Learning and Calibration
Some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out if replaced as part of a repair
procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
Vehicle Identification (VID) Block
Some PCMs contain a memory area called a Vehicle Identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block
commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), tire
size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with cruise control.
Transmission Identification Block
Some PCMs also contain a memory area called a transmission identification block. The PCM
transmission identification block stores solenoid body flow data. If the solenoid body information is
not correct, transaxle damage or driveability concerns can occur. Refer to Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems.
Module Address
A unique module address is assigned to each module on the network for identification.
As-Built Data
As-Built data is a VIN-specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration
from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect
customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to
be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured.
NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This
data may be accessed from the technician service publication website.
The following chart lists As-Built data addresses and describes specific module configuration
information:
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Escape and Mariner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2664
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2665
Module Configuration and Parameter Chart - Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2666
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2667
Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Communications Network
Communications Network
DTC Charts
NOTE: Network DTCs (U-codes) are often a result of intermittent concerns such as damaged
wiring or low battery voltage occurrences. Additionally, vehicle repair procedures such as module
reprogramming often set network DTCs. Replacing a module to resolve a network DTC is unlikely
to resolve the concern. To prevent repeat network DTC concerns, inspect all network wiring,
especially connectors. Test the vehicle battery, refer to Battery.
NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character
failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as
opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status
code suffix to assist in determining DTC history.
Communication Network DTC Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2668
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2669
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2670
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2671
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2672
Module Configuration
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2673
Module Configuration
DTC Chart
NOTE: Some modules on this vehicle utilize a 5-character DTC followed by a 2-character
failure-type code. The failure-type code provides information about specific fault conditions such as
opens, or shorts to ground. Continuous memory DTCs have an additional 2-character DTC status
code suffix to assist in determining DTC history.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2674
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2675
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Communications Network
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2676
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2677
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2678
Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 24 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 3.0L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- PCM
PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 VERIFY WHETHER OTHER HS-CAN MODULES PASS
THE NETWORK TEST
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- In the LH pane of the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) network test display screen, verify
whether any HS-CAN modules passed the network test.
- Is the text "pass" or a DTC listed next to any of the following modules (if equipped): 4x4 control
module, ABS module, Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), Battery Control Module (BCM),
Instrument Cluster (IC), Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), Parking Aid Module
(PAM), Power Steering Control Module (PSCM), Restraints Control Module (RCM), Transmission
Control Module (TCM) or PCM?
Yes
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to the PCM, a network fault is not currently present. GO to
Pinpoint Test R to diagnose an intermittent HS-CAN fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test R: The
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
If "pass" or a DTC was listed next to one or more modules other than the PCM, GO to A2.
No
No modules are currently communicating on the HS-CAN. GO to Pinpoint Test T to diagnose no
HS-CAN communication. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- A2 VERIFY COMPUTERS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS
INFORMATION PINPOINT TEST QA HAS BEEN CARRIED OUT
- Verify that pinpoint test QA has been carried out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2679
- Has pinpoint test QA been carried out?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information, Pinpoint Tests, pinpoint test QA to
diagnose no communication with the PCM.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A6.
No
For non-hybrid, GO to A4.
For hybrid, GO to A5.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND
THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - NON-HYBRID
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2680
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A6.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK THE CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM AND
THE DLC FOR AN OPEN - HYBRID
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-43, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to A6.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2681
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 42 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Vehicle Dynamic
Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
Normal Operation
The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ABS module
PINPOINT TEST B: THE ABS MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: The following test steps use the engine cooling fan to simulate normal circuit loads. It is
necessary to create 2 4-foot jumper wires to carry out the voltage drop testing on both the voltage
input and the ground side. Use only 10 gauge wire and terminals that are capable of carrying 40
amps to make the jumper wires. In addition, the jumper wires must be fused using a 40A fuse to
protect the components.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE ABS MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155 .
- Ignition ON.
- For non-hybrid, measure the voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as
follows:
Non-Hybrid
- For hybrid, measure the voltage between the ABS module, harness side and ground as follows:
Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2682
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
For non-hybrid, VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 9 (50A), 18 (20A) or 25 (5A) is OK. If
OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
For hybrid, VERIFY the BJB fuse 9 (50A), 18 (50A) or 27 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in
question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE ABS MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- For non-hybrid, measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), harness side and ground.
- For hybrid, measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD179 (BK/VT),
harness side and ground; and between the ABS module C155-47, circuit GD179 (BK/VT), harness
side and ground.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ABS
MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-12, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side
and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the ABS module C155-13, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side
and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH),
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2683
harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to B4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CARRY OUT A VOLTAGE DROP TEST ON THE
VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Engine Cooling Fan C1074.
- Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-1, circuit SBB09 (RD), harness
side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component side.
- Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component
side and the battery negative post.
NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always
be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being
incorrectly carried out.
- Measure the voltage between the BJB fuse 9 (50A) and the ABS module C155-1, circuit SBB09
(RD), harness side.
- Is the voltage less than 0.4 volt?
Yes
For Escape and Mariner, GO to B6. For Hybrid, GO to B5.
No
REPAIR circuit SBP09 (RD) for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B5 TEST THE HOT AT ALL TIMES B+ VOLTAGE INPUT
CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
- Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-32, circuit SBB18 (YE/RD),
harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component side.
- Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component
side and the battery negative post.
- NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always
be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being
incorrectly carried out.
- Measure the voltage between the BJB fuse 18 (50A) and the ABS module C155-32, circuit SBB18
(YE/RD), harness side.
- Is the voltage less than 0.4 volt?
Yes
GO to B6.
No
REPAIR circuit SBP18 (YE/RD) for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2684
------------------------------------------------- B6 CARRY OUT A VOLTAGE DROP TEST ON THE
GROUND CIRCUIT
NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always
be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being
incorrectly carried out.
- Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component side.
- Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component
side and the battery positive post.
- On Escape and Mariner, measure the voltage between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), harness side and the battery negative post.
- On Hybrid, measure the voltage between the ABS module C155-16, circuit GD120 (BK/GN),
harness side and the battery negative post.
- Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
Yes
For the Escape and Mariner, VERIFY ground G105 is securely tightened. GO to B8. For Hybrid,
VERIFY ground G110 is securely tightened. GO to B7.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) (Escape and Mariner) or GD179 BK/VT) (Hybrid) or the battery
negative cable to body ground for high resistance. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B7 CARRY OUT A VOLTAGE DROP TEST ON THE ABS
MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT (HYBRID)
- Connect one fused jumper wire between the ABS module C155-47, circuit GD179 (BK/VT),
harness side and the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 3, component side.
- Connect the second fused jumper wire between the engine cooling fan C1074 pin 1, component
side and the battery positive post.
- NOTE: Be sure that there is some voltage drop when carrying out this step. There should always
be some voltage drop on all circuits. A voltage reading of 0 volts indicates that the test is being
incorrectly carried out.
- Measure the voltage between the ABS module C155-47, circuit GD179 (BK/VT), harness side
and the battery negative post.
- Is the voltage less than 0.2 volt?
Yes
VERIFY ground G112 is securely tightened. GO to B8.
No
REPAIR circuit GD179 (BK/VT) or the battery negative cable to body ground for high resistance.
TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B8 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect the ABS module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2685
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster (IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 60 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Instrument
Cluster for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Instrument Cluster (IC) communicates with the scan tool and with other modules through the
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN). The IC does not communicate with the scan tool
through the Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse(s)
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- IC
PINPOINT TEST C: THE IC DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit 1828 (PK/LG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2686
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC
C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C7.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to C5.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2687
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C7.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C5 CHECK THE IC GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-9, circuit GD112 (BK/GN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to C6.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE IC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the IC C220-19, circuit SBP26 (YE/RD), harness side and ground;
and between the IC C220-20, circuit CBP29 (WH/VT), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2688
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 26 (10A) or 29 (5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in
question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the short circuit.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental
Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Restraints Control Module (RCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2689
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- RCM
PINPOINT TEST E: THE RCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification
------------------------------------------------- E1 CHECK THE RCM CONNECTION
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the SRS. Refer to Restraint Systems.
- Disconnect: RCM C2041a .
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b .
Are RCM C2041a and C2041b pins OK?
Yes
GO to E2.
No
REPAIR the RCM connector pins as necessary. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Restraint
Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E2 CHECK THE RCM CASE GROUND FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the metal RCM case and a good chassis ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to E3.
No
REPAIR the case ground connection. REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR
the DTCs.
Repeat the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E3 CHECK THE RCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Repower the SRS. Refer to Restraint Systems.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the RCM C2041a-13, circuit CBP31 (BU/OG), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2690
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to E4.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 31 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
REPOWER the SRS. REFER to Restraint Systems. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with
the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- E4 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE RCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-10, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the RCM C2041b-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to E5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. REPOWER the SRS. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test
with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- E5 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the RCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2691
- Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test
with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test D: The 4X4 Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 34 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Four Wheel
Drive Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The 4X4 control module communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area
Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module
PINPOINT TEST D: THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- D1 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE VOLTAGE
SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the 4X4 control module C3184-4, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness
side and ground; and between the 4X4 control module C3184-5, circuit SBP11 (BU/RD), harness
side and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2692
GO to D2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 11 (10A) and 35 (10A) are OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE GROUND
CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-15, circuit GD182 (BK/GY),
harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE 4X4
CONTROL MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU),
harness side and the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the 4X4 control module C3184-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to D4.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2693
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE
OPERATION
- Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to Transfer Case. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 46 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Supplemental
Restraint Systems for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) communicates with the scan tool through the
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- OCSM
PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- F1 CHECK THE OCSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the OCSM C3285-1, circuit CBP46 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2694
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to F2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 46 (7.5A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- F2 CHECK THE OCSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-14, circuit GD183 (BK/WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to F3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE OCSM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-18, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the OCSM C3285-9, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2695
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to F4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- F4 CHECK FOR CORRECT OCSM OPERATION
- Disconnect the OCSM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the OCSM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test G: The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 43 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Steering
Controls for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) communicates with the scan tool through the High
Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- PSCM
PINPOINT TEST G: THE PSCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2696
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- G1 CHECK THE PSCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: PSCM C2231a .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the PSCM C2231a-1, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to G2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
------------------------------------------------- G2 CHECK THE PSCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: PSCM C2231b .
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the PSCM C2231b-2, circuit GD116 (BK/VT), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to G3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- G3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PSCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PSCM C2231a-2, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2697
- Measure the resistance between the PSCM C2231a-3, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to G4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- G4 CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PSCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PSCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new steering column. REFER to Steering Column. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 29 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Transmission
Controls for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2698
Normal Operation
The Transmission Control Module (TCM) is present on hybrid vehicles only. The TCM
communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- TCM
PINPOINT TEST H: THE TCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- H1 CHECK THE TCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: TCM C1458a .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the TCM, harness side and ground as follows:
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to H2.
No
VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 5 (10A) or fuse 24 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- H2 CHECK THE TCM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-2, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side and
ground; and between the TCM C1458a-8, circuit GD121 (BK/YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2699
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to H3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- H3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE TCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-1, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the TCM C1458a-7, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to H4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- H4 CHECK FOR CORRECT TCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the TCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the TCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2700
Yes
INSTALL a new TCM. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control
Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Battery Control Module (BCM) is present on hybrid vehicles only. The BCM communicates
with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- BCM
PINPOINT TEST I: THE BCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK THE POWER TO THE BCM
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves with leather outer gloves and a face
shield when servicing the battery pack sensor module (BPSM) and never remove the high-voltage
BPSM connector unless directed by a service procedure. High voltage is present at the BPSM at all
times, even with service disconnect plug removal. Depowering the system will not remove voltage
from the BPSM connector with the orange harness. Follow all service instructions. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227a .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the BCM, harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2701
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to I2.
No
VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuses 8 (5A), 25 (5A), 26 (20A) and 15 (50A) are OK. If
OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- I2 CHECK THE BCM GROUNDS
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the BCM, harness side and ground as follows:
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2702
GO to I3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE BCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the BCM C4227a-29, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the BCM C4227a-28, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to I4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM OPERATION
NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step.
- Disconnect all the BCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the BCM connectors and make they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2703
Pinpoint Test J: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test J: The Parking Aid Module (PAM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 131 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking Aid for
schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Parking Aid Module (PAM) communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- PAM
PINPOINT TEST J: THE PAM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- J1 CHECK THE PAM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR AN
OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: PAM C4014 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the PAM C4014-1, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side and
ground.
-
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the short circuit. TEST the system
for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK THE PAM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-4, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2704
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PAM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-3, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the PAM C4014-11, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to J4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
- Disconnect the PAM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2705
Yes
INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test K: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) Does Not Respond To The
Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 55 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Automatic
Climate Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
NOTE: The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) is present on hybrid vehicles only.
Normal Operation
The ACCM communicates with the scan tool through the High Speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ACCM
PINPOINT TEST K: THE ACCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- K1 CHECK THE ACCM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: ACCM C1469a .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the ACCM C1469a-1, circuit CH401 (VT/WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2706
GO to K2.
No
VERIFY the Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 27 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question.
If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE ACCM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the ACCM C1469a-4, circuit GD123 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to K3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ACCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the ACCM C1469a-2, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the ACCM C1469a-3, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2707
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to K4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACCM OPERATION
- Disconnect the ACCM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ACCM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ACCM. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 54 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Manual Climate
Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 55 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Automatic
Climate Control System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The HVAC module communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed Controller Area
Network (MS-CAN).
NOTE: The Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) HVAC module does not communicate
with the scan tool.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- HVAC module
PINPOINT TEST L: THE HVAC MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2708
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- L1 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC) .
- Ignition ON.
- For gasoline engines (without hybrid), measure the voltage between the HVAC module
C2356a-12 or C2357a-12, circuit CBP37 (WH), harness side and ground; and between the HVAC
module C2356a-13 or C2357a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD), harness side and ground.
- For hybrid, measure the voltage between the HVAC module C2356a-12 circuit CH122 (WH/OG),
harness side and ground; and between the HVAC module C2356a-13, circuit SBP15 (WH/RD),
harness side and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to L2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 15 (10A) or fuse 37 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the
circuit in question. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the
circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- L2 CHECK THE HVAC MODULE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-23 or C2357a-23, circuit GD114
(BK/BU), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to L3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2709
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- L3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE HVAC
MODULE AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-25 or C2357a-25, circuit VDB06
(GY/OG), harness side and the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG),
harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the HVAC module C2356a-26 or C2357a-26, circuit VDB07
(VT/OG), harness side and the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to L4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- L4 CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect all the HVAC module connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new HVAC module. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test M: The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2710
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test M: The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) communicates with the scan tool through the
Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- GPSM
PINPOINT TEST M: THE GPSM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- M1 CHECK THE GPSM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: GPSM C2300 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the GPSM C2300-1, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2711
Yes
GO to M2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
------------------------------------------------- M2 CHECK THE GPSM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the GPSM C2300-6, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to M3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- M3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE
GPSM AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the GPSM C2300-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2712
- Measure the resistance between the GPSM C2300-3, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to M4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2713
------------------------------------------------- M4 CHECK FOR CORRECT GPSM OPERATION
- Disconnect the GPSM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the GPSM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new GPSM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium
Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- FDIM
PINPOINT TEST N: THE FDIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- N1 CHECK THE FDIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: FDIM C2123 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the FDIM C2123-12, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2714
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to N2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
------------------------------------------------- N2 CHECK THE FDIM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-8, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to N3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- N3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FDIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-4, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the FDIM C2123-5, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2715
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to N4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- N4 CHECK FOR CORRECT FDIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FDIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FDIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FDIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium
Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- FCIM
PINPOINT TEST O: THE FCIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2716
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- O1 CHECK THE FCIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the FCIM C2402-1, circuit SBP14 (BN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to O2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
------------------------------------------------- O2 CHECK THE FCIM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-2, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to O3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- O3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE FCIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2717
- Measure the resistance between the FCIM C2402-4, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to O4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- O4 CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FCIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FCIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FCIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test P: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test P: The Audio Control Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2718
Normal Operation
The Audio Control Module (ACM) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed
Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- ACM
PINPOINT TEST P: THE ACM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- P1 CHECK THE ACM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: ACM C240a .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the ACM C240a-1, circuit SBP39 (WH/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to P2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 39 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
------------------------------------------------- P2 CHECK THE ACM GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the ACM C240a-13, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to P3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2719
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- P3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE ACM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: ACM C240b .
- Measure the resistance between the ACM C240b-15, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the ACM C240b-16, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to P4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- P4 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Q: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Q: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2720
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 10 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Grounds for
schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 13 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power
Distribution/SJB for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Smart Junction Box (SJB) communicates with the scan tool through the Medium Speed
Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST Q: THE SJB DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Q1 CHECK THE SJB FUSE FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the voltage between the back of the SJB fuse 5 (10A) terminals (both sides) and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Q2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 5 (10A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
------------------------------------------------- Q2 CHECK THE SJB GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d .
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-8, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground; and between the SJB C2280d-12, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2721
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to Q3.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q3 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SJB
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b .
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-37, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-38, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to Q4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- Q4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2722
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan
Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) communicates with the scan tool through the
High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- APIM
PINPOINT TEST R: THE APIM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- R1 CHECK THE APIM VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: APIM C3338 .
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the APIM C3338-1, circuit SBP03 (BU/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to R2.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 3 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit in question. If
not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
------------------------------------------------- R2 CHECK THE APIM GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2723
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-37, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and
ground; and between the APIM C3338-38, circuit GD115 (BK/GY), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to R3.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- R3 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-53, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the Data Link Connector (DLC) C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-54, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to R4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- R4 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE APIM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-16, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2724
- Measure the resistance between the APIM C3338-17, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to R5.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- R5 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the APIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test S: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication,
Communication Can Be Intermittently
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test S: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication,
Communication Can Be Intermittently Established
Normal Operation
The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. In the
event that 1 of the 2 network circuits (HS-CAN + or
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2725
HS-CAN -) becomes open to a module on the network, unreliable network communication to all
modules on the network may result.
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped)
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST S: INTERMITTENT NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION CAN
BE INTERMITTENTLY ESTABLISHED
NOTE: Various modules set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear the DTCs from all
modules after the diagnostic procedure is complete.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- S1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- Inspect DLC pins 6 and 14 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK?
Yes
GO to S2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- S2 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2726
GO to S3.
No
GO to Pinpoint Test T. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- S3 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the battery negative cable. GO to S4.
No
GO to Pinpoint Test T. See: Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN)
Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- S4 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
GO to S5.
------------------------------------------------- S5 CHECK FOR RESTORED COMMUNICATION WITH THE
PCM DISCONNECTED
NOTE: An Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) session must be established prior to disabling the
PCM in this test step. If the PCM has failed communication during multiple attempts to identify the
vehicle, first identify the vehicle manually by entering a PCM part number, calibration number or
tear tag when prompted by IDS.
NOTE: When a vehicle is manually identified by a PCM part number, calibration number or tear
tag, the IDS does not automatically run a network test. The network test must be manually selected
and run.
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: PCM C175b .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2727
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the PCM. GO to Pinpoint Test A. See: Pinpoint Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond
To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the PCM.
For hybrid, GO to S6.
For non-hybrid, GO to S7.
------------------------------------------------- S6 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE BCM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: BJB Fuses 26 (20A) and 8 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test I. See: Pinpoint Test I: The Battery Control
Module (BCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to S7.
------------------------------------------------- S7 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE PSCM, THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE (IF EQUIPPED) AND THE
PAM (IF EQUIPPED) DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 35 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse.
For vehicles equipped with an PSCM only, GO to Pinpoint Test G. See: Pinpoint Test G: The
Power Steering Control Module (PSCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
For vehicles also equipped with a 4X4 control module and/or a PAM, GO to S8.
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S11.
------------------------------------------------- S8 VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - 4X4 CONTROL
MODULE
- Inspect the vehicle for a 4X4 control module.
- Is the vehicle equipped with a 4X4 control module?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2728
GO to S9.
No
GO to S10.
------------------------------------------------- S9 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the 4X4 control module. GO to Pinpoint Test D. See: Pinpoint Test D: The 4X4 Control
Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the 4X4 control module. GO to S10.
------------------------------------------------- S10 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE PAM DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: PAM C4014 .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the PAM. GO to Pinpoint Test J. See: Pinpoint Test J: The Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the PAM. GO to S11.
------------------------------------------------- S11 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE RCM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 31 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test E. See: Pinpoint Test E: The Restraints Control
Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S12.
------------------------------------------------- S12 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE OCSM DISABLED
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2729
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 46 (7.5A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test F. See: Pinpoint Test F: The Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S13.
------------------------------------------------- S13 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuses 26 (10A) and 29 (5A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test C. See: Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster
(IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses.
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to S14.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to S15.
------------------------------------------------- S14 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 3 (15A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test R. See: Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to S15.
------------------------------------------------- S15 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE ABS MODULE AND THE ACCM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2730
- Disconnect: BJB Fuse 47 (10A) and SJB Fuse 27 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses.
For non-hybrid, GO to Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does Not Respond
To The Scan Tool
For hybrid, GO to S16.
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to S17.
------------------------------------------------- S16 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: ABS Module C1155 .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the ABS module. GO to Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The ABS Module Does
Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the ABS module.
For non-hybrid, an intermittent fault is not present. GO to Pinpoint Test K. See: Pinpoint Test K:
The Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
For hybrid, GO to S17.
------------------------------------------------- S17 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE TCM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: BJB Fuses 5 (10A) and 24 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test H. See: Pinpoint Test H: The Transmission
Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. An intermittent fault is not present. GO to Pinpoint Test T. See:
Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules
Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------Part 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2731
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules
Are Not Responding
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid)
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped)
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid)
PINPOINT TEST T: NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- T1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Inspect Data Link Connector (DLC) pins 6 and 14 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 6 and 14 OK?
Yes
GO to T2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2732
------------------------------------------------- T2 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to T3.
No
GO to T5.
------------------------------------------------- T3 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T4.
No
GO to T23.
------------------------------------------------- T4 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2733
The HS-CAN has tested within specifications. GO to Pinpoint Test S to test for an intermittent
network fault condition. See: Pinpoint Test S: Intermittent No High Speed Controller Area Network
(HS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently
------------------------------------------------- T5 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to T6.
No
GO to T9.
------------------------------------------------- T6 CHECK THE HS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH
THE PCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PCM C175b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to T7.
No
GO to T8.
------------------------------------------------- T7 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE PCM
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-59, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- For non-hybrid, measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-58, circuit VDB05 (WH),
harness side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2734
- For hybrid, measure the resistance between the PCM C175b-43, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness
side and the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T35.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- T8 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-15, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and the DLC
C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T41.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2735
------------------------------------------------- T9 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T11.
No
GO to T10.
------------------------------------------------- T10 CHECK THE HS-CAN CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN AT
THE DLC
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
A capacitor internal to a module may still be draining causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5
minutes. REPEAT the pinpoint test.
------------------------------------------------- T11 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PCM C175b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T12.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2736
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T35.
------------------------------------------------- T12 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T13.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T14.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T36.
------------------------------------------------- T13 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T14.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T37.
------------------------------------------------- T14 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE RCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2737
Yes
GO to T15.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T38.
------------------------------------------------- T15 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE OCSM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to T16.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to T17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T39.
------------------------------------------------- T16 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T40.
------------------------------------------------- T17 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2738
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a PAM, GO to T18.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a PAM, GO to T19.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T41.
------------------------------------------------- T18 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PAM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PAM C4014 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T19.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T42.
------------------------------------------------- T19 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE PSCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PSCM C2231a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV), GO to T20.
If the vehicle is not an HEV, REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative
battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T43.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2739
------------------------------------------------- T20 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE TCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: TCM C1458a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T21.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T44.
------------------------------------------------- T21 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE BCM DISCONNECTED
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves with leather outer gloves and a face
shield when servicing the battery pack sensor module (BPSM) and never remove the high-voltage
BPSM connector unless directed by a service procedure. High voltage is present at the BPSM at all
times, even with service disconnect plug removal. Depowering the system will not remove voltage
from the BPSM connector with the orange harness. Follow all service instructions. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to T22.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T45.
------------------------------------------------- T22 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ACCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ACCM C1469a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2740
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T46.
------------------------------------------------- T23 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PCM C175b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T35.
No
GO to T24.
------------------------------------------------Part 2
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test T: No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication, All Modules
Are Not Responding
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 23 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Electronic
Engine Controls - 2.5L for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- 4X4 control module (if equipped)
- ABS module
- Air Conditioning Compressor Module (ACCM) (hybrid)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2741
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
- PCM
- Parking Aid Module (PAM) (if equipped)
- Power Steering Control Module (PSCM)
- Restraints Control Module (RCM)
- Battery Control Module (BCM) (hybrid)
- Transmission Control Module (TCM) (hybrid)
PINPOINT TEST T: NO HS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the pinpoint test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- T24 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ABS MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ABS Module C155 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T36.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T25.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a 4X4 control module, GO to T26.
------------------------------------------------- T25 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE 4X4 CONTROL MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: 4X4 Control Module C3184 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T37.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2742
GO to T26.
------------------------------------------------- T26 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE RCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: RCM C2041b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T38.
No
GO to T27.
------------------------------------------------- T27 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE OCSM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: OCSM C3285 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T39.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), GO to T28.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to T29.
------------------------------------------------- T28 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2743
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T40.
No
GO to T29.
------------------------------------------------- T29 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T41.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with a Parking Aid Module (PAM), GO to T30.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a PAM, GO to T31.
------------------------------------------------- T30 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PAM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PAM C4014 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T42.
No
GO to T31.
------------------------------------------------- T31 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE PSCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: PSCM C2231a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2744
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T43.
No
For hybrid, GO to T32.
For non-hybrid, REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- T32 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE TCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: TCM C1458a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T44.
No
GO to T33.
------------------------------------------------- T33 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE BCM DISCONNECTED
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves with leather outer gloves and a face
shield when servicing the battery pack sensor module (BPSM) and never remove the high-voltage
BPSM connector unless directed by a service procedure. High voltage is present at the BPSM at all
times, even with service disconnect plug removal. Depowering the system will not remove voltage
from the BPSM connector with the orange harness. Follow all service instructions. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and the
DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2745
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T45.
No
GO to T34.
------------------------------------------------- T34 CHECK THE HS-CAN (+) AND HS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ACCM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ACCM C1469a .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-6, circuit VDB04 (WH/BU), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-14, circuit VDB05 (WH), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to T46.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- T35 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T36 CHECK FOR CORRECT ABS MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect the ABS module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ABS module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2746
Yes
INSTALL a new ABS module. REFER to Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems. CONNECT all
modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T37 CHECK FOR CORRECT 4X4 CONTROL MODULE
OPERATION
- Disconnect the 4X4 control module connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the 4X4 control module connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new 4X4 control module. REFER to Transfer Case. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR
the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T38 CHECK FOR CORRECT RCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the RCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the RCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new RCM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T39 CHECK FOR CORRECT OCSM OPERATION
- Disconnect the OCSM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the OCSM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new OCSM. REFER to Restraint Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2747
Repeat the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T40 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the APIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs.
Repeat the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. REPOWER the SRS. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- T41 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. CONNECT all
modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T42 CHECK FOR CORRECT PAM OPERATION
- Disconnect the PAM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the PAM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PAM. REFER to Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems. CONNECT all
modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2748
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T43 CHECK FOR CORRECT PSCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PSCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PSCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new steering column. REFER to Steering Column. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T44 CHECK FOR CORRECT TCM OPERATION
NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step.
- Disconnect the TCM low voltage connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the TCM low voltage connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new TCM. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control
Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T45 CHECK FOR CORRECT BCM OPERATION
NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step.
- Disconnect the BCM low voltage connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the BCM low voltage connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2749
INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems.
CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- T46 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACCM OPERATION
NOTE: Do not disconnect the high-voltage cables or connectors in the following step.
- Disconnect the ACCM low voltage connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the ACCM low voltage connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB). REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems.
CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test U: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittent
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test U: Intermittent No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN)
Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittently Established
Normal Operation
The Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable. In
the event that 1 of the 2 network circuits (MS-CAN + or MS-CAN -) becomes open to a module on
the network, unreliable network communication to all modules on the network may result.
The following modules communicate with the scan tool using the MS-CAN:
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped)
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) (if equipped)
- HVAC module
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST U: INTERMITTENT NO MS-CAN COMMUNICATION, COMMUNICATION CAN
BE INTERMITTENTLY ESTABLISHED
NOTE: Various modules set network DTCs during this test procedure. Clear DTCs from all
modules after the diagnostic procedure is completed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2750
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- U1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC.
- Inspect DLC pins 3 and 11 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 3 and 11 OK?
Yes
GO to U2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- U2 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to U3.
No
GO to Pinpoint Test V. See: Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- U3 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2751
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to U4.
No
GO to Pinpoint Test V. See: Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------- U4 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground;
and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
GO to U5.
------------------------------------------------- U5 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE SJB DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 5 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test Q. See: Pinpoint Test Q: The Smart Junction Box
(SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U6.
------------------------------------------------- U6 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE HVAC MODULE DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuses 37 (10A) and 15 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test L. See: Pinpoint Test L: The HVAC Module Does
Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2752
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to U7.
------------------------------------------------- U7 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE ACM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 39 (20A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test P. See: Pinpoint Test P: The Audio Control
Module (ACM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse.
If the vehicle is equipped with an Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM), INSTALL the
removed fuse. GO to U8.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U9.
------------------------------------------------- U8 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE APIM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 3 (15A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test R. See: Pinpoint Test R: The Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U9.
------------------------------------------------- U9 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCIM, FDIM AND/OR GPSM DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuse 14 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuse.
For vehicles equipped with an FDIM only, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to Pinpoint Test N. See:
Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
For vehicles also equipped with an FCIM and/or a GPSM, INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U10.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2753
INSTALL the removed fuse. GO to U13.
------------------------------------------------- U10 VERIFY VEHICLE EQUIPMENT - FCIM
- Inspect the vehicle for an FCIM.
- Is the vehicle equipped with an FCIM?
Yes
GO to U11.
No
GO to U12.
------------------------------------------------- U11 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402 .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the FCIM. GO to Pinpoint Test O. See: Pinpoint Test O: The Front Controls Interface
Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the FCIM. GO to U12.
------------------------------------------------- U12 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE GPSM DISCONNECTED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: GPSM C2300 .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
CONNECT the GPSM. GO to Pinpoint Test M. See: Pinpoint Test M: The Global Positioning
System Module (GPSM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
CONNECT the GPSM. GO to Pinpoint Test N. See: Pinpoint Test N: The Front Display Interface
Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
------------------------------------------------- U13 CHECK FOR RESTORED NETWORK
COMMUNICATION WITH THE IC DISABLED
NOTE: When re-running the network test, the network test application must be first closed or the
screen display reverts back to the prior run network test results.
- Disconnect: SJB Fuses 26 (10A), 29 (5A) and 43 (10A) .
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Network Test .
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2754
- Repeat the network test.
- Do all other modules pass the network test?
Yes
INSTALL the removed fuses. GO to Pinpoint Test C. See: Pinpoint Test C: The Instrument Cluster
(IC) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool
No
INSTALL the removed fuses. An intermittent fault is not present. GO to Pinpoint Test V. See:
Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All
Modules Are Not Responding
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All
Modules Are Not Responding
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test V: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All
Modules Are Not Responding
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Audio Control Module (ACM)
- Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) (if equipped)
- Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) (if equipped)
- Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
- Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) (if equipped)
- HVAC module
- Instrument Cluster (IC)
- Smart Junction Box (SJB)
PINPOINT TEST V: PINPOINT TEST U: NO MS-CAN COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE
NOT RESPONDING
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- V1 CHECK THE DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the Data Link Connector (DLC).
- Inspect DLC pins 3 and 11 for damage.
- Are DLC pins 3 and 11 OK?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2755
Yes
GO to V2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- V2 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTANCE
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 54 and 66 ohms?
Yes
GO to V3.
No
GO to V5.
------------------------------------------------- V3 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V4.
No
GO to V19.
------------------------------------------------- V4 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and ground;
and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2756
- Is the voltage greater than 6 volts?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The Controller Area Network (CAN) has tested within specifications. GO to Pinpoint Test U to
diagnose the intermittent MS-CAN fault. See: Pinpoint Test U: Intermittent No Medium Speed
Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, Communication Can Be Intermittent
------------------------------------------------- V5 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to V6.
No
GO to V9.
------------------------------------------------- V6 CHECK THE MS-CAN TERMINATION RESISTOR WITH
THE SJB DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance between 108 and 132 ohms?
Yes
GO to V7.
No
GO to V8.
------------------------------------------------- V7 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE SJB
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-37, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG),
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2757
harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280b-38, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and
the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V27.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- V8 CHECK THE MS-CAN CIRCUITS BETWEEN THE IC
AND THE DLC FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-2, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between the IC C220-1, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V34.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2758
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT
the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- V9 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to V11.
No
GO to V10.
------------------------------------------------- V10 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the DLC or REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the
negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
A capacitor internal to a module may still be draining causing irregular resistance readings. WAIT 5
minutes. REPEAT the Pinpoint Test.
------------------------------------------------- V11 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a Global Positioning System Module (GPSM), GO to V12.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2759
If the vehicle is not equipped with a GPSM, GO to V13.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V27.
------------------------------------------------- V12 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE GPSM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: GPSM C2300 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to V13.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V28.
------------------------------------------------- V13 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE FDIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FDIM C2123 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with a Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), GO to V14.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an FCIM, GO to V15.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V29.
------------------------------------------------- V14 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2760
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to V15.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V30.
------------------------------------------------- V15 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE ACM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ACM C240b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
If the vehicle is equipped with an APIM, GO to V16.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to V17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V31.
------------------------------------------------- V16 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to V17.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V32.
------------------------------------------------- V17 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE HVAC MODULE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2761
DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC) .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to V18.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V33.
------------------------------------------------- V18 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TOGETHER WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and the
DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V34.
------------------------------------------------- V19 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE SJB DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V27.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2762
If the vehicle is equipped with a Global Positioning System Module (GPSM), GO to V20.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a GPSM, GO to V21.
------------------------------------------------- V20 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE GPSM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: GPSM C2300 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V28.
No
GO to V21.
------------------------------------------------- V21 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE FDIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FDIM C2123 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V29.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with a Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM), GO to V22.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an FCIM, GO to V23.
------------------------------------------------- V22 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE FCIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: FCIM C2402 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2763
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V30.
No
GO to V23.
------------------------------------------------- V23 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE ACM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: ACM C240b .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V31.
No
If the vehicle is equipped with an APIM, GO to V24.
If the vehicle is not equipped with an APIM, GO to V25.
------------------------------------------------- V24 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE APIM DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: APIM C3338 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V32.
No
GO to V25.
------------------------------------------------- V25 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE HVAC MODULE DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: HVAC Module C2356a (DATC) or C2357a (EMTC) .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2764
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V33.
No
GO to V26.
------------------------------------------------- V26 CHECK THE MS-CAN (+) AND MS-CAN (-) CIRCUITS
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND WITH THE IC DISCONNECTED
- Disconnect: IC C220 .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-3, circuit VDB06 (GY/OG), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-11, circuit VDB07 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances greater than 1,000 ohms?
Yes
CONNECT the negative battery cable. GO to V34.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT all modules. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the
DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
------------------------------------------------- V27 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V28 CHECK FOR CORRECT GPSM OPERATION
- Disconnect the GPSM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2765
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the GPSM connector and make it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new GPSM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs.
Repeat the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V29 CHECK FOR CORRECT FDIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FDIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FDIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FDIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V30 CHECK FOR CORRECT FCIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the FCIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the FCIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new FCIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V31 CHECK FOR CORRECT ACM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the ACM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the ACM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2766
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new ACM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V32 CHECK FOR CORRECT APIM OPERATION
- Disconnect the APIM connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the APIM connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new APIM. REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment. CONNECT all modules.
CLEAR the DTCs.
Repeat the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V33 CHECK FOR CORRECT HVAC MODULE OPERATION
- Disconnect all the HVAC module connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the HVAC module connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new HVAC module. CONNECT all modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network
test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules.
------------------------------------------------- V34 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2767
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. CONNECT all
modules. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CONNECT all modules. .
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test W: No Power To The Scan Tool
Communications Network
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test W: No Power To The Scan Tool
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 14 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Module
Communications Network for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The scan tool is connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC) to communicate with the High Speed
Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) and Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN).
A loss of ground or poor ground at the DLC may result in HS-CAN or MS-CAN faults while the scan
tool is connected.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- DLC
- Scan tool
PINPOINT TEST W: NO POWER TO THE SCAN TOOL
NOTE: Most faults are due to connector and/or wiring concerns. Carry out a thorough inspection
and verification before proceeding with the Pinpoint Test. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Module Configuration/Inspection and Verification
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- W1 CHECK DLC PINS FOR DAMAGE
- Disconnect the scan tool cable from the DLC.
- Inspect the DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 for damage.
- Are the DLC pins 4, 5 and 16 OK?
Yes
GO to W2.
No
REPAIR the DLC as necessary. REPEAT the network test with the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2768
------------------------------------------------- W2 CHECK THE DLC VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Measure the voltage between the DLC C251-16, circuit SBP20 (GN/RD), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to W3.
No
VERIFY the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 20 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK,
Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. REPEAT the
network test with the scan tool. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- W3 CHECK THE DLC GROUND CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable .
- Measure the resistance between the DLC C251-4, circuit GD112 (BK/GN), harness side and
ground; and between the DLC C251-5, circuit GD114 (BK/BU), harness side and ground.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
REPAIR the scan tool. CONNECT the negative battery cable. REPEAT the network test with the
scan tool.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question. CONNECT the negative battery cable. REPEAT the network test
with the scan tool.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2769
Information Bus: Programming and Relearning
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the
Original Module is Available
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the
Original Module is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal.
2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark.
3. Select Programmable Module Installation.
4. Select the module that is being replaced.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check
mark.
6. Install the new module and press the check mark.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check
mark.
8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete.
9. Test module for correct operation.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the
Original Module is Not Available
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the
Original Module is NOT Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module.
2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal.
3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2770
4. Select Programmable Module Installation.
5. Select the module that was replaced.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check
mark.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check
mark.
8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center.
Retrieve the data from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.
10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete.
11. Test module for correct operation.
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System
(IDS)
NOTE: If a new Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) is being installed, install the new
APIM before carrying out the following procedure. For additional information, refer to Accessories
and Optional Equipment.
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and
Consumer Interface Processor (CIP) software
levels.
8. NOTE: Do not disconnect the Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) or USB cables during
APIM programming.
Select the desired software level from the list of available software for programming then select the
"Program APIM" button to begin the APIM programming process. Enter the APIM As-Built data if
prompted. When only the CIP is being programmed, select cancel when prompted whether or not to program
the VIP.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2771
- When the VIP is programmed, the CIP will be programmed automatically.
9. The Sync/ APIM application downloads the software into the APIM and displays "Programming
has been completed successfully".
10. Test the audio system for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2772
Information Bus: Service and Repair
Programmable Module Installation (PMI)
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the
Original Module is Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal.
2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark.
3. Select Programmable Module Installation.
4. Select the module that is being replaced.
5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check
mark.
6. Install the new module and press the check mark.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check
mark.
8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete.
9. Test module for correct operation.
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When the
Original Module is NOT Available
NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be
carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal
and installation procedures.
1. Install the new module.
2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal.
3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark.
4. Select Programmable Module Installation.
5. Select the module that was replaced.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check
mark.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check
mark.
8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center.
Retrieve the data from the technician service
publication website at this time and press the check mark.
9. Enter the module data and press the check mark.
10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration
Complete.
11. Test module for correct operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2777
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2778
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2781
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2782
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2783
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2784
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2785
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 2786
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2790
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2791
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster (IC) and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2798
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2799
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2800
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses
the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input
used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral
with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor.
Typical MAP Sensor
Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2801
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM
> Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2809
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2810
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2811
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2812
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2813
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2816
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2817
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2818
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop
operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical HO2S
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2821
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2824
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page
2825
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 2830
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust
Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2834
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that
As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices
must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the
configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs,
successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and
a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2839
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The
clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new
SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer
to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming
instructions, if necessary.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step clears DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This makes sure that all displays are visible under
all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation
TORQUE-BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC)
Overview
The torque-based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque
(via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body
(ETB), the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the
throttle opening and engine torque.
Torque-based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and
later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque
during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM
and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver.
It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft
timing (VCT), which delivers same torque during transitions.
Torque-based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with
smoother traction control.
Other benefits of torque-based ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators
- eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve
- better airflow range
- packaging (no cable)
- more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality
The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster
(IC) when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs)
and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL).
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB)
The ETB has the following characteristics: The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires).
- There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel
to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a
separate motor housing.
- An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The
default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle.
- The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore. This
hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine
airflow required at idle.
- The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate
angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve.
- There is one reference voltage and one signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The
reference voltage and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage and signal
return circuits used by the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor. There are also 2 throttle
position (TP) signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased
monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope (increasing angle,
decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope (increasing angle,
increasing voltage). The TPS2-PS signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at
approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. For additional
information on the APP sensor, refer to Engine Control Components. See: Description and
Operation/Engine Control Components
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy
The torque-based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate
variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver
pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver
demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift
schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque.
The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain
control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function
is carried out by the independent plausibility checker (IPC) software, which resides on the main
processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an
estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a
specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2843
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 1)
ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode Effects Management (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2844
ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management
Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page
2845
APP and TP Sensor Inputs
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check
Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output
Electronic TAC Operation Check
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh
Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Engine Control Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's
Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2867
Engine Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2868
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2869
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2870
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2871
Engine Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2872
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2873
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2874
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2875
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2876
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2877
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2878
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Engine Control Module: Procedures
FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM)
Description
The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM).
The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle,
and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly.
As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The
VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID
Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTC P1635 or
P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware
or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure
properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle
ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID
Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items
used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification
number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the
presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual
shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID
block are displayed on the scan tool.
When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as
tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this
limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to
reset the VID block.
On selected vehicles equipped with permanent DTC reporting capabilities, neutral profile correction
should be learned after a PCM replacement in order to activate the misfire monitor. This can be
accomplished using the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Learn function on the scan tool.
Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan
tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details.
Neutral Profile Correction
In order for the misfire detection system to function properly, any mechanical inaccuracies in the
crankshaft position (CKP) sensor must be learned by the PCM. This information is stored in
non-volatile memory (NVM) in the PCM. It is not cleared when the keep alive memory (KAM) is
reset.
Neutral profile learning is accomplished using the scan tool any time a PCM is replaced. It should
also be relearned any time the CKP sensor is replaced or major engine repairs have been
completed.
To determine if the neutral profile learning has been completed, check the MP_LRN parameter
identification (PID) using the scan tool. The PID should read YES if the neutral profile learning has
been completed. If the PID reads NO, complete the neutral profile learning prior to diagnosing any
misfire DTCs.
Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM
The VID block on a replacement PCM is blank and requires programming. There are two
procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, the
second is manual data entry into the new PCM.
Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by
using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored
data can be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed.
Carry out manual data entry if the old PCM is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove
and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter
programing, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all
parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile
equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF
may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center
for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center
only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury
technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) web site for
As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the
Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) home page, use the search
function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data.
For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the
PTS web site for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle.
Making Changes to the VID Block
A programmed PCM may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate
the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Making Changes to the PCM Calibration
At certain times, the EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes
made to the strategy or calibration after production or the need to reset the VID block because it
has reached its limit. Refer to PCM/Module Reprogramming on the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2881
Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
Removal
1. NOTE: PCM installation DOES NOT require new keys or programming of keys, only a
Parameter Reset of the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure. See: Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the cowl stud bolt.
3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the PCM.
5. Remove and inspect the PCM cowl seal; install new if damaged.
Installation
1. Install the PCM cowl seal.
2. Install the PCM and the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2882
4. Attach the wiring harness retainer to the cowl stud bolt.
5. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the
Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure.
For additional information, refer to Information Bus. See: Information Bus/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
6. Reprogram the PATS. Carry out the Parameter Reset procedure. For additional information,
refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
7. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2886
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers
and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2887
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2892
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2893
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and
Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2897
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2898
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2899
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2900
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2901
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Barometric Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Barometric Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
The BARO sensor directly measures barometric pressure to estimate the exhaust back pressure.
Exhaust back pressure influences speed density based air charge computation. The BARO sensor
is mounted directly to the PCM circuit board.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake
Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Brake Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake
Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 2909
Brake Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1 > Page 2914
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position
Sensor 1 > Page 2915
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position
Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position
Sensor > Page 2918
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position
Sensor > Page 2919
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2920
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2921
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Cylinder Head
Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description
and Operation/Powertrain Control Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2929
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation Engine Coolant
Temperature (ECT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2933
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2934
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2935
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2936
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2937
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2938
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2939
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2940
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Engine Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2945
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2946
Engine Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2947
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2948
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT
sensor provides complete engine temperature information and is used to infer coolant temperature.
If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe
cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern, such as low
coolant or coolant loss, could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine
components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM
prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. For additional
information, refer to Powertrain Control Software for Fail-Safe Cooling Strategy. See: Description
and Operation/Powertrain Control Software
Typical CHT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor > Page 2951
Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor
The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total
current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel
control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors; threaded, push-in, and
twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage.
Typical Thread-Type ECT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 2952
Engine Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair
Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the Cylinder Head Temperature (CHT) sensor cover and position aside.
2. Disconnect the CHT sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the CHT sensor.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2957
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2958
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2959
Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler
Pipe - Exploded View > Page 2960
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2964
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2965
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure.
Typical In-tank FTP Sensor
Typical In-line FTP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2969
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2970
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2971
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor
The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical
resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases
as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor
terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The IAT sensor provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air
temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of fuel, spark, and air flow.
The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT
sensor.
Currently there are 2 types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and an
integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the
mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand-alone sensor.
Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate
as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard
OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor, intake air temperature 2 (IAT2), is located after the
supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air
temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC)
efficiency.
The IAT2 sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
IAT2 sensor measures the intake manifold temperature. The powertrain control module (PCM)
uses the information from the IAT2 sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide
input used for various spark control functions. The IAT2 sensor for a speed density system is
integral with the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor.
Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated IAT Snesors
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2972
Typical Integrated IAT Sensor Integrated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor
Typical IAT2 Sensor Integrated With A MAP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2977
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2978
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2981
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2982
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2983
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 2984
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2985
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2986
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2990
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2991
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2992
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the
MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold.
The MAP sensor for speed density control systems is centrally located on the intake manifold. The
MAP sensor measures the intake manifold pressure. The powertrain control module (PCM) uses
the information from the MAP sensor to determine the speed density air charge and provide input
used for various spark control functions. The MAP sensor for a speed density system is integral
with the intake air temperature 2 (IAT2) sensor.
Typical MAP Sensor
Typical MAP Sensor Integrated With An IAT2 Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2993
Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Service and Repair
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor electrical connector.
3. Using a tool like KD Tool #58181 or Lisle T25 Torx Bit, remove the screw and the MAP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Lubricate the MAP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation
Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Engine Oil Temperature (EOT) Sensor
The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The
electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance
increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across
the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature.
Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a
voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in
total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in series with the sensor resistor
determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage
minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor.
The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into
the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM uses the EOT sensor input in conjunction with other
PCM inputs to determine oil degradation.
The PCM uses EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown to prevent engine damage from
occurring as a result of high oil temperatures. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for
a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders.
On VCT applications, the PCM uses the EOT sensor input to adjust the VCT control gains and
logic for camshaft timing.
Typical EOT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3001
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3002
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3003
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3004
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#11 > Page 3005
Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3008
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3009
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
#22 > Page 3010
Oxygen Sensor: Diagrams Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #21
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage
according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in
the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich
air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the
PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during
closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts.
Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to
a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine enters closed loop
operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by
providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter
closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty
cycled, to prevent damage to the heater.
Typical HO2S
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Heated
Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 3013
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Universal Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S
combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric
air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a
measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to
detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content
inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping
oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner,
the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the
measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to
pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio.
The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a
signal that comes directly from the sensor.
The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen
differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small
amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal
HO2S does not need access to outside air.
Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used
to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM.
Embedded with the sensing element is the universal HO2S heater. The heater allows the engine to
enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of
780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on
and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum
accuracy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor Exploded View
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3016
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the HO2S.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen
Sensor (HO2S) and Catalyst Monitor Sensor - Exploded View > Page 3017
Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Catalyst Monitor Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
3. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in
removal.
Using the Exhaust Gas Oxygen Sensor Socket, remove the CMS.
- Calculate the correct torque wrench setting for the following torque.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the CMS.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 3022
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 3026
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 3031
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3035
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3036
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3037
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3038
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3039
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3040
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 3041
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Output
Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3046
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling.
Typical VSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Electronic Throttle Control Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page
3051
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3055
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3056
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3057
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3058
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3059
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3060
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3061
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard
Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Customer Interest Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's
P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 11-2-10 > Feb > 11 > Engine Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough
Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Variable Valve Timing Actuator: >
11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
Liftgate Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
TSB 11-2-9
02/07/11
BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may
experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are
present.
ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage.
a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure.
b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design.
Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms.
a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7842006 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 3087
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 3088
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve > Page 3089
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Diagrams Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Valve 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3090
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation
VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM
Overview
The VCT system enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function
of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded.
- Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced.
- Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and
equally advanced or retarded.
- Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are
shifted independently.
All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default
mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM)
determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant
temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine
RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine
power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque.
In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the
overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS
and DEPS systems are used.
The VCT system knocking and noise concerns are diagnosed in the diagnostic/repair information.
For additional information, refer to the Engine, Engine System - General Information. Verification of
incorrect VCT phasing on a warm engine operating below 1500 RPM can be isolated using a
stethoscope and by monitoring the VCTADV, VCTADVERR and VCTDC PIDs using a scan tool. If
the VCT phaser does not maintain correct valve timing, low oil pressure or oil flow restrictions are
primary possible causes. Verify correct oil pressure and flow, refer to the Engine, Engine System -
General Information.
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System
The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position
(CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP sensor trigger wheel indicates the CMP signal for
that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning
information in 10 degree increments.
1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT), engine coolant
temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), CMP,
throttle position (TP), mass air flow (MAF), and CKP sensors to determine the operating conditions
of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft
position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft
position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not
operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature.
2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal
is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the
VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly.
As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the
cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a
fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle.
The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT
solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and
actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM
disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related
DTC is also set when the concern is detected.
5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly
which advances or retards the camshaft timing.
One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the
timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3091
couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the
chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either
an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow.
VCT System
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 3096
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Locations > Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid 1 > Page 3097
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Locations Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Solenoid >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3098
Variable Valve Timing Solenoid: Service and Repair
Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) Oil Control Solenoid
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the valve cover. For additional information, refer to Engine.
2. Remove the bolt and the Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) oil control solenoid.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft.
The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications,
the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in
different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed
sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is
generated.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3103
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency
that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low speed, the
sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor
generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the
VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control,
transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and TCC scheduling.
Typical VSS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation
CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS
Overview
The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine
exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N),
carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of
nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants
of CO, NOx, and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled.
The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated
oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The
catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle
applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic
converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the
powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the
description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor
Only two HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the
catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the sensors after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22)
are used to monitor catalyst efficiency.
Typical V-Engine
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3108
Typical In-Line Engine
Catalytic Converter
A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a
chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The
concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The
catalytic converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated
ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust
gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The
catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components
so they are used up as much as possible.
Light Off Catalyst
As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency
exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C
(475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a three way catalytic converter (TWC) that is located as
close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the
exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located
under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion
efficiency for that catalyst.
Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) Conversion Efficiency
A TWC requires a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of gasoline (14.7:1),
for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be
tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly
decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO
conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency.
For vehicles using E85 the required air/fuel ratio is 9.8:1. Other gasoline/ethanol mixtures require a
variable air/fuel ratio between 14.7:1 to 9.8:1 dependent on the percentage of ethanol content.
TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart
Exhaust System
The exhaust system conveys engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere.
Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter
through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst.
The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust
emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic
converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler.
Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 3109
Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration
Underbody Catalyst
The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line
with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming
a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific
vehicle, refer to the Exhaust System for the exhaust system exploded view.
Three Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter
The TWC contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The
TWC catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of
NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio
at or close to stoichiometry.
Exhaust Manifold Runners
The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust
manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of
cylinders.
Exhaust Pipes
Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to
increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the
engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler.
Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S)
The HO2Ss provide the powertrain control module (PCM) with information related to the oxygen
content of the exhaust gas. For additional information on the HO2S, refer to Engine Control
Components. See: Computers and Control Systems/Description and Operation/Engine Control
Components
Muffler
Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase
the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also
reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the
atmosphere.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Manifold
Catalytic Converter - 2.5L Manifold, Hybrid
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe.
3. Remove the 2 exhaust bracket bolts.
4. Disconnect the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) and the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS)
electrical connectors.
5. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold nuts.
6. Remove the catalytic converter manifold from the vehicle.
- Discard the catalytic converter manifold gasket.
7. Remove and discard the 7 catalytic converter manifold studs.
8. Clean and inspect the catalytic converter manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
Installation
1. Install the 7 new catalytic converter manifold studs.
- Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
2. NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification before installing
the converter bracket bolts will cause
the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
NOTICE: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter manifold nuts to specification a second time will
cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak.
Using a new gasket, install the catalytic converter and the 7 exhaust manifold nuts. Tighten in 2
stages in the sequence shown.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Connect the HO2S and the CMS electrical connectors.
4. Install the 2 exhaust bracket bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Install the exhaust intermediate pipe. For additional information, refer to Exhaust Intermediate
Pipe - 2.5L, Hybrid See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Exhaust System/Exhaust Pipe/Service and Repair/Exhaust Intermediate Pipe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3112
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System - Exploded View
Exhaust System - Exploded View
2.5L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3113
3.0L (View 1 of 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3114
3.0L (View 2 of 2)
2.5L Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3115
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3116
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Catalytic Converter - Underbody
Removal
NOTICE: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration
of the rubber.
NOTICE: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator
to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation.
NOTE: The production catalytic converter and muffler assembly is a 1-piece construction. The
service catalytic converter and muffler is a 2-piece construction.
NOTE: If replacement is not required, the production catalytic converter and muffler assembly can
be removed and installed as one piece. It is only necessary to cut the production exhaust to enable
the service section to be fitted. Before cutting any part of the exhaust system, check that the
position of the cut is correct in comparison to the service section being installed.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2.5L vehicles
2. Disconnect the Catalyst Monitor Sensor (CMS) electrical connector.
All vehicles
3. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts, alternately
loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 10-mm exhaust catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate
pipe/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts.
4. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spring nuts or damage may occur
to the resonator flange studs.
NOTE: When loosening the resonator spring nuts, alternately loosen the nuts from side to side.
Remove and discard the two 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts.
5. NOTICE: Remove the gaskets by simultaneously pulling up and twisting the gasket on the pipe.
Do not pry under the gasket or damage
to the flange may occur.
Detach the 3 exhaust hangers and remove the catalytic converter and muffler assembly.
- Remove and discard the gaskets.
2.5L vehicles
6. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3117
3.0L vehicles
7. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
2.5L hybrid vehicles
8. Cut the exhaust system as indicated in illustration.
Installation
NOTICE: The exhaust hanger insulators are constructed of a special material. Use only the correct
specification exhaust hanger insulator or damage to the exhaust system may occur.
NOTE: Check the exhaust hanger insulators for damage and fatigue. Install new exhaust hanger
insulators as required.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad.
1. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Install the service clamp onto the catalytic converter section.
2. Install the catalytic converter section and service clamp onto the muffler section.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3118
3. Inspect the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe and resonator flange studs for damage.
- If damaged, replace stud(s), or if stud comes out when removing nut(s), replace the stud(s).
NOTE: If replacement of the exhaust intermediate pipe/exhaust Y-pipe flange stud(s) is required,
perform Steps 4 and 5.
4. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 10-mm stud out of the flange.
5. NOTE: When positioning the new 10-mm stud in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe
flange, make sure to line up the new stud seat knurls
with witness knurl grooves in the exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 10-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
NOTE: If replacement of the resonator flange stud(s) is required, perform Steps 6 and 7.
6. Use the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover to push the 8-mm stud out of the flange.
7. NOTE: When positioning the new 8-mm stud in the resonator flange, make sure to line up the
new stud seat knurls with witness knurl grooves in
the resonator flange.
Use a C-clamp and a deep-well socket to push the 8-mm stud fully into the flange.
- Make sure the stud is fully and evenly seated into the flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - Manifold > Page 3119
8. NOTE: Do not tighten the service clamp at this time.
Attach the catalytic converter and muffler assembly to the 3 exhaust hangers.
9. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new resonator-to-muffler gasket by hand.
10. Install the 2 new 8-mm resonator-to-muffler spring nuts and alternately tighten RH side to LH
side in sequence in 3 stages:
- Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
11. NOTICE: Replace the gasket by hand. Do not rotate the gasket back and forth during
installation. Doing so may lessen the gaskets ability
to seal and stay correctly positioned during assembly.
NOTE: Thoroughly clean the sealing surfaces of the flanges using a finishing pad. Inspect the
cleaned sealing surface for nicks and scratches and replace as necessary.
Install a new converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe gasket by hand.
12. Install the 2 new 10-mm catalytic converter-to-exhaust intermediate/exhaust Y-pipe spring nuts
and alternately tighten RH side to LH side in
sequence in 3 stages: Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Tighten the 4 service clamp nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister
Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Canister
Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3129
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Canister Purge Control Valve: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3135
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3136
Canister Purge Control Valve: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3137
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3138
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporative Emission (EVAP)
Canister Purge Valve
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister
Purge Valve
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Valve
The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system controlled by the PCM. This
valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during
various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve. The
EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the need
for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. For E-Series, Escape/Mariner,
Expedition, F-Series, Fusion 2.5L, Fusion 3.0L, Milan and Navigator, the PCM outputs a duty cycle
between 0% and 100% to control the EVAP canister purge valve. For all others, the PCM outputs a
variable current between 0 and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve.
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Evaporative Emission (EVAP)
Canister Purge Valve > Page 3142
Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister
Purge Check Valve
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Purge Check Valve
The EVAP canister purge check valve is used on turbocharged engines to prevent boost pressure
from forcing open the EVAP canister purge valve and entering the EVAP system. The valve is open
under normal engine vacuum. The valve closes during boost conditions to prevent the fuel tank
from being pressurized and hydrocarbons forced out of the EVAP system into the atmosphere
through the EVAP canister vent valve. When the engine is off, or at atmospheric pressure, the
EVAP canister purge check valve is in an indeterminate state. The EVAP canister purge check
valve is an integral part of the purge valve assembly.
Typical EVAP Canister Purge Check Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3143
Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve
2.5L Engine
3.0L Engine
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3144
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector.
3. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and the EVAP canister purge valve.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Customer Interest Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's >
Page 3153
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - Driveability
Issues With/Without/MIL/DTC's
TSB 11-3-22
03/16/11
DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITHOUT DTCS OR DRIVEABILITY SYMPTOMS WITH DTC
P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, P0456-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 3/4/2011
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion 2009-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan 2009-2011 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2011 Escape, Mariner, 2010-2011 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a
2.5L or 3.OL engine built on or before 03/04/2011 may experience a leaking/stuck canister purge
valve. This condition may cause various intermittent driveability symptoms without any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC). The condition may also cause driveability symptoms with malfunction
indicator light on with DTCs P144A, P2196, P2198, P1450, or P0456.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove evaporative emission canister, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-13.
2. Inspect canister for raw fuel by turning canister over and watching for any signs of raw fuel
exiting canister. Are there any signs of raw fuel present in
the evaporative emission canister?
a. No - Proceed to Step 3.
b. Yes - Replace the evaporative emission canister, Refer to WSM, Section 303-13. Proceed to
step 3.
3. Replace the evaporative emission canister purge valve located in the engine compartment,
Refer to WSM, Section 303-13.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110322A 2010-2011 Fusion And 1.0 Hr.
Milan: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Evaporative Emission Control Canister: > 11-3-22 > Mar > 11 > Emissions - Driveability Issues
With/Without/MIL/DTC's > Page 3159
110322A 2009-2011 Escape And 1.2 Hrs.
Mariner: Check DTCs, Remove And Inspect Canister Replace If Necessary, And Replace The
Evaporative Emission Canister Purge Valve (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9C915 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3160
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3161
3. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister electrical connector.
4. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister.
5. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister fuel vapor tube quick connect
coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-fuel vapor tube quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, 2 bolts and the EVAP canister assembly.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair
Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair
Fuel Vapor Tube Assembly
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System >
Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3165
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Position the Powertrain Lift under the fuel tank.
4. Remove the bolt and position the LH fuel tank strap aside.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
5. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly.
6. Disconnect the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
8. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister fuel vapor
tube quick connect coupling. For additional
information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
9. Remove the fuel vapor tube assembly.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation
Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP
canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the
target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor.
Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations
Leak Detection Valve: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3172
Leak Detection Valve: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3173
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3174
Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair
Evaporative Emission Canister Vent Solenoid
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Remove the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister assembly. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission Canister See:
Evaporative Emission Control Canister/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent solenoid electrical connector, release the pin-type retainer
and remove the EVAP canister wire harness.
3. Remove the 3 EVAP canister tray bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak
Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 3175
4. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
5. Disconnect the EVAP canister fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
6. Remove the EVAP canister from the tray.
7. Depress the locking tab outward, rotate the EVAP canister vent solenoid clockwise and remove
it from the EVAP canister.
8. NOTE: Do not apply oil to the EVAP canister O-ring seal. Clean water may be applied to aid
reassembly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Carry out the Evaporative Emission System Leak Test. For additional information, refer to
Evaporative Emission System Leak Test See: Testing and Inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR
Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum
supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a
disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed
through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is
vented through the solenoid vent to the atmosphere. At 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied),
the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR
valve.
EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube
> Component Information > Description and Operation
EGR Tube: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Orifice Tube Assembly
The EGR orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake
manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also
contains the metering orifice and 2 pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a
measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential
across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides
feedback to the PCM.
EGR Orifice Tube Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations
EGR Valve: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Locations > Page 3186
EGR Valve: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve
Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve
assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR
valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the
valve against the motor opening force.
EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3189
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM)
The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same
manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system
components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve
portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering
orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By
relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream
pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR
correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at ignition on. The system provides the PCM
with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal that is identical to a traditional differential pressure
feedback EGR system.
ESM
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve > Page 3190
EGR Valve: Description and Operation Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional,
vacuum-actuated valve. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to
the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum
signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is
fully open at about 15 kPa (4.4 in-Hg).
Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is
impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not
measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures.
Typical EGR Valve
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3191
EGR Valve: Service and Repair
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve
Removal and Installation
1. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block
Heater.
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
3. Disconnect the EGR valve electrical connector.
4. Release the clamp and remove the coolant hose from the EGR valve.
5. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. NOTICE: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive
means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools
cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces
of the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) valve gasket.
NOTE: If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and
prepare the surfaces
NOTE: Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket.
Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket.
- Clean and inspect the EGR gasket mating surfaces.
7. NOTE: Install a new EGR valve gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve
> Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3192
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
8. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure
Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3196
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Oil
Separator > Component Information > Service and Repair
Oil Separator: Service and Repair
Crankcase Vent Oil Separator
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
2. Release the coolant bypass hose from the clip.
3. NOTE: Remove and discard the crankcase vent oil separator gasket.
Remove the 8 bolts, the crankcase vent oil separator.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Clean and inspect the sealing surfaces.
- Install a new crankcase vent oil separator gasket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation >
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Diagrams
Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation
Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer
that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly.
The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as
the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI
and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing
for identification (note the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure
feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering
orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback.
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger
plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF
hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission
Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Description and Operation >
Page 3208
Differential Pressure Feedback EGR Sensor - Tube Mounted
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 3213
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information
> Specifications > Page 3214
All vehicles
7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system
pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP module fuse.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System
Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal
2.5L and 3.0L Vehicles
2.5L Hybrid Vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3221
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
NOTE: The accelerator pedal and sensor assembly on the 2.5L and 3.0L are similar in appearance
to the 2.5L Hybrid but are not interchangeable.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2.5L and 3.0L vehicles
2. Remove the 3 self-tapping screws and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2.5L Hybrid vehicles
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the accelerator pedal and sensor assembly.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
All vehicles
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3225
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3226
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Diagrams
Air Filter Element: Diagrams
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Filter
Element > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3231
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3235
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3236
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3237
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3238
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3239
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM
sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the
EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly.
This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release
> System Information > Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
Fuel System Pressure Release
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse is located in the Battery Junction Box (BJB), location
22.
Remove the FP fuse.
2. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls.
3. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel
injection supply manifold pressure has been released.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. When the fuel system service is complete, install the FP module fuse.
6. NOTE: Carry out a Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO) visual inspection for leaks prior to starting the
engine.
Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Fuel Injector Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3251
Fuel Injector Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Fuel Injector Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3252
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings
Spring Lock Couplings
Disconnect
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube spring lock coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Insert the Spring Lock Coupling Disconnect Tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock
coupling.
4. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3257
Connect
1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling.
- Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil.
2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated.
3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube.
4. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3258
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling
Quick Connect Coupling
Disconnect - Type I
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from
the tube.
Connect - Type I
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3259
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Disconnect - Type II
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling.
3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3260
Connect - Type II
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting.
2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the
fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Release the lock tab into the latched position.
3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Disconnect - Type III
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3261
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage.
Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab.
4. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully unlocked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs to
release the locking mechanism.
5. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Connect - Type III
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing.
Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3262
3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling.
Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position.
4. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Disconnect - Type IV
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism.
4. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector
retaining clip area before separating from the tube.
Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
- Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling.
- Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3263
Connect - Type IV
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
NOTE: Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To
make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube.
Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube.
1. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated.
2. Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing.
2. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Disconnect - Type V
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to
remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube
or damage to the tube or connector retaining clip can occur. Apply clean engine oil to the end of the
tube before inserting the tube into the connector.
NOTICE: Fuel injection equipment is manufactured to very precise tolerances and fine clearances.
It is essential that absolute cleanliness is observed when working with these components or
component damage can occur. Always install plugs to any open orifices or tubes.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools. The use of tools may cause a deformity in the clip components
which may cause fuel leaks.
1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. For
additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Depress the legs of the retainer clip and position the clip in an outward position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 3264
4. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube.
Connect - Type V
1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and quick connect coupling O-ring seals.
Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated.
2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip is fully seated and locked onto the tube by pulling on the
quick connect coupling.
Press the retainer clip into the quick connect coupling body until flush and the legs are locked in
place.
3. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure
difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies
between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts
corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the
output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after
several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is
energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome
light does not affect the FP module control.
The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail
pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and
pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with
the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control
system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump.
Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is
de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi)
lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if
the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379
kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3269
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Key ON Engine OFF (KOEO)...............................................................................................................
.........................................................379 kPa (55 psi)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3274
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
Fuel System Pressure Test
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
All vehicles
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel System Pressure
Release See: Fuel Filter/Fuel Pressure Release/Service
and Repair.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Vehicles with 2.5L engine
3. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
4. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel rail.
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
5. Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Quick Connect Coupling See: Fuel Line
Coupler/Service and Repair/Quick Connect Coupling.
6. Install the Fuel Pressure Test Kit between the fuel jumper tube and the fuel tube.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure >
System Information > Specifications > Page 3275
All vehicles
7. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module fuse was removed previously to release the fuel system
pressure and must be installed to test the fuel system
pressure.
Install the FP module fuse.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system.
Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before
starting the engine.
10. NOTE: When the fuel system pressure test is completed, open the drain valve on the Fuel
Pressure Test Kit and release fuel system pressure and
drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool.
Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. For additional
information, refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3279
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3280
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control
Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3281
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail
Fuel Rail
Removal
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Clean all fuel residue from the engine compartment. If not removed, fuel residue may
ignite when the engine is returned to operation. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer
to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
4. Disconnect the 4 fuel injector electrical connectors.
5. Remove the nut and position the radio capacitor aside.
6. Detach the 2 pin-type wire harness retainers from the fuel rail.
7. Remove the 2 fuel rail stud bolts.
8. Remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
9. Remove the 4 fuel injector retainer clips and the 4 fuel injectors.
- Remove and discard the 8 fuel injector O-ring seals.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary
O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do
not reuse the O-ring seals.
NOTE: Install 8 new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil.
Install the 4 fuel injectors and the 4 retainer clips on the fuel rail.
2. Install the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly.
3. Install the 2 fuel rail stud bolts.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Attach the 2 pin-type wire harness retainers to the fuel rail.
5. Position the radio capacitor and install the nut.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3286
6. Connect the 4 fuel injector electrical connectors.
7. Connect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer
to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
8. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3287
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View
Fuel Rail and Fuel Injector - Exploded View
Fuel Rail
Fuel Injector
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Fuel Rail > Page 3288
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3293
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3294
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3295
Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair Fuel Lines
Fuel Lines
2.5L
3.0L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3296
Hybrid
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3297
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
All vehicles
1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Hybrid vehicles
4. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure.
When disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes,
carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container.
Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube spring lock coupling.
2.5L and 3.0L vehicles
5. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure.
When disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes,
carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container.
Disconnect the fuel jumper tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling.
All vehicles
6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-vapor tube quick connect coupling. For additional information,
refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3298
7. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
8. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
9. Disconnect the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister purge tube-to-vapor tube quick connect
coupling. For additional information, refer to Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction.
10. Release the fuel tube bundle retainer clips and remove the fuel supply and vapor tubes.
11. Disconnect the fresh air tube from the EVAP canister.
12. Release the 3 pin-type retainer clips and remove the fresh air tube.
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3304
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3305
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3306
Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 3.0L have an anti-siphon grate incorporated in the fuel tank filler
pipe assembly.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
5. Remove the information bezel.
6. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
7. Remove the LR wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
8. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
9. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tank filler pipe. Carefully drain into a suitable
container.
Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
10. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube and insulator from the frame rail.
11. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe assembly.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the
FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP
module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve
located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A
flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the
fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3311
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3314
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3315
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3316
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 3317
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams
Fuel Tank Unit: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3321
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the
FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP
module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve
located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A
flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the
fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 3324
Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Idle Air Control (IAC) Valve
NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned.
The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC
valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve
assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals
the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the
IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or
decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM.
The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: no touch start
- cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up
- idle (corrects for engine load)
- stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function)
- over-temperature idle boost
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3334
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3335
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3336
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is
retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum
shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch
is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle.
Typical IFS Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 3337
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Intake Air System Components - Exploded View
Air Cleaner Assembly, Intake Pipe and Outlet Pipe
Intake Air Resonator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3342
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3343
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Air Cleaner Intake Pipe
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Remove the bolt and the Air Cleaner (ACL) intake pipe.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Intake Air System Components - Exploded View > Page 3344
Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe
Air Cleaner Outlet Pipe
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube from the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe.
2. If equipped, disconnect the vacuum tube from the ACL outlet pipe.
3. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector and the wiring harness retainer.
4. Loosen the 2 clamps and remove the ACL outlet pipe.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
5. NOTE: The ACL outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering
the engine.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3348
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel
System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3349
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3354
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3355
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 3356
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Service and Repair
Fuel Pump Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The Fuel Pump (FP) control module is located near the left rear side of the fuel tank.
Disconnect the FP control module electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the fasteners or damage will occur.
Remove the 2 bolts and the FP control module.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3360
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery
and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 3361
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Resonator, Intake Air > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Resonator: Service and Repair
Intake Air Resonator
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the LF wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
3. Remove the 9 fasteners and position aside the LH fender splash shield.
4. Remove the bolt and the air intake resonator.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. NOTE: Make sure that the front rubber grommet is seated in the bracket.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3369
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3370
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor
The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and used to determine the
amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application, either a 2-track or
3-track APP sensor is used.
2-Track APP Sensor
There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP and APP2, have a positive
slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2
pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern.
The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the
other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2
reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins)
between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal
travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts,
which is the input to the torque based strategy. For additional information, refer to Torque Based
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Typical 2-Track APP Sensor
3-Track APP Sensor
There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP, has a negative slope (increasing
angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation, APP is used as the indication of
pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct
input even if one signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating
where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits
the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary
angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the
torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal
circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly.
Typical 3-Track APP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3374
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3375
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3376
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the
engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F)
above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to
maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then
outputs a signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required
fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in
determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift, and torque converter clutch
(TCC) scheduling.
The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner
assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated IAT sensor.
The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the
element may change the air flow calibration.
Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT
Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals
Typical MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3377
Typical Drop-in MAF Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3378
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail
Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
The FRP sensor is a diaphragm strain gauge device. The FRP sensor measures the pressure
difference between the fuel rail and atmospheric pressure. The FRP sensor nominal output varies
between 0.5 and 4.5 volts, with 0.5 volts corresponding to 0 MPa (0 psi) gauge and 4.5 volts
corresponding to 26 MPa (3771 psi) gauge. The sensor can read vacuums and may lower the
output voltage to slightly below 0.5 volts. This condition is normal and is usually the case after
several hours of cold soak before the vehicle dome light is turned on. The fuel pump (FP) module is
energized at the same time the dome light is commanded on. A disabled or malfunctioning dome
light does not affect the FP module control.
The FRP sensor is located on the fuel rail, and provides a feedback signal to indicate the fuel rail
pressure to the PCM. The PCM uses the FRP signal to command the correct injector timing and
pulse width for proper fuel delivery at all speed and load conditions. The FRP sensor, along with
the fuel volume regulator (part of the fuel injection pump), form a closed loop fuel pressure control
system. An electrically faulted FRP sensor results in the deactivation of the fuel injection pump.
Fuel pressure to injectors is then provided only by the FP module. When the fuel injection pump is
de-energized and the injectors are active, the fuel rail pressure is approximately 70 kPa (10 psi)
lower than FP module pressure due to the pressure drop across the fuel injection pump. Thus, if
the FP module pressure is 448 kPa (65 psi), then the fuel rail pressure would be approximately 379
kPa (55 psi) if the injectors are active.
Fuel Rail Pressure (FRP) Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Rail
Pressure (FRP) Sensor > Page 3383
Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor
The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends
these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to
determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship
between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel
vapor in the fuel rail.
The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance
changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature
increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance
changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM
corresponding to temperature.
Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The
speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The
dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the
injector pulse width to decrease.
Typical FRPT Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3390
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3391
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3392
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Inertia Fuel Shut-off (IFS) Switch
The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is
to shut off the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of an inverted pendulum mass that is
retained in a conical cone via a set of linear springs. When a sharp impact occurs, the pendulum
shifts out of the conical cone, opens the circuit and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch
is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle.
Typical IFS Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3393
Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair
Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch
1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel.
2. Disconnect the Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic
Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic
Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page 3398
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3407
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
Throttle Body: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122
TSB 09-23-5
11/30/09
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) ON WITH DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC)
P2135 - BUILT BETWEEN 6/22/2009-10/15/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid, 2010 Fusion, Milan,
Fusion Hybrid, and Milan Hybrid vehicles, built on or between 6/22/2009 - 10/15/2009, may exhibit
a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) or wrench light with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P2135. DTCs
P2111 and/or P0122 may also be present. Drivability symptoms may include intermittent rough
idle, idle speed below specification and/or reduced power. This concern may be attributed to
Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) hardware. If the vehicle only exhibits DTCs P2111 or P0122 follow
normal Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test (PPT) diagnostics.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check for DTCs and confirm vehicle build date. Is DTC P2135 present and vehicle built on or
between 6/22/2009-10/15/2009?
a. Yes - proceed to Step 2.
b. No - Procedure does not apply. Refer to PC/ED PPT DV for appropriate diagnostic routines.
2. Replace the ETB per the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 303-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092305A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Fusion 0.6 Hr.
Hybrid, Milan, Milan Hybrid 2.5L Engine: Replace The ETB, Includes Time To Check And Clear
Codes (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-23-5 > Nov > 09 > Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC P2135/P2111/P0122 > Page 3413
Other Operations)
092305A 2010 Fusion, Milan 3.0L 0.8 Hr.
Engine: Replace The ETB Includes Time To Check And Clear Codes (Do Not Use With Any Other
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
9E926 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Throttle Body: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments
- Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3424
Throttle Body: Service and Repair
Throttle Body
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2. Disconnect the electrical throttle control electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Discard the Throttle Body (TB) gasket.
Remove the 4 bolts and the TB.
- Install a new TB gasket.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position
Sensor (ETBTPS)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS)
The ETBTPS has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETBTPS signals
are required for increased monitoring. The first ETBTPS signal (TPS1-NS) has a negative slope
(increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TPS2-PS) has a positive slope
(increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETBTPS signals make sure the PCM receives a
correct input even if one signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal
return circuit for the sensor that are shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return
circuits used by the APP sensor. For additional information, refer to Torque Based Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC). See: Computers and Control Systems/Electronic Throttle Control
Module/Description and Operation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Electronic Throttle Body Throttle Position Sensor (ETBTPS) > Page
3429
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Throttle Position (TP) Sensor
The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly
proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical
connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the
terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body.
As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM
from the TP. These are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration)
- part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration)
- wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank)
- throttle angle rate
Typical TP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System >
Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation
Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Intake Manifold Tuning Valve (IMTV)
WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be
careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in personal injury.
The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator
controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with
this system to indicate shutter position.
The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below a calibrated RPM. The shutter is in the closed
position to prevent airflow blend from occurring in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is
energized above a calibrated RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM initially at a
100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to approximately
50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Firing Order
Firing Order: Specifications Firing Order
Firing Order..........................................................................................................................................
.........................................................................1-3-4-2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information >
Specifications > Firing Order > Page 3439
Firing Order: Specifications Engine Cylinder Identification
Engine Cylinder Identification
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3444
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3445
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3448
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3449
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3450
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 3451
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3455
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3456
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3457
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3458
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3459
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3460
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3461
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3462
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Page 3463
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1
Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3468
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3469
Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3470
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3471
Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 3
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3472
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3473
Ignition Coil: Diagrams Coil On Plug (COP) 4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3474
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3475
Ignition Coil: Diagrams Ignition Transformer Capacitor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams
> Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3476
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP)
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil On Plug (COP)
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Coil On Plug (COP)
The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has 1 coil per
plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure
mode effects management (FMEM). For additional information, refer to Ignition Systems. See:
Description and Operation/Ignition Systems
Typical Coil On Plug (COP)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Coil On Plug (COP) > Page 3479
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil Pack
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Coil Pack
The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed,
voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil.
The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the
secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as 1 spark
plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next
time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine
firing order.
Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and 6-tower series 5 models. Two adjacent coil
towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder)
applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder)
applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4 and 2 and 3.
When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their
respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires
on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil
is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing
order.
Typical 4-Tower Coil Pack
Typical 6-Tower Coil Pack
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3482
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Ignition Coil-On-Plug
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 4 ignition coil electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and
ease removal.
Remove the 4 bolts and the ignition coils.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Inspect the coil seals for rips, nicks or tears. Remove and discard any damaged coil seals.
- To install, slide the new coil seal onto the coil until fully seated at the top of the coil.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to
the spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3487
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3488
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3491
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3492
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3493
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3494
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3495
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 3496
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3502
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Camshaft Position Sensor 1 > Page 3503
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3506
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Camshaft Position Sensor > Page 3507
Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams Camshaft Position Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3508
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston
number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing
the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP
signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire.
Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). The second
sensor is used to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2.
There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 2-pin variable reluctance type sensor and the 3-pin
Hall-effect type sensor.
Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor
Typical Hall-effect CMP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3509
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor electrical connector.
2. Remove the bolt and the CMP sensor.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
- Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary.
3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3514
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3515
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3516
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3517
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3518
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel
located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the
primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced
10 degrees apart with 1 empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39
teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the
pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the
PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order
to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the
crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the
CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth.
Typical CKP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3519
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3520
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise until the hole in the crankshaft pulley is in the 3 o'clock position.
4. Remove the engine plug bolt.
5. NOTE: When the crankshaft contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg, the No. 1 cylinder will be
at Top Dead Center (TDC).
Install the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg and turn the crankshaft clockwise until the crankshaft
contacts the Crankshaft TDC Timing Peg.
6. Disconnect the Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor electrical connector.
7. Remove the bolts and the CKP sensor.
Installation
1. NOTICE: Only hand-tighten the bolt or damage to the front cover can occur.
Install a 6 mm x 18 mm bolt through the crankshaft pulley and thread it into the front cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System >
Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3521
2. Install the CKP sensor and the 2 bolts.
- Do not tighten the bolts at this time.
3. Adjust the CKP sensor with the Crankshaft Sensor Aligner.
- Tighten the 2 bolts to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Connect the CKP sensor electrical connector.
5. Remove the 6 mm x 18 mm bolt from the crankshaft pulley.
6. Install the engine plug bolt.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
7. Install the RH splash shield, 5 bolts and the pin-type retainer (not shown).
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. Using the scan tool, perform the Misfire Monitor Neutral Profile Correction procedure, following
the on-screen instructions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3531
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page
3537
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition
Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3538
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to
Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3543
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3544
Knock Sensor: Locations Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3547
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3548
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3549
Knock Sensor: Diagrams Knock Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Knock Sensor 1 > Page 3550
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3551
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Knock Sensor (KS)
The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical
signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark
timing.
Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3552
Knock Sensor: Service and Repair
Knock Sensor (KS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the intake manifold. For additional information, refer to Engine.
3. Remove the bolt and the Knock Sensor (KS).
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap
Spark Plug: Specifications Gap
Spark Plug gap.....................................................................................................................................
....................................1.25-1.35 mm (0.049-0.053 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Gap > Page 3557
Spark Plug: Specifications Torque Specifications
Spark plugs...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................12 Nm (106 lb-in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3558
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark plug............................................................................................................................................
.............................................................AYSF-32-YPC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3559
Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap.
- Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or
carbon fouling.
- Install a new spark plug.
2. Check for oil fouling.
- Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil
entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide
clearance or worn or loose bearings.
- Correct the oil leak concern.
- Install a new spark plug.
3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips,
exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a
spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling.
Install new spark plugs.
4. Inspect for normal burning.
- Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip.
5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator.
Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine
damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized
installation of a heli-coil insert in place of the spark plug threads. Install a new spark plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 3560
6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and a bluish-burnt appearance of
electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating,
wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump
pressure or incorrect ignition timing. Install a new spark plug.
7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters.
These are caused by sudden acceleration.
- Install new spark plugs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Engine Ignition Components - Exploded View > Page 3563
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Spark Plugs
Spark Plugs
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the ignition coils. For additional information, refer to Ignition Coil-On-Plug See: Ignition
Coil/Service and Repair/Ignition Coil-On-Plug.
2. NOTICE: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur
to the cylinder head or spark plug.
NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well prior to removing
the spark plugs.
Remove the spark plugs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. Inspect the spark plugs. For additional information, refer to Engine.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3570
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3573
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3574
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3575
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3576
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3577
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3578
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3579
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3580
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3581
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3582
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body
Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3583
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3584
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3585
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3586
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3587
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3588
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3589
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3590
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve
Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3591
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3592
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3593
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3594
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 3598
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3601
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3602
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3603
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3604
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3605
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3606
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3607
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3608
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3609
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3610
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body
Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3611
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3612
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3613
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3614
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3615
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3616
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3617
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3618
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve
Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3619
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3620
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3621
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3622
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3626
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3629
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3630
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3631
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3632
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3633
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3634
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3635
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3636
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3637
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3638
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body
Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3639
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3640
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3641
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3642
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3643
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3644
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3645
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3646
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve
Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3647
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3648
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3649
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3650
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
Transfer Case Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3655
Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Page 3656
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations
Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3667
Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission
and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information >
Locations > Page 3668
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 3675
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive.
Typical Stalk Mounted TCS
Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3682
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3683
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3684
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3685
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3686
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3687
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 3688
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 3693
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3694
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3695
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3698
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3699
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3700
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and
Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly,
continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3701
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3702
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3703
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3704
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability
Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3717
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3718
If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul
is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the
repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires
October 31, 2010.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no
expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be
excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to
transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body.
RENTAL VEHICLES
In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission
repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for
fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency
order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to
guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special
Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for
part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter
the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense
area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts.
Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous
Expense area.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage
limit for this program.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3719
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Note:
Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts.
To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order
line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message
when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels.
When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide
Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3720
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The
function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the
solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts.
Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may
eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This
service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the
solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you
to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MODULE REPROGRAMMING
NOTE:
Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following:
^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected.
^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode.
^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection.
^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop.
^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended).
If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session
has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in
the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram.
1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off.
2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3721
3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session.
4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick.
5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick.
6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to
software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and
higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed.
A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions
to program the PCM to the latest calibration.
7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage:
^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is
complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle
and proceed to Step 8.
TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST
WARNING:
Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of
vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature
(TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C).
Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating
temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the
following:
^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine.
^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C).
9. Perform the Transmission Load Test:
NOTE:
Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and
transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct.
1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes.
2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped
3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm.
4. Place the gear selector in D.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3722
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get
to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the
TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While
performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2.
After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool
the torque converter.
10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service
procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load
Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair.
Table of Contents
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
Pan and Tool Requirements
Transaxle Removal
Transaxle Disassembly
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly
Filter Removal and Replacement
Transaxle Assembly
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
Part and Tool Requirements
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch
packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3723
PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows:
^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent
^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566
^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091
^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1
^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2
^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent
^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635
^ Suitable Depth Gauge
Transaxle Removal
1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM
Section 307.
Transaxle Disassembly
If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a
complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool
found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website.
If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the
repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A
code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle.
If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make
sure to select FSA on the main menu.
1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle.
2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding
fixture.
3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566.
4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091.
5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result.
Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle.
6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3724
Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1.
7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
electrical connectors. See Figure 2.
8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3.
9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3725
Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4.
10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle
case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3726
12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6.
13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7.
14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly.
Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts.
15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case.
16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3727
17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8.
18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9.
19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear.
20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3728
21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11.
22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain.
23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12.
24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3729
25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14.
26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15.
27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16.
28. Remove the park pawl.
29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring
goes up (flat side down).
NOTE:
The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3730
Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17.
30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring.
31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18.
32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3731
33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20.
1. No 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21.
35. Remove the center planetary sun gear.
36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3732
38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24.
39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25.
40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26.
41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell
assembly.
Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch
from the assembly. See Figure 27.
42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring.
43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28.
44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the
No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch
assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3733
Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29.
46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30.
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3734
1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See
Figure 31.
2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate
from the new main control valve body.
3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts.
See Figure 32.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3735
2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33.
3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33.
4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33.
5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on
the balance piston.
6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See
Figure 34.
7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3736
8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35.
9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36.
10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37.
11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3737
12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch
piston. See Figure 38.
13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case.
14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch
assembly. See Figure 39.
15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3738
16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 40.
17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 41.
18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place.
19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct
clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42.
20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3739
21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See
Figure 43.
22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412
on the balance piston.
23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See
Figure 44.
24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor #
307-584/2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3740
25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45.
26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46.
27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47.
28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack.
29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate.
30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3741
31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator
and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air
pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial
Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the
clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48.
32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and
the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing.
Filter Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3742
2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and
filter assembly. See Figure 50.
3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump.
See Figure 51.
4. Remove the magnet from the filter.
5. Install the magnet on the filter.
6. Install the filter.
A. Position the filter on the pump.
B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees.
7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts.
See Figure 52.
A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3743
B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Transaxle Assembly
1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the
main control cover sealing surface.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to
the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53.
3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage
to the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54.
5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3744
6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55.
7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56.
8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and
steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement.
9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3745
10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3
different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3746
11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the transaxle case step above the
intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58.
12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm
(0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out
of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack.
13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top.
Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates
back in the transaxle case.
14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly.
15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly.
16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center
support, the long support legs must fit through the
low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC.
Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure
plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59.
17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60.
18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case,
temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel
plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3747
19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long
support legs. See Figure 61.
20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch
piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3748
21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record
this as measurement B. See Figure 63.
22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C.
23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as
measurement D. See Figure 64.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3749
25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different
points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65.
26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F.
27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The
clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and
2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct
installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to
replace the low/reverse clutch pack.
28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top.
Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back
in the transaxle case.
29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down
and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle
case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3750
Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned
with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66.
1. Long center support legs face down.
2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case.
30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68.
32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3751
33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69.
1. No. 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70.
35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70
36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure
71.
37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack.
38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate.
NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing
down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3752
Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing
the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring.
2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap.
40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3753
41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the
transaxle case and position the plunger on the top
forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74.
42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the
transaxle case. See Figure 75.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3754
43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while
recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator.
The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is
out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for
correct assembly. See Figure 76.
44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77.
46. Install the park pawl.
47. Install the park pawl pin and spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3755
48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78.
49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place.
50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole.
51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79.
53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the
driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case.
54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3756
55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81.
56. Install the differential planetary sun gear.
57. Install the differential assembly.
58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82.
59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft.
60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface.
61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing
are free of oil before applying silicone.
Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly.
Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle
case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3757
1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft)
2. Stud bolt location
63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635.
64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case.
See Figure 84.
1. Bypass valve.
2. Bypass valve sleeve
66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85.
67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide
pin.
68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual
valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3758
Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install
the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86.
69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87.
70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3759
71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing
up.
Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal.
73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the
transaxle case.
76. Position the main control cover in place.
77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during
disassembly.
Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
1. Bolt location
2. Stud bolt location
78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using
the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the
torque converter.
79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091.
80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566.
81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625.
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307.
2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3760
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability >
Page 3761
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In
5th Gear/DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In
5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh
Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability
Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3784
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3785
If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul
is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the
repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires
October 31, 2010.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no
expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be
excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to
transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body.
RENTAL VEHICLES
In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission
repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for
fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency
order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to
guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special
Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for
part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter
the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense
area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts.
Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous
Expense area.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage
limit for this program.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3786
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Note:
Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts.
To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order
line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message
when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels.
When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide
Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3787
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The
function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the
solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts.
Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may
eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This
service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the
solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you
to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MODULE REPROGRAMMING
NOTE:
Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following:
^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected.
^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode.
^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection.
^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop.
^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended).
If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session
has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in
the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram.
1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off.
2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3788
3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session.
4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick.
5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick.
6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to
software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and
higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed.
A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions
to program the PCM to the latest calibration.
7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage:
^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is
complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle
and proceed to Step 8.
TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST
WARNING:
Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of
vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature
(TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C).
Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating
temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the
following:
^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine.
^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C).
9. Perform the Transmission Load Test:
NOTE:
Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and
transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct.
1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes.
2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped
3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm.
4. Place the gear selector in D.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3789
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get
to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the
TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While
performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2.
After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool
the torque converter.
10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service
procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load
Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair.
Table of Contents
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
Pan and Tool Requirements
Transaxle Removal
Transaxle Disassembly
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly
Filter Removal and Replacement
Transaxle Assembly
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
Part and Tool Requirements
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch
packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3790
PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows:
^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent
^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566
^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091
^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1
^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2
^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent
^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635
^ Suitable Depth Gauge
Transaxle Removal
1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM
Section 307.
Transaxle Disassembly
If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a
complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool
found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website.
If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the
repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A
code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle.
If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make
sure to select FSA on the main menu.
1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle.
2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding
fixture.
3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566.
4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091.
5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result.
Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle.
6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3791
Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1.
7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
electrical connectors. See Figure 2.
8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3.
9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3792
Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4.
10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle
case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3793
12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6.
13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7.
14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly.
Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts.
15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case.
16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3794
17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8.
18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9.
19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear.
20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3795
21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11.
22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain.
23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12.
24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3796
25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14.
26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15.
27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16.
28. Remove the park pawl.
29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring
goes up (flat side down).
NOTE:
The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3797
Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17.
30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring.
31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18.
32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3798
33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20.
1. No 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21.
35. Remove the center planetary sun gear.
36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3799
38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24.
39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25.
40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26.
41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell
assembly.
Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch
from the assembly. See Figure 27.
42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring.
43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28.
44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the
No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch
assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3800
Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29.
46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30.
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3801
1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See
Figure 31.
2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate
from the new main control valve body.
3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts.
See Figure 32.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3802
2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33.
3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33.
4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33.
5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on
the balance piston.
6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See
Figure 34.
7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3803
8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35.
9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36.
10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37.
11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3804
12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch
piston. See Figure 38.
13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case.
14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch
assembly. See Figure 39.
15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3805
16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 40.
17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 41.
18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place.
19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct
clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42.
20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3806
21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See
Figure 43.
22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412
on the balance piston.
23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See
Figure 44.
24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor #
307-584/2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3807
25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45.
26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46.
27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47.
28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack.
29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate.
30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3808
31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator
and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air
pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial
Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the
clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48.
32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and
the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing.
Filter Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3809
2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and
filter assembly. See Figure 50.
3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump.
See Figure 51.
4. Remove the magnet from the filter.
5. Install the magnet on the filter.
6. Install the filter.
A. Position the filter on the pump.
B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees.
7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts.
See Figure 52.
A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3810
B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Transaxle Assembly
1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the
main control cover sealing surface.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to
the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53.
3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage
to the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54.
5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3811
6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55.
7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56.
8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and
steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement.
9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3812
10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3
different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3813
11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the transaxle case step above the
intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58.
12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm
(0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out
of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack.
13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top.
Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates
back in the transaxle case.
14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly.
15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly.
16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center
support, the long support legs must fit through the
low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC.
Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure
plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59.
17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60.
18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case,
temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel
plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3814
19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long
support legs. See Figure 61.
20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch
piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3815
21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record
this as measurement B. See Figure 63.
22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C.
23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as
measurement D. See Figure 64.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3816
25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different
points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65.
26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F.
27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The
clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and
2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct
installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to
replace the low/reverse clutch pack.
28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top.
Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back
in the transaxle case.
29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down
and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle
case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3817
Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned
with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66.
1. Long center support legs face down.
2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case.
30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68.
32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3818
33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69.
1. No. 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70.
35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70
36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure
71.
37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack.
38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate.
NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing
down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3819
Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing
the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring.
2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap.
40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3820
41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the
transaxle case and position the plunger on the top
forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74.
42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the
transaxle case. See Figure 75.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3821
43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while
recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator.
The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is
out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for
correct assembly. See Figure 76.
44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77.
46. Install the park pawl.
47. Install the park pawl pin and spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3822
48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78.
49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place.
50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole.
51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79.
53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the
driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case.
54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3823
55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81.
56. Install the differential planetary sun gear.
57. Install the differential assembly.
58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82.
59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft.
60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface.
61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing
are free of oil before applying silicone.
Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly.
Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle
case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3824
1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft)
2. Stud bolt location
63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635.
64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case.
See Figure 84.
1. Bypass valve.
2. Bypass valve sleeve
66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85.
67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide
pin.
68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual
valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3825
Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install
the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86.
69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87.
70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3826
71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing
up.
Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal.
73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the
transaxle case.
76. Position the main control cover in place.
77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during
disassembly.
Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
1. Bolt location
2. Stud bolt location
78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using
the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the
torque converter.
79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091.
80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566.
81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625.
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307.
2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3827
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3828
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh
Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability
Technical Service Bulletin # 10B15 Date: 100419
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3843
Attachment I - Administrative Information
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on April 19, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by April 19, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 31, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service
action.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this service action.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this service action performed on a timely basis.
NOTE:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3844
If the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that complete transmission overhaul
is necessary, dealers must perform a Cost Cap Analysis using the Cost Cap Tool found on the
Professional Technician Society (PTS) Website.
ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME
^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the repair, call the Special Service
Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval
after completion of the repair will not be granted.
^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the
repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center.
OWNER REFUNDS
^ Ford Motor Company is offering a refund for owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the
repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter. This refund offer expires
October 31, 2010.
^ Dealers are also authorized to refund owner-paid emergency repairs that were performed away
from an authorized servicing dealer after the date of the Owner Notification Letter. There is no
expiration date for emergency repair refunds. Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be
excessive, will not be reimbursed.
^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with low regulated fluid pressure to
transmission clutches (burnt or slipping) and/or replacement of the transmission valve body.
RENTAL VEHICLES
In most cases, a rental vehicle will not be required. If a customer's vehicle requires a transmission
repair and it is necessary to order parts, Ford will pay for up to two days of vehicle rental except for
fuel and insurance which will be at the owner's expense. The parts order must be an emergency
order (unit down) if the order is placed between 3:00 PM and 7:00 PM (your local time zone) to
guarantee next day delivery. Prior approval for additional rental days is required from the Special
Service Support Center. Rentals should be provided only while the vehicle is at the dealership for
part replacement. Follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for rental dollar amounts. Enter
the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous Expense
area of the recall claim form.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
"MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center.
^ Refund Claiming Information (Submit on separate repair line.)
- Program Code: 10B15 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN
- Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs.
^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair
should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit,
the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines.
^ For rental vehicle claiming, follow Extended Service Plan (ESP) guidelines for dollar amounts.
Enter the word "RENTAL" plus the number of days the vehicle was used in the Miscellaneous
Expense area.
^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through April 30, 2011. There is no mileage
limit for this program.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3845
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Note:
Less than 2% of the affected vehicles are expected to require parts.
To manage part availability, dealers must contact the Special Service Support Center parts order
line (except for transmission fluid and silicone sealant). Dealers will receive a DOES II message
when part requirements can be ordered through normal order processing channels.
When calling to place an order for any of the parts in the chart below please be prepared to provide
Dealer P&A; Code, VIN, and Mileage.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3846
In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission solenoid regulator valve bore may wear. The
function of a solenoid regulator is to provide regulated pressure to shift solenoids. Wear in the
solenoid regulator bore causes low clutch pressure and results in transmission slips/harsh shifts.
Continued driving with this condition may cause premature wear on the clutches. This may
eventually lead to a loss of 4th through 6th gears and ultimately loss of transmission function. This
service action will reprogram the PCM to the latest calibration. This calibration will reposition the
solenoid regulator valve to eliminate bore wear. A flowchart has been developed to help direct you
to the proper repair. See Figure 1.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
MODULE REPROGRAMMING
NOTE:
Reprogramming concerns! errors may be caused by the following:
^ Data Link Connector (DLC) or Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) becoming disconnected.
^ Allowing the IDS to enter any type of sleep mode.
^ Using a wireless IDS to VCM connection.
^ Low voltage on the IDS laptop.
^ Low voltage in the vehicle battery (use of a battery charger is recommended).
If you encounter reprogramming concerns, DO NOT DELETE the session. If the original session
has accidentally been deleted, recover the original session from the IDS "TRASH CAN" (located in
the lower right corner of the previous session screen) and continue to reprogram.
1. Make sure that all accessories (radio, interior fan, headlights, etc.) are switched off.
2. Verify that the IDS is updated to software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and higher.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3847
3. Connect the IDS to the vehicle and start a session.
4. Select the Tool Box tab and then select Module Programming. Touch the tick.
5. Select Module Reprogramming and then select PCM. Touch the tick.
6. NOTE: If the IDS states there are no updates available, either the IDS has not been updated to
software release 65.17 and higher or 66.03A and
higher, or the PCM has already been reprogrammed.
A screen will appear stating a later PCM calibration is available. Follow the on-screen instructions
to program the PCM to the latest calibration.
7. After the PCM has been reprogrammed, inspect the vehicle's odometer for mileage:
^ If the mileage is LESS THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), remove the IDS. This service procedure is
complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
^ If the mileage is MORE THAN 7,000 miles (11,265 km), leave the IDS connected to the vehicle
and proceed to Step 8.
TRANSMISSION LOAD TEST
WARNING:
Block all wheels, set the parking brake and firmly apply the service brake to reduce the risk of
vehicle movement during this procedure Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
8. NOTE: In order to perform a valid Transmission Load Test, Transmission Fluid Temperature
(TFT) must be between 185-200° F (85-93° C).
Using the IDS, make sure the Transmission Fluid Temperature (TFT) is at an operating
temperature of 185-200° F (85-93° C). If the TFT is BELOW 185-200° F (85-93° C), perform the
following:
^ With the vehicle's brakes applied, start the engine.
^ Place the gear selector in D, bring the engine up to 1500 rpm and hold for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in R and bring the engine up to 1500 rpm for one minute.
^ Place the gear selector in N and allow the engine to idle for one minute.
^ Repeat this procedure until the vehicle's TFT is 185-200° F (85-93° C).
9. Perform the Transmission Load Test:
NOTE:
Conduct this test after the PCM has been reprogrammed. Make sure that the engine coolant and
transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature and fluid levels are correct.
1. Block all wheels, set the parking brake, and firmly apply the service brakes.
2. Turn off Traction Control if equipped
3. Set the IDS to record engine rpm and TSS_SRC rpm.
4. Place the gear selector in D.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3848
5. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor and hold the pedal just long enough to let the engine get
to Wide Open Throttle (WOT) and observe the
TSS_SRC rpm (it should be at ZERO when engine speed has reached maximum rpm). While
performing this test, do not hold the throttle open for more than 5 seconds. See Figure 2.
After the test, place the gear selector in N and run the engine at 1,000 rpm for 15 seconds to cool
the torque converter.
10. If the TSS_SRC rpm was ZERO during the Transmission Load Test, then this service
procedure is complete and no additional repairs are necessary.
If the TSS_SRC rpm was MORE than ZERO (transmission slipping) during the Transmission Load
Test, then proceed to Attachment IV for transmission repair.
Table of Contents
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
Pan and Tool Requirements
Transaxle Removal
Transaxle Disassembly
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4, 5, 6) Disassembly and Assembly
Filter Removal and Replacement
Transaxle Assembly
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
Part and Tool Requirements
TRANSMISSION REPAIR PROCEDURE
This transmission repair procedure involves installing a new transmission valve body and clutch
packs in the Overdrive/Direct (O/D) and forward clutch assemblies.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3849
PART AND TOOL REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Special tools that are needed for this portion of the service procedure are as follows:
^ Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 or equivalent
^ Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566
^ Torque Converter Handle # 307-091
^ Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Drive Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1
^ Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307-584/2
^ Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002 or equivalent
^ Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
^ Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635
^ Suitable Depth Gauge
Transaxle Removal
1. Remove the transaxle from the vehicle For additional information refer to the appropriate WSM
Section 307.
Transaxle Disassembly
If the technician determines that the transmission is contaminated and damaged to the point that a
complete overhaul is necessary, dealers must perform a cost cap analysis using the cost cap tool
found on the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website.
If the cost cap tool states "Repair", contact the Special Service Support Center (SSSC) with the
repair estimate (parts and labor at warranty prices) Be prepared to provide the dealership's P/A
code and have the repair order, which contains the VIN and mileage of the vehicle.
If the cost cap tool states "Replace" continue with the Transmission Prior Approval request, make
sure to select FSA on the main menu.
1. Install the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 onto the transaxle.
2. Using the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625 install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding
fixture.
3. Remove the Torque Converter Retainer # 307-566.
4. Install the Torque Converter Handle # 307-091.
5. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result.
Using Torque Converter Handle #307-091,remove the torque converter from the transaxle.
6. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3850
Remove the 13 bolts and the main control cover. See Figure 1.
7. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the Transmission Range (TR) sensor
electrical connectors. See Figure 2.
8. Remove and discard the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal. See Figure 3.
9. NOTE: Record the location of the short and long main control Torx(R) bolts for reassembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3851
Remove the nut and the 22 Torx(R) bolts and remove the main control assembly. See Figure 4.
10. Remove and discard the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
11. Remove and discard the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch and low/reverse clutch transaxle
case-to-center support seals. See Figure 5.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
2. Low/reverse clutch transaxle case-to-center support seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3852
12. Remove the internal cooler bypass spring, sleeve and valve. See Figure 6.
13. Remove the bolt and the 055 sensor. See Figure 7.
14. NOTE: Record the location of the stud bolt for assembly.
Remove the 17 torque converter housing bolts.
15. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case.
16. Remove the loose torque converter housing from the transaxle case
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3853
17. Remove the No 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 8.
18. Remove the differential. See Figure 9.
19. Remove the differential planetary sun gear.
20. Remove the No. 13 thrust washer. See Figure 10.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3854
21. Remove the No 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 11.
22. Simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and the chain.
23. Remove the No 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 12.
24. Remove the No 10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 13.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3855
25. Remove the 2 bolts and the lube funnel hold down bracket. See Figure 14.
26. Remove the transmission fluid baffle. See Figure 15.
27. Remove the park pawl pin and spring. See Figure 16.
28. Remove the park pawl.
29. NOTE: The forward (1 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring is beveled. The beveled side of the snap ring
goes up (flat side down).
NOTE:
The forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap faces the front of the transmission.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3856
Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring. See Figure 17.
30. Remove the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate, clutch pack, and wave spring.
31. Remove the front sun gear and shell assembly See Figure 18.
32. Remove the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 19.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3857
33. Remove the No 7 and No 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 20.
1. No 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Remove the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 21.
35. Remove the center planetary sun gear.
36. Remove the No 5 and No 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 22.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
37. Remove the center support assembly. See Figure 23.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3858
38. Remove the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly See Figure 24.
39. Remove the low/reverse wave spring, clutch pack and pressure plate. See Figure 25.
40. Remove the low One-Way Clutch (OWC). See Figure 26.
41. NOTE: The intermediate (2, 6) clutch is removed with the rear planetary sun gear and shell
assembly.
Remove the rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly and remove the intermediate (2, 6) clutch
from the assembly. See Figure 27.
42. Remove the pressure plate and the wave spring.
43. Remove the No 3 thrust bearing. See Figure 28.
44. Remove the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
45. NOTE: If the No. 1 thrust bearing is stuck to the overdrive/direct clutch assembly remove the
No. 1 thrust bearing from the overdrive/direct clutch
assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3859
Remove the No. 1 thrust bearing. See Figure 29.
46. Remove and discard the 5 clutch feed seals. See Figure 30.
Main Control Valve Body Replacement
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3860
1. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the main control valve body from the solenoid body. See
Figure 31.
2. Remove and discard the separator plate from the solenoid body. Install the new separator plate
from the new main control valve body.
3. Position the new main control valve body on the solenoid body assembly and install the 2 bolts.
See Figure 32.
^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Overdrive/Direct Clutch (4,5,6) Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the Overdrive (O/D) (4, 5, 6) clutch hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3861
2. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub, No 2 thrust bearing See Figure 33.
3. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring. See Figure 33.
4. Remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate and discard the clutch pack. See Figure 33.
5. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor 30758412 on
the balance piston.
6. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and remove the snap ring. See
Figure 34.
7. Remove the Overdrive Clutch Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307-589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 307584/2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3862
8. Remove and discard the balance piston See Figure 35.
9. Remove the O/D (4, 5 6) piston return spring. See Figure 36.
10. Install the No.1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 37.
11. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3863
12. Apply compressed air to the O/D (4 5, 6) clutch piston port and remove the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch
piston. See Figure 38.
13. Remove the O/D/direct clutch assembly from the transaxle case.
14. Remove and discard the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal from the O/D/direct clutch
assembly. See Figure 39.
15. Remove and discard the 2 seals from the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3864
16. Install 2 new seals on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston and lubricate the seals with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 40.
17. Install a new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston inner seal and lubricate the seal with petroleum jelly.
See Figure 41.
18. Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston in place.
19. Using the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston, and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911,install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston into the O/D/direct
clutch assembly by hand. See Figure 42.
20. NOTE: Position the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring with the holes facing upward Install
the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston return spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3865
21. Lubricate the seals on the new balance piston and position the balance piston in place. See
Figure 43.
22. Install the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 30758911 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor # 30758412
on the balance piston.
23. Using a press compress the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch return spring and install the snap ring. See
Figure 44.
24. Remove the Overdrive Clutch, Balance Piston and Direct Clutch Compressor # 307589/1 and
Forward/Intermediate Spring Compressor #
307-584/2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3866
25. Install the No 2 thrust bearing. See Figure 45.
26. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch hub. See Figure 46.
27. Soak the new O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 47.
28. Install the new O/D (4. 5, 6) clutch pack.
29. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate.
30. Install the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch snap ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3867
31. Position the O/D/direct clutch assembly in the transaxle case, install Dial Indicator Gauge with
Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator
and position the plunger on the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pressure plate. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air
pressure to the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch piston port while recording the clutch pack clearance on the Dial
Indicator. The clearance should be between 0.950 mm (0.037 in) and 1.778 mm (0.07 in). If the
clearance is out of range, check the O/D (4, 5, 6) clutch pack for correct installation. See Figure 48.
32. Remove Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100-002, O/D/direct clutch assembly and
the No. 1 O/D/direct clutch assembly thrust bearing.
Filter Removal and Replacement
1. Remove the 2 bolts and the oil baffle from the torque converter housing. See Figure 49.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3868
2. NOTE: Record the location of the 6mm bolt for assembly Remove the 9 bolts and the pump and
filter assembly. See Figure 50.
3. Remove filter from the pump. making note of the orientation of the fluid filter to the fluid pump.
See Figure 51.
4. Remove the magnet from the filter.
5. Install the magnet on the filter.
6. Install the filter.
A. Position the filter on the pump.
B. Rotate the filter counterclockwise 90 degrees.
7. Install the pump and filter assembly in the torque converter housing and install the pump bolts.
See Figure 52.
A. Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3869
B. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Install the transmission fluid baffle and the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Transaxle Assembly
1. Clean the silicone from the transaxle case-to-torque converter housing sealing surface and the
main control cover sealing surface.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up or damage to
the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 1 thrust bearing with the flat side facing up. See Figure 53.
3. Install the overdrive/direct clutch assembly.
4. NOTICE: Make sure to install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down or damage
to the transaxle can occur
Install the No. 3 thrust bearing with the flat side facing down. See Figure 54.
5. Install the direct/intermediate clutch hub and rear planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3870
6. Install the intermediate (2, 6) wave spring assembly. See Figure 55.
7. Soak the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly in clean transmission fluid See Figure 56.
8. Install the original intermediate (2, 6) clutch assembly, temporarily reversing the top friction and
steel plates for the clutch stack-up measurement.
9. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3871
10. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300
to the top of the intermediate (2, 6) clutch pack at 3
different points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement A. See Figure 57.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3872
11. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the transaxle case step above the
intermediate (2, 6) clutch Record this as measurement B. See Figure 58.
12. Subtract measurement B from measurement A. The clearance should be between 0.240 mm
(0009 in) and 260 mm (0.102 in). If the clearance is out
of range, check the intermediate (2,6) clutch pack for correct installation. If the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack is correctly installed, call the SSSC for authorization to replace the intermediate (2, 6)
clutch pack.
13. NOTE: When the intermediate (2, 6) clutch is correctly installed, a friction plate is on top.
Remove the top intermediate (2, 6) clutch friction and steel plate and correctly install the plates
back in the transaxle case.
14. Install the One-Way Clutch (OWC) assembly.
15. Install the rear planetary carrier/center ring gear assembly.
16. NOTE: The position of the low/reverse pressure plate is important. When installing the center
support, the long support legs must fit through the
low/reverse pressure plate and rest on the OWC.
Position the low/reverse pressure plate so that the center support legs fit through the pressure
plate and rest on the OWC and install the low/reverse pressure plate. See Figure 59.
17. Soak the original low/reverse clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure 60.
18. Align the low/reverse clutch pack with the pressure plate and install it in the transaxle case,
temporarily reversing the wave spring and top steel
plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3873
19. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the side of the center support with the long
support legs. See Figure 61.
20. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the contact surface of the low/reverse clutch
piston Record this as measurement A. See Figure 62.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3874
21. Using a suitable depth gauge, measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the leg surface of the center support Record
this as measurement B. See Figure 63.
22. Subtract measurement B from measurement A and record as measurement C.
23. Install the Shim Selection Gauge # 307-300 on the transaxle case.
24. Using a suitable depth micrometer measure the distance from the Shim Selection Gauge #
307-300 to the top of the OWC Record this as
measurement D. See Figure 64.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3875
25. Using a suitable depth gauge measure the distance from the top of Shim Selection Gauge #
307300 to the top of the low/reverse clutch at 3 different
points and average the 3 distances Record this as measurement E. See Figure 65.
26. Subtract measurement E from measurement D and record as measurement F.
27. Subtract measurement F from measurement C to get the low/reverse clutch clearance. The
clearance should be between 0.406 mm (0.015 in) and
2.000 mm (0.078 in). If the clearance is out of range, check the low/reverse clutch pack for correct
installation. If the low/reverse clutch pack is still out of range, call the SSSC for authorization to
replace the low/reverse clutch pack.
28. NOTE: When the low/reverse clutch is correctly installed, the wave spring is on top.
Remove the top low/reverse clutch steel plate and wave spring and correctly install the plates back
in the transaxle case.
29. NOTE: Make sure the center support is installed with the long center support legs facing down
and the feed holes facing the front of the transaxle
case. Improper alignment will cause transmission failure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3876
Install the center support with the long center support legs facing down and the feed holes aligned
with the feed holes in the transaxle case. See Figure 66.
1. Long center support legs face down.
2. Feed holes face the front of the transaxle case.
30. Install the No. 5 and No. 6 thrust bearings. See Figure 67.
1. No. 5 thrust bearing
2. No. 6 thrust bearing
31. Install the center planetary sun gear. See Figure 68.
32. Install the center planetary carrier/front ring gear assembly. See Figure 68.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3877
33. Install the No. 7 and No. 8 thrust bearings. See Figure 69.
1. No. 7 thrust bearing
2. No. 8 thrust bearing
34. Install the front planetary carrier/rear ring gear assembly. See Figure 70.
35. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch wave spring See Figure 70
36. Soak the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack in clean automatic transmission fluid. See Figure
71.
37. Install the new forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack.
38. Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pressure plate.
NOTICE: Be sure to install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side facing
down or the snap ring can come loose causing damage to the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3878
Install the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch beveled snap ring with the flat side down with the gap facing
the front of the transaxle. See Figure 72.
1. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring.
2. Forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch snap ring gap.
40. Using a suitable tool, seat the snap ring in the snap ring groove. See Figure 73.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3879
41. Install Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture # 100002 or a suitable dial indicator on the
transaxle case and position the plunger on the top
forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch friction plate. See Figure 74.
42. Install new low/reverse and forward (1, 2, 3, 4) transaxle case-to-center support seals in the
transaxle case. See Figure 75.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3880
43. Apply 483 kPa (70 psi) of air pressure to the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch piston port while
recording the clutch pack clearance on the dial indicator.
The clearance should be between 0.076 mm (0.002 in) and 1.840 mm (0.072 in). If the clearance is
out of range, check the forward (1, 2, 3, 4) clutch pack for correct installation and the transaxle for
correct assembly. See Figure 76.
44. Install the front planetary sun gear and shell assembly.
45. Install the No.10 front sun gear and shell assembly thrust bearing. See Figure 77.
46. Install the park pawl.
47. Install the park pawl pin and spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3881
48. Install the 5 new clutch feed seals. See Figure 78.
49. Position the transmission fluid baffle in place.
50. Install the lube funnel and position the alignment pin in the alignment hole.
51. Position the lube funnel hold-down bracket in place and install the 2 bolts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
52. Install the No. 12 driven sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 79.
53. Simultaneously install the drive and driven sprocket and chain assembly Lightly tap on the
driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case.
54. Install the No. 11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. See Figure 80.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3882
55. Install the No.13 thrust washer. See Figure 81.
56. Install the differential planetary sun gear.
57. Install the differential assembly.
58. Install the No. 15 differential thrust bearing. See Figure 82.
59. Install the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector # 307-635 on the input shaft.
60. Clean the torque converter housing sealing surface.
61. NOTE: Be sure the sealing surfaces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing
are free of oil before applying silicone.
Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA-29 or equivalent) to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
62. NOTE: Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as recorded during disassembly.
Install the torque converter housing on the transaxle case and install the 17 transaxle
case-to-torque converter housing bolts. See Figure 83.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3883
1. Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft)
2. Stud bolt location
63. Remove the Turbine Shaft Seal Protector 307-635.
64. Install the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor and the bolt.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
65. Assemble the internal cooler bypass valve in the sleeve and install the assembly in the case.
See Figure 84.
1. Bypass valve.
2. Bypass valve sleeve
66. Install the internal cooler bypass valve spring. See Figure 85.
67. Install the new main control-to-transaxle separator plate and align it on the stud and the guide
pin.
68. NOTE: Be sure that the manual pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the manual
valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3884
Position the main control assembly in place and align the manual valve on the TR sensor. Install
the nut hand-tight. See Figure 86.
69. Install the short main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 87.
70. Install the long main control Torx(R) bolts hand-tight. See Figure 88.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3885
71. Tighten the 22 main control Torx(R) bolts and the nut in a crisscross pattern.
Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
72. NOTE: Be sure the solenoid body-to-main control cover seal is installed with the holes facing
up.
Install the new solenoid body-to-main control cover seal.
73. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
74. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
75. Apply silicone (Motorcraft(R) TA 29 or equivalent) to the main control sealing surface of the
transaxle case.
76. Position the main control cover in place.
77. NOTE: Install the main control cover stud bolts in the correct location as noted during
disassembly.
Install the 13 main control cover bolts. See Figure 89.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
1. Bolt location
2. Stud bolt location
78. NOTICE: The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using
the Torque Converter Handle 307-091 install the
torque converter.
79. Remove the Torque Converter Handle 3O7-091.
80. Install the Torque Converter Retainer 307-566.
81. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
82. Remove the Transaxle Holding Fixture # 307-625.
Transaxle Installation and Post Test
1. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to the appropriate WSM, Section 307.
2. Perform post test drive to verify transmission is operating correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3886
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: >
10B15 > Apr > 10 > Campaign - ECM Update For A/T Durability > Page 3887
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Page 3894
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3897
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3898
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3899
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3900
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3901
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3902
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3903
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3904
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3905
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3906
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3907
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3908
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3909
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3910
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3911
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3912
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3913
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3914
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a
new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3915
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3916
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3917
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3918
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3922
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3925
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3926
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3927
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3928
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3929
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3930
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3931
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3932
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3933
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3934
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3935
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3936
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3937
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3938
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3939
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3940
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3941
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3942
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a
new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3943
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3944
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3945
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body
Leadframe > Page 3946
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 3950
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3953
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3954
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3955
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3956
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3957
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3958
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3959
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3960
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3961
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3962
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3963
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3964
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3965
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3966
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3967
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3968
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3969
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3970
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a
new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3971
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3972
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3973
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 3974
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Transfer Case Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3979
Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain >
Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3980
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3986
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3989
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3990
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3991
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3992
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3993
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3994
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3995
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3996
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3997
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3998
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service
and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 3999
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4000
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4001
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4002
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4003
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4004
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4005
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4006
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4007
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4008
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4009
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4010
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4014
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4017
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4018
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4019
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4020
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4021
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4022
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4023
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4024
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4025
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4026
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service
and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4027
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4028
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4029
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4030
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4031
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4032
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4033
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4034
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4035
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4036
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4037
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4038
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4042
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4045
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4046
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4047
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4048
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4049
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4050
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4051
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4052
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4053
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4054
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service
and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4055
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4056
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4057
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4058
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4059
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4060
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4061
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4062
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4063
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4064
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4065
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe >
Page 4066
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 4071
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Automatic Transmission Dipstick - Dipstick Tube: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat
Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Automatic Transmission
Dipstick - Dipstick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines >
Page 4076
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
Drive Chain: Customer Interest A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
TSB 10-20-1
10/25/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION
FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic
transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration
from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur
under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear
axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised
transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL
CHARACTERISTIC.
Drive Chain Replacement:
1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01.
2. Install the holding fixture 307-625.
3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture.
4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566.
5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091.
6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque
converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter
from the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4085
7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing
bolts. (Figure 1)
8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2)
9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4086
10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4)
11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5)
12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4087
13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7)
14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8)
15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and
the chain. (Figure 9)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4088
16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10)
17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets.
18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11)
19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4089
20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive
sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on
the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13)
21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4090
22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15)
23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16)
24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4091
25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18)
26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19)
27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace.
28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free
of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone
Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
(Figure 20)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4092
29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque
converter housing on the transaxle case and install the
17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21)
30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635.
31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter.
32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091.
33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566.
34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625.
36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01.
37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid
level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4093
Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7G249 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
Drive Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
TSB 10-20-1
10/25/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION
FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic
transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration
from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur
under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear
axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised
transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL
CHARACTERISTIC.
Drive Chain Replacement:
1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01.
2. Install the holding fixture 307-625.
3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture.
4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566.
5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091.
6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque
converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter
from the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4099
7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing
bolts. (Figure 1)
8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2)
9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4100
10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4)
11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5)
12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4101
13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7)
14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8)
15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and
the chain. (Figure 9)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4102
16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10)
17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets.
18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11)
19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4103
20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive
sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on
the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13)
21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4104
22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15)
23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16)
24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4105
25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18)
26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19)
27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace.
28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free
of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone
Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
(Figure 20)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4106
29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque
converter housing on the transaxle case and install the
17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21)
30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635.
31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter.
32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091.
33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566.
34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625.
36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01.
37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid
level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Drive Chain, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Chain: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10
> A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop > Page 4107
Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7G249 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 4112
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transaxle ............................................................................................................................
.................................................... 9 quarts (8.5 liters)
NOTE: Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary based on cooler
size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount of transmission fluid and fluid level should
be set by the indication on the dipstick's normal operating range.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4115
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft MERCON LV ATF
Ford Part Number - XT-10-QLV
Ford Specification - MERCON LV
NOTE: Automatic transmissions that require MERCON LV should only use MERCON LV fluid. Use
of any fluid other then the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specified for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental
transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products could cause internal
transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission.
NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing and cleaning will be performed using the
Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions
included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present
before proceeding.
NOTE: If the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent is not available, install a new
transmission fluid cooler and/or an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an in-line transmission fluid filter, remove and discard the
in-line filter.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the cooler line flusher with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the transmission fluid in the cooler line flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F)
before using.
3. If equipped, remove and discard the in-line transmission fluid filter.
4. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler tubes.
5. Attach the cooler line flusher red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick
disconnect fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4118
6. Attach the cooler line flusher blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick
disconnect fitting.
7. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission
fluid cooler prior to starting the flushing
procedure.
8. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission fluid cooler
in a normal flow direction for an additional
10-15 minutes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4119
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
NOTE: In order to completely clean the torque converter, this procedure needs to be carried out 3
times.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A
small amount of metal or friction particles may be
found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present, the
transaxle will need to be overhauled.
Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
3. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid.
5. Start the engine and let it run for 3 minutes. Move the range selector lever into each gear
position. Repeat Steps 2, 3, 4 and 5 two more times.
After the transmission fluid has been changed a total of 3 times, check the transmission fluid level
for a final time, making sure that the transmission fluid is at the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning > Page 4120
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Exchange
Transmission Fluid Exchange
NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental
transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal
transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Use the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to change the fluid.
3. Connect the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer to the transmission
fluid cooler tube after the transmission fluid
cooler on the return tube. This will help remove any foreign material trapped in the transmission
fluid coolers.
4. Perform the transmission fluid exchange using the Heavy-Duty Transmission and Power
Steering Fluid X-Changer. Follow the manufacturer's
instructions included with the machine.
5. Once the transmission fluid exchange is completed, disconnect the Heavy-Duty Transmission
and Power Steering Fluid X-Changer. Reconnect any
disconnected transmission fluid cooler tubes.
6. Using the scan tool with the engine running, check and make sure that the transmission is at
normal operating temperature 66-77°C (150-170°F).
Check and adjust the transmission fluid level and check for any leaks. If transmission fluid is
needed, add transmission fluid in increments of 0.24L (0.5 pt) until the correct level is achieved.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts. Tighten to.....................................................
...............................................................................................................................................12 Nm
(106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4124
Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
Main Control Cover
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4125
5. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
6. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4126
Installation
1. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
2. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
3. Position the main control cover in place.
4. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4127
5. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly in
place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
7. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers.
8. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4128
9. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T
> Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing
Technical Service Bulletin # 10C12 Date: 100521
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4141
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on May 21, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available on the website through May 21, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 21, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
OWNER REFUNDS
Refunds are not authorized for this program.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4142
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this recall is 50421.
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford
Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
In some of the affected vehicles, the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide may not be
present in the transmission. If the retaining pin is not present when the transmission is shifted into
park, the park pawl rod guide may move out of position and not allow the park pawl to engage.
Dealers are to inspect for the presence of the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide and
install a retaining pin as necessary.
INSPECTION
WARNING:
FAILURE TO APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE MAY RESULT IN VEHICLE DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
1. Inspect for the presence of the park pawl rod guide retaining pin located near the transmission
barcode label on top of the transmission. The height of
the retaining pin should be approximately 5 mm (1/4 in.) above the transmission housing boss. See
Figure 1.
^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS PRESENT, no further inspection is necessary and this
compliance recall is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4143
^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS NOT PRESENT, continue to the service procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
FUSION AND MILAN
1. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01.
ALL VEHICLES
2. Remove the selector lever cable bracket nuts and position the bracket aside.
3. Make sure that the park pawl rod guide is positioned correctly when installing a new park pawi
rod guide retaining pin.
a. Install a suitable tool, such as a small pick, into the retaining pin location to align the guide. See
Figure 2.
b. If the park pawl rod guide is out of position and can not be aligned, perform the following:
1. Install the guide with the retaining pin cut-out to the bottom of the guide. See Figure 3.
2. Using slight pressure, slide the guide inward until it stops Continue to apply slight pressure and
rotate the guide COUNTER - clockwise first
and then clockwise. This will allow the guide to align with the park pawl rod.
3. Make sure that the guide is aligned in the correct position by installing a suitable tool, such as a
small pick into the guide retaining pin
location. See Figure 2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4144
4. Install a new park pawi rod guide retaining pin with the tapered end downward. See Figure 4.
^ Tap the retaining pin in until 5 mm (1/4 in) remains above the transmission housing boss.
5. Install the selector lever cable bracket and nuts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
FUSION AND MILAN
6. Install the battery tray For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4145
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May > 10 > Recall - A/T
Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4146
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls for Parking Pawl: > NHTSA10V222000 > May > 10 > Recall
10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod
Parking Pawl: Recalls Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Escape 2010 Ford/Fusion 2010 Mercury/Milan
2010 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company
MFR'S REPORT DATE: May 21, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V222000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 19
SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2010 Fusion, Milan, and Escape vehicles
manufactured from February 27, through March 26, 2010. The park rod guide retention pin may not
have been properly installed which fails to conform to the requirement of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 114, "Theft Protection and Rollaway Prevention".
CONSEQUENCE: A vehicle parked without an engaged park pawl and without an applied parking
brake may have unintended movement which may cause a crash.
REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will repair the vehicles free of charge. The safety
recall is expected to begin on or about May 28, 2010. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center at 1-866-436-7332 and for the hearing impaired call 1-800-232-5952
(TDD). Representatives are available Monday through Friday: 8:00AM - 5:00PM.
NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10C12. Owners may also contact The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or
go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing
Technical Service Bulletin # 10C12 Date: 100521
Attachment I - Administrative Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4156
OASIS ACTIVATED?
Yes, OASIS will be activated on May 21, 2010.
FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED?
Yes, FSA VIN list will be available on the website through May 21, 2010. Owner names and
addresses will be available by May 21, 2010.
NOTE:
Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle
registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in
connection with this recall is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries.
Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this recall.
STOCK VEHICLES
Correct all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery.
SOLD VEHICLES
^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for repairs.
^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN list but
are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter (when available)
and schedule a service date.
^ Correct other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership.
TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES
Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this recall.
RELATED DAMAGE
If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the
Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage.
Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not
had this recall performed on a timely basis.
OWNER REFUNDS
Refunds are not authorized for this program.
RENTAL VEHICLES
The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program.
CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION
^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE).
^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information.
^ Related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which
the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support
Center.
^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked.
Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4157
LABOR ALLOWANCES
PARTS REQUIREMENTS / ORDERING INFORMATION
Order your parts requirements through normal order processing channels.
The DOR/COR number for this recall is 50421.
DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II.
EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford
Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000.
Attachment III - Technical Information
OVERVIEW
In some of the affected vehicles, the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide may not be
present in the transmission. If the retaining pin is not present when the transmission is shifted into
park, the park pawl rod guide may move out of position and not allow the park pawl to engage.
Dealers are to inspect for the presence of the retaining pin holding the park pawl rod guide and
install a retaining pin as necessary.
INSPECTION
WARNING:
FAILURE TO APPLY THE PARKING BRAKE MAY RESULT IN VEHICLE DAMAGE AND/OR
SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY
1. Inspect for the presence of the park pawl rod guide retaining pin located near the transmission
barcode label on top of the transmission. The height of
the retaining pin should be approximately 5 mm (1/4 in.) above the transmission housing boss. See
Figure 1.
^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS PRESENT, no further inspection is necessary and this
compliance recall is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4158
^ If the park pawl rod guide retaining pin IS NOT PRESENT, continue to the service procedure.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
FUSION AND MILAN
1. Remove the battery tray. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01.
ALL VEHICLES
2. Remove the selector lever cable bracket nuts and position the bracket aside.
3. Make sure that the park pawl rod guide is positioned correctly when installing a new park pawi
rod guide retaining pin.
a. Install a suitable tool, such as a small pick, into the retaining pin location to align the guide. See
Figure 2.
b. If the park pawl rod guide is out of position and can not be aligned, perform the following:
1. Install the guide with the retaining pin cut-out to the bottom of the guide. See Figure 3.
2. Using slight pressure, slide the guide inward until it stops Continue to apply slight pressure and
rotate the guide COUNTER - clockwise first
and then clockwise. This will allow the guide to align with the park pawl rod.
3. Make sure that the guide is aligned in the correct position by installing a suitable tool, such as a
small pick into the guide retaining pin
location. See Figure 2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4159
4. Install a new park pawi rod guide retaining pin with the tapered end downward. See Figure 4.
^ Tap the retaining pin in until 5 mm (1/4 in) remains above the transmission housing boss.
5. Install the selector lever cable bracket and nuts.
^ Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
FUSION AND MILAN
6. Install the battery tray For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 414-01.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4160
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: > 10C12 > May >
10 > Recall - A/T Parking Pawl Pin Missing > Page 4161
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Parking Pawl, A/T >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Parking Pawl: >
NHTSA10V222000 > May > 10 > Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod
Parking Pawl: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V222000: A/T Park Pawl Retention Rod
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Ford/Escape 2010 Ford/Fusion 2010 Mercury/Milan
2010 MANUFACTURER: Ford Motor Company
MFR'S REPORT DATE: May 21, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V222000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Power Train: Automatic Transmission
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 19
SUMMARY: Ford is recalling certain model year 2010 Fusion, Milan, and Escape vehicles
manufactured from February 27, through March 26, 2010. The park rod guide retention pin may not
have been properly installed which fails to conform to the requirement of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 114, "Theft Protection and Rollaway Prevention".
CONSEQUENCE: A vehicle parked without an engaged park pawl and without an applied parking
brake may have unintended movement which may cause a crash.
REMEDY: Ford will notify owners and dealers will repair the vehicles free of charge. The safety
recall is expected to begin on or about May 28, 2010. Owners may contact Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center at 1-866-436-7332 and for the hearing impaired call 1-800-232-5952
(TDD). Representatives are available Monday through Friday: 8:00AM - 5:00PM.
NOTES: Ford's recall campaign number is 10C12. Owners may also contact The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or
go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4169
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4172
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4173
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4174
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4175
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4176
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4177
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4178
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4179
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4180
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4181
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service
and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4182
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4183
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4184
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4185
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4186
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4187
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4188
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4189
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4190
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4191
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4192
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4193
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4202
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4203
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov
> 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov
> 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4209
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov
> 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4210
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4211
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4212
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4213
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4214
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4215
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page 4216
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4219
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4220
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4221
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
22. Using a suitable tool, remove the manual control lever shaft seal.
Installation
All vehicles
1. Using the Manual Lever Seal Installer, install a new manual control lever shaft seal.
2. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4222
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
3. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
4. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
5. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
6. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4223
7. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
8. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
9. Position the main control cover in place.
10. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
11. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4224
12. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
13. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
14. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4225
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4226
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4227
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal
Halfshaft Seal - RH, All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Transfer Case.
3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the RH transaxle differential seal.
4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4228
Installation
1. Install a new halfshaft seal on the RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Installer.
2. Using the RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Installer, install the RH halfshaft seal.
3. Install the PTU. For additional information, refer to Transfer Case.
4. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4229
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal - LH
Halfshaft Seal - LH
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the front LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints.
3. Using a suitable awl, poke a small hole in the halfshaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4230
4. Using a suitable dent puller, remove the halfshaft seal.
Installation
1. Inspect the bushing surface on the LH halfshaft and the LH halfshaft bushing in the transaxle
case for damage or excessive wear. If the LH
halfshaft or the LH halfshaft bushing shows signs of excessive wear or damage, inspect the
transaxle case for damage. Install a new LH halfshaft. Install a new LH halfshaft bushing. For
additional Information, refer to Transaxle case bushing. If the LH halfshaft or the LH halfshaft bushing shows signs of excessive wear or damage but the
transaxle case does not, install a new LH halfshaft. Install a new LH halfshaft bushing. For
additional Information, refer to Transaxle case bushing.
- If the transaxle case is damaged, install a new LH halfshaft. Install a new transaxle case. For
additional Information, refer to Transaxle - 2.5L See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removal or Transaxle - 3.0L See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Removal and Transaxle See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly.
- If the bushing is not damaged or worn excessively, clean the area behind the seal and install a
new seal following this procedure.
2. Install a new halfshaft seal on the Differential Seal Installer and Handle.
3. Using the Differential Seal Installer and Handle, install the LH halfshaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Manual Control Lever Shaft Seal > Page 4231
4. Install the front LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints.
5. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level. For additional information, refer to
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill See: Service and
Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page
4237
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive.
Typical Stalk Mounted TCS
Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4244
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4245
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4246
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4247
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4248
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4249
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4250
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC
P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC
P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4255
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4256
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4257
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4260
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4261
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4262
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4263
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4264
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4265
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T
> Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor >
Page 4266
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4271
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4272
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4273
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4274
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4275
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4276
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4277
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4278
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4279
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4280
Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4281
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4282
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4283
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4284
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4285
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4286
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4287
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4288
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4289
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4290
Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4291
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4292
Shift Interlock: Service and Repair
Brake Shift Interlock Override
NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK
position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving
the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift
interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is
in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed.
If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON
position and the brake pedal is depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key.
2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel.
Remove the access panel.
3. Using a suitable tool, depress the Brake Shift Interlock Actuator (BSIA) override mechanism on
the selector lever, apply the brake, depress the
button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL.
4. Start the vehicle.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4296
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4299
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4300
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4301
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4302
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4303
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4304
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4305
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4306
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4307
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4308
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service
and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4309
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4310
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4311
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4312
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4313
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4314
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4315
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4316
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4317
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4318
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4319
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4320
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams
Shifter A/T: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4324
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
Selector Lever
Removal
All vehicles
1. Place the selector lever in the D position.
2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4325
3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
4. Remove the top finish panel.
5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever.
7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever.
1. Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4326
2. Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
8. Pull the All-Wheel Drive (AWD) module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector
lever.
All vehicles
9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console.
10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4327
All vehicles
1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
2. Install the 2 center console screws.
AWD vehicles
3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever.
All vehicles
4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever.
1. Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever.
2. Connect the selector lever electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4328
5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever.
6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly.
1. Install the selector lever cable on the bracket.
2. Connect the selector lever cable end.
7. Install the top finish panel.
8. Install the center console compartment tray.
9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 4329
10. Adjust the selector lever cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable
Adjustment See: Adjustments.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Selector Lever Cable
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Place the selector level in the D position.
3. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring.
4. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4334
5. Remove the top finish panel.
6. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
7. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
8. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the transmission fluid filler tube.
9. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift
Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4335
10. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket.
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the selector lever cable after installation. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever
Cable Adjustment See: Adjustments.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Torque Converter: Description and Operation
Torque Converter
The torque converter transmits and multiplies torque. The torque converter is a 4-element device:
- Impeller and cover assembly
- Turbine
- Reactor
- Clutch and damper assembly
Rotation of the torque converter housing and impeller set the transmission fluid in motion by driving
the impeller blades and pump.
The turbine is driven by the transmission fluid from the impeller and transmits power to the input
shaft.
The reactor redirects transmission fluid flow returned from the turbine to the impeller so that it
rotates in the same direction as the impeller. This action assists in torque multiplication.
The reactor has a One-Way Clutch (OWC) to hold it stationary during torque multiplication and
allows it to rotate at higher vehicle speeds.
Torque Converter Operation
The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) connects the torque converter housing to the damper when
the TCC is applied.
During TCC release, the direction that the transmission fluid flows through the torque converter
allows the TCC to release. During TCC apply, the transmission fluid flows in the opposite direction
to apply the TCC.
The PCM controls TCC operation using the TCC solenoid in the solenoid body. TCC solenoid
operation provides the modulation of hydraulic pressure to change the position of the TCC control
valve and TCC regulator apply valve which changes the pressure and transmission fluid direction in
the torque converter.
The TCC can be applied in 3rd, 4th, 5th and 6th gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4339
Torque Converter Internal Component Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis
Torque Converter Diagnosis
Prior to torque converter installation, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent
the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete
diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque
converter.
Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows:
1. Preliminary inspection
2. Know and understand the customer concern
3. Verify the concern - carry out the Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test See: Torque
Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
4. Carry out diagnostic procedures:
- Run On-Board Diagnostic (OBD). Refer to Diagnostics See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnostics. Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first.
- Repair all transmission DTCs.
- Rerun OBD to verify repair.
- Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Special
Testing Procedures. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Line Pressure Test
- Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Special
Testing Procedures. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Stall Speed Test
- Carry out diagnostic routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom.
See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures/Diagnostic Routines
- Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine
will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each
component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before installing a new torque converter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4342
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
Torque Converter Diagnosis
Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) Operation Test
This test verifies that the TCC control system and the torque converter are operating correctly.
1. Carry out Self Test, refer to the tester manual. Check for DTCs.
2. Connect a tachometer to the engine.
3. Bring the engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for
approximately 15 minutes in (D) position.
4. If the vehicle stalls in (D) at idle with the vehicle at a stop, move the selector lever to manual L
position. If the vehicle stalls, see torque converter
operation concerns, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom. Repair as
required. If the vehicle does not stall in (D), refer to Diagnosis By Symptom See: Transmission
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By
Symptom.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 4343
Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
Torque Converter Contamination Inspection
1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following
statements is true:
- A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures.
- The torque converter stud or studs, impeller hub or bushing are damaged.
- The torque converter exhibits external discoloration (due to overheating).
- There is evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following
transmission or converter failure modes. Major metallic failure
- Multiple clutch plates or band failures
- Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination
- Water or antifreeze contamination
2. If none of the above conditions are present, continue with the following fluid inspection.
3. Pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque converter onto an absorbent white
tissue or through a paper filter.
4. Examine the fluid for contaminants, color and smell. The fluid must be free of contaminants, red
in color and not have a burnt smell.
5. NOTICE: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque
converter or transmission damage will occur.
If the fluid passed inspection:
- drain the remaining fluid from the torque converter.
- using only the recommended transmission fluid, add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean fluid into the converter
and agitate by hand.
- thoroughly drain the fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4347
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4350
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4351
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4352
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4353
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4354
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4355
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4356
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4357
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4358
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4359
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Valve Body/Service
and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4360
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4361
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4362
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4363
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4364
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4365
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4366
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4367
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Valve Body/Service and
Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with this
procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4368
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4369
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4370
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch
Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4371
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications
6F35 - Material
6F35 - General Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4376
Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Specifications > Page 4377
Transmission Cooler: Description and Operation
Transaxle Cooling
The transmission fluid cooling system consists of the following:
- Oil-To-Air (OTA) transmission fluid combo cooler
- Transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
- Transmission fluid cooler outlet tube
- Transmission fluid cooler return tube
These vehicles are equipped with an external transmission fluid cooler. The transmission fluid
cooler is part of the A/C condenser and cannot be serviced separately. The cooler is mounted in
front of the engine radiator. This transaxle has an internal thermal bypass valve. When the
transmission fluid is below normal operating temperature, transmission fluid bypasses the cooling
system. When the transmission fluid is at or above normal operating temperature, the thermal
bypass valve opens, allowing transmission fluid to travel from the transaxle through the cooler and
back to the transaxle. The transmission fluid cooler transfers heat from the transmission fluid to the
outside air.
Transaxle Cooling
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Transmission Cooler: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Transaxle Cooling
Inspection and Verification
Transaxle Cooling
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern by operating the vehicle to duplicate the condition.
2. If the inspection reveals an obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, repair as
necessary.
3. Install new components if a transmission fluid leak is found in any of the transaxle cooling
components.
4. If the concern(s) remains after the inspection, determine the symptom(s). GO to Symptom Chart
- Transaxle Cooling or GO to Symptom Chart NVH. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Symptom Chart - NVH
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4380
Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - NVH
Transaxle Cooling
Symptom Chart - NVH
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4381
Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
6F35
Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transaxle Cooling
When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material
or band material may have been carried into the torque converter and transaxle fluid cooler. These
contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle troubles and must be removed from the
system before the transaxle is put back into use. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing
and Cleaning See: Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and
Cleaning.
Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test
NOTE: The selector lever linkage, selector lever cable adjustment, transmission fluid level and line
pressure must be within specification before carrying out this test. Refer to Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle for selector lever linkage and selector lever cable adjustment and refer to
Special Testing Procedures See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/6F35/Special Testing Procedures/Special Testing Procedures for line pressure test.
The transmission fluid must be above 82°C (180°F) for the cooler bypass to open to carry out this
test.
1. Using a scan tool, run the engine to establish the correct transmission fluid temperature of 82°C
(180°F).
2. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator from the transaxle filler tube.
3. Place funnel in the transaxle filler tube.
4. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting.
5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler return tube (rear fitting) from the fitting on the transaxle
case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4382
6. Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return tube and route other end of the hose up to a
point where it can be inserted into the funnel at the
transaxle filler tube.
7. Start the engine and run it at idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL position.
8. When transmission fluid flowing from hose is in a steady stream, a liberal amount of
transmission fluid should be observed. "Liberal" is described
as about 1L (1 qt) delivered in 30 seconds. If a liberal flow is observed, the test is complete.
9. If the flow is not liberal, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return tube and
connect it to the converter outlet tube fitting (front
fitting) on the transaxle case.
10. Repeat Steps 7 and 8. If flow is now approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, refer to
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning See:
Service and Repair/Procedures/Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. If the flow is
still not approximately 1L (1 qt) in 30 seconds, repair the pump and/or the torque converter. If new
transmission fluid cooler tubes need to be installed, refer to Transmission Cooler, A/T.
6F35 - Transaxle Cooling
Transaxle Cooling
Check Transmission Fluid Level and Condition (All Vehicles)
NOTICE: The vehicle should not be driven if the transmission fluid level indicator shows the
transmission fluid below the minimum transmission fluid level mark or internal failure could result.
If the vehicle has been operated for an extended period of time, at highway speeds, in city traffic, in
hot weather or while pulling a trailer, the transmission fluid may need to cool down to obtain an
accurate reading.
The transmission fluid level reading on the transmission fluid level indicator will differ depending on
operating and ambient temperatures. The correct reading should be within the normal operating
temperature range.
Transmission Fluid Level Check
NOTE: The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 85°C-93°C
(185°F-200°F) on a level surface. Normal operating temperature can be reached after
approximately 32 km (20 mi) of driving and can be checked using the scan tool.
Under normal circumstances the transmission fluid level should be checked during normal
maintenance. If the transaxle starts to slip, shifts slowly or shows signs of transmission fluid
leaking, the transmission fluid level should be checked.
1. With the transaxle in PARK, the engine at idle, foot pressed on the brake, move the selector
lever through each gear and allow engagement of each
gear. Place the selector lever in the PARK position.
2. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator cap and remove the transmission fluid level indicator.
3. Wipe the transmission fluid level indicator with a clean cloth.
4. Install the transmission fluid level indicator back in the transaxle filler tube until it is fully seated,
then remove the indicator. The transmission
fluid level should be within the crosshatch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4383
High Transmission Fluid Level
A transmission fluid level that is too high may cause the transmission fluid to become aerated due
to the churning action of the rotating internal parts. This will cause erratic control pressure, foaming,
loss of transmission fluid from the vent tube and possible transaxle malfunction and/or damage. If
an overfill reading is indicated, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission
Control Systems.
Low Transmission Fluid Level
A low transmission fluid level could result in poor transaxle engagement, slipping, malfunction
and/or damage. This could also indicate a leak in one of the transaxle seals or gaskets.
Flat Tow Fluid Level
Recreational flat towing of the vehicle may require the transmission fluid to be set to a lower fluid
level. This will prevent damage to the transmission. The transmission fluid level is within the normal
operating range and will not require the transmission fluid level to be readjusted after recreational
towing.
Adding Transmission Fluid
NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable. The use of any fluid other than
what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage.
If transmission fluid needs to be added, add transmission fluid in 0.25L (1/2 pt) increments through
the transaxle filler tube with the selector lever in PARK and the engine idling. Do not overfill the
transmission fluid. For transmission fluid type, refer to the Material chart.
Transmission Fluid Condition Check
1. Check the transmission fluid level.
2. Observe the color and the odor. The color under normal circumstances should be a dark red
color, not brown or black or have a burnt odor.
3. Hold the transmission fluid level indicator over a white facial tissue and allow the transmission
fluid to drip onto the facial tissue and examine the
stain.
4. If evidence of solid material is found, the transmission fluid pan should be removed for further
inspection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 4384
5. If transmission fluid contamination or transaxle failure is confirmed by the sediment in the bottom
of the transmission fluid pan, repair the
transaxle and clean the transmission fluid cooler tubes and the transmission fluid cooler.
6. If the transaxle is to be overhauled or if installing a new transaxle, the transmission fluid cooler
must be backflushed. Refer to Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Transmission Cooler: Procedures
Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning
NOTICE: Use transmission fluid specified for this transmission. Do not use any supplemental
transmission fluid additives or cleaning agents. The use of these products could cause internal
transmission components to fail, which will affect the operation of the transmission.
NOTE: Transmission fluid cooler backflushing and cleaning will be performed using the
Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent. Follow the manufacturer's instructions
included with the machine. Test the equipment to make sure that a vigorous fluid flow is present
before proceeding.
NOTE: If the Transmission Heated Cooler Line Flusher or equivalent is not available, install a new
transmission fluid cooler and/or an auxiliary transmission fluid cooler.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with an in-line transmission fluid filter, remove and discard the
in-line filter.
1. Check and top off fluid level of the cooler line flusher with transmission fluid.
2. Allow the transmission fluid in the cooler line flusher 15-30 minutes to heat up to 60°C (140°F)
before using.
3. If equipped, remove and discard the in-line transmission fluid filter.
4. Install the line adapters into the transmission cooler tubes.
5. Attach the cooler line flusher red line to the transmission fluid cooler pressure tube quick
disconnect fitting.
6. Attach the cooler line flusher blue line to the transmission fluid cooler return tube quick
disconnect fitting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4387
7. Follow the equipment instructions to purge the transmission fluid cooler tubes and transmission
fluid cooler prior to starting the flushing
procedure.
8. Allow the cooling system to backflush for 10-15 minutes, then flush the transmission fluid cooler
in a normal flow direction for an additional
10-15 minutes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4388
Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement
6F35 - Transmission Fluid Cooler
Transmission Fluid Cooler
1. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser assembly and cannot be
serviced separately.
If installation of a new transmission fluid cooler is required, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning.
6F35 - Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4389
Removal
NOTICE: Automatic transmission fluids are not interchangeable. The use of any fluid other than
what is recommended for this transaxle will cause transaxle damage.
1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
2. Remove the left side splash shield.
3. Release the transmission fluid cooler tube retaining clip and remove the transmission fluid cooler
tubes from the clip.
4. Compress the constant tension clamps and remove the transmission fluid cooler tubes from the
transmission fluid cooler.
5. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube secondary latches from the transmission fluid cooler
tubes at the transmission.
6. Using the Transmission Cooler Line Disconnect Tool, disconnect the transmission fluid cooler
tubes from the transaxle and remove the
transmission fluid cooler tubes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4390
Installation
1. If installing new transmission fluid cooler tubes, remove the transmission fluid cooler tube
secondary latches and the retainer from the old
transmission fluid cooler tubes and install them on the new transmission fluid cooler tubes.
2. Position the transmission fluid cooler tubes in place. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in
the transaxle by inserting the tube into the fitting
until a click is heard/felt. Pull back to confirm connection is secure and install the transmission fluid
cooler tube secondary latches.
3. Compress the constant tension clamps and install the transmission fluid cooler tubes on the
transmission fluid cooler.
4. Install the transmission fluid cooler tubes in the retaining clip and close the retaining clip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4391
5. Install the left side splash shield.
6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
7. Check the transmission fluid level and add transmission fluid as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode
Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch,
A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive.
Typical Stalk Mounted TCS
Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4402
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly and outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction.
Vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
2. Install the Engine Support Bar and Adapters and support the engine and transaxle.
Vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine
3. Remove the 2 upper radiator hose retainers from the radiator support and position aside the
upper radiator hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4403
4. Disconnect the LH Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) electrical connector, remove the wiring
harness retainer from the LH valve cover and position
aside the wiring harness.
5. Remove the 2 retainers from the valve cover studs, remove the retainer from the main control
cover stud and position aside the alternator power
cable.
6. Install the Engine Lifting Bracket and the Universal Mounting Brackets on both cylinder heads.
7. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg and Adapters.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4404
8. Install the Engine Lifting Chain and Adapter and support the engine and transaxle.
All vehicles
9. Remove the LH support insulator.
1. Remove the LH support insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
2. Remove the top LH support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the side LH support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the LH support insulator.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4405
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the rear cross brace.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4406
4. Remove the lower front insulator through bolt and the 2 cross brace bolts.
5. Remove the cross brace nut and remove the brace.
Installation
1. Position the cross brace in place and install the nut.
- Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
2. Install the 2 bolts for the cross brace.
- Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
3. Install the lower front support insulator through bolt for the mount.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4407
4. Install the rear cross brace and the 4 bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 4408
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) similar. Vehicles equipped with
AWD have a damper that is held on by the
through bolt.
Remove the lower support insulator.
1. Remove the lower support insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Remove the lower support insulator bolt and 2 nuts.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
3. Remove the lower support insulator.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4412
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4413
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4414
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4415
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4416
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4417
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position
Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4418
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts > Page 4423
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4424
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4425
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4428
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4429
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4430
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4431
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4432
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4433
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed
Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4434
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Valve Body: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4439
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4440
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4441
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4442
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4443
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4444
Valve Body: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4445
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4446
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4447
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4448
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Solenoid Body
Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4449
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4450
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4451
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4452
Valve Body: Service and Repair Main Control Valve Body
Main Control Valve Body
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional Information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4453
3. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
4. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
5. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
7. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4454
8. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
9. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
10. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
11. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4455
12. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
13. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
14. Remove the main control-to-transaxle case separator plate.
15. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body assembly from the main control valve
body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4456
Installation
1. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the solenoid body assembly onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts. Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control valve body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4457
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4458
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4459
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4460
16. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
17. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
18. If a new solenoid body is installed, the solenoid body strategy and solenoid body identification
will need to be updated. For additional
Information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy
19. If a replacement transaxle assembly is being installed or a new solenoid body is installed, the
PCM will have to be reflashed with a new solenoid
body strategy and identification data file. For additional information, refer to Solenoid Body Strategy
See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4461
Valve Body: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4462
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4463
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4464
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4465
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Main Control Valve Body. If
installing a new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4466
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4467
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4468
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4469
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Transmission Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body
Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures
Clutch Disc: Procedures
Clutch Disc Check
1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil.
2. Check for a worn clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with
a slide caliper.
3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets.
4. Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
5. Check for wear or rust on the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth.
6. Check the clutch disc for cracking, scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new
clutch disc if necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4475
Clutch Disc: Removal and Replacement
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4476
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction
surface.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. For
additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T.
7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal
prior to clutch disc installation. For additional information, refer to Engine.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation.
- worn or loose facings.
- warpage or loose rivets at the hub.
- wear or rust on the splines.
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. For additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T.
Installation
1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts.
- Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4477
3. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid >
Component Information > Specifications
Clutch Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US)
Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Controls - Exploded View
Clutch Controls - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Clutch Controls - Exploded View > Page 4486
Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder
Clutch Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder.
- Plug the brake master cylinder.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder hose.
2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod.
4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting.
- Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
5. Remove the clutch master cylinder.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle
&/or Clutch, M/T.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair
Clutch Slave Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter.
3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle
&/or Clutch, M/T.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair
Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the engine air cleaner. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch master cylinder.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder.
- Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic
fluid tube adapter.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle
&/or Clutch, M/T.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Adjustments
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Adjustments
Clutch Pedal Freeplay Adjustment
1. Measure the clutch pedal travel.
1. Press the clutch pedal lightly by hand.
2. Measure the distance the clutch pedal travels. It should be 5-13 mm (0.20-0.51 in). If the
measurement is not within specification, inspect,
repair and/or replace the clutch pedal. If the measurement is within specification, check the clutch
pressure plate for damage or wear. For additional information, refer to Clutch Pressure Plate Check
See: Pressure Plate/Service and Repair/Procedures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information >
Adjustments > Page 4496
Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair
Clutch Pedal
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod.
2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4501
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4502
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4503
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4506
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4507
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures
Pressure Plate: Procedures
Clutch Pressure Plate Check
1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or
discoloration should be removed with a fine emery
cloth.
2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge.
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments.
4. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 4512
Pressure Plate: Removal and Replacement
Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate
Removal
1. Remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
2. Using the Flywheel Holding Tool, lock the flywheel to the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 4513
3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and
spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest.
4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the
bolts are removed. Failure to follow
this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage.
Remove the 6 bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc.
5. Use a suitable cleaning solution to remove any oil film from the clutch pressure plate friction
surface.
6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. For
additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T.
7. NOTICE: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for
leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal
prior to clutch disc installation. For additional information, refer to Engine.
NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface.
NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present.
Inspect the clutch disc for: oil or grease saturation.
- worn or loose facings.
- warpage or loose rivets at the hub.
- wear or rust on the splines.
8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. For additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T.
Installation
1. Using the Clutch Aligner, position the clutch disc on the flywheel.
2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the 6 clutch pressure plate bolts.
- Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in the sequence shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Procedures > Page 4514
3. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair
Fluid - CVT: Service and Repair
Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. NOTE: If an integral problem is suspected, drain the transmission fluid through a paper filter. A
small amount of metal or friction particles may be
found from normal wear. However, if excessive metal and friction particles are present, internal
service will be required.
Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
6. NOTE: After the transmission fluid has been drained, clean the drain plug threads and apply a
small amount of thread sealant to the threads.
Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. NOTICE: Use only clean transmission fluid specific for this transmission. Do not use any
supplemental transmission fluid additives or
cleaning agents. The use of these products can cause internal transmission components to fail,
which will affect the operation of the transmission.
Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of the
fill plug hole.
8. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug, removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on
the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Fluid CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4519
Install the fill plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
9. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH
Differential Seals - LH
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4524
5. Remove the LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints.
6. Using the Slide Hammer and Input Shaft Oil Seal Remover, remove and discard the LH
differential seal.
Installation
1. Using the Differential Seal RH and LH Installer (two sided tool eCVT) and Handle, install the LH
differential seal.
2. Install the LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints.
3. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install
the drain plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
5. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of
the fill plug hole.
6. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on
the transaxle case.
Install the fill plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4525
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front.
NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding
transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole.
Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4526
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH
Differential Seals - RH
Removal
All Vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
4. Remove the drain plug and drain the transmission fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4527
Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
5. Remove the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
6. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Transfer Case.
All Vehicles
7. Using the Slide Hammer and RH Halfshaft Fluid Seal Remover, remove and discard the RH
differential seal.
Installation
All Vehicles
1. Using the Differential Seal RH and LH Installer (two sided tool eCVT) and Driver 32 Inch Handle,
install the RH differential seal.
AWD
2. Install the PTU. For additional Information, refer to Transfer Case
FWD
3. Install the intermediate shaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and
Joints.
All Vehicles
4. Clean the drain plug threads and apply a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install
the drain plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Seals and
Gaskets, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 4528
5. Remove the fill plug on the side of the transaxle.
6. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid as specified until the level reaches the bottom of
the fill plug hole.
7. NOTE: Clean the area around the fill plug removing transmission fluid that may have spilled on
the transaxle case.
Install the fill plug.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. NOTE: The check and fill plug is located on the left side of the transaxle near the front.
NOTE: The transmission fluid is checked and filled by removing the fill plug and adding
transmission fluid to the bottom of the fill plug hole.
Start the engine and check for correct forward and reverse operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Upper
Transaxle Support Insulator - Upper
Transaxle Support Insulator - Upper
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4533
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2. Install the Engine Support Bar, Support Leg Adapter, Engine Support Bar Adapter and Lifting
Hook Adapter.
3. Remove the upper insulator bracket bolt, nut and the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4534
4. Remove the upper insulator.
1. Remove the upper insulator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
2. Remove the upper insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten the bolt to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4535
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Lower
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower
Removal and Installation
Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
3. Remove the splash shield retainers and remove the LH splash shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4536
4. Remove the bolts and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. Remove the lower insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
6. Remove the rear roll restrictor-to-crossmember through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
7. Remove and discard the engine support crossmember nut. Remove the 2 engine support
crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten the new engine support crossmember nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the 2 engine support crossmember bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
8. Remove the engine support crossmember.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4537
9. Remove the rear roll restrictor through bolt and remove the rear roll restrictor from the bracket.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4538
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator - Rear
Transaxle Support Insulator - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the rear insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
3. Remove the rear insulator nuts and bolt.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT >
Transmission Mount, CVT > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper > Page 4539
4. Remove the rear insulator studs.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Remove the rear insulator.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Differential Cover: Service and Repair
Differential Housing Cover
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential cover.
- Drain the differential fluid from the housing.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing
cover are clean and free of oil before installing the
new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined
surface to prevent contamination.
Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover.
2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the
silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If
possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly
cured.
Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts.
- Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Remove the filler plug and fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5 mm
(0.118-0.196 in) below the bottom of the filler
hole. Install the filler plug and tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Rear Axle Fluid Capacity
Rear Axle .............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L )
Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4548
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
Ford Part Number - XY-80W90-QL
Ford Specification - WSP-M2C197-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Seal
Stub Shaft Seal
Removal
1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only.
Remove the halfshaft assembly.
2. Use the Torque Converter Fluid Seal Remover and Slide Hammer to remove the stub shaft seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease.
Using the Front Axle Oil Seal Installer and Handle, install the stub shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4553
2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard CV joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the
halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal
with fine crocus cloth.
Install the halfshaft assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4554
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal
Drive Pinion Seal
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange.
3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft.
Disconnect the rear driveshaft U-joint flange.
- Remove and discard the 4 bolts.
- Position aside the driveshaft and flange.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4555
4. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut.
- Remove and discard the pinion flange nut.
5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange.
6. Using the 2 Jaw Puller, remove the pinion flange.
7. Using the Converter Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the pinion seal.
Installation
1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal.
Using the Pinion Drive Seal Installer, install the pinion seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System
Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Seal > Page 4556
2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with grease.
Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange.
3. Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, install a new pinion nut.
- Tighten to 244 Nm (180 lb-ft).
4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and U-joint flange.
- Install the 4 new bolts.
- Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10
> A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Axle Shaft Assembly: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10
> A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4566
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11 > Nov > 10
> A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4567
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11
> Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Axle Shaft Assembly: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11
> Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4573
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Axle Shaft Assembly: > 10-21-11
> Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4574
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications
Axle Shaft Assembly: Mechanical Specifications
Front Drive Halfshafts
Torque Specifications
Rear Drive Halfshafts
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 4577
Axle Shaft Assembly: Fluid Type Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Front Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft Joint
Halfshaft Joint
The front drive halfshaft CV joints consist of the following components:
- Inner CV joints
- Outer CV joints
- CV joint boot clamps
- Convoluted CV joint boots
- Tripod joint housings
- Ball and cage housings
- Retainer circlips
- Special CV high temperature grease
The halfshaft joint allows for smooth rotation of the interconnecting shaft and the outboard housing.
It also adjusts for length requirements as the vehicle goes through jounce and rebound.
The halfshaft joints are not repairable and are serviced as assemblies only.
Halfshaft
Front Drive Halfshafts
The halfshafts and intermediate shaft consists of the following components:
- Inner CV joints
- Outer CV joints
- A support bearing on the intermediate shaft
The shafts are serviced as assemblies only.
The front drive halfshafts are splined to drive the front wheel hubs. The LH halfshaft uses a circlip
to retain the inner CV joint stub shaft in the differential side gear. The RH halfshaft is connected to
an intermediate shaft with a circlip. The intermediate shaft is also driven by a differential side gear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4580
Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshafts
Rear Drive Halfshafts
The rear drive halfshafts have the following features:
- The inner and outer CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove
inner race assembly (inner CV joint) together.
- The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length.
- An axle circlip retains the splined inner CV joint to the differential side gear.
- A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outer CV
joint) to the rear hub.
- The rear halfshafts are serviced as assemblies only.
The rear drive halfshafts are driven by the differential side gears in the rear drive axle. The splined
inner CV joint housing transfers the torque to the connecting shaft through the flexible joint
consisting of caged balls or 3 roller trunion. This allows the connecting shaft to change both length
and angle while the joint housing remains fixed. The CV joints are lubricated with a special high
temperature grease that is contained by flexible rubber boots sealed to the joint housing and
connecting shafts by clamps. The outer CV joint receives the rotational force from the connecting
shaft and in turn, drives the rear wheel hub.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4581
Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection
Rear Drive Halfshafts
For information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly &/or Drive/Propeller Shafts,
Bearings and Joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft
Halfshaft
NOTE: RH halfshaft shown, LH similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4584
Removal
All halfshafts
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
3. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
5. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
6. NOTICE: Use care when releasing the lower arm and wheel knuckle into the resting position or
damage to the ball joint seal and/or
Constant Velocity (CV) joint boot may occur.
Separate the lower arm from the wheel knuckle.
7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
Left halfshaft
8. Using the Halfshaft Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the LH halfshaft from the differential.
Right halfshaft
9. Using a brass drift to strike the RH halfshaft in the indicated area, separate and remove the
halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4585
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4586
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshafts
Halfshaft
Halfshaft
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4587
Removal
NOTICE: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outer Constant Velocity (CV) joint.
Damage to the CV joint will occur.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Damage to the halfshaft may
occur.
NOTICE: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Damage to
the halfshaft or Constant Velocity (CV) joints may occur.
NOTICE: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Damage to
the halfshaft boots will occur.
NOTICE: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without
evidence of external damage.
1. Remove the coil spring. For additional information, refer to Rear Suspension.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
4. Remove and discard the 4 stabilizer bar bracket upper and lower bolts.
5. NOTE: Support the wheel knuckle.
Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joint.
6. NOTICE: Do not damage the oil seal when removing the axle halfshaft from the differential.
NOTE: Support the halfshaft inner joint.
Using the Halfshaft Remover Tool, remove the halfshaft from the differential.
7. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the rear wheel hub assembly.
- Remove the halfshaft.
Installation
1. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 4588
2. Using the Axle Seal Protector, install the halfshaft into the differential.
3. If the axle is equipped with the oil seal protector, make sure the oil seal lip and seal protector are
correctly aligned.
4. Position the lower ball joint and install the lower ball joint nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the rear coil spring. For additional information, refer to Rear Suspension.
6. Install the 4 new stabilizer bar bracket upper and lower bolts.
- Tighten the lower bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- Tighten the upper bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
7. Install the wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the rear wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov >
10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov >
10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4597
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seals and Gaskets: > 10-21-11 > Nov >
10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4598
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4604
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: >
10-21-11 > Nov > 10 > A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal > Page 4605
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4606
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4607
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4608
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-21-11 Date: 101108
A/T - Fluid Leak At L/H Axle Shaft Seal
TSB 10-21-11
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK - SEAL - LEFT SIDE HALF SHAFT
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4609
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-9-4 to update the model years covered, Service Procedure, Part
List and Service Labor Time Standards.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner and 2010 Fusion, Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the left hand (LH) halfshaft seal. This may be
due to seal and/or bushing wear caused by the halfshaft sur[ace finish.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
A service kit is now available for Escape and Mariner vehicles which has all the parts needed
including the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint housing, and eliminates the need for halfshaft
assembly replacement. There are additional parts in the kit (halfshaft boot and small clamp) that
are not required for this repair.
Fusion and Milan vehicles still require replacement of the halfshaft assembly.
2009-2010 Escape And Mariner
1. Replace the LH halfshaft seal. Refer to WSM Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
2. Clamp the LH halfshaft in a soft-jawed vise. Use care not to damage the boot or component
damage may occur.
3. Remove and discard the one (1) large inboard CV boot clamp. (Figure 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4610
4. Remove the inboard CV joint housing and discard. (Figure 2)
5. Push the boot back and remove all the grease from the boot.
6. Install half of the packet of grease (supplied with kit) into the new CV joint housing. Inject the
other half of grease into the boot on the CV tripod
joint.
7. Install the new inboard CV joint housing on the CV tripod joint and new large inboard CV boot
clamp.
8. Insert a small, flat-blade screwdriver under the boot seat to allow the air to escape. Slide the
tripod joint in as far as it will go, then pull it out 0.787 in
(20 mm). Remove the screwdriver.
9. Using special service tool 205-343 (constant velocity joint boot clamp installer) or equivalent,
install the new CV boot clamp. (Figure 3)
2010 Fusion And Milan
1. Replace the LH halfshaft and seal. Refer to WSM, Section 307-01. When the halfshaft seal is
removed, visually inspect the transaxle case bushing for
wear.
a. If bushing is visually worn, replace the bushing in the transaxle case. Refer to WSM, Section
307-01.
b. If bushing is not visually worn; clean the area behind the halfshaft seal before installing the new
seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Seals and Gaskets, Drive
Axles > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seals and Gaskets: > Page
4611
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102111A 2009-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102111A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 1.7 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shafi And Seal (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
102111B 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.3 Hrs.
Replace The Left Side Half Shaft, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
102111B 2009-2010 Escape, 2.0 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The Left Side Half Shaft CV Joint Housing, Seal And Bushing (Do Not Use With
Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3A428 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4616
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4617
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4618
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4619
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 4620
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut >
Component Information > Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Center Support: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb > 11 >
Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4634
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Center Support: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Center Support: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4640
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive/Propeller Shaft: > 11-2-19 > Feb
> 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4649
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed
Rumble/Vibration
TSB 11-2-19
02/28/11
AWD - COLD TEMPERATURES - VIBRATION AT HIGHWAY SPEEDS AND/OR
VIBRATION/RUMBLE/EXCESSIVE EXHAUST NOISE AFTER A COLD START - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 6/13/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-16-2 to add a production fix date, update the Issue Statement
Service Procedure and Part List.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner AWD vehicles built on or before 6/13/2010 may
exhibit a highway speed vibration that is isolated to the rear driveshaft and/or a
vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise when in ambient temperatures of approximately -26
degrees Celsius (-15 degrees Fahrenheit) or lower. The vibration and/or noise will eventually
diminish once vehicle reaches normal operating temperature.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Vehicles exhibiting a vibration/rumble/excessive exhaust type noise, proceed to Step 1. For
vehicles with a highway speed driveshaft vibration only, skip to Step 2.
1. Replace all five (5) exhaust hangers. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00.
2. Replace the rear driveshaft center bearing assembly. Refer to Instruction Sheet included in the
kit, and Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 205-01.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110219A 2009-2010 Escape And 0.3 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace All Five (5) Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
110219B 2009-2010 Escape And 1.0 Hr.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive/Propeller Shaft: >
11-2-19 > Feb > 11 > Drivetrain/Exhaust - Highway Speed Rumble/Vibration > Page 4655
110219C 2009-2010 Escape And 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner AWD: Replace The Rear Driveshaft Center Bearing Assembly And Replace All Five (5)
Exhaust Hangers (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 D4
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4656
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Description and Operation
Driveshaft
NOTICE: All driveshaft assemblies are balanced. If undercoating the vehicle, protect the driveshaft
to prevent overspray of any undercoating material or an unbalanced condition may occur.
The driveshaft consists of:
- spot-welded balance weights.
- a front CV joint at the Power Transfer Unit (PTU).
- a center support bearing assembly with a ground strap.
- staked and snap ring type U-joints.
- U-joint cap straps for the center U-joint.
- square flanged rear U-joint.
The driveshaft is a 2-piece shaft which transfers the rotational torque from the PTU to the rear drive
axle. The driveshaft uses CV joints, U-joints and a center support for consistent operation through
varying lengths and angles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures
Driveline Angle Measurement
Driveline Angle Measurement
NOTE: This procedure does not apply to CV joints, flex couplers or double cardan joints that are
used in some driveshafts. This check is for single-cross and roller-style joints found in the
driveshafts.
NOTE: Prior to checking driveline angularity, inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
NOTE: An incorrect driveline angle can cause a vibration or shudder. For additional information,
refer to Vehicle Noise, Vibration, and Harshness.
NOTE: Driveline angularity is the angular relationship between the engine crankshaft, the
driveshaft and the rear axle pinion. Factors determining driveline angularity include ride height, rear
spring and engine mounts.
All vehicles
1. Carry out the following preliminary setup steps:
- Inspect the U-joints for correct operation.
- Park the vehicle on a level surface such as a drive-on hoist, or back onto a front end alignment
rack.
- Verify the curb position ride height is within specifications with the vehicle unloaded and all of the
tires are inflated to their normal operating pressures.
- Calibrate the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor by placing it on a clean, flat level
section of the frame rail and press the ALT-ZERO button.
Vehicles with flat-flanged, split-pin or slip-flanged U-joints
2. NOTE: If equipped, remove the snap ring to allow access to the base of the U-joint cup. Make
sure the Anglemaster II Driveline
Inclinometer/Protractor is seated against the U-joint cup.
NOTE: Rotate the driveshaft until the flange U-joint cup is parallel with the floor. This will simplify
taking measurements.
To check the U-joint operating angle, install the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor.
Check and record the flange angle as angle A.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4659
3. Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the connecting
component. Record the measurement of the
component angle as angle B.
Multiple piece driveshafts
4. NOTE: Repeat this step for each center support bearing on the driveshaft.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the U-joint snap ring, if equipped, for these measurements.
Using the Anglemaster II Driveline Inclinometer/Protractor, measure the slope of the components in
front and behind the center support bearing U-joint in the area indicated. Record the front
component as angle A and the rear component as angle B.
All vehicles
5. NOTE: When 2 connected components slope in the same direction, subtract the smallest
number from the larger number to find the U-joint
operating angle. When 2 connected components slope in the opposite direction, add the
measurements to find the U-joint operating angle.
Calculate the difference in the slope of the components to determine the U-joint operating angle.
- The U-joint operating angle is the angle formed by 2 yokes connected by a cross and bearing kit.
Ideally, the operating angles on each connection of the driveshaft must: be equal or within one degree of each other.
- have a 3 degree maximum operating angle.
- have at least one-half of one degree continuous operating angle.
6. If the angle is not within specifications, repair or adjust to obtain the correct angle. Inspect the
engine mounts, transmission mounts, center support
bearing mounting, rear suspension, rear axle, rear axle mounting or the frame for wear or damage.
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Driveshaft Runout and Balancing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4660
Driveshaft Inspection
NOTE: Driveline vibration exhibits a higher frequency and lower amplitude than high-speed shake.
Driveline vibration is directly related to the speed of the vehicle and is noticed at various speeds.
Driveline vibration can be perceived as a tremor in the floorpan or heard as a rumble, hum or
boom.
NOTE: Refer to Specifications for all runout specifications.
1. NOTE: Do not make any adjustments before carrying out a road test. Do not change the tire
pressure or the vehicle load.
Carry out a visual inspection of the vehicle. Operate the vehicle and verify the condition by
reproducing it during the road test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Visual Inspection
- The concern should be directly related to vehicle road speed, not affected by acceleration or
deceleration or could not be reduced by coasting in NEUTRAL.
2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
- The driveshaft should be kept at an angle equal to or close to the curb-weighted position. Use a
twin-post hoist or a frame hoist with jackstands.
3. Inspect the driveshaft for damage, undercoating or incorrectly seated U-joints. Rotate the
driveshaft slowly by hand and feel for binding or end
play in the U-joint trunnions. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to
Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints. Inspect the slip yoke splines for any galling, dirt, rust or
incorrect lubrication. Clean the driveshaft or install new U-joints as necessary. Install a new
driveshaft if damaged. After any corrections or new components are installed, recheck for the
vibration at the road test speed. -
If the vibration is gone, test drive the vehicle.
- If the vibration persists or the driveshaft passes visual inspection, measure the driveshaft runout.
Driveshaft Runout
1. Install the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Rotate the driveshaft by turning the axle
and measure the runout at the front, the center and
the rear of the driveshaft. If the runout exceeds 1 mm (0.040 in) at the front or center, install a new driveshaft.
- If the front and center is within 1 mm (0.040 in), but the rear runout is not, index-mark the rear
runout high point and proceed to Step 2.
- If the runout is within 1 mm (0.040 in) at all points, recheck for vibration at road test speed. If the
vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in
this procedure.
2. NOTE: Circular pinion flanges can be turned in 90 degree or one-fourth increments. Half-round
pinion flanges are limited to 2 positions.
Index-mark the driveshaft to the pinion flange. Disconnect the driveshaft and rotate it 180 degrees.
Reconnect the driveshaft. Recheck the runout at the rear of the driveshaft.
- If the runout is still over specification, mark the high point and proceed to Step 3.
- If the runout is within specification, check for the vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration is
still present, balance the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this
procedure.
3. Excessive driveshaft runout can originate in the driveshaft itself or from the pinion flange. To find
the source, compare the 2 high points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4661
previously determined. If the index marks are close together, within 25 mm (1 in), the driveshaft is eccentric. Install a new
driveshaft.
- If the marks are on opposite sides of the driveshaft, 180 degrees apart, the slip yoke or pinion
flange is responsible. Check the pinion flange runout. If the pinion flange runout exceeds
specifications, a bent pinion is indicated.
- If the pinion flange and pinion runouts are within specifications, road test and check for the
vibration at the road test speed. If the vibration persists, balance the driveshaft. For additional
information, refer to Driveshaft Balancing in this procedure.
Driveshaft Balancing - Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH
Analyzer (Vetronix)
All vehicles
1. Install the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix) to
the vehicle.
2. Working under the vehicle, install an accelerometer. The accelerometer can be attached and
mounted near either the transmission or differential
end of the driveshaft.
3. Clean an area of the driveshaft and install the reflective tape, then install the photo-tachometer
sensor. The sensor should be placed at
approximately a 20-degree angle from perpendicular to the surface of the reflective tape. Make
sure the sensor does not get moved during the balance procedure.
1. Reflective tape.
2. Photo-tachometer sensor.
4. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a driveshaft balance test with the driveshaft
unmodified.
Vehicles with tapped pinion flanges
5. Label the tapped holes in the pinion flange numerically, starting at the top hole as 1. Mark the
remaining holes 2, 3 and 4. Label in the direction of
rotation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4662
6. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a second test with the 12 mm (0.47 in) test
weight set screw in the No. 1 hole, previously marked on the pinion flange.
7. Remove the test weight, then install the weight combination directed by the Mastertech(R)
Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH
Analyzer (Vetronix).
Vehicles without tapped pinion flanges
8. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a second test with a test weight. Using a metal
band, secure the test weight to the end of the driveshaft. The weight should be placed at the end of
the driveshaft tube, as close to the tube-to-yoke weld seam as possible. Mark the location of the
test weight on the driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Tube-to-yoke weld seam.
3. Driveshaft pinion flange.
- Select the test weight based on driveshaft size. Larger driveshafts use 10 g (0.353 oz). Smaller
driveshafts use 5 g (0.176 oz).
9. Remove the test weight, then install the recommended weight at the position directed by the
Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance
and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix). Using a metal band and epoxy, secure the test weight to the
driveshaft, as shown in the figure below.
1. Test weight.
2. Measure in this direction.
3. Driveshaft diameter.
4. Directional rotation.
5. Balance weight relative to test weight centerline.
- The results are displayed with respect to the location to where the test weight was placed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4663
All vehicles
10. Using the Mastertech(R) Series MTS 4000 Driveline Balance and NVH Analyzer (Vetronix), run
a third test to verify the repair.
Driveshaft Balancing - Hose Clamp Method
1. Install 1 or 2 hose clamps on the driveshaft, near the rear. Position of the hose clamp head(s)
can be determined through trial and error.
2. Mark the rear of the driveshaft into 4 approximately equal sectors and number the marks 1
through 4. Install a hose clamp on the driveshaft with its
head at position No. 1, as shown in the figure below. Check for vibration at road speed. Recheck
with the clamp at each of the other positions to find the position that shows minimum vibration. If 2
adjacent positions show equal improvement, position the clamp head between them.
3. If the vibration persists, add a second clamp at the same position and recheck for vibration.
4. If no improvement is noted, rotate the clamps in opposite directions, equal distances from the
best position determined in Step 2. Separate the
clamp heads about 13 mm (1/2 in) and recheck for vibration at the road speed.
5. Repeat the process with increasing separation until the best combination is found or the vibration
is reduced to an acceptable level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4664
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement
Driveshaft
Driveshaft
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The Escape Hybrid driveshaft is longer than the driveshaft in the Escape/Mariner and is not
interchangeable.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the ground strap bolt.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
3. NOTICE: Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and
washers or damage to the vehicle may
occur.
Remove and discard the 6 CV joint-to-Power Transfer Unit (PTU) flange bolts and 3 washers.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
5. NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap
straps or damage to the vehicle may
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller
Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4665
occur.
NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement cap strap bolts from the
production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location.
Remove and discard the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the driveshaft.
7. NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange. Install new bolts.
Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft-to-pinion flange bolts.
- To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
8. With the help of an assistant, remove the center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
9. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index
the driveshaft. For additional information, refer
to Differential Assembly &/or Axle Shaft Assembly &/or Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation
Universal Joint: Description and Operation
Universal Joints
The center and rear joints consist of:
- a lubed-for-life design that requires no periodic lubrication.
- equipped with nylon thrust washers, located at the base of each bearing cup, which control end
play, position the needle bearings and improve grease movement.
- staked in place U-joints are not serviced individually. If worn or damaged, install a new driveshaft
assembly.
- snap ring type U-joints can be replaced if worn or damaged.
The U-joints allow the speeding up and slowing down of the driveshaft as the angularity of the
driveshaft changes.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4669
Universal Joint: Service and Repair
Driveshaft Universal Joint - Snap Ring Type
Disassembly
1. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft See: Drive/Propeller
Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
2. NOTICE: Do not, under any circumstance, clamp the driveshaft assembly in the jaws of a vise or
similar holding fixture. Denting or
localized fracturing may result, causing driveshaft failure during vehicle operation.
Place the driveshaft on a suitable workbench. Do not damage the tube.
3. NOTE: If the components are not marked and therefore installed incorrectly, driveshaft
imbalance can occur.
Index-mark the driveshaft components.
4. Remove and discard all 4 of the snap rings.
5. Place the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover in a vise.
6. NOTE: If necessary, use a pair of pliers to remove a bearing cup that fails to press out all the
way.
Remove the bearing cups and the driveshaft slip yoke.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4670
1. Position the driveshaft slip yoke in the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover.
2. Press out a bearing cup.
3. Rotate the driveshaft slip yoke 180 degrees.
4. Press on the U-joint spider to remove the remaining bearing cup.
5. Remove the driveshaft slip yoke.
7. Repeat steps to remove the remaining bearing cups and the U-joint spider from the driveshaft
yoke.
8. NOTE: Inspect the bearing cup bores and retaining ring grooves. Remove any rust or other
surface irregularities.
Inspect the bearing cup bores of the driveshaft slip yoke and driveshaft yoke. Make sure that the
bearing cup bores are clean and smooth.
Assembly
1. NOTE: Install the U-Joint Kits as complete assemblies only. Do not mix components from other
U-Joint Kits.
NOTE: Lubricate the driveshaft slip yoke and driveshaft yoke bearing cup bores with grease before
installing the bearing cups.
Install a new U-joint spider and bearing cup.
1. Start a new bearing cup in the driveshaft yoke.
- Check the needle bearings for correct positioning.
2. Position the new U-joint spider in the driveshaft yoke.
3. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, press the bearing cup to just below the snap
ring groove.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4671
2. NOTICE: Never mix yellow and black snap rings on opposing sides or damage to the component
can occur.
Remove the shaft from the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover and install a new yellow snap
ring.
3. Repeat steps to install the new bearing cup and snap ring on the opposite side of the driveshaft
yoke.
- If the yellow snap ring will not seat in the snap ring groove, install the black snap rings.
4. Install the driveshaft slip yoke and new bearing cup.
1. Align the index marks made during disassembly and install the driveshaft slip yoke on the U-joint
spider.
2. Start a new bearing cup in the driveshaft slip yoke.
- Check the needle bearings for correct positioning.
3. Position the assembly in the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover.
4. Press the bearing cup to just below the snap ring groove.
5. Remove the driveshaft from the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover and install a new yellow
snap ring.
6. NOTICE: Never mix yellow and black snap rings on opposing sides or damage to the component
can occur.
Repeat steps to install the new bearing cup and snap ring on the opposite side of the driveshaft slip
yoke.
- If the yellow snap ring will not seat in the snap ring groove, install the black snap rings.
7. NOTICE: Do not strike the bearings or damage to the component can occur.
A sharp rap on the driveshaft yoke with a brass or plastic hammer will seat the bearing cups.
8. Rotate the driveshaft yoke to make sure the U-joints are free to rotate easily, without binding,
before installing the driveshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Universal Joint,
Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 4672
9. Install the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Driveshaft See: Drive/Propeller
Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Install the flexplate and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to......
..............................................................................................................................................................
.....................50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to...............................................................................
..........................................................................................................80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Stage 3:
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
.........................................112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page
4676
Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection
Flexplate Inspection
1. Inspect the flexplate for:
1. any cracks.
2. worn ring gear teeth.
3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Flex Plate: Procedures
Flexplate Inspection
1. Inspect the flexplate for:
1. any cracks.
2. worn ring gear teeth.
3. chipped or cracked ring gear teeth.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4679
Flex Plate: Removal and Replacement
Flexplate
Flexplate
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the automatic transaxle. For additional information, refer to Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems.
3. Remove the 6 bolts and the flexplate.
Installation
1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flexplate and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
2. Install the automatic transaxle. For additional information, refer to Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems.
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal - Exploded View
Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4680
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications
Flywheel: Specifications
Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to......
..............................................................................................................................................................
.....................50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Stage 2: Tighten to...............................................................................
..........................................................................................................80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Stage 3:
Tighten to..............................................................................................................................................
.........................................112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4684
Flywheel: Testing and Inspection
Flywheel Inspection
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage
to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to
Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave
cylinder. For additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle.
5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper.
6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If
spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle.
7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate.
- Discard the clutch disc.
8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary.
- Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or
discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery cloth.
- Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or
discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery
cloth.
9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for
scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel.
10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and
counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction
control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4685
11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new
dual mass flywheel if necessary.
12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction
control plate is off center or damaged.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational
freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17.
13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary
mass notches.
14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel.
15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay.
Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual
mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the
freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary
mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the
dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay
exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4686
18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal
spring operation using the following Steps 19 through
21.
19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The
secondary mass should begin to engage the internal
spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should
continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary
mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise.
The secondary mass should begin to engage the
internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass
should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the
secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using
the following Steps 23 and 24.
23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable.
Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface.
- Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4687
24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel
should not be discarded based on this movement.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bushing
for wear and install new as necessary.
- Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass.
- Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the
secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge.
- Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any
deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass
flywheel.
25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block.
1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new
dowel pins as necessary.
2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new
plates as necessary.
3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as
necessary.
26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face.
- Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged.
27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking
compound or rust and clean as necessary.
28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts.
Loosely install the dual mass flywheel.
29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4688
30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Install the clutch disc and pressure plate.
32. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures
Flywheel: Procedures
Flywheel Runout Check
Flywheel Runout Check
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid. Use a dry cloth only or
damage to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed. For additional information, refer to the Flywheel
Inspection procedure in Engine.
Flywheel Inspection
Flywheel Inspection
NOTICE: Do not clean the dual mass flywheel with any kind of fluid, use a dry cloth only or damage
to the dual mass flywheel may occur.
NOTICE: Do not clean the gap between the primary and secondary mass. Only clean the bolt
connection surface and the clutch surface or damage to the flywheel may occur.
1. Check the transaxle fluid level and fill to the correct level as necessary.
2. With the engine operating at idle and the transaxle in NEUTRAL, listen and check for
unacceptable noise. Determine if any unacceptable noise is
reduced when the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. If unacceptable noise is identified, remove the transaxle. For additional information, refer to
Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
4. Inspect the clutch slave cylinder for leaks. If a leak is identified, install a new clutch slave
cylinder. For additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle.
5. Inspect the sliding surfaces of the clutch release hub and bearing. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper.
6. Inspect the transaxle input shaft for spline wear, scoring or burrs. Any scoring or burr should be
removed with a fine grade of emery paper. If
spline wear is identified, install a new transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual
Transmission/Transaxle.
7. NOTE: The clutch disc should be discarded due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Remove the clutch disc and pressure plate.
- Discard the clutch disc.
8. Inspect the clutch pressure plate and diaphragm spring segments and discard as necessary.
- Inspect the clutch pressure plate for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Any minor scoring or
discoloration should be removed with a fine grade
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4691
of emery cloth.
- Inspect the clutch diaphragm spring segments for damage, uneven height, scoring, cracks or
discoloration. Any minor scoring or discoloration should be removed with a fine grade of emery
cloth.
9. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be machined.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel surface for
scoring, cracks, discoloration or damage. If any of these conditions exist, install a new flywheel.
10. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise and
counterclockwise until the dual mass flywheel friction
control plate is centered between the secondary mass notches.
11. Inspect the dual mass flywheel friction control plate for damage or melting and install a new
dual mass flywheel if necessary.
12. NOTE: The dual mass flywheel rotational freeplay inspection cannot be carried out if the friction
control plate is off center or damaged.
With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel rotational
freeplay using the following Steps 13 through 17.
13. Check that the dual mass flywheel friction control plate is centered between the secondary
mass notches.
14. Place a reference mark on the secondary mass of the dual mass flywheel.
15. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass clockwise to the end of the freeplay.
Place a reference mark on the primary mass of the dual
mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
16. Using light hand pressure, rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise to the end of the
freeplay. Place a second reference mark on the primary
mass of the dual mass flywheel, in line with the reference mark on the secondary mass.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4692
17. Measure the rotational freeplay XX between the 2 reference marks on the primary mass of the
dual mass flywheel. If the rotational freeplay
exceeds 19 mm (0.750 in), install a new dual mass flywheel.
18. With the dual mass flywheel installed on the engine, inspect the dual mass flywheel internal
spring operation using the following Steps 19 through
21.
19. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
20. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass clockwise. The
secondary mass should begin to engage the internal
spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass should
continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the secondary
mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
21. Using a suitable long screwdriver or bar, firmly rotate the secondary mass counterclockwise.
The secondary mass should begin to engage the
internal spring past the freeplay movement of 19 mm (0.750 in) maximum. The secondary mass
should continue to rotate and engage the internal spring with increasing spring pressure. If the
secondary mass does not rotate, install a new dual mass flywheel.
22. Inspect the dual mass flywheel when removed from the engine and placed on a bench, using
the following Steps 23 and 24.
23. NOTE: Blocks must be placed under the dual mass flywheel to make sure it is level and stable.
Remove the dual mass flywheel and place it on a firm and level surface.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4693
- Discard the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts.
24. NOTE: Axial movement of the secondary mass flywheel is normal and the dual mass flywheel
should not be discarded based on this movement.
Using the Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture, inspect the dual mass flywheel hub bushing
for wear and install new as necessary.
- Place a dial indicator gauge at a point on the outer upper surface of the secondary mass.
- Using light hand pressure, press downward at the opposite point on the outer upper surface of the
secondary mass and note the deflection on the dial indicator gauge.
- Repeat this measurement at 120 degree intervals around the dual mass flywheel and note any
deflection. If the deflection exceeds 1.5 mm (0.060 in) at any point, install a new dual mass
flywheel.
25. Inspect the rear face of the engine block.
1. Make sure that the 2 engine dowel pins are correctly installed and are not damaged, install new
dowel pins as necessary.
2. Inspect the upper and lower engine block rear face plates for damage or warping and install new
plates as necessary.
3. Inspect the crankshaft flange for residual thread locking compound or rust, and clean as
necessary.
26. Inspect the transaxle mounting face.
- Make sure that the 2 dowel pin holes are not elongated or damaged.
27. Inspect the dual mass flywheel crankshaft mounting flange for residual thread locking
compound or rust and clean as necessary.
28. NOTE: Install new dual mass flywheel retaining bolts.
Loosely install the dual mass flywheel.
29. Install the Flywheel Holding Tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4694
30. Tighten the dual mass flywheel retaining bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
31. NOTE: A new clutch disc should be installed due to possible hub spline wear or friction material
wear.
Install the clutch disc and pressure plate.
32. Install the transaxle. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4695
Flywheel: Removal and Replacement
Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal - Exploded View
Lower End Components - Exploded View, Flexplate, Flywheel and Crankshaft Rear Seal
Flywheel
Flywheel
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the manual transaxle and clutch. For additional information, refer to Clutch, M/T and
Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
3. Remove the 6 bolts and the flywheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Procedures > Page 4696
Installation
1. NOTE: Special bolts are used for installation. Do not use standard bolts.
Install the flywheel and tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in 3 stages.
- Stage 1: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
- Stage 2: Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
- Stage 3: Tighten to 112 Nm (83 lb-ft).
2. Install the clutch and manual transaxle. For additional information, refer to Clutch, M/T and
Manual Transmission/Transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and
Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications
Manual Transaxle ................................................................................................................................
................................................. 2.4 quarts (2.3 liters)
NOTE: Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole
with the vehicle on a level surface.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4707
Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications
MANUAL TRANSMISSION FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil
Ford Part Number - XT-4-QGL
Ford Specification - WSS-M2C203-A1 and GL-4
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 4708
Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair
Transaxle Draining and Filling
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid.
3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug.
Install the drain plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
4. Remove the fill level inspection plug.
5. Fill the transmission with gear oil through the fill level inspection plug hole, until level with the fill
level inspection plug hole.
6. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug.
Install the fill level inspection plug.
- Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Halfshaft Seal
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed any time the halfshafts are removed. Failure to
install new halfshaft seals may result in transmission oil leak(s).
NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown, LH halfshaft oil seal similar.
1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints.
2. Using the Slide Hammer with the Bearing Cup Remover, remove the RH intermediate shaft oil
seal or the LH halfshaft oil seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T >
System Information > Service and Repair > Page 4712
Installation
1. Using the Output Shaft Seal Installer, install the halfshaft oil seal.
2. NOTICE: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the
LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal
protector may result in transmission oil leaks.
Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T >
Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever
Gearshift Lever
Removal
1. Remove the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly.
2. Remove the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips.
4. Carefully disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever.
5. Remove the 4 gearshift lever nuts.
6. Remove the gearshift lever.
Installation
1. Position the gearshift lever.
2. Connect the gearshift cables to the gearshift lever.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4721
3. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.
4. Install the 4 gearshift lever nuts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Adjust the gearshift cables. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle
&/or Clutch, M/T.
6. Install the floor console finish panel.
7. Install the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Gearshift Lever > Page 4722
Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot
Gearshift Lever Boot
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob is one assembly.
1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console.
2. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot has been removed for clarity.
Cut the gearshift lever knob crimp ring and discard.
3. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift lever boot assembly.
4. NOTICE: A fully seated knob will conceal the knurled section on the gearshift lever. Failure to
fully seat the gearshift knob may cause
gearshift lever boot damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new gearshift lever knob crimp ring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Gearshift Cable Adjustment
1. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console and push the mounting flange down
through the console opening.
2. Carefully pry the floor console finish panel from the floor console.
3. Disengage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud.
4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the
ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear,
and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud.
Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable.
5. With the shifter and the transmission in 3rd or 4th gear, engage the primary shift cable lock.
6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock.
7. Install the floor console finish panel.
8. Install the gearshift lever boot.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4727
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
Gearshift Cables
Removal
1. NOTE: Carefully disconnect the spring clip from the cable end. It can become unfastened from
the cable.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly.
- Pull the spring clip out of the groove, lift upward and rotate the clip 90 degrees.
2. NOTE: Carefully pry the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket.
Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket.
3. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
4. Remove the Restraints Control Module (RCM). For additional information, refer to Restraint
Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4728
5. Disconnect the Smart Junction Box (SJB) electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical
connectors.
6. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever assembly.
7. Remove the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts.
8. Remove the gearshift cables.
- Pull the gearshft cables into the vehicle. Using an assistant, carefully lift the LH floor duct, pull the
cables under the duct and remove from the vehicle.
Installation
1. NOTE: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on the
grommet is pointing down.
Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel.
2. Connect the selector cable.
3. Connect the shift cable.
4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift
Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4729
5. NOTE: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated.
Install the 2 gearshift cable clips.
6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly.
7. Connect the SJB electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors.
8. Adjust the gearshift cables. For additional information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle
&/or Clutch, M/T.
9. Install the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
10. Install the RCM. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Manual Transmission
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Transaxle Support Insulator - LH
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL). For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
3. Using the Engine Support Bar and Adapters, support the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4734
4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. Remove the through bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator.
- To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Transaxle Front Support Insulator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4735
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Using the Engine Support Bar and Adapters, support the engine.
3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember.
1. Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
2. Remove the splash shield screw.
3. Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and the nut.
- To install, tighten bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4736
4. Remove the crossmember.
4. Remove the through bolt and the transaxle front support insulator.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Manual Transmission > Page 4737
Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Transaxle Rear Support Insulator
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts.
- To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through bolt and washer.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator.
6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle rear support insulator bracket.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor,
M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Power Take-Off > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Power Take-Off: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Take-Off (PTO) Switch and Circuits
The PTO circuit is used by the PCM to disable some of the OBD monitors during PTO operation.
The PTO switch is normally open. When the PTO unit is activated, the PTO switch is closed and
battery voltage is supplied to the PTO input circuit. This indicates to the PCM that an additional
load is being applied to the engine. The PTO indicator lamp illuminates when the PTO system is
functioning correctly and flashes when the PTO system is damaged.
When the PTO unit is activated, the PCM disables some OBD monitors which may not function
reliably during PTO operation. Without the PTO circuit information to the PCM, false DTCs may be
set during PTO operation. Prior to an inspection/maintenance (I/M) test, operate the vehicle with
the PTO disengaged long enough to successfully complete the OBD monitors.
PTO Circuits Description
The 3 PTO input circuits are PTO mode, PTO engage, and PTO RPM.
The PTO engage circuit is used when the operator is requesting the PCM to check the needed
inputs required to initiate the PTO engagement.
The PTO RPM circuit is used when the operator is requesting additional engine RPM for PTO
operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4749
Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4750
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position
(BPP) Switch
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position
(BPP) Switch > Page 4757
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive.
Typical Stalk Mounted TCS
Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4764
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4765
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4766
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4767
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4768
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4769
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page
4770
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4775
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4776
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4777
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4780
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4781
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4782
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of
Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with
this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4783
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4784
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4785
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft
Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4786
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors
and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Transfer Case Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4796
Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case >
Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 4797
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations
Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4801
Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4802
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Power Transfer Unit .............................................................................................................................
........................................... 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information
> Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 4807
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
POWER TRANSFER UNIT (PTU) Fluid (4X4)
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant.
Ford Part Number - XY-75W140-QL
Ford Specification - WSL-M2C192-A
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair
Output Flange
Removal
NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles.
1. Remove the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints.
2. NOTICE: Rotational torque of the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange must be
measured and recorded using a Nm
(lb-in) torque wrench for correct pinion bearing preload when reassembled.
Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture to hold the flange, remove and discard the pinion
nut.
3. NOTE: Index-mark the Power Transfer Unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange relative to the pinion
spline.
Using a suitable tool such as Snap-on(R) CJ2001, remove the PTU rear output shaft flange.
Installation
1. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange to engage the spline as previously marked. Install the
PTU rear output shaft flange.
2. NOTICE: Do not overtighten the pinion nut. Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded
with a Nm (in-lb) torque wrench.
Overtightening the pinion nut will damage the collapsible spacer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4811
NOTICE: If the rotational torque is less than specification, tighten the drive pinion nut in small
increments until it is within specification. Do not tighten the drive pinion nut more than 3 Nm (27
lb-in) or the collapsible spacer will be damaged. If the rotation torque is higher than specification,
the collapsible spacer has been compressed too far and a new collapsible spacer must be
installed.
Using the Drive Pinion Flange Holding Fixture, install a new pinion nut.
3. Install the driveshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations
Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4816
Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control
Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 4817
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal
Input Shaft Seal
Input Shaft Seal
1. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
2. Remove the bolt and the vent tube.
3. Remove the 12 bolts and the PTU cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4822
4. Remove the helical driven gear, idler gear and drive gear.
5. Using the PTU Linkshaft Seal Dust Shield Installer and Handle, remove the input shaft seal.
6. Clean the PTU sealing surface.
Intermediate Shaft Seal
Intermediate Shaft Seal
1. Remove the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
2. Using the Halfshaft Oil Seal Remover and Slide Hammer, remove the intermediate shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4823
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Installation
Input Shaft Seal
Input Shaft Seal
1. Using the Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, install the input shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4824
2. NOTICE: Make sure not to roll the inner input seal sealing lip when installing the drive gear. Use
a slight rotation to prevent damaging
the inner input seal.
Install the helical gears in the following sequence.
1. Install the drive gear.
2. Install the idler gear.
3. Install the driven gear.
3. NOTE: The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of oil
before applying new sealant.
Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of silicone sealant to the sealing surface of the PTU cover. Install the
PTU cover and tighten the 12 PTU cover bolts in a star pattern. Tighten to 32 Nm (24 lb-ft).
4. Install the vent tube and the bolt.
- Tighten to 14 Nm (124 lb-in).
5. Install the PTU. For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transfer
Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
Intermediate Shaft Seal
Intermediate Shaft Seal
1. Using the Handle and PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, install the intermediate shaft seal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System
Information > Service and Repair > Removal > Page 4825
2. Install the Power Transfer Unit (PTU). For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit
(PTU) See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Removal.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
Information > Locations
Transfer Case Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4829
Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4830
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4837
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4840
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4841
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4842
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4843
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4844
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4845
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4846
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4847
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4848
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4849
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4850
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4851
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4852
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4853
Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4854
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4855
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4856
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4857
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a
new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4858
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4859
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4860
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4861
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection
Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Page 4865
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4868
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4869
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4870
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4871
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4872
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4873
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4874
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4875
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4876
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4877
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4878
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4879
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4880
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4881
Shift Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4882
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4883
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4884
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4885
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a
new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4886
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4887
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4888
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4889
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection
Pinpoint Tests - OSC Equipped Vehicle
Any time an electrical connector or solenoid body is disconnected, inspect the connector for
terminal condition, corrosion and contamination. Also inspect the connector seal for damage.
Clean, repair or install new components as required.
Shift Solenoid Pre-Diagnosis
Use the following shift solenoid operation information when carrying out Pinpoint Test A.
Solenoid Operation Chart
a Solenoid state will change if vehicle is moving forward with the selector lever in the NEUTRAL
position.
CB = Clutch brake
NC = Normally closed
NH= Normally high
NL = Normally low
Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Failed ON" or "Failed OFF"
Failed ON/OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns and/or solenoid electrically,
mechanically or hydraulically stuck on/off.
Shift Solenoid A (SSA)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 4893
Shift Solenoid B (SSB)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
Shift Solenoid C (SSC)
Shift Solenoid D (SSD)
a Reverse is available if the solenoid circuit failed causing transaxle solenoid power control
solenoid to remove voltage to all solenoids.
b No engine braking.
Shift Solenoid E (SSE)
a No engine braking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Leadframe
Solenoid Body Leadframe
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4896
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4897
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
Installation
1. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
2. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4898
3. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
4. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
5. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4899
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4900
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4901
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoids
Solenoids
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4902
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4903
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: Be careful not to bend or twist the leadframe or the solenoid terminals when removing
the leadframe or damage can occur to
the leadframe or the solenoids.
Remove the 5 screws and the leadframe from the solenoids by lifting it straight up evenly.
13. Using a paint pen, number the solenoids and solenoid body to clearly mark which solenoid was
removed from which bore in the solenoid body.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4904
14. Remove the solenoid retaining pin(s).
15. Remove the solenoid(s) from the solenoid body.
Installation
1. Inspect the solenoid(s) for damage.
2. If a new solenoid is not being installed, install the solenoid(s) into the bore from which it was
removed.
3. If installing a new Variable Force Solenoid (VFS), determine the base part number of the
solenoid(s). The Torque Converter Clutch (TCC)
solenoid, Shift Solenoid A (SSA) and Shift Solenoid C (SSC) are all normally low pressure
solenoids. The Line Pressure Control (LPC) solenoid, Shift Solenoid B (SSB) and Shift Solenoid D
(SSD) are all normally high pressure solenoids. Shift Solenoid E (SSE) is not a VFS; it is an
ON/OFF solenoid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4905
4. If installing a new LPC solenoid, SSB orSSD, note the color of the electrical terminal area of the
solenoid. The color will be blue or green and the
solenoid can only be replaced with the same color solenoid. If a new solenoid with that color is not
available, install a new solenoid body, refer to Solenoid Body Assembly See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Solenoid Body Assembly.
5. Determine the part number suffix by checking the solenoid service band number etched on the
side of the solenoid. The band number is the third
digit on the side of the solenoid and will be a 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Use the following table to determine the
part number suffix and match the new solenoid base part number and suffix with the old solenoid.
Install the solenoid in the solenoid body.
6. Install the solenoid retaining pin(s).
7. Install the Valve Body Alignment Pins in the solenoid body to align the lead frame for installation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4906
8. Position the leadframe on the Valve Body Alignment Pins and carefully install the leadframe by
pushing straight down into the solenoids.
9. Remove the Valve Body Alignment Pins.
10. Install the 5 leadframe screws.
11. Connect the OSS sensor electrical connector.
12. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
13. Install the main control cover grommet.
14. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4907
15. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
16. Position the main control cover in place.
17. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4908
19. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
20. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
21. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4909
Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Service and Repair Solenoid Body Assembly
Solenoid Body Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4910
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4911
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4912
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
11. Remove the main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control transaxle separator plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4913
14. Remove the 2 bolts and separate the solenoid body from the main control valve body.
Installation
1. Install the solenoid body onto the main control valve body. Install the 2 bolts.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and Repair/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a
new main control assembly, continue with this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
case separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4914
Install the main control.
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4915
7. Install the main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is
on the inside of the main control cover or
a transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4916
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Solenoid Body Leadframe > Page 4917
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
17. Download a new solenoid body strategy to the PCM. For additional information, refer to
Solenoid Body Strategy See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Solenoid Body Strategy.
18. Using the scan tool, select module programming and programmable parameters under the tool
box icon and select transmission. Follow the
instructions displayed on the scan tool. There are fields to enter the solenoid body 7-digit
identification and 13-digit strategy recorded from the solenoid body.
19. NOTICE: If the solenoid body information is not correct, transaxle damage or driveability
concerns can occur.
Enter the solenoid body identification and strategy.
The scan tool will verify that the numbers entered are valid and display a message if the
information is not valid.
The scan tool checks to see if the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, the
technician may proceed with downloading the file to the PCM. If the file is not present, the scan tool
will need to be connected to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) server to download the file
onto the scan tool.
20. Verify that the file is present on the scan tool. If the file is present, go to Step 26. If the file is not
present, continue with this procedure.
21. Connect the scan tool to the PTS server.
The screen will display a progress bar when connecting to the network.
22. Follow the instructions on the network to download the strategy file to the scan tool.
The screen will display a progress bar when downloading the strategy file to the scan tool and
display a message if it is downloaded successfully.
23. If the scan tool cannot connect to the PTS server, download the file from www.motorcraft.com.
If the scan tool cannot download a strategy from the web site, a partial strategy will automatically
be downloaded.
24. Reconnect the scan tool to the vehicle.
25. Follow the instructions displayed on the scan tool.
26. If a new solenoid body was installed, compare the 7-digit identification and the 13-digit strategy
fields from the solenoid body to the replacement
solenoid body tag provided with the solenoid body service kit and place it over the existing
identification tag.
The scan tool will automatically download the strategy file or partial strategy file to the PCM and will
display a progress bar while downloading. The scan tool will display a message when it is finished
downloading the data that states that the file was downloaded successfully.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations
Transfer Case Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Page 4922
Transfer Case Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Page 4923
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations
Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4934
Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component
Information > Locations > Page 4935
Control Module: Service and Repair
4X4 Control Module
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the 4X4
control module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description
and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 4942
Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature,
the TCIL illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive.
Typical Stalk Mounted TCS
Typical Shift Selector Lever Mounted TCS
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair
Digital Transmission Range (TR) Sensor
Removal
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
3.0L engine
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
2.5L engine
3. Remove the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
All vehicles
4. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3.0L engine
5. Remove the retainers and the RH splash shield.
All vehicles
6. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
7. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4949
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3.0L engine
8. Drain the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and
Bleeding in Cooling System &/or Engine
Block Heater.
9. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the coolant pump housing and position it aside.
10. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing and position it aside.
All vehicles
11. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual control lever.
12. Remove the nut and the manual control lever.
13. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4950
15. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket nuts from the main control cover studs and
position the transmission fluid cooler tubes and
bracket aside.
16. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
17. Remove the main control cover grommet.
18. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4951
19. Remove the bolt and the TR sensor detent spring.
20. Using a small pair of Vise Grips(R) or an equivalent suitable tool, remove and discard the TR
sensor locking pin.
21. Remove the TR sensor in the following sequence.
1. Hold the TR sensor in place and slide the manual shaft outward until the manual shaft is out of
the transaxle case.
2. Remove the TR sensor from the transaxle, leaving the park pawl actuating rod attached to the
TR sensor.
Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: The TR sensor is easier to install into the transaxle from under the vehicle.
Install the TR sensor.
1. Install the TR sensor and park pawl actuating rod in the transaxle case.
2. Install the manual shaft in the transaxle case through the TR sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4952
2. Using a suitable tool such as center punch or a 5.5 mm (0.216 in) socket and a 101.6 mm (4 in)
extension 1/4-inch drive, install a new TR sensor
locking pin.
3. Install the TR sensor detent spring and bolt.
- Tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
5. Install the main control cover grommet.
6. Clean the main control cover sealing surface.
7. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4953
8. Position the main control cover in place.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the main control cover grommet to make sure that the seal is on the inside of
the main control cover. Transmission
fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control cover 8 bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
10. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tubes in place
and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
11. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
12. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4954
13. NOTICE: Make sure that when installing the manual control lever it is fully seated onto the
manual control lever shaft or damage to the
manual control lever shaft will occur and the lever will come loose.
NOTICE: Make sure to hold the manual control lever while tightening the manual control lever nut
or damage to the manual control lever and park components will occur.
Install the manual control lever and the nut.
- Tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
14. Connect the selector lever cable end to the manual control lever with the manual control lever
and selector lever in DRIVE. Check selector lever
cable adjustment. For additional information, refer to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle.
3.0L engine
15. Connect the lower radiator hose onto the thermostat housing.
16. Connect the upper radiator hose onto the coolant pump housing.
All vehicles
17. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 4955
3.0L engine
18. Install the RH splash shield and the retainers.
2.5L engine
19. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
3.0L engine
20. Install the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
21. Fill and bleed the cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System Draining,
Filling and Bleeding in Cooling System &/or
Engine Block Heater.
All vehicles
22. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts
Transmission Speed Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh
Engagement/Shifts
TSB 10-1-7
02/01/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - DTC P0720, P0722 HARSH ENGAGEMENTS OR SHIFTS, 5TH GEAR
DRIVE AWAY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 11/25/2009
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmissions and built on or before 11/25/2009 may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes
(DTCs) P0720 or P0722 DTC harsh engagement or shifts or starts in 5th gear from a stop. These
conditions may be caused by an open circuit in the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor or the main
control lead frame connector.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check the condition of the transmission fluid.
a. If the fluid dose not smell burnt, continue to Step 2 and follow the repair procedure to diagnose
the OSS circuit
b. If fluid smells burnt, follow normal Work Shop Manual (WSM) diagnosis to repair.
2. Follow WSM, Section 307-01A for Escape and Mariner or 307-01B for Fusion and Milan.
Perform pin point test (PPT) steps C through C7.
a. If instructed to replace the OSS sensor in PPT step C7, proceed to Step 3.
b. If the PPT does not lead to replacing the OSS, this procedure does not apply and proceed with
normal diagnostics.
3. Check the build date on the lead frame. (Figure 1) The lead frame build date is a Julian date.
The first two numbers are the year (09) and the next
three numbers are the day of the year.
a. If the build date matches one from the table, replace the lead frame and the OSS sensor. (Table
1)
(1) When replacing the lead frame, inspect the build date on the new part. Do not use a lead frame
with a build date listed in the table.
b. If the lead frame build date does not match one from the table, only replace the OSS sensor.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And
Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a
TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > A/T 6F35 - DTC P0720/P0722/Harsh Engagement/Shifts > Page 4960
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100107A 2009-2010 Escape, 2.4 Hrs.
Mariner: Replace The 0SS And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
100107A 2010 Fusion, Milan: 2.6 Hrs.
Replace The 055 And The Lead Frame If Necessary (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7H103 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4961
Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4962
Transmission Speed Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Remove the transmission fluid drain plug and allow the transmission fluid to drain.
4. Install the transmission fluid drain plug.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
6. Remove the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers from the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4965
7. Remove the 2 nuts, pull the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and tubes away from the
transaxle and position it aside.
8. NOTE: Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly.
Remove the 8 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the main control cover.
9. Disconnect the Transmission Range (TR) sensor electrical connector.
10. Disconnect the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) sensor electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4966
11. Remove the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
12. NOTICE: The main control should be handled with care, damage to the main control may
occur.
NOTE: Note the location of the different length bolts for assembly.
Remove the nut, 22 bolts and the main control.
13. Remove the main control-to-transaxle separator plate.
14. Remove the bolt and the OSS sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4967
Installation
1. Install the OSS sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. NOTE: If cleaning the main control assembly or inspecting the valves, refer to Main Control
Valve Body See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly of
Subassemblies/Main Control Valve Body. If installing a new main control assembly, continue with
this procedure.
Position the OSS and TR sensor wiring harnesses aside and install the main control-to-transaxle
separator plate.
3. NOTE: Make sure that the manual lever pin (part of the TR sensor) is correctly installed in the
manual valve.
Install the main control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4968
4. NOTICE: Make sure not to pinch the Output Shaft Speed (OSS) or Transmission Range (TR)
sensor wiring harnesses when installing the
main control or damage to the sensors can occur.
NOTE: Install the different length bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Install the main control valve body, the main control valve body nut and the 22 main control valve
body bolts. Tighten in a crisscross pattern.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. Route the OSS sensor wiring harness and connect the electrical connector.
6. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector.
7. Install the main control-to-main control cover grommet.
8. Clean the main control cover sealing surface and inspect for damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4969
9. Apply silicone to the main control sealing surface of the transaxle case.
10. Position the main control cover in place.
11. NOTICE: Inspect the main control-to-main control cover grommet to make sure that the seals is
on the inside of the main control cover.
Transmission fluid leak will occur.
NOTE: Install the stud bolts in the locations noted during disassembly.
Tighten the 8 main control cover bolts and 5 stud bolts.
- Tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
12. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket and transmission fluid cooler tube assembly
in place and install the 2 nuts.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4970
13. Connect the transaxle vehicle harness electrical connector.
14. Connect the transaxle electrical wiring harness retainers to the transmission fluid pan stud
bolts.
15. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
16. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 4971
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor
Removal
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the retainers and the LH splash shield.
3. Disconnect the Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) electrical connector, remove the bolt and the TSS
sensor.
Installation
1. Install the TSS sensor, the bolt and connect the TSS electrical connector.
- Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Install the LH splash shield and the retainers.
3. Fill with clean transmission fluid to the correct level.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair
Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top
of the transaxle.
Remove the VSS bolt.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal Angle Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake pedal bracket. For additional information, refer to Brake Pedal and Bracket Hybrid See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair
.
2. Remove and discard the 2 brake pedal angle sensor screws.
3. Remove the brake pedal angle sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new brake pedal angle sensor screws.
5. Carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic
Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams
Diagnostic Connector - ABS: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4987
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4988
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4989
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicle shown, hybrid vehicle similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles. The ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake
Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4990
2. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See:
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be
configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method).
All vehicles
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if a new ABS module is being installed.
Connect the scan tool and upload the module configuration from the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control
Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4994
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction.
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the
brake tubes.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
All vehicles
5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed.
Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. If a new ABS module was installed, download the module configuration information from the
scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
11. If a new ABS module and/or a new HCU was installed, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence
following the scan tool directions.
12. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4998
Traction Control Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4999
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5000
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior
Moulding / Trim.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5005
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5006
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5007
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5010
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5011
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5012
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5013
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5014
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5017
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5018
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5019
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5020
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5021
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed
Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5022
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately. For additional information, refer to Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5027
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5028
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5029
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5030
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap.
- Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5031
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5032
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap.
- Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
4. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair >
Component Bleeding > Page 5033
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. For additional
information, refer to Brake System Bleeding.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Brake Pedal Assy: Description and Operation
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
The hydraulic brake actuation system consists of the following components:
- Brake master cylinder
- Brake pedal and bracket assembly
- Brake tubes and hoses
The hydraulic brake system is diagonally split with the LH front and RH rear brakes on one circuit
and the RH front and LH rear brakes on the other circuit.
Hydraulic Brake Actuation
The brake pedal is connected to the power brake booster, which is connected to the brake master
cylinder. When the brake pedal is pressed, brake fluid is pushed from the master cylinder through
the double-walled steel tubes and flexible hoses to the front brake calipers and rear wheel
cylinders. The brake fluid enters the brake calipers and wheel cylinders, forcing brake pads and
shoes outward against the brake disc/drum friction surfaces, slowing or stopping rotation. When the
brake pedal is released, brake fluid pressure is relieved, returning the front and rear brake
components to the unapplied position.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5037
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal and Bracket
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch and speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch
plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the
switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.
2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster
push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin.
3. Disconnect the accelerator pedal electrical connector.
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper and lower nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 5038
6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly.
- Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the
brake booster studs.
8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch or the speed control deactivator
switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and
with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any
other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5044
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose.
8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5045
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip.
10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
11. Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Component Bleeding in Brakes and
Traction Control.
12. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5046
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5047
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake pad minimum thickness..............................................................................................................
........................................................3.0 mm (0.118 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5053
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Brake Pads
Brake Pads
Removal
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder
reservoir until it is half filled.
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
3. NOTICE: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can
occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
4. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5054
5. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
6. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
7. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary. For
additional information, refer to the Diagnosis and Testing
portion of Brakes and Traction Control. See: Testing and Inspection
10. NOTICE: Protect the piston and boots when pushing the caliper piston into the caliper piston
bores or damage to the piston or boots may
occur.
If installing new brake pads, using a C-clamp and worn brake pad, compress the brake caliper
piston into the brake caliper.
11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary. For additional information,
refer to the Diagnosis and Testing portion of Brakes
and Traction Control. See: Testing and Inspection
Installation
1. Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply
a light coat of specified lubricant to the 4 brake
pad contact points on the anchor plate.
2. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Disc Brake System - Exploded View > Page 5055
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
5. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
6. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
7. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
8. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
9. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
10. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
- Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Disc minimum thickness.............................................................................................................
........................................................24 mm (0.944 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures
Brake Disc Machining
NOTE: Do not use a bench lathe to machine the brake discs. Use an on-vehicle brake lathe only.
Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing,
operating or repairing the lathe.
NOTE: An on-vehicle brake lathe with an automatic runout adjustment feature is preferred.
However, if the lathe is not self adjusting, the lathe oscillation must be adjusted using a dial
indicator. The total indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The maximum indicated runout
should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in). If the runout adjustment (automatic or manual) is
carried out correctly prior to machining, then the final brake disc runout will be within specification,
and a runout measurement is not necessary after machining.
NOTE: Do not machine new brake discs.
NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct
adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe will make sure that these dimensions are within
specifications.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose may
occur.
NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube from the brake caliper.
Remove the bolts and position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly aside,
as required.
- Support the brake caliper using mechanic's wire.
3. Install the hub adapter using:
- four wheel nuts on a 4-stud wheel hub.
- five wheel nuts on a 5-stud wheel hub.
- six wheel nuts on a 6-stud wheel hub.
- four wheel nuts on a 7- or 8-stud wheel hub.
- five wheel nuts on a 10-stud wheel hub.
4. Install the cutting lathe.
5. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total
indicated runout target is 0.000 mm (0.000 in). The
maximum indicated runout should be no more than 0.050 mm (0.002 in).
6. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector/silencer.
7. NOTE: The depth of the cut should be between 0.10 and 0.40 mm (0.004 and 0.015 in). Lighter
cuts will cause the bit to heat up and wear faster.
Heavier cuts will cause poor brake disc surface finish.
Machine the brake disc.
8. Remove the lathe and the silencer.
9. Remove the wheel nuts and hub adapter.
10. Remove the metal shavings.
11. Measure the brake disc thickness.
- If the measurement is below the minimum specification, install a new brake disc. For additional
information, refer to Disc Brake System.
12. NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads if friction material is within specifications. For
additional information, refer to Specifications.
Position the brake caliper or brake caliper and anchor plate assembly.
- Install the bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5061
- For fastener torque specifications, refer to Disc Brake System.
13. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5062
Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Brake Disc
Brake Disc
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. For additional information, refer to Brake Caliper Anchor
Plate See: Brake Caliper/Service and
Repair/Brake Caliper Anchor Plate.
2. Remove the brake disc.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Backing Plate: Service and Repair
Brake Backing Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Wheel Cylinder See: Wheel
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable
assembly through the backing plate.
4. Remove the rear wheel hub. For additional information, refer to Rear Suspension.
5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate.
- To install, tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Drum: Specifications
Brake drum maximum diameter...........................................................................................................
..................................................256.3 mm (10.090 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5070
Brake Drum: Service and Repair
Brake Drum
Removal
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTICE: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can
result.
NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum
between the wheel studs.
If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes.
1. Move the brake shoe adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster.
2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to retract the brake shoes.
3. Remove the brake drum.
Installation
1. Using the Brake Drum Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
- Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside
face of the brake drum.
2. Adjust the rear brakes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See: Brake
Shoe/Adjustments.
3. Position the brake drum on the vehicle.
4. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications
Brake Shoe: Specifications
Brake shoe minimum thickness............................................................................................................
........................................................1.0 mm (0.039 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5074
Brake Shoe: Adjustments
Brake Shoe Adjustment
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Brake Adjustment Gauge, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum.
3. Position the Brake Adjustment Gauge on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly.
4. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service
and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5075
Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Brake Shoes
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always install new brake shoes or pads at both ends of an axle to reduce the
possibility of brakes pulling vehicle to one side. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
uneven braking and serious personal injury.
1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to
remove glazing and to provide an equal friction
surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions.
Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake Drum/Service
and Repair.
2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins.
3. Remove the upper return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the lower return spring.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
7. Remove the leading brake shoe.
- Using specified brake parts cleaner, clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing
plate.
- Apply a thin coat of the specified silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing
plate.
8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Adjustments.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Wheel Cylinder: Procedures
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
2. Remove the upper and lower return springs.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth
movement.
8. Install the upper and lower return springs.
9. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5080
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Brake
Shoe/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5081
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5082
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel
cylinder.
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the upper return spring.
3. Remove the lower return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
- Clean and dry the brake backing plate.
7. Remove the bleeder screw cap.
8. Remove the bleeder screw.
9. Remove the 2 dust boots.
10. Remove the 2 pistons.
11. Remove the 2 piston seals.
12. Remove the spring.
13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed.
Assembly
1. Install the spring.
2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals.
3. Install the 2 pistons.
4. Install the 2 dust boots.
5. Install the bleeder screw.
6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs.
9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5083
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of
smooth movement.
15. Install the lower return spring.
16. Install the upper return spring.
17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Brake
Drum/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Brake Shoe/Adjustments.
18. Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Master Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When a new brake master cylinder has been installed or the system has been emptied or
partially emptied, it must be primed to prevent air from entering the system.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Install short brake tubes onto the primary and secondary ports of the master cylinder with the
ends submerged in the brake master cylinder
reservoir.
3. Fill the brake reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
4. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air
bubbles.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5089
5. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes.
- Tighten the master cylinder brake tube fittings to specifications. Refer to Specifications.
Non-hybrid vehicles
6. Place a box-end wrench on the master cylinder bleeder screw and attach a rubber drain hose to
the bleeder screw. Submerge the free end of the
rubber hose into the master cylinder reservoir.
7. Fill the master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from the rubber hose, without air
bubbles.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
All vehicles
10. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake System Bleeding See: Brake
System Bleeding.
Brake Caliper
Component Bleeding
Brake Caliper
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5090
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Wheel Cylinder
Component Bleeding
Wheel Cylinder
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was
disconnected or installed new.
1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the bleeder screw and submerge the
free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
3. Loosen the bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains
pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder
screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5091
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
4. Tighten the bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
5. Apply brakes several times to verify correct brake operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5092
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding
Brake System Bleeding
Manual Bleeding - Non-Hybrid Vehicles Only
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all the dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap.
- Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5093
3. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Loosen the RR bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While an assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RR
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
5. Tighten the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber hose
and install the bleeder screw cap.
6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LR bleeder screw.
7. Remove the RF bleeder cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a rubber
drain hose to the RF bleeder screw and submerge
the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
8. Have an assistant pump and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal.
9. Loosen the RF bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant
maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RF
bleeder screw. Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out.
- Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary.
10. Tighten the RF bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to Specifications. Remove the rubber
hose and install the bleeder screw cap.
11. Repeat Steps 7 through 10 for the LF bleeder screw.
Pressure Bleeding
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5094
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: The Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding procedure must be carried out if the HCU or any
components upstream of the HCU are installed new.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
NOTE: Due to the complexity of the fluid path within the hybrid brake system, it is necessary to
pressure bleed this system.
1. Clean all dirt from the brake master cylinder filler cap and remove the filler cap.
- Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid.
2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers
of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the
instructions of the manufacturer when installing the adapter.
Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir, and attach the bleeder tank hose
to the fitting on the adapter.
3. NOTE: Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the
bleeding operation.
Open the valve on the bleeder tank.
- Apply 207-345 kPa (30-50 psi) to the brake system.
4. Remove the RR bleeder screw cap and place a box-end wrench on the bleeder screw. Attach a
rubber drain hose to the RR bleeder screw and
submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid.
5. Loosen the RR bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten
the RR bleeder screw to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. Remove the rubber hose.
6. Continue bleeding the rest of the system, going in order from the LR bleeder screw to the RF
bleeder screw, ending with the LF bleeder screw.
- Tighten the brake caliper and wheel cylinder bleeder screws to specifications. Refer to
Specifications.
7. Close the bleeder tank valve and release the pressure. Remove the tank hose from the adapter
and remove the adapter. Fill the reservoir with clean,
specified brake fluid and install the reservoir cap.
8. NOTE: On hybrid vehicles, the brake booster push rod has an elongated slot that attaches to the
brake pedal with a clevis pin. The elongated slot
allows for a small amount of pedal travel (free play) to occur without the brake pedal applying
pressure on the booster push rod. When performing a bleed procedure, it is important to push the
pedal through the air gap, so that the clevis pin is contacting the brake booster push rod. Except
when required by the scan tool, the ignition key must remain off during the bleed procedure to allow
minimal force required to push through the gap.
With the ignition off, press the brake pedal through the gap to seat the clevis pin against the brake
booster push rod and then confirm the pedal is firm.
- If the brake pedal feels spongy (soft), repeat the Pressure Bleeding procedure to remove any
remaining air from the system.
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Bleeding
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information
> Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 5095
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not allow the brake master cylinder to run dry during the bleeding operation. Master
cylinder may be damaged if operated without fluid, resulting in degraded braking performance.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Pressure bleeding the brake system is preferred to manual bleeding.
All vehicles
1. Follow the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system. For additional
information, refer to Brake System Bleeding.
2. Connect the scan tool and follow the ABS Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) bleeding instructions.
3. Repeat the Pressure Bleeding or Manual Bleeding procedure to bleed the system.
Hybrid vehicles
4. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper
Brake Caliper
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
NOTICE: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may
damage the high-voltage components.
NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTICE: If the anchor housing spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake
caliper or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTICE: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive
force or damage to the spring can occur.
NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
upper brake caliper cavity.
For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from
the lower brake caliper cavity.
3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper.
4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the
lower brake caliper cavity.
For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5100
- Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from
the upper brake caliper cavity.
5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper.
6. NOTE: The brake caliper and brake flexible hose are removed as an assembly.
Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
7. Remove and discard the retainer clip from the brake flexible hose.
8. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper
aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper.
10. Remove the brake flexible hose from the brake caliper.
Installation
1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate.
2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps.
- Tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first.
Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure:
1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity.
2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake
caliper cavity).
4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate.
5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate.
6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are
latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities.
7. NOTICE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur.
Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5101
8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted.
Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper.
- Tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. Position the brake flexible and install a new retainer clip.
10. Attach the brake tube fitting to the brake flexible hose.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
11. Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Component Bleeding in Brakes and
Traction Control.
12. Install the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5102
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Caliper > Page 5103
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Brake Caliper Anchor Plate
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTICE: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur.
Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside.
- Support the caliper using mechanic's wire.
3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information
> Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
BRAKE (and clutch - if equipped) FLUID
Ford Part Name - Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
Ford Part Number - PM-1-C (US)
Ford Specification - WSS-M6C62-A or WSS-M6C65-A1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5110
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5111
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5116
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Disc Brake System - Exploded View
Brake Flexible Hose
Brake Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 5117
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to surface may occur. If
brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with water.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip.
3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
4. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket.
5. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from the caliper.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install a new retaining clip.
- Bleed the brake caliper. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair
Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU)
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) assembly, it must be
configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method).
All vehicles
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if a new ABS module is being installed.
Connect the scan tool and upload the module configuration from the ABS module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock
Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5121
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) and the ACL outlet pipe. For additional information, refer to Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction.
3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
Vehicles with 3.0L engine
4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the
brake tubes.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
All vehicles
5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed.
Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover.
8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU.
- To install, tighten to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. If a new ABS module was installed, download the module configuration information from the
scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
11. If a new ABS module and/or a new HCU was installed, carry out the IVD Initialization sequence
following the scan tool directions.
12. Bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
Component Tests
Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition
1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder.
2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder.
3. NOTE: Make sure the outlet port plugs do not show signs of leakage.
Lightly apply the brakes and hold for 10 seconds. Release the brakes and then reapply with heavy
force. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak
and a new brake master cylinder must be installed. If brake pedal height is maintained, reinstall brake tubes and tighten to specifications. Refer to
Specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. Refer to Brake System Bleeding See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5126
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
Component Tests
Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting.
2. Apply and release the brakes.
3. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
- If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at multiple wheels, continue to Step 4.
- If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only one wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake
caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as
necessary.
4. Check the brake stoplamp switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is
not partially applied.
5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the
brake booster.
6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag.
- If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Assist.
- If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder. Refer to Hydraulic System, Brakes
&/or Brake Pedal Assy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5127
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
Brake System Inspection
Brake Pads
NOTE: It is not required to install new brake pads when the brake discs are machined.
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake pad friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require pad replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake pads. For additional information,
refer to Disc Brake System for front brake pads.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake pads.
For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front disc brakes.
- If the friction material shows taper wear that is not within specifications, install new brake pads
and verify the caliper guide pins are functioning correctly. For additional information, refer to Brake
Caliper Guide Pins inspection. See: Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake Shoes
Brake System Inspection
Brake Shoes
1. Inspect and measure the thickness of the brake shoe friction material. For additional information,
refer to Specifications.
- Minor surface cracks do not require shoe replacement, however, if there are missing chunks or
cracks in the lining through to the backing plate, install new brake shoes.
- If the thickness of the friction material is less than the specified thickness, install new brake
shoes.
- Verify that the mounting hardware is installed correctly and operating correctly. Install new
hardware as necessary.
- Verify that the backing plate contact points are free of corrosion that may cause binding. Clean or
install new as necessary.
- Verify correct brake shoe adjustment.
- For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Brake Discs
Brake System Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5128
Brake Discs
NOTICE: Using an impact tool without a torque socket will lead to unevenly tightened wheel nuts.
This causes brake disc on-vehicle lateral runout and brake roughness.
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake discs to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake discs and measure the brake disc thickness. Record the measurement, refer
to Specifications.
- If the brake disc is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake disc. For additional
information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brakes.
- If the measurement is below the minimum thickness specification, install a new brake disc. For
additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brakes.
- If the diagnosis has revealed vibration in the steering wheel, seat or pedal while braking that
varies with vehicle speed, machine the brake disc. Heavily scored brake discs, similar to that
caused by pads worn down to the backing plate, should also be machined. In order to machine,
discs must be above the minimum thickness specification. For additional information, refer to
Specifications and Brake Disc Machining See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and
Repair/Procedures.
Brake Drums
Brake System Inspection
Brake Drums
NOTE: It is generally not required to install new brake drums to address noise issues.
1. Inspect the brake drums and measure the brake drum diameter. Record the measurements,
refer to Specifications.
- If the brake drum is cracked or otherwise damaged, install a new brake drum.
- If the diameter measurement is more than the maximum specification, install a new brake drum.
- Heavily scored brake drums, similar to that caused by shoes worn down to the backing plate,
should be machined. In order to machine, drums must be below the maximum diameter
specification.
- For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Wheel Cylinders
Brake System Inspection
Wheel Cylinders
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5129
1. Inspect the wheel cylinders for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the wheel cylinder is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new wheel cylinder. For additional
information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Brake Calipers
Brake System Inspection
Brake Calipers
1. Inspect the brake calipers for leaks, damage to seals, and piston corrosion or binding.
- If the brake caliper is leaking or otherwise damaged, install a new brake caliper. For additional
information, refer to Disc Brake System for front brake calipers.
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
Brake System Inspection
Brake Caliper Guide Pins
1. The guide pins should slide with a reasonable amount of hand force. If the brake pads show
taper wear or the guide pins are difficult to move,
carry out the following steps. Disassemble the brake caliper guide pins and inspect the guide pins and guide pin bores for wear,
damage and corrosion. If bore is worn or damaged, replace the damaged component.
- Use a wire brush, rolled-up sandpaper or emery cloth to remove all corrosion and foreign material
from the caliper guide pin bores. Clean any remaining foreign material from the bores with brake
parts cleaner and compressed air.
- Assemble the caliper guide pins using new caliper seals, boots and guide pins. Use an ample
amount of the specified grease to lubricate the bores and guide pins.
- Inspect the brake pads.
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
Brake System Inspection
Brake Flexible Hoses and Tubes
NOTICE: Never use copper tubing. It is subject to fatigue, cracking and corrosion, which may result
in brake tube failure.
NOTE: Double-wall steel tubing is used throughout the brake hydraulic system. All brake tube
fittings must be correctly double flared to provide
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5130
strong, leakproof connections. When bending tubing to fit the underbody or rear axle contours, be
careful not to kink or crack the tube.
1. Inspect brake tubes for corrosion, cracks, leaks or any other signs of damage.
- If a section of the brake tube is damaged, the entire section must be installed with a new tube of
the same type, size, shape and length.
- When installing the hydraulic brake tubing, hoses or connectors, tighten all connections to
specifications. After installation, bleed the brake system. For additional information, refer to Brake
System Bleeding See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair/Brake System Bleeding.
2. Inspect the brake flexible hoses for cracks, leaks and swelling during brake application or any
other signs of damage.
- Install a new brake flexible hose if the hose shows signs of softening, cracking or other damage.
For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System for the front brake flexible hose or Drum
Brake System for the rear brake flexible hose.
Brake Master Cylinder
Brake System Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder
NOTE: During normal operation of the brake master cylinder, the fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir will fall during brake application and rise during release. The net fluid level (such
as after brake application and release) will remain unchanged. Fluid level will decrease with pad
wear.
NOTE: A trace of brake fluid will exist on the booster shell below the master cylinder mounting
flange. This results from the normal lubricating action of the master cylinder bore and seal.
1. Inspect the brake master cylinder for fluid leaks.
- Install a new master cylinder or brake fluid reservoir if signs of excessive leaking are present. For
additional information, refer to Hydraulic System, Brakes &/or Brake Pedal Assy.
- To check for correct brake master cylinder operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Brake Booster
Brake System Inspection
Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Inspect the brake booster for excessive corrosion or damage. Inspect the vacuum hoses for
leaks and kinks.
- Install a new brake booster if signs of excessive corrosion or damage is found. For additional
information, refer to Power Brake Assist.
- Repair or replace vacuum hoses as necessary.
- To check for correct brake booster operation, refer to Component Tests See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 5131
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster
Component Tests
Brake Booster (Non-Hybrid Vehicles)
1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster and connect a suitable vacuum/pressure
tester to the booster side of the check valve.
2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL.
- Allow the engine to reach normal operating temperature.
3. NOTE: Subtract approximately 4.0193 kPa (1 in-Hg) from the specified reading for every 304.8
m (1,000 ft) of elevation above sea level.
Verify that vacuum is available at the check valve with engine running at normal idle speed.
- The vacuum gauge should read between 51-74 kPa (15-22 in-Hg).
- If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step
5.
- If specified vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4.
4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that the specified vacuum is
available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and
the transmission in NEUTRAL. If specified vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step
5.
- If specified vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve
and refer to Engine to diagnose the no/low vacuum condition.
5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system.
6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the
brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts.
- If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly.
- If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Assist.
7. Operate the engine a minimum of 20 seconds at idle. Stop the engine and let the vehicle stand
for 10 minutes, then apply the brake pedal. The
brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest.
- If condition still exists, install a new brake booster. Refer to Power Brake Assist.
- If the brake pedal feels the same as noted with the engine operating, the check valve is
functioning properly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder
Brake Master Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from
the brake fluid reservoir.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
3. Disconnect the 2 brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder
ports.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5134
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the master cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
component bleeding.
- If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. For additional
information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5135
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector.
2. If equipped with a manual transmission, release the clamp and disconnect the clutch hose from
the brake fluid reservoir.
- Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose.
3. Remove the reservoir.
- Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir.
- Pull the reservoir upwards.
4. Remove and discard the 2 seals.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid.
- Bleed the master cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 5136
- If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. For additional
information, refer to Manual Transmission/Transaxle &/or Clutch, M/T.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Wheel Cylinder: Procedures
Wheel Cylinder Lubrication
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
2. Remove the upper and lower return springs.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
3. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
4. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
5. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
6. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply specified lubricant
around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
7. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and verify smooth
movement.
8. Install the upper and lower return springs.
9. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5141
Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Wheel Cylinder
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoes See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Shoe/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5142
Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul
Wheel Cylinder
Disassembly
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5143
has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination,
brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Removal is not necessary to disassemble, inspect, hone or overhaul the rear wheel
cylinder.
1. Remove the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the upper return spring.
3. Remove the lower return spring.
4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
5. Remove the retaining springs, the pins and the leading brake shoe.
6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
- Clean and dry the brake backing plate.
7. Remove the bleeder screw cap.
8. Remove the bleeder screw.
9. Remove the 2 dust boots.
10. Remove the 2 pistons.
11. Remove the 2 piston seals.
12. Remove the spring.
13. Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these
conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed.
Assembly
1. Install the spring.
2. Using clean brake fluid, lubricate and install the 2 piston seals.
3. Install the 2 pistons.
4. Install the 2 dust boots.
5. Install the bleeder screw.
6. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate.
7. Install the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly.
8. Install the leading brake shoe, the pins and the retaining springs.
9. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake
drum.
Install the self-adjuster and spring assembly.
NOTICE: Use only specified silicone based lubricant. Use of other lubricants may cause damage to
piston seals.
10. With the brake shoe return springs removed, push the leading shoe into the wheel cylinder until
the shoe bottoms out.
11. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5144
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
12. Push the trailing shoe into the wheel cylinder until the shoe bottoms out.
13. Pull back the wheel cylinder dust boot (opposite depressed shoe) and apply the specified
lubricant around the wheel cylinder piston.
- Reposition the wheel cylinder dust boot.
14. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, push the pistons side-to-side at least 3
times to distribute the lubricant and make sure of
smooth movement.
15. Install the lower return spring.
16. Install the upper return spring.
17. Install the brake drum. For additional information, refer to Brake Drum See: Drum Brake
System/Brake Drum/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment See:
Drum Brake System/Brake Shoe/Adjustments.
18. Bleed the wheel cylinder. For additional information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Parking Brake Cable: Procedures
Parking Brake Cable Tension Release
1. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake cable tension by pulling down on the
front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake
control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 in) x 100 mm (3.93 in) retainer pin can be
inserted.
2. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are
secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly.
To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5150
Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH
NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Procedures.
2. Remove the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs.
4. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5151
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH
Removal and Installation
1. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Procedures.
2. Remove the rear brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by
compressing the cable conduit locking tabs.
4. Compress the retaining clip and detach the parking brake cable from the exhaust support
bracket.
5. Remove the parking brake cable bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through
the brake backing plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5152
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Parking Brake Cable - Front
Parking Brake Cable - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the parking brake control. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake Control
See: Parking Brake Control/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
4. Remove the driver side front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
5. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by
releasing the locking tab.
7. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5153
8. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Control
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel.
2. Release the parking brake cable tension. For additional information, refer to Parking Brake
Cable Tension Release See: Parking Brake
Cable/Service and Repair/Procedures.
3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the
harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control
cover.
5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts.
- To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft).
7. Remove the parking brake control.
- Disconnect the front parking brake cable.
8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of
fasteners.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5157
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5161
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5162
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5163
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5168
Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation
Brake Booster
The power brake actuation system consists of the following components:
- Brake booster
- Brake booster check valve
- Brake booster travel sensor (hybrid vehicles)
- Brake booster vacuum sensor (hybrid vehicles)
- Brake booster vacuum supply hose
- Vacuum pump (hybrid vehicles)
Conventional brake booster
The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold to create a partial vacuum inside
the vacuum booster on both sides of the diaphragm. When the brake pedal is pressed, the booster
rod opens a valve, allowing air to enter the booster on one side of the diaphragm while sealing off
the opposite side. This increases pressure on that side of the diaphragm so that it helps push the
rod, which in turn pushes the piston in the master cylinder. As the brake pedal is released, the
valve seals off the outside air supply while opening the vacuum valve. This restores vacuum to
both sides of the diaphragm, allowing everything to return to its original position.
Active brake booster (hybrid vehicles)
The active brake booster uses vacuum supplied by an engine-mounted electronic vacuum pump
and is similar to a conventional vacuum assist brake booster with the addition of a brake booster
(vacuum) solenoid, a brake booster travel sensor and a vacuum sensor. If it is necessary to apply
the friction brakes, the ABS module will send a signal to the brake booster solenoid that is
proportional to the amount of brake torque requested. The booster solenoid will open to allow
vacuum to draw the booster diaphragm and push rod towards the master cylinder piston, building
hydraulic pressure. The brake booster vacuum sensor is used by the ABS module to monitor
vacuum maintained inside the brake booster. The brake booster travel sensor is used to monitor
the performance of the brake booster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5169
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair
Brake Booster
NOTE: Hybrid vehicle shown, gas vehicle similar.
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp
switch. This switch must be removed with
the brake pedal in the at-rest position. The switch plunger must be compressed for the switch to
rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal
apply) will result in damage to the switch.
Remove the stoplamp switch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 5170
2. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Any time the booster
push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new
booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used.
NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the
opposite end.
Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin.
3. Remove and discard the 4 brake booster nuts.
- To install, tighten the new nuts to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
4. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster.
Hybrid vehicles
5. Disconnect the vacuum sensor, booster solenoid and the booster travel sensor electrical
connectors.
All vehicles
6. Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts.
- To install, tighten new nuts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings.
Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward and remove the brake booster.
8. NOTICE: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp
switch. This switch must be installed with
the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position.
Installing this switch with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment
and may damage the switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Hybrid vehicles
9. Following the scan tool instructions, carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Vacuum Pump: Service and Repair
Brake Vacuum Pump
Vacuum Pump - Hybrid Vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS) coolant pump bolts and position the
pump aside.
- To install, tighten the bolts to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 lower A/C compressor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Pump, Brakes > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 5174
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the 2 A/C compressor bracket bolts and the bracket.
- To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. Disconnect the vacuum pump electrical connector.
6. Remove the vacuum pump bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. Remove the vacuum pump bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten the bolts to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Position the vacuum pump to release the clamp, detach the vacuum hose and remove the
vacuum pump.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Electronic Brake Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5179
Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5180
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5181
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module
NOTE: Non-hybrid vehicle shown, hybrid vehicle similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification.
Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions
will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal
injury.
WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call:
1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: Do not spill brake fluid on painted or plastic surfaces or damage to the surface may
occur. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash the surface with
water.
NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles. The ABS module and the Hydraulic Control
Unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly.
Hybrid vehicles
1. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) - Hybrid See:
Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
Non-hybrid vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic
Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5182
2. Remove the HCU. For additional information, refer to Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) See: Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Hydraulic
Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair.
3. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
All vehicles
5. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5187
Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake
Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5188
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Braking
Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Braking Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Brake Pedal Angle Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the brake pedal bracket. For additional information, refer to Brake Pedal and Bracket Hybrid See: Brake Pedal Assy/Service and Repair
.
2. Remove and discard the 2 brake pedal angle sensor screws.
3. Remove the brake pedal angle sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new brake pedal angle sensor screws.
5. Carry out the Multi-Calibration Routine. Follow the scan tool directions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5195
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5196
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking
Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5197
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations
Traction Control Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5201
Traction Control Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5202
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction
Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5203
Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair
Stability/Traction Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the lower Instrument Cluster (IC) center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior
Moulding / Trim.
2. Depress the 2 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5208
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5209
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5210
Wheel Speed Sensor: Locations Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5213
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5214
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5215
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5216
Wheel Speed Sensor: Diagrams Wheel Speed Sensor, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Wheel Speed Sensor, Left Front > Page 5217
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor - Front
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment.
Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are
located at right angles to the sensor wire.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5220
4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer.
5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the front wheel speed sensor.
9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5221
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. NOTICE: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the
grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need
to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects.
Remove the grommet from the body.
- When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a
small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at
right angles to the sensor wire.
3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer.
5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal.
Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5222
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor.
8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5223
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front
Removal
1. Remove the front halfshaft. For additional information, refer to Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints.
2. Using a suitable driver, remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring.
Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5224
1. Install the new ABS wheel speed sensor ring and the tools on the halfshaft as shown in the
previous illustration.
2. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring to the dimension as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel
Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 5225
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear
Removal and Installation
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut.
- To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles
5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired
separately. For additional information, refer to Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5232
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5233
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5234
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5237
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5238
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch
Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5248
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5254
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch >
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5255
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to
Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5260
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 5261
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
Battery Cable: Service and Repair
Battery Cables - 2.5L
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5266
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery Disconnect See: Service and
Repair/Battery Disconnect.
2. Remove the Air Cleaner (ACL) assembly. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
3. Remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
4. Position the generator B+ terminal cable aside.
5. Disconnect the generator harness retainer.
6. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover.
7. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
8. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Position the starter motor terminals aside.
10. Remove the battery ground cable bolt.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
11. Position the battery ground cable aside.
12. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the left rear of the engine.
13. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the middle of the intake runners.
14. Disconnect the pin-type retainer from the front of the engine.
15. Disconnect the clip retainer from the right front of the engine.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Page 5267
16. Disconnect the clip retainer from the left front of the engine.
17. Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
18. Open the Battery Junction Box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
19. Position the BJB terminal aside.
20. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector.
21. Disconnect the retainers fastening the battery cables to the battery tray.
22. Remove the battery cables.
23. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Alternator: Electrical Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5273
Alternator: Mechanical Specifications
General Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5274
Alternator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5275
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5276
Alternator: Description and Operation
Charging System
The charging system is a negative ground system consisting of:
- a generator with an internal voltage regulator.
- a charging system warning indicator.
- a battery.
- circuitry and cables.
- a PCM.
- a radial arm adapter (serviceable separately from the generator)
The generator is driven by the accessory drive belt. When the engine is started, the generator
begins to generate AC which is internally converted to DC. The DC is controlled by the voltage
regulator (located on the rear of the generator) and supplied to the battery. The PCM controls the
voltage regulation set point, working with the generator internal voltage regulator over 2 control and
communication circuits.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5277
Alternator: Service and Repair
Generator - 2.5L
Removal
NOTICE: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and internal
diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in component damage.
NOTE: The radial arm adapter is a serviceable item. Do not replace the generator if the radial arm
adapter is the only concern.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5278
2. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the 5 bolts, 1 pushpin and the RH lower splash shield.
4. Rotate the Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) belt tensioner clockwise and position the
accessory drive belt aside.
5. Remove the battery harness locator from the lower generator stud.
6. Remove the generator bolt.
7. Remove the 2 generator stud nuts.
8. Working from the top of the vehicle, press the locking tab to release the generator lower air duct
from the generator and remove the lower air duct.
9. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut.
10. Position the generator B+ cable aside.
11. Disconnect the generator electrical connector.
12. Remove the generator.
13. Remove the 3 screws and the generator upper air duct.
Installation
1. Install the 3 screws and the generator upper air duct.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
2. Working from the top of the vehicle, install the generator and the generator stud.
3. Install the 2 generator stud nuts hand-tight.
4. Install the generator B+ cable and install the generator B+ terminal nut.
- To install, tighten to 17 Nm (150 lb-in).
5. Connect the generator electrical connector.
6. Position the generator B+ protective cover on the B+ terminal.
7. Working from under the vehicle, install the lower generator bolt hand-tight.
8. Tighten the 2 generator stud nuts.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
9. Install the lower generator air duct.
10. Tighten the generator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
11. Rotate the FEAD belt tensioner clockwise and position the accessory drive belt onto the
pulleys.
12. Install the 5 bolts, 1 pushpin and the RH lower splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Position the harness locator on the generator stud.
14. Connect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5284
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5285
Clutch Switch: Locations Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5286
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cut Off Switch
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Cut Off Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5289
Clutch Switch: Diagrams Clutch Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 5290
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder
Ignition Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder > Page 5299
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5305
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 >
Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 >
Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5315
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: >
09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5321
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5322
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Ignition Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For non-functional ignition lock cylinders, the steering column lock module has to be
replaced. For additional information, refer to Steering Column.
1. Remove the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver. For additional information, refer to
Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position.
Using a suitable tool (such as a pick), press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
Key: Testing and Inspection Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure only works if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster (IC) PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate.
If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Switch State Control,
in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to
ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the IC before the vehicle starts. If the
MyKey(TM) function is enabled, one or both of the keys must be administrator (admin) keys.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the
vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to
the vehicle.
1. Insert a programmed PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional PATS key) into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF
position to the ON position.
2. Leave the first key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the first key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the first key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed
PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional
PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the second key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the second key to the OFF position and remove the key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the second key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed
PATS ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the new key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key
in the ON position for a minimum of 6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5327
seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if
programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are
not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for
instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be
enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: "Ignition Key Code Erase". Follow all IDS on-screen instructions
until the key erase procedure completes. The
scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, the RKE data transfers
from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB,
the RKE function does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5328
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC, of which only 4 can be IKT keys), refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key
that needs to be programmed.
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
NOTE: A minimum of 2 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys must be programmed into the
Instrument Cluster (IC) to complete this procedure and allow the vehicle to start.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For
additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics .
3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. NOTE: If the IC or the IC and the PCM were replaced, updated or reconfigured, follow Steps 4-9.
All vehicle keys are erased during the
parameter reset procedure. Verify at least 2 vehicle keys are available prior to carrying out the
PATS parameter reset. If only the PCM was replaced, go to Step 9.
From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
6. Turn the key to the ON position for 6 seconds.
7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the key.
8. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
6 seconds.
9. Both keys now start the vehicle.
10. If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys.
11. Program the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) PATS keys. For additional
information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5329
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a
convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key
programming procedure available to the vehicle driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLE, the
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This PID only
affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure.
1. NOTE: The key used in this step does not have to be an Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
key. A conventional Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) key can also be used, as long as it has first been successfully programmed to this vehicle.
Insert a programmed PATS IKT key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF
position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLE, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" and follow the IDS
on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" - spare key programming procedure is accessible.
- "Customer Spare Key Programming Disable" - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5330
of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition key to OFF (the key does not need to be removed
at this time).
8. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if
it is an IKT key).
9. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position
for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation.
12. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if
it is an IKT key).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation.
9. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to
ENABLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5331
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE.
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into
the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This
procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key
can be programmed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock
cylinder.
NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to
be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) can be determined by viewing the Instrument Cluster (IC) PID N_KEYCODE.
1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key
Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will
be erased from the system.
From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key".
4. NOTE: The 20-second delay is to allow sufficient time for the module to exit its diagnostic mode.
Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (wait 20 seconds).
5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and
also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT
key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5332
Key: Testing and Inspection MyKey(TM)
MyKey(TM) Programming
Program a MyKey(TM)
NOTE: After a MyKey(TM) has been programmed, the remaining standard key(s) (the key[s] that is
not programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature) is referred to as an "administrator key(s)" or "admin"
key(s). There must always be at least one admin key. The Instrument Cluster (IC) does not allow
the last admin key to be programmed into a MyKey(TM) restricted key. Both the admin key and the
MyKey(TM) restricted key can be used to see how many MyKey(TM) and admin keys are
programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey(TM)
feature active (using the message center). The MyKey(TM) is the one with the restricted status.
The admin key does not have any restrictions.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was programmed.
Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted
MyKey(TM) status. If the key has been cycled, an admin key is required to disable the MyKey(TM)
programming.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can only be configured or disabled with an admin key.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature allows you to program/configure a restricted driving mode on one
(or more) standard key(s) supplied with the vehicle or any (Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
programmed spare key(s) to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys that are
programmed to the vehicle can be programmed to a MyKey(TM) restricted key status. The
MyKey(TM) is a restricted key for consecutive key cycles until the MyKey(TM) feature is disabled.
When the MyKey(TM) feature is programmed, several features are modified/or can be modified:
NOTE: The standard restricted features below cannot be configured in any way.
Standard Restricted Features
- Belt-Minder(R) chimes periodically with the audio system muted until the driver safety belt is
buckled. If Belt-Minder(R) has been disabled when the admin key is in the ignition lock cylinder,
Belt-Minder(R) still functions for the MyKey(TM) driver. Belt-Minder(R) cannot be disabled by the
MyKey(TM) driver.
- Audible (chime) and visual (message center message) low fuel warnings are issued when the
Distance To Empty (DTE) value is reached (typically 75 miles).
- The parking aid system (if equipped) cannot be turned off.
NOTE: The optional restricted features below can be configured to the customer preferences.
Refer to Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features.
Optional Restricted Features
- If configured, the audio system limits the volume to 45% of the maximum volume. The message
MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is displayed if an attempt is made to exceed the volume limit of 45%.
- If configured, vehicle maximum speed can be limited to 130 km/h (80 mph). Audible (chime) and
visual (message center message) warnings are issued when the vehicle speed of 130 km/h (80
mph) is attained. The PCM automatically limits the vehicle speed to not exceed 130 km/h (80 mph).
- If configured, audible (chime) and visual (message center message) warnings are issued when
the preselected vehicle speed of 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph) is attained.
- If configured, the AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature can be configured to on or off. If configured
to always on, the traction control cannot be disabled by the MyKey(TM) driver when a MyKey(TM)
is being used to operate the vehicle.
NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do
not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure
to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message
Center in the Description and Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators for MyKey(TM) system checks and system warnings displays.
1. NOTE: The key that is being programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature must first already be
programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Insert a programmed PATS ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF
to the ON position. This key must be the one that is being programmed to the MyKey(TM)
restricted status.
2. Using the message center buttons:
1. Press the SETUP button until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY appears in the message
center display.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY is displayed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5333
3. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately 2 seconds) until MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed, then release the RESET button.
3. The MyKey(TM) feature (standard restricted features) is successfully programmed into this
particular key. Make sure it is labeled for easy
identification. To customize the MyKey(TM) with the audio volume limited, maximum speed limit,
speed alert chimes, and AdvanceTrac(R) on/off restrictions, refer to Configuring MyKey(TM)
Optional Restricted Features. If the vehicle is equipped with remote start, also refer to Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start
Systems.
Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features
NOTE: The following features can be restricted on a MyKey(TM):
- audio volume level set to a pre-determined level (45% of the maximum volume)
- maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (80 mph) on or off
- speed alert chimes set for 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph)
- AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature turned on or off
1. NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do
not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow
the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted
MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message Center in the Description and
Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators for MyKey(TM) system
checks and system warnings displays.
To configure the MyKey(TM) optional restricted features listed directly above, carry out the
following:
1. Using an admin key that has not been programmed as a MyKey(TM), turn the key to the ON
position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed.
3. Press and release the RESET button to display the MyKey(TM) setup menus. The first
programmable feature is: MYKEY MAX MPH [80
MPH] OFF. To change the status of a feature that appears, press SETUP to accept the current setting and the
message center displays the next feature.
- To change the status of the feature that is displayed, press RESET to turn a feature on/off (or
toggle between choices). After the feature selection has been made, press and release SETUP to
accept and the message center displays the next feature.
4. Repeat the process for the next features:
- MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 [OFF] (choose the desired speed for the chime to sound)
- MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT [ON] OFF (choose the audio volume to be limited to 45%)
- MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON [OFF] (choose for the AdvanceTrac(R) to be automatically locked
on or able to be turned on or off by the MyKey(TM) driver)
Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features
1. NOTE: This procedure is used to disable the MyKey(TM) feature on all of the keys that are
programmed to the vehicle. All of the keys then
operate as normal (admin) keys with no restrictions.
Insert an admin key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY appears.
3. Press and hold RESET until HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR and ALL KEYS ARE
CLEARED is displayed.
- A MyKey(TM) can also be cleared during the same key cycle that it was programmed by following
Steps 2 and 3 of this procedure.
Check MyKey(TM) System Status
1. The vehicle system check provides the status of the following MyKey(TM) parameters:
- MYKEY DISTANCE - This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey(TM) is used. If mileage
does not accumulate, the intended MyKey(TM) is not being used or the IC is at fault. The only way
to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling the MyKey(TM). If this odometer is lower than the last
time it was checked, the MyKey(TM) system has been cleared. If desired, it may be necessary to
program the MyKey(TM) restricted features into the key.
- # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many MyKeys(TM) are programmed to the vehicle.
It can also be used to determine if a MyKey(TM) has been disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Key > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 5334
- # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the
vehicle. It can also be used to determine if an additional spare key has been programmed to the
vehicle.
Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start System
NOTE: The # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or the # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED messages that
may be displayed in the message center includes the remote start system as an additional key in
the total count, depending on whether or not it was programmed as a MyKey(TM). Refer to the
Check MyKey(TM) System Status to determine if this is the case.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) system is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote start
systems. If a Ford approved remote start system is installed on the vehicle and it is started using
the remote start, the vehicle stalls if a door is opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. The driver
must insert their key into the ignition lock cylinder, cycle the ignition to the ON position and drive
the vehicle with the MyKey(TM) restrictions that are programmed into their MyKey(TM). If the
remote start system is a non-Ford approved system, the vehicle may not stall when a door is
opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. If the remote start system has not been programmed as
a MyKey(TM) and the driver is a MyKey(TM) driver, the driver could possibly drive the vehicle using
the remote start system as an admin key with no MyKey(TM) restrictions. To resolve this
incompatibility, it is necessary to either recycle the MyKey(TM) before the vehicle is driven or
program the non-Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey(TM).
NOTE: It is possible to program all of the keys as MyKeys(TM), with the remote start system being
the lone remaining admin key. In this particular case, it may be necessary to use the remote start
system to clear all MyKeys(TM) and turn them into admin keys. In order to do this, carry out the
following:
- Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
- Remote start the vehicle using the remote start fob.
- Follow Steps 1-3 of the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure.
1. When using a Ford approved remote start system, the standard restricted features recognize the
remote start system as an additional admin key. If
the remote start system is not Ford approved, it may not operate correctly. If a Ford approved
remote start system is installed on the vehicle, the remote start system can be programmed as a
MyKey(TM), in addition to the key that is also programmed as a MyKey(TM). To program the
remote start system as a MyKey(TM), follow the steps below:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-3 of the Program a MyKey(TM) procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Starter Motor: Electrical Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5339
Starter Motor: Mechanical Specifications
General Specifications
General Specifications
Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5340
Starter Motor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5341
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5342
Starter Motor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5343
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
Starter Motor - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the 5 bolts, the pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
4. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the starter solenoid battery cable nut and disconnect the starter motor solenoid terminal
cover and cables.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
6. Remove the ground wire nut and position aside the ground wire.
- To install, tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
7. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the starter motor.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information >
Specifications > Page 5344
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations
Starter Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5348
Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 5349
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5355
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Mechanical Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5356
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point, Console
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5359
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5360
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 5361
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 5362
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DC/DC Converter
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power from the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) to low-voltage (12 volts) DC power. This
charges the 12-volt battery through the low-voltage battery cables and powers the low-voltage
electrical systems, eliminating the need for a conventional engine-driven generator. It is controlled
by the PCM and is located on the RF wheel housing.
DC/DC Converter Wiring Harness
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
The DC/DC converter wiring harness supplies high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to the DC/DC
converter from the Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). Like all
other high-voltage wiring, it is orange in color. The DC/DC converter wiring harness runs along the
back of the engine underneath the engine cover and is a serviceable part.
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts low voltage (12 volts) DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses
AC power with a rating of less than 150 watts. The DC/AC inverter is located underneath the floor
console and is a serviceable part. The AC power point is located in the front of the floor console
and can be serviced separately from the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure differently than a conventional AC outlet
(utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power point will automatically shut off if the load
exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts
AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position. This reduces the draw on the 12-volt
system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter outlet (AC power point) is equipped
with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green LED illuminates continuously when
the key is in the ON/START position and the system is operating normally. The green LED flashes
constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads
or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to flash and the power to be cut off to the
outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected (short circuit or excessive load). If the
inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off (without the load connected). Refer to
Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads/devices that can be used.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems, charging the vehicle's 12-volt battery, and eliminating the need
for a conventional engine-driven generator. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC
converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
The DC/DC converter is liquid-cooled and is part of the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS).
In addition to the DC/DC converter, the MECS also provides cooling of the Electronically Controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). For more information on the MECS, refer to
Transmission Cooler, A/T.
Inspection and Verification
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5365
depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided
through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring
are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are
marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
6. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
7. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- verify the ignition is ON.
- verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
9. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(CMDTCs).
10. Carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC Chart. For all other DTCs,
refer to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5366
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DTC Chart
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
PCM DTC Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5367
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Symptom Chart
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5368
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power
Point
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power
Point
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110
volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted.
Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's
Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER
AT THE AC POWER POINT
NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals.
Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR
VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s). If
not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible cause of the circuit short. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5369
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE AC POWER OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness
side and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness
side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point
C2292-2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5370
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point
C2292-1.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator Is Never On
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator is Never On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110
volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in
the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key
is in the ON position.
The DC/AC inverter supplies 12 volts DC to the LED along circuit LYA03 (YE/VT). Ground is
provided by the DC/AC inverter on circuit RYA03 (BU/BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC
POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals.
Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5371
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to
the Wiring Diagrams to locate the possible cause of the circuit short. TEST the system for normal
operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE LED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B.
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side
and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter
C2293B-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03
(BU/BN), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5372
No
REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED
- Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6,
component side in both directions.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the
opposite direction?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- PCM
- 12-volt battery
- Battery cables
- DC/DC converter
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand
and Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
- Are any PCM DTCs present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5373
For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems
Information.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Ignition OFF.
- Refer to Battery and carry out Pinpoint Test A: Battery Condition Test to determine if the battery
can hold a charge and is OK for use. See: Battery/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new 12-volt battery. REFER to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See:
Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing
and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Start the engine.
- NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a
short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch
still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine
running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time.
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the
voltage at the 12-volt battery.
- Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5374
C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
positive C1457C, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100A, post side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
negative C1457B, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors.
- Check for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5375
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13
Normal Operation
The PCM controls the DC/DC enable hardwired signal to switch the DC/DC converter on and off.
The DC/DC converter provides feedback to the PCM using the hardwired DC/DC fault signal. The
DC/DC fault signal indicates to the PCM when the converter is non-operational or when a fault has
occurred.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- DC/DC converter
- High-voltage cable assembly
- PCM
- Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT)
- DC/DC converter high-voltage wire harness
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST D: DTCs P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 AND P0A13
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals.
Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE: The 12-volt battery must be sufficiently charged before carrying out any DC/DC converter
system diagnostics.
NOTE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) must be at a minimum state of charge of 35% in
order for the PCM to activate the DC/DC converter enable circuit in the KOER position.
NOTE: DTC P0A09 set alone as a Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Code (CMDTC)
indicates an intermittent DC/DC fault circuit failure or that battery voltage has dropped below a
preset limit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5376
------------------------------------------------- D1 REVIEW THE PCM DTCs
- Review the DTCs retrieved and recorded during Inspection and Verification.
Is DTC P0A7C or any other MECS DTCs present in the PCM?
Yes
REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information to diagnose those DTCs first.
No
GO to D2.
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK FOR FAULT REPEATABILITY
- Connect the scan tool.
- Ignition ON.
- Using the scan tool, clear the PCM DTCs.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test - PCM.
- Is DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 present?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
GO to D24.
------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Ignition OFF.
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See:
Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Battery/Testing
and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to D4.
------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HVTB STATE OF CHARGE
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - BCM.
- Using the Battery Pack State of Change (BSOC) PID, verify that the HVTB state of charge is
greater than 35%.
- Is the HVTB state of charge greater than 35%?
Yes
GO to D5.
No
The HVTB is under-charged. CARRY OUT a self-test of the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems
to diagnose the HVTB.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5377
------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK IF THE ENGINE WILL START
- Start the engine.
- Test drive the vehicle over a short distance to verify that the engine starts.
- Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D6.
------------------------------------------------- D6 MONITOR THE TCM HIGH-VOLTAGE CONTACTOR
(CONTACT) PID
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - TCM.
- Monitor the TCM CONTACT PID.
- Does the PID indicate that the contactors are closed?
Yes
GO to D7.
No
The Battery Control Module (BCM) is unable to close the contactors. CARRY OUT a Self Test of
the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems to diagnose the high-voltage system.
------------------------------------------------- D7 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY HIGH-VOLTAGE
(HVBAT_V) PID
- Monitor the TCM HVBAT_V PID.
- Is the voltage between 216 and 400 volts?
Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D25.
------------------------------------------------- D8 VERIFY THE MECS COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(MECT_V) PID
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM.
- Monitor the PCM MECT_V PID.
- Is the voltage less than 1.2 volts?
Yes
GO to D9.
No
The MECS may be overheating. REFER to the appropriate pinpoint test for DTC P0A7C in
Computers and Control Systems Information.
------------------------------------------------- D9 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE
DROP
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5378
- Start the engine.
- With the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop
between DC/DC converter C1457C, positive post and 12-volt battery C1100A, positive post.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to D10.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- D10 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE
DROP
- With the engine still running, and with the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on
high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter C1457B, negative post and DC/DC
converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to D11.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- D11 CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE DC/DC CONVERTER
WIRING HARNESS
- Turn off the headlights and heater blower fan.
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457D.
- Disconnect: TCM C1458E.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness
side, and TCM C1458E-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5379
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side,
and TCM C1458E-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D12.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter wiring harness. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC)
Converter Wiring Harness . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D12 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FOR AN
OVER-CHARGING CONDITION
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457D.
- Connect: TCM C1458E.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Repower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the battery voltage and record.
- Is the voltage less than 16 volts?
Yes
GO to D13.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D13 VERIFY CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the battery voltage and compare it to the value recorded in step D12.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5380
- Was the battery voltage at least 0.5 volts greater when the ignition was in the ON position?
Yes
If DTC P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 was retrieved, GO to D14.
If DTC P0A08, P0A09 or P0A10 was retrieved, GO to D19.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D14 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: PCM C175T.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness
side, and PCM C175T-12, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D15.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D15 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side
and ground.
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5381
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to D16.
------------------------------------------------- D16 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness
side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to D17.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D17 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Connect: PCM C175T.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the battery voltage.
- While monitoring the measured battery voltage, momentarily connect a fused jumper wire
between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground.
- While monitoring the measured battery voltage, disconnect the fused jumper wire between
DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground.
- Does the battery voltage drop approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is connected (disabling
the DC/DC converter) and increase approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is disconnected
(enabling the DC/DC converter)?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5382
GO to D18.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D18 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER USING THE PCM
DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE (DCE) PID
- Ignition OFF.
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM.
- Measure the battery voltage.
- While monitoring the measured battery voltage, command the PCM DCE active command on and
off.
- Does the battery voltage increase and decrease in accordance with the cycling of the active
command?
Yes
CLEAR the DTCs. GO to D19.
No
GO to D26.
------------------------------------------------- D19 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if not previously disconnected).
- Disconnect: PCM C175B.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness
side, and PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D20.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D20 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5383
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side
and ground.
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to D21.
------------------------------------------------- D21 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness
side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to D22.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D22 CHECK THE PCM FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and
PCM C175B-67, circuit CBB29 (WH/VT), component side, and between PCM C175B-8, circuit
CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and PCM C175B-68, circuit GD122 (BK), component side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5384
- Are the resistances between 1,000 and 2,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to D23.
No
GO to D26.
------------------------------------------------- D23 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT IN THE PCM
- Connect: PCM C175B.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage less than 10.5 volts?
Yes
GO to D26.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D24 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUITS FOR AN
INTERMITTENT CONCERN
- Ignition OFF.
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if previously disconnected).
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM.
- While monitoring the PCM DCE and PCM DC/DC converter status (DCE_F) PIDs, carefully
wiggle all accessible wiring and connectors associated with the circuit and monitor the PIDs for a
change in state.
- Do the PIDs indicate a concern while wiggling the harness or connectors?
Yes
REPAIR the affected circuit(s). Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid) for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5385
No
The concern cannot be duplicated at this time. VERIFY the 12-volt battery is sufficiently charged.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D25 CHECK THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems.
- Disconnect: TCM C1458D.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227B.
- Measure the resistance as shown in the table below:
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new eCVT. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control
Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new high-voltage cable assembly. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D26 CHECK THE PCM FOR CORRECT OPERATION
- Ignition OFF.
- (if not previously turned to the OFF position)
- Disconnect: PCM C175B.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Check the PCM and DC/DC converter connectors for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- spread terminals.
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Connect: PCM C175B.
- Verify that each connector is correctly seated.
- Carry out the PCM self-test and verify that the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5386
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Remove the console trim insert.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5389
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter.
4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt.
- To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5390
6. Remove the DC/AC inverter.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component
Information > Service and Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5391
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point
Power Point
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Electronic Noise Suppressor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5395
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5400
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5401
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5402
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5406
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5407
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5412
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5413
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5414
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5415
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5416
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5419
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5420
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5421
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5422
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5423
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5424
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5425
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5426
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5427
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5428
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5429
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5430
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5431
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5432
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5433
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5434
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5435
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5436
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5437
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5438
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5439
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5440
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5441
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5442
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5443
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5444
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5445
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5446
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5447
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5452
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5453
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5454
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5455
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5456
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
C110
C133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5457
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5458
C134
C139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5459
C140
C210
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5460
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5461
C211
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5462
C212
C214
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5463
C215
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5464
C237
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5465
C238
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5466
C248
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5467
C263
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5468
C264
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5469
C311
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5470
C312
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5471
C313
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5472
C314
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5473
C316
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5474
C327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5475
C339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5476
C340
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5477
C405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5478
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5479
C408
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5480
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5481
C410
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5482
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5483
C421
C422
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5484
C495
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5485
C914
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5486
C922
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5487
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5488
C913
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5489
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5490
C3007
C3133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5491
C3134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector >
Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 5492
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments
- Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 11-2-10
> Feb > 11 > Engine - Hard Start/Rough Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Hard Start/Rough
Idle/DTC's P0016/P052A/B
TSB 11-2-10
02/07/11
2.5L - DTCS P0016 AND P052NB - POSSIBLE HARD TO START AND/OR ROUGH IDLE
CONCERN
FORD: 2010-2011 Fusion, Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Milan, Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape, Mariner, Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 2.5L engine
with less than 16,000 Km (10,000 miles) may exhibit diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P0016 and
P052A/B. This may be accompanied by hard to start and or rough idle concerns.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
This may be due to debris that temporarily restricted the movement of the variable camshaft timing
(VCT) solenoid.
1. Clear DTCs.
2. Perform drive cycle exercising the throttle to generate VCT movement.
NOTE
IF A CONCERN EXISTS, THE DTCS WILL TRIGGER ON THE FIRST KEY EVENT, HOWEVER
IT TAKES A SECOND KEY EVENT FOR THE MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP TO
ILLUMINATE.
3. Did the DTCs P0016 or P052A/B return?
a. No - The DTCs did not return, release vehicle. No further repair required.
b. Yes - DTCs did return, perform Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) pinpoint test
HK to confirm VCT solenoid functionality.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT110210 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
6M280 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5520
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5521
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5522
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO >
Page 5541
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO >
Page 5542
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO >
Page 5543
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5548
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5549
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5550
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5551
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5552
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5555
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5556
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5557
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5558
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5559
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5560
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5561
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5562
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5563
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5566
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5567
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and
Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5568
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5573
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5574
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5575
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5576
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5577
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5580
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5581
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5582
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5583
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5584
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5585
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5586
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5587
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5588
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5591
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5592
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information >
Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5593
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5599
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Mechanical Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information >
Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 5600
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point, Console
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console > Page 5603
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console > Page 5604
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagrams Power Point
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Power Point, Console > Page 5605
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 5606
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Description and Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DC/DC Converter
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power from the High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) to low-voltage (12 volts) DC power. This
charges the 12-volt battery through the low-voltage battery cables and powers the low-voltage
electrical systems, eliminating the need for a conventional engine-driven generator. It is controlled
by the PCM and is located on the RF wheel housing.
DC/DC Converter Wiring Harness
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
The DC/DC converter wiring harness supplies high-voltage (216-397 volts) DC power to the DC/DC
converter from the Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). Like all
other high-voltage wiring, it is orange in color. The DC/DC converter wiring harness runs along the
back of the engine underneath the engine cover and is a serviceable part.
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The DC/AC inverter converts low voltage (12 volts) DC to 110 volts AC to power a device that uses
AC power with a rating of less than 150 watts. The DC/AC inverter is located underneath the floor
console and is a serviceable part. The AC power point is located in the front of the floor console
and can be serviced separately from the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Principles of Operation
DC/AC Inverter and AC Power Point
The 110 volts AC created by the inverter will measure differently than a conventional AC outlet
(utility-generated) with some multi-meters. The power point will automatically shut off if the load
exceeds 150 watts. This prevents damage to the inverter or load. The inverter supplies 110 volts
AC power only when the key is in the ON/START position. This reduces the draw on the 12-volt
system when the vehicle is not running. The DC/AC inverter outlet (AC power point) is equipped
with a green LED that indicates the system integrity. The green LED illuminates continuously when
the key is in the ON/START position and the system is operating normally. The green LED flashes
constantly if the key is in the ON/START position and a fault is detected. Short circuits, overloads
or overheating of the inverter will cause the green LED to flash and the power to be cut off to the
outlet. If the LED is flashing, the problem must be corrected (short circuit or excessive load). If the
inverter is overheated, it must be allowed time to cool off (without the load connected). Refer to
Owner's Literature for a list of appropriate electrical loads/devices that can be used.
DC/DC Converter
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power, while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery systems, charging the vehicle's 12-volt battery, and eliminating the need
for a conventional engine-driven generator. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC
converter through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
The DC/DC converter is liquid-cooled and is part of the Motor Electronics Cooling System (MECS).
In addition to the DC/DC converter, the MECS also provides cooling of the Electronically Controlled
Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT). For more information on the MECS, refer to
Transmission Cooler, A/T.
Inspection and Verification
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Inspection and Verification
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5609
depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided
through high-voltage cables to its components and modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring
are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire covering. All high-voltage components are
marked with high-voltage warning labels with a high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in serious personal injury or death.
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
5. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
6. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
7. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
8. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- verify the ignition is ON.
- verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
9. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes
(CMDTCs).
10. Carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM.
11. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to PCM DTC Chart. For all other DTCs,
refer to Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic
Trouble Code Descriptions
12. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5610
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
DTC Chart
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
PCM DTC Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5611
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Symptom Chart
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5612
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power At The AC Power
Point
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - No Power at the AC Power
Point
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110
volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral).
NOTE: The electrical device that is powered by the AC power point must not exceed 150 watts.
NOTE: If the green LED is flashing, the AC power point may be overloaded, overheated or shorted.
Unplug the electrical device from the AC power point and cycle the key. Refer to the Owner's
Literature to determine if the electrical device is appropriate for the AC power point.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST A: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - NO POWER
AT THE AC POWER POINT
NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals.
Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS FOR
VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-1, circuit SBP04 (GN/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Are the voltages greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuses 1 (30A) and 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit(s). If
not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible cause of the circuit short. See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5613
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A3.
No
REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE AC POWER OUTPUT CIRCUITS FOR AN
OPEN
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-1, circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness
side and AC power point C2292-1 circuit HYA01 (OG/GN), harness side.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-5, circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness
side and AC power point C2292-3 circuit HYA02 (OG/WH), harness side.
Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT FOR AN OPEN
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-1, component side and AC power point
C2292-2.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5614
- Measure the resistance between AC power point C2292-3, component side and AC power point
C2292-1.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator Is Never On
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test B: The DC/AC Inverter Does Not Operate Correctly - The AC Power Point LED
Indicator is Never On
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/AC inverter receives 12 volts DC on circuits SBP04 (GN/RD) and CBP35 (YE/GY) and is
grounded on circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The incoming DC power is internally converted to 60 Hz 110
volts AC power that is output to the AC power point on circuits HYA01 (OG/GN) (power) and
HYA02 (OG/WH) (neutral). If a fault in the system is detected, the LED flashes when the key is in
the ON position. The LED continuously illuminates if the system is operating correctly when the key
is in the ON position.
The DC/AC inverter supplies 12 volts DC to the LED along circuit LYA03 (YE/VT). Ground is
provided by the DC/AC inverter on circuit RYA03 (BU/BN).
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuses
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- DC/AC inverter
- AC power point
PINPOINT TEST B: THE DC/AC INVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY - THE AC
POWER POINT LED INDICATOR IS NEVER ON
NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals.
Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293A.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/AC inverter C2293A-3, circuit CBP35 (YE/GY), harness side
and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5615
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to B2.
No
CHECK the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 35 (10A). If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to
the Wiring Diagrams to locate the possible cause of the circuit short. TEST the system for normal
operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- B2 CHECK THE GROUND CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293A-6, circuit GD182 (BK/GY), harness side
and ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B3.
No
REPAIR circuit GD182 (BK/GY). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B3 CHECK THE LED CONTROL CIRCUITS FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: DC/AC Inverter C2293B.
- Disconnect: AC Power Point C2292.
- Measure the resistance between DC/AC inverter C2293B-9, circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side
and AC power point C2292-6 circuit LYA03 (YE/VT), harness side; and between DC/AC inverter
C2293B-8, circuit RYA03 (BU/BN), harness side and AC power point C2292-5 circuit RYA03
(BU/BN), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to B4.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5616
No
REPAIR the affected circuit(s). TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- B4 CHECK THE AC POWER POINT LED
- Test the diode between AC power point C2292-5, component side and AC power point C2292-6,
component side in both directions.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms in one direction and between 10-20 ohms in the
opposite direction?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/AC inverter. REFER to Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
See: Service and Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Direct Current/Alternating Current
(DC/AC) Inverter. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new AC power point. REFER to Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint See: Service and
Repair/High Voltage Converter/Inverter/Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test C: The DC/DC Converter Does Not Operate Correctly
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Charging
System for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The DC/DC converter is a liquid-cooled component that converts high voltage (216-397 volts) DC
power to low voltage (12 volts) DC power while maintaining electrical isolation between the 2 DC
power systems. The converter steps down the high voltage to 12 volts, providing power to the
vehicle low voltage battery system. The PCM controls the operation of the DC/DC converter
through an enable input from the PCM to the DC/DC converter.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- PCM
- 12-volt battery
- Battery cables
- DC/DC converter
PINPOINT TEST C: THE DC/DC CONVERTER DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY
------------------------------------------------- C1 CHECK THE PCM FOR DTCs
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test/Retrieve and Record On-Demand
and Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Codes (CMDTCs).
- Are any PCM DTCs present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5617
For DTC P1A0C only, GO to C2. For all other DTCs, REFER to Computers and Control Systems
Information.
No
GO to C2.
------------------------------------------------- C2 CHECK THE INTEGRITY OF THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Ignition OFF.
- Refer to Battery and carry out Pinpoint Test A: Battery Condition Test to determine if the battery
can hold a charge and is OK for use. See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and
Inspection/Pinpoint Tests
- Did the battery pass the condition test?
Yes
GO to C3.
No
INSTALL a new 12-volt battery. REFER to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- C3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See:
Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C4.
------------------------------------------------- C4 CHECK THE VOLTAGE TO THE 12-VOLT BATTERY
- Start the engine.
- NOTE: The vehicle will start when the ignition switch is turned to the START position, but after a
short period of time (approximately 2 minutes) the engine may shut down with the ignition switch
still in the ON position. The DC/DC converter will output a normal charging rate with the engine
running or not, but the engine MUST have run at least once. The state of charge of the High
Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) will have a direct affect on the length of engine running time.
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), monitor the
voltage at the 12-volt battery.
- Is the voltage between 13.2-16.0 volts?
Yes
The system is operating correctly at this time. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to C5.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5618
C5 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
positive C1457C, post side and 12-volt battery positive C1100A, post side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to C6.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C6 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE
- With the engine running (ignition switch ON, engine must have run at least once), headlights on
high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter
negative C1457B, post side and DC/DC converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to C7.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- C7 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Disconnect all of the DC/DC converter connectors.
- Check for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- Connect all of the DC/DC converter connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. TEST the system for normal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5619
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13
High-Voltage Converter/Inverter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test D: DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 and P0A13
Normal Operation
The PCM controls the DC/DC enable hardwired signal to switch the DC/DC converter on and off.
The DC/DC converter provides feedback to the PCM using the hardwired DC/DC fault signal. The
DC/DC fault signal indicates to the PCM when the converter is non-operational or when a fault has
occurred.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- DC/DC converter
- High-voltage cable assembly
- PCM
- Electronically Controlled Continuously Variable Transmission (eCVT)
- DC/DC converter high-voltage wire harness
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
PINPOINT TEST D: DTCs P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 AND P0A13
WARNING: To prevent the risk of high-voltage shock, always follow precisely all warnings and
service instructions, including instructions to depower the system. The high-voltage hybrid system
utilizes approximately 300 volts DC, provided through high-voltage cables to its components and
modules. The high-voltage cables and wiring are identified by orange harness tape or orange wire
covering. All high-voltage components are marked with high-voltage warning labels with a
high-voltage symbol. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or
death.
NOTICE: Use the Flex Probe Kit for all test connections to prevent damage to the wiring terminals.
Do not use standard multi-meter probes.
NOTE: The 12-volt battery must be sufficiently charged before carrying out any DC/DC converter
system diagnostics.
NOTE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) must be at a minimum state of charge of 35% in
order for the PCM to activate the DC/DC converter enable circuit in the KOER position.
NOTE: DTC P0A09 set alone as a Continuous Memory Diagnostic Trouble Code (CMDTC)
indicates an intermittent DC/DC fault circuit failure or that battery voltage has dropped below a
preset limit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5620
------------------------------------------------- D1 REVIEW THE PCM DTCs
- Review the DTCs retrieved and recorded during Inspection and Verification.
Is DTC P0A7C or any other MECS DTCs present in the PCM?
Yes
REFER to Computers and Control Systems Information to diagnose those DTCs first.
No
GO to D2.
------------------------------------------------- D2 CHECK FOR FAULT REPEATABILITY
- Connect the scan tool.
- Ignition ON.
- Using the scan tool, clear the PCM DTCs.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: Self Test - PCM.
- Is DTC P0A08, P0A09, P0A10, P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 present?
Yes
GO to D3.
No
GO to D24.
------------------------------------------------- D3 CHECK FOR CURRENT DRAINS
- Ignition OFF.
- Carry out the Battery - Drain Test. Refer to the Diagnosis and Testing subsection in Battery. See:
Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
See: Starting and Charging/Battery/Testing and Inspection
- Are any circuits causing excessive current drains?
Yes
REPAIR as necessary. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to D4.
------------------------------------------------- D4 CHECK THE HVTB STATE OF CHARGE
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - BCM.
- Using the Battery Pack State of Change (BSOC) PID, verify that the HVTB state of charge is
greater than 35%.
- Is the HVTB state of charge greater than 35%?
Yes
GO to D5.
No
The HVTB is under-charged. CARRY OUT a self-test of the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems
to diagnose the HVTB.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5621
------------------------------------------------- D5 CHECK IF THE ENGINE WILL START
- Start the engine.
- Test drive the vehicle over a short distance to verify that the engine starts.
- Does the engine start?
Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D6.
------------------------------------------------- D6 MONITOR THE TCM HIGH-VOLTAGE CONTACTOR
(CONTACT) PID
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - TCM.
- Monitor the TCM CONTACT PID.
- Does the PID indicate that the contactors are closed?
Yes
GO to D7.
No
The Battery Control Module (BCM) is unable to close the contactors. CARRY OUT a Self Test of
the BCM. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems to diagnose the high-voltage system.
------------------------------------------------- D7 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE ASSEMBLY HIGH-VOLTAGE
(HVBAT_V) PID
- Monitor the TCM HVBAT_V PID.
- Is the voltage between 216 and 400 volts?
Yes
GO to D8.
No
GO to D25.
------------------------------------------------- D8 VERIFY THE MECS COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(MECT_V) PID
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM.
- Monitor the PCM MECT_V PID.
- Is the voltage less than 1.2 volts?
Yes
GO to D9.
No
The MECS may be overheating. REFER to the appropriate pinpoint test for DTC P0A7C in
Computers and Control Systems Information.
------------------------------------------------- D9 CHECK THE POSITIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE
DROP
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5622
- Start the engine.
- With the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on high, measure the voltage drop
between DC/DC converter C1457C, positive post and 12-volt battery C1100A, positive post.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.75 volt?
Yes
GO to D10.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- D10 CHECK THE NEGATIVE 12-VOLT CABLE VOLTAGE
DROP
- With the engine still running, and with the headlights on high beam and the heater blower fan on
high, measure the voltage drop between DC/DC converter C1457B, negative post and DC/DC
converter ground G105, ground bolt side.
- Is the voltage drop less than 0.25 volt?
Yes
GO to D11.
No
REPAIR or INSTALL a new 12-volt battery cable assembly as necessary. REFER to Battery. TEST
the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- D11 CHECK FOR AN OPEN IN THE DC/DC CONVERTER
WIRING HARNESS
- Turn off the headlights and heater blower fan.
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457D.
- Disconnect: TCM C1458E.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness
side, and TCM C1458E-(+), circuit HYT03 (OG), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5623
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457D-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side,
and TCM C1458E-(-), circuit HYT04 (OG), harness side.
- Are the resistances less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D12.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter wiring harness. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC)
Converter Wiring Harness . CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D12 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FOR AN
OVER-CHARGING CONDITION
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457D.
- Connect: TCM C1458E.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Repower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the battery voltage and record.
- Is the voltage less than 16 volts?
Yes
GO to D13.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D13 VERIFY CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER OPERATION
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the battery voltage and compare it to the value recorded in step D12.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5624
- Was the battery voltage at least 0.5 volts greater when the ignition was in the ON position?
Yes
If DTC P0A11, P0A12 or P0A13 was retrieved, GO to D14.
If DTC P0A08, P0A09 or P0A10 was retrieved, GO to D19.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D14 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: PCM C175T.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness
side, and PCM C175T-12, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D15.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D15 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness side
and ground.
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5625
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to D16.
------------------------------------------------- D16 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), harness
side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to D17.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D17 CHECK FOR CORRECT DC/DC CONVERTER
OPERATION
- Connect: PCM C175T.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the battery voltage.
- While monitoring the measured battery voltage, momentarily connect a fused jumper wire
between DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground.
- While monitoring the measured battery voltage, disconnect the fused jumper wire between
DC/DC converter C1457A-1, circuit CYD03 (BN/YE), component side and ground.
- Does the battery voltage drop approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is connected (disabling
the DC/DC converter) and increase approximately 1 volt when the jumper wire is disconnected
(enabling the DC/DC converter)?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5626
GO to D18.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D18 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER USING THE PCM
DC/DC CONVERTER ENABLE (DCE) PID
- Ignition OFF.
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM.
- Measure the battery voltage.
- While monitoring the measured battery voltage, command the PCM DCE active command on and
off.
- Does the battery voltage increase and decrease in accordance with the cycling of the active
command?
Yes
CLEAR the DTCs. GO to D19.
No
GO to D26.
------------------------------------------------- D19 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if not previously disconnected).
- Disconnect: PCM C175B.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness
side, and PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to D20.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D20 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5627
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side
and ground.
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
GO to D21.
------------------------------------------------- D21 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness
side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to D22.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D22 CHECK THE PCM FOR AN OPEN CIRCUIT
- Ignition OFF.
- Measure the resistance between PCM C175B-8, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and
PCM C175B-67, circuit CBB29 (WH/VT), component side, and between PCM C175B-8, circuit
CYD04 (BU/OG), component side and PCM C175B-68, circuit GD122 (BK), component side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5628
- Are the resistances between 1,000 and 2,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to D23.
No
GO to D26.
------------------------------------------------- D23 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER FAULT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT IN THE PCM
- Connect: PCM C175B.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between DC/DC converter C1457A-6, circuit CYD04 (BU/OG), harness side
and ground.
Is the voltage less than 10.5 volts?
Yes
GO to D26.
No
INSTALL a new DC/DC converter. REFER to Direct Current/Direct Current (DC/DC) Converter .
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D24 CHECK THE DC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUITS FOR AN
INTERMITTENT CONCERN
- Ignition OFF.
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A (if previously disconnected).
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger - PCM.
- While monitoring the PCM DCE and PCM DC/DC converter status (DCE_F) PIDs, carefully
wiggle all accessible wiring and connectors associated with the circuit and monitor the PIDs for a
change in state.
- Do the PIDs indicate a concern while wiggling the harness or connectors?
Yes
REPAIR the affected circuit(s). Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 12 (Escape/Mariner, Escape
Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid) for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5629
No
The concern cannot be duplicated at this time. VERIFY the 12-volt battery is sufficiently charged.
CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D25 CHECK THE HIGH-VOLTAGE CABLE FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Depower the HVTB system. Refer to the general procedure in Hybrid Drive Systems.
- Disconnect: TCM C1458D.
- Disconnect: BCM C4227B.
- Measure the resistance as shown in the table below:
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
INSTALL a new eCVT. REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control
Systems. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
INSTALL a new high-voltage cable assembly. REFER to Hybrid Drive Systems. CLEAR the DTCs.
REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- D26 CHECK THE PCM FOR CORRECT OPERATION
- Ignition OFF.
- (if not previously turned to the OFF position)
- Disconnect: PCM C175B.
- Disconnect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Check the PCM and DC/DC converter connectors for: corrosion.
- pushed-out pins.
- spread terminals.
- Connect: DC/DC Converter C1457A.
- Connect: PCM C175B.
- Verify that each connector is correctly seated.
- Carry out the PCM self-test and verify that the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. REPEAT the self-test.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 5630
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair High Voltage Converter/Inverter
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Alternating Current (AC) Powerpoint
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Remove the console trim insert.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the AC power point.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Direct Current/Alternating Current (DC/AC) Inverter
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5633
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the DC/AC inverter.
4. Remove the 2 DC/AC inverter nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Remove the DC/AC inverter bolt.
- To install, tighten 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5634
6. Remove the DC/AC inverter.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Service and
Repair > High Voltage Converter/Inverter > Page 5635
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Power Point
Power Point
Removal
NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location.
1. Open the power point cover.
2. Install the Power Point Socket Remover in one of the power point socket slots.
3. Position the Power Point Socket Remover so that it engages in the adjacent slot.
4. Using the Power Point Socket Remover, pull the power point socket out of the retainer.
5. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Installation
1. Connect the electrical connector.
2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams
Electronic Noise Suppressor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 5639
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box (BJB)
Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box (BJB) > Page 5644
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box (BJB) > Page 5645
Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction
Box (BJB) > Page 5646
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5649
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5650
Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5651
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5656
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5657
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5658
Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5659
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5660
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5663
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5664
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5665
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5666
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5667
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5668
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5669
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5670
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5671
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5672
Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5673
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5674
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5675
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5676
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5677
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5678
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5679
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5680
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5681
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5682
Fuse Block: Connector Views
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5683
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5684
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5685
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5686
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5687
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5688
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5689
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5690
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 5691
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5696
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5697
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5698
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5699
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5700
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
C110
C133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5701
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5702
C134
C139
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5703
C140
C210
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5704
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5705
C211
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5706
C212
C214
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5707
C215
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5708
C237
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5709
C238
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5710
C248
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5711
C263
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5712
C264
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5713
C311
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5714
C312
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5715
C313
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5716
C314
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5717
C316
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5718
C327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5719
C339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5720
C340
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5721
C405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5722
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5723
C408
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5724
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5725
C410
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5726
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5727
C421
C422
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5728
C495
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5729
C914
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5730
C922
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5731
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5732
C913
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5733
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5734
C3007
C3133
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5735
C3134
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information >
Diagrams > C110 > Page 5736
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 >
Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5754
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5755
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5756
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Power Distribution
Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Power
Distribution Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Micro ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5775
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5776
Power Distribution Relay: Testing and Inspection Relay - Mini ISO
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power
Distribution Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Relay - Micro ISO > Page 5777
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5782
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5783
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5784
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5785
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5786
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5789
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5790
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5791
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5792
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5793
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5794
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5795
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5796
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5797
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5800
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5801
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay
Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5802
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5807
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5808
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5809
Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5810
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5811
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5814
Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5815
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5816
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5817
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5818
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5819
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5820
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5821
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery
Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5822
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box (BJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5825
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5826
Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID >
Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 5827
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications
Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications
Alignment Specifications
NOTE: All alignment specifications are with the vehicle fuel tank full.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications > Page 5833
Alignment: Specifications General Specifications
General Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment
Specifications > Page 5834
Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications
Torque Specifications
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber
Alignment: Description and Operation Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 5837
Alignment: Description and Operation Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 5838
Alignment: Description and Operation Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 5839
Alignment: Description and Operation Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 5840
Alignment: Description and Operation
Camber
Wheel Alignment Angles
Camber
Negative and Positive Camber
Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or
negative and has a direct effect on tire wear.
Caster
Wheel Alignment Angles
Caster
Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut
and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the
best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to
tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable.
A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a
separate procedure on this vehicle. The vehicle will tend to drift/pull toward the side with the lowest
caster.
Toe
Wheel Alignment Angles
Toe
Positive Toe (Toe In)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 5841
Negative Toe (Toe Out)
The vehicle toe setting affects tire wear and directional stability.
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Wheel Alignment Angles
Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking)
Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not
square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking.
Wander
Wheel Alignment Angles
Wander
Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel
corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road.
Shimmy
Wheel Alignment Angles
Shimmy
Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering
wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements.
Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire
contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface.
Nibble
Wheel Alignment Angles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Description and Operation >
Camber > Page 5842
Nibble
Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various
road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel.
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering
Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to
center after a turn or steering correction.
Drift/Pull
Wheel Alignment Angles
Drift/Pull
Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep
the vehicle going straight.
Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel.
- A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead
path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect.
- Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (for example, wind or road crown).
Poor Groove Feel
Wheel Alignment Angles
Poor Groove Feel
Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as
the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead
(under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center."
- Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the
gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the
effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch.
- In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between
wander and poor groove feel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment
Camber and Caster Adjustment
Front Camber and Caster Adjustment
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the
camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the
front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5.
4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Difference From Standard Position (LH side)
5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position.
NOTE: Arrows shown in illustrations are pointing towards the front of the vehicle.
Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment.
Difference From Standard Position (RH side)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5845
6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering
Diagnosis and Testing for steering wheel position
sensor calibration. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5846
Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement
Ride Height Measurement
Front Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface
and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is
located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 2).
3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's
arm until the scriber point is located in the center of
the forward lower arm bolt. Lock the surface gauge in this position.
4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the
surface gauge position (measurement 3).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5847
5. Subtract measurement 3 from measurement 2 to obtain the front ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Rear Ride Height Measurement
NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to
the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel.
1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower
bolt (measurement 2).
2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt
(measurement 3).
3. Subtract measurement 2 from measurement 3 to obtain the rear ride height.
- Refer to Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5848
Alignment: Service and Repair Toe Adjustment
Toe Adjustment
Front Toe Adjustment
1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel.
2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable
holding device.
3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
4. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
5. Loosen the tie-rod jam nut(s).
6. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the inner tie rod is rotated.
Rotate the inner tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe.
7. NOTICE: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut or damage to the
boot can occur.
NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s).
Tighten the tie-rod jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and
Caster Adjustment > Page 5849
9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions.
10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing portion of Steering.
Rear Toe Adjustment
1. NOTICE: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct
clamping.
NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean
the area using only mild liquids.
NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position.
Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment.
2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the
serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush
and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut.
Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification.
4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts.
- Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel
knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel
Position Sensor Calibration in the Diagnosis and
Testing portion of Steering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5855
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5856
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and
Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5857
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power
Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page 5864
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring
System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5870
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and
Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5871
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut.
5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover.
Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 5876
6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nuts and bolts.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut.
- Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System.
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or
Alignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5881
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5882
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component
Information > Locations > Page 5883
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations
Steering Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 5888
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 5889
Steering Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module
> Component Information > Locations > Page 5890
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch
The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch
is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate
for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during
parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission EPC
pressure during increased engine load, such as during parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering
Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch > Page
5896
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP)
Sensor
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor
The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP
sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the
input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the
idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the
PCM to adjust the transmission EPC pressure during increased engine load, such as during
parking maneuvers.
Typical PSP Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5902
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5903
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5904
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5905
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5906
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5907
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5912
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5913
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5914
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5915
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5916
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming >
System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page
5917
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder > Page 5926
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign.
Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign.
Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5932
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 >
Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page
5951
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
> Page 5957
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5963
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key
Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 5969
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When
Turning Steering Wheel
Steering Gear: Customer Interest Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering Wheel
TSB 10-20-12
10/25/10
SQUEAK OR RUB NOISE WHEN TURNING STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES BUILT 9/1/2009 TO
12/1/2009
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built 9/1/2009 to 12/1/2009 may exhibit a squeak
or rubbing type noise from the steering column area when turning the steering wheel. The noise
typically occurs when the vehicle is warm, but may diminish after the vehicle sits with engine off for
an extended period of time.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Some amount of noise from the Electronic Power Assist Steering (EPAS) column is considered
normal.
1. Turn steering wheel left and right lock-to-lock and listen for squeak or rubbing type noise.
a. If noise is originating from the steering gear, proceed to Step 2.
b. If noise is not originating from the steering gear, do not continue with this article. Refer to
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-00.
2. Replace the steering gear. Refer to WSM, Section 211-02.
3. Perform steering wheel position sensor calibration. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102012A 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X2: 0.9 Hr.
Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure,
And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed With C)
102012B 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X4: 1.0 Hr.
Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When
Turning Steering Wheel > Page 5978
The Service Procedure, And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed
With C)
102012C 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.7 Hr.
Includes Time To Check And Adjust Front Toe (Can Be Claimed With Operation A Or B)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3504 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise
When Turning Steering Wheel
Steering Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise When Turning Steering
Wheel
TSB 10-20-12
10/25/10
SQUEAK OR RUB NOISE WHEN TURNING STEERING WHEEL - VEHICLES BUILT 9/1/2009 TO
12/1/2009
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built 9/1/2009 to 12/1/2009 may exhibit a squeak
or rubbing type noise from the steering column area when turning the steering wheel. The noise
typically occurs when the vehicle is warm, but may diminish after the vehicle sits with engine off for
an extended period of time.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Some amount of noise from the Electronic Power Assist Steering (EPAS) column is considered
normal.
1. Turn steering wheel left and right lock-to-lock and listen for squeak or rubbing type noise.
a. If noise is originating from the steering gear, proceed to Step 2.
b. If noise is not originating from the steering gear, do not continue with this article. Refer to
Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-00.
2. Replace the steering gear. Refer to WSM, Section 211-02.
3. Perform steering wheel position sensor calibration. Refer to WSM, Section 211-00.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102012A 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X2: 0.9 Hr.
Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In The Service Procedure,
And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed With C)
102012B 2010 Escape, Mariner 4X4: 1.0 Hr.
Replace The Steering Gear, Includes Time To Perform The Diagnosis In
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Gear: > 10-20-12 > Oct > 10 > Steering - Squeak/Rub Noise
When Turning Steering Wheel > Page 5984
The Service Procedure, And Perform The Wheel Position Sensor Calibration (Can Be Claimed
With C)
102012C 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.7 Hr.
Includes Time To Check And Adjust Front Toe (Can Be Claimed With Operation A Or B)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3504 12
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear
Steering Gear
Steering Gear - Exploded View
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the front wheels and tires. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position.
- Remove the ignition key.
3. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result.
If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the
coupling from the steering gear. To install, tighten the new bolt to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5987
5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield.
6. Remove and discard the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts.
- To install, tighten the new nuts to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
7. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid)
8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.5L
9. Remove the 3 transmission damper bolts and the transmission damper.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
All vehicles
10. NOTE: It may be necessary to lower the rear of the front subframe slightly to provide clearance
for removing the steering gear bolts. For
additional information, refer to the front subframe exploded view in Frame.
Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts. To install, tighten the new bolts to 125 Nm (92 lb-ft).
11. NOTE: For All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles (except Hybrid), it is necessary to grasp the
driveshaft by hand and apply slight downward pressure
to obtain clearance for the removal of the steering gear.
Rotate the steering gear 90 degrees clockwise and remove it from the LH side of the vehicle.
12. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or
Alignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Steering Gear > Page 5988
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot
Steering Gear Boot
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. For additional information, refer to Tie Rod End - Outer See: Tie
Rod/Service and Repair/Tie Rod End - Outer.
2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut.
3. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 5997
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns >
Page 6003
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds
In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds
In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6009
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds
In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6015
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6016
Steering Shaft: Service and Repair
Steering Column Shaft
Removal and Installation
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 6017
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel.
3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt.
- Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside.
4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness
electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery
high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. Position the connectors and harnesses aside.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the
steering column coupling-to-steering column bolt is
accessible.
6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column shaft
coupling-to-steering column bolt.
- To install, tighten the new bolt to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.
- Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected
or damage to the clockspring can result.
If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered.
For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column.
9. Remove the 3 steering column dash seal nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft.
11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt.
- To install, tighten the new bolt to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal.
13. Remove the steering column dash seal from the shaft.
- Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash
seal.
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering
Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering
Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6026
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns
Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On
Turns
TSB 10-13-2
07/19/10
STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a
pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter
turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight
off the wheels.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE,
AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE
ON TURNS.
1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before
steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop.
a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal
characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not
apply.
b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual
(WSM), Section 211-04.
a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern
(Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 6032
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3B676 14
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page
6041
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
TSB 10-18-8
09/27/10
VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the
steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F
(-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A
steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-04.
2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent.
3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency.
a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to
temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal
tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04.
b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to
Step 4.
c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure.
Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM,
Section 100-04.
4. Install a revised steering wheel damper.
a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel.
c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering
damper. (Figure 1)
d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps
> Page 6047
e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs.
Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On
Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
4R602 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop
Drive Chain: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed From A Stop
TSB 10-20-1
10/25/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HOOT TYPE NOISE AT LOW SPEED - ON LIGHT ACCELERATION
FROM A STOP BEFORE THE FIRST SHIFT - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 1/25/2010
FORD: 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2009-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 09-25-3 to add a production build date.
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 6F35 automatic
transmission and built on or before 1/25/2010 may exhibit a single hoot noise on light acceleration
from a stop just before the 1-2 shift. This noise will not occur any other time and will not occur
under heavy acceleration. On four wheel drive (4WD) vehicles, the noise may be heard at the rear
axle due to noise transfer through the rear differential unit (RDU). This is a normal characteristic of
the vehicle and does not affect transmission function and/or 4WD function or durability. A revised
transaxle chain has been released to reduce this noise.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE
A SLIGHT NOISE WHILE ACCELERATING FROM A STOP MAY BE A NORMAL
CHARACTERISTIC.
Drive Chain Replacement:
1. Drain fluid and remove the transaxle, following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 307-01.
2. Install the holding fixture 307-625.
3. Using the holding fixture 307-625, install the transaxle on a bench-mounted holding fixture.
4. Remove the torque converter retainer 307-566.
5. Install the torque converter handle 307-091.
6. The torque converter is heavy. Be careful not to drop it or damage will result. Using torque
converter handle 307-091, remove the torque converter
from the transaxle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6053
7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing
bolts. (Figure 1)
8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2)
9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6054
10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4)
11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5)
12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6055
13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7)
14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8)
15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and
the chain. (Figure 9)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6056
16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10)
17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets.
18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11)
19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6057
20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive
sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on
the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13)
21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6058
22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15)
23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16)
24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6059
25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18)
26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19)
27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace.
28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free
of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone
Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
(Figure 20)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6060
29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque
converter housing on the transaxle case and install the
17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21)
30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635.
31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter.
32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091.
33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566.
34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625.
36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01.
37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid
level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6061
Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7G249 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6067
7. Note the location of the stud bolts for assembly and remove the 17 torque converter housing
bolts. (Figure 1)
8. Using a suitable tool, pry the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 2)
9. Remove the torque converter housing loose from the transaxle case. (Figure 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6068
10. Remove the No.15 differential thrust bearing. (Figure 4)
11. Remove the differential. (Figure 5)
12. Remove the differential planetary sun gear. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6069
13. Remove the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 7)
14. Remove the No.11 drive sprocket thrust bearing. (Figure 8)
15. Lift the driven sprocket up first then simultaneously remove the drive and driven sprockets and
the chain. (Figure 9)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6070
16. Remove the drive chain from the drive and driven sprockets. (Figure 10)
17. Install the new drive chain on the drive and driven sprockets.
18. Install the No.10 thrust bearing. (Figure 11)
19. Install the No.12 thrust bearing. (Figure 12)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6071
20. Simultaneously install the drive/driven sprocket and chain assembly by first seating the drive
sprocket then seat the driven sprocket, Lightly tap on
the driven sprocket to be sure it is fully seated in the case. (Figure 13)
21. Install the No.11 thrust bearing. (Figure 14)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6072
22. Install the No.13 thrust washer. (Figure 15)
23. Install the final drive sun gear. (Figure 16)
24. Install the differential assembly. (Figure 17)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6073
25. Install the No.15 thrust bearing. (Figure 18)
26. Install the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635 on the input shaft. (Figure 19)
27. Clean the silicone off torque converter housing and transmission case sealing sur[ace.
28. Be sure the sealing sur[aces of the torque converter housing and the transaxle housing are free
of oil before applying Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone
Sealant. Apply Motorcraft® Ultra Silicone Sealant to the sealing surface of the transaxle case.
(Figure 20)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6074
29. Be sure the stud bolt is in the correct location as noted during disassembly. Install the torque
converter housing on the transaxle case and install the
17 bolts. Tighten to 18 lb-ft (24 N.m). (Figure 21)
30. Remove the turbine shaft seal protector 307-635.
31. Using the torque converter handle 307-091, install the torque converter.
32. Remove the torque converter handle 307-091.
33. Install the torque converter retainer 307-566.
34. Remove the transaxle from the bench-mounted holding fixture.
35. Remove the holding fixture 307-625.
36. Install transaxle and refill transaxle fluid following WSM, Section 307-01.
37. To correctly set and check the transmission fluid level monitor the transmission fluid
temperature (TFT) Parameter Identification (PID) using
Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)/ Portable Diagnostic Software (PDS) scan tool. Correct fluid
level will read in the cross hatch area of the dipstick at normal operating temperature 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C).
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.4 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001A 2009-2010 Escape, 5.7 Hrs.
Mariner 4X2 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.0 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 2.5L: Replace The Drive Chain In The Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102001B 2009-2010 Escape, 6.5 Hrs.
Mariner 4X4 3.0L: Replace The Drive Chain In The
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-20-1 > Oct > 10 > A/T - Hoot Noise At Low Speed
From A Stop > Page 6075
Transmission. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7G249 33
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch
Steering Wheel: Locations Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 6078
Steering Wheel: Locations Steering Wheel/Speed Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6079
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
2. Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring.
- Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside.
3. Remove the steering wheel bolt.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
4. NOTICE: Do not allow the Steering Wheel Puller to damage the steering wheel switch wires and
connector while removing the steering
wheel.
Using the Steering Wheel Puller, remove the steering wheel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6080
5. Tape the clockspring center rotor to the outer housing to keep it from rotating.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Tie Rod End - Inner
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Inner
Tie Rod End - Inner
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: When servicing inner tie rods, a new bellows boot and clamps must be installed or a leak
may occur causing steering gear damage.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. Turn the steering wheel fully in the direction of the inner tie-rod end that is being removed.
3. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
5. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle and
remove the tie rod.
6. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut.
7. Remove and discard the boot clamps and the steering gear bellows boot.
8. Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack.
9. Using a suitable tool, remove the inner tie-rod end.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
10. NOTE: Using a suitable tool, hold the steering gear rack while tightening the inner tie rod.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
11. Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. For additional information, refer to Suspension
&/or Alignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Tie Rod End - Inner > Page 6085
Tie Rod: Service and Repair Tie Rod End - Outer
Tie Rod End - Outer
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: RH side shown, LH side similar.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
3. Remove and discard the outer tie-rod end nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
4. Using the Ball Joint Separator, separate the outer tie-rod end from the front wheel knuckle.
5. Remove the outer tie-rod end.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Check and, if necessary, adjust the front toe. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or
Alignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Ball Joint Deflection Lower...................................................................................................................
..................................................................................0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications >
Page 6090
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection
Suspension System
Component Tests
Ball Joint Inspection
1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. Install a new wheel bearing
as necessary. Refer to Front Suspension &/or
Steering Knuckle.
2. NOTE: In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full rebound with
the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame.
Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position.
3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage.
- If the ball joint or ball joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary. Refer to Front
Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle.
4. NOTICE: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or suspension
components while checking for relative
movement. Suspension damage may occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative
movement that may not exist when using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using
hand force only.
Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on
the lower control arm by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and
lower arm at the lower ball joint.
- If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint.
- If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5.
5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close
as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of
the ball joint.
To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the
lower control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud.
6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the lower
control arm, by hand.
- If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed. Refer to Front
Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle.
- If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection
Control Arm Bushing: Testing and Inspection
Suspension System
Component Tests
Lower Arm Rearward Bushing Inspection
NOTE: Some lower arm rearward bushings may exhibit minor surface cracks or separations that
will not adversely affect the performance of the bushing. Surface cracks or separations that are 10
mm (0.393 in) or less in depth will function normally and do not require lower arm replacement.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Vehicle Jacking and Lifting. See:
Wheels and Tires/Vehicle Lifting
2. Inspect the rubber portion of the lower arm rearward bushing for cracks or a separation between
the rubber and the bushing outer sleeve.
- If a crack or separation is found, insert a paper clip or other suitable measuring device into the
crack or separation and measure the depth.
- If the bushing has a crack or separation that is greater than 10 mm (0.393 in) in depth, install a
new lower arm. Refer to Front Suspension &/or Steering Knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
Wheel Knuckle
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System.
2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut.
3. Using the Front Hub Remover, separate the halfshaft from the wheel hub.
4. Remove and discard the tie-rod end nut.
5. NOTICE: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to
the wheel knuckle can result.
NOTICE: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the Tie-Rod End Remover.
Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6098
6. Remove and discard the lower ball joint bolt and nut.
7. Remove the wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside.
8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle.
9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle.
- Discard the nuts and bolts.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new lower ball joint bolt and nut.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor and the bolt.
- Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the new tie-rod end nut.
- Tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft).
6. Using the Halfshaft Installer, install the halfshaft into the wheel hub.
7. Install the brake disc. For additional information, refer to Disc Brake System.
8. NOTICE: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be
tightened to specification before the
vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded
with the weight of the vehicle applied.
NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating.
Install the new front wheel hub nut.
- Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. For additional information, refer to Suspension &/or
Alignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Bushing
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly oriented
with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the vehicle.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 2 stabilizer bar bushing bracket bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket.
- Discard the bolts.
- To install, tighten the new bolts to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part.
Remove the stabilizer bar bushing.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 >
Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6111
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps
Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On
Bumps
TSB 09-24-2
12/14/09
CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR
END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009
FORD: 2005-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles
built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over
bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links?
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
204-00 diagnostics.
b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2.
2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any
evidence present of loose upper nuts?
a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
NOTE
THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK
LOWER ATTACHMENT.
b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01.
Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to
replace the stabilizer bar end link.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test,
Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End
Links (Do Not Use With Any
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec >
09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 6117
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5K483 24
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6118
Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair
Stabilizer Bar Link
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Do not use power tools to remove or install the stabilizer bar link nuts. Damage to the
stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots may occur.
NOTICE: Do not hold the stabilizer bar link boot with any tool or damage to the boot may occur.
NOTE: The stabilizer bar links are designed with low friction ball joints that have a low breakaway
torque.
NOTE: When installing the stabilizer link to the stabilizer bar, make sure the stabilizer bar is
perpendicular to the stabilizer link when tightening the link nut or the link nut may not seat properly.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
3. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove and discard the lower stabilizer bar link nut.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new
parts.
Remove the stabilizer bar link.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6128
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6129
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6135
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6136
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6137
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6138
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6139
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6140
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6141
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6142
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6143
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
Subframe - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6144
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6145
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles
3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. For additional information, refer to
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission
Control Systems.
All vehicles
5. Remove the front tires. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6146
6. NOTICE: Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and
washers or damage to the vehicle may
occur.
NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap
straps or damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). For additional
information, refer to Exhaust System &/or Catalytic
Converter.
9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Hybrid vehicles only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6147
12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket.
All vehicles
13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
All vehicles except hybrid
14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
All vehicles
15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6148
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE: Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
NOTE: When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear
bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer the components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6157
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6158
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6164
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6165
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder
Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In
Ign. Cylinder
TSB 09-19-15
10/05/09
IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION
ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may
exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start
position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift
interlock is not affected.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern.
a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove
ignition key.
b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock
restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage
before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction.
c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction?
(1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14 for additional diagnostics
(2) No - Proceed to step 2.
2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs.
The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 >
Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6171
Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
3511 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6172
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6173
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6174
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6175
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6176
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6177
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6186
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6187
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6193
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6194
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6195
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6196
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6197
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6198
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6199
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6200
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6201
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
Subframe - Rear
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their
failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed
if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
2. Remove the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or
Axle Shaft Assembly.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6202
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Vehicles with AWD
5. Install the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle
Shaft Assembly.
All vehicles
6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6211
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 >
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6212
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6218
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10
> Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6219
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6220
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6221
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6222
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6223
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6224
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6225
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip.
3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position
the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6230
Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod Constant
Velocity (CV) joint can result in the
separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Suspension
Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and Repair/Overhaul.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender.
2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip.
7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. For additional information, refer to
Suspension &/or Alignment.
Rear Suspension
Spring
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6231
NOTE: All-Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicle shown, Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicle similar.
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and position the brake tube and bracket
assembly aside.
4. Using a suitable jackstand, support the wheel knuckle.
5. Remove and discard the shock absorber lower nut, washer and bolt.
6. Remove the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service
and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm.
7. Loosen the lower arm inner bolt.
8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulators and coil spring for installation.
Using the jackstand, carefully lower the wheel knuckle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6232
9. Remove the coil spring.
Installation
1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulators to the previously noted position.
2. Using a suitable jackstand, carefully raise the wheel knuckle.
3. Install the new shock absorber lower bolt, washer and nut.
- Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
4. Install the upper arm. For additional information, refer to Upper Arm See: Control Arm/Service
and Repair/Rear Suspension/Upper Arm.
5. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder.
- Tighten to 18 Nm (159 lb-in).
6. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt.
- Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
7. Bleed the rear wheel cylinder. For addition information, refer to Brakes and Traction Control for
Component Bleeding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6233
Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul
Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut.
- To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut.
5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.
6. Remove the coil spring.
7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6234
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing.
11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Suspension
Strut and Spring Assembly
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal.
Remove the wheel and tire.
2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip.
3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position
the brake jounce hose aside.
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
5. NOTE: Use the hex-holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or
installing the stabilizer bar link nut.
Remove and discard the upper stabilizer bar link nut.
6. Remove and discard the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts.
7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6239
Remove and discard the 4 strut upper bushing nuts.
8. NOTICE: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod Constant
Velocity (CV) joint can result in the
separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft.
Remove the strut and spring assembly.
9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly,
refer to Strut and Spring Assembly See: Overhaul.
Installation
1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender.
2. Align the 4 new strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks.
- Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Install the 2 new strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
4. Install the new upper stabilizer bar link nut.
- Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
5. Install the wheel speed sensor harness bolt.
- Tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip.
7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. For additional information, refer to
Suspension &/or Alignment.
Rear Suspension
Shock Absorber
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6240
retention of these parts.
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the wheel and tire. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
3. Using a suitable jackstand, support the rear suspension.
4. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nut and bushing assembly.
- To install, tighten the new nut and bushing assembly to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt.
- To install, tighten the new nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
6. Remove the shock absorber.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6241
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
Strut and Spring Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the strut rod nut.
Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor.
2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly.
3. Remove and discard the strut rod nut.
- To assemble, tighten the new nut to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft).
4. Remove the strut.
5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator.
6. Remove the coil spring.
7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator.
8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing
plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6242
the strut is installed.
Remove the bearing plate.
9. Remove the bearing.
10. Remove the strut upper bushing.
11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper.
12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6247
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front
Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6248
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Front Steering
Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6249
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6250
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6251
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information >
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair
Jacking and Lifting
WARNING: When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the
parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended
vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could
unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the
vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or
jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline
unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could
cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING: Position the hoist lift arms as shown in the illustration. Incorrect positioning could result
in vehicle slipping or falling from the hoist. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious
personal injury.
NOTICE: The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a
deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other
purpose.
NOTICE: To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on
lift without first checking for possible interference.
NOTICE: Damage to the rear tire air deflector, suspension, exhaust or steering linkage
components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting
the vehicle.
Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training > Page 6265
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire
Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training > Page 6266
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
6272
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor
> Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page
6273
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub
Removal
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6278
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See:
Steering/Front Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
2. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing.
3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel
knuckle after removing the wheel hub.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub.
4. Remove the snap ring.
5. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, Wheel Bearing Adapter and Handle, press the outer
wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise.
2. NOTE: Step Plate 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle.
Using the Pinion Bearing Cup Replacer and the 2 Step Plates, install the wheel bearing into the
wheel knuckle.
3. Install the snap ring.
4. Using the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6279
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle See: Steering/Front
Steering Knuckle/Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6280
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Bearing - All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Removal
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6281
1. Remove the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
2. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Remove the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
4. Position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press.
- Using the PTO Driven Gear Oil Seal Installer, the Handle and the Pinion Bearing Cone Remover
or equivalent, position the wheel knuckle on a suitable press and press the wheel bearing from the
wheel knuckle.
Installation
1. Using the Rear Axle Drawbar, Bearing Cup Replacer and Differential Bearing Cup Replacer,
install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle.
2. Install the new wheel bearing snap ring.
3. Install the 4 bolts and the brake drum backing plate.
- Tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft).
4. Using the Halfshaft Installer and Receiver Adapter, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6282
5. Install the wheel knuckle. For additional information, refer to Wheel Knuckle - All Wheel Drive
(AWD) See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair/Rear Suspension.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information
> Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Rear wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................290 Nm (214 lb-ft).
Front wheel hub nut Tighten to.............................................................................................................
......................................................................................300 Nm (221 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Specifications
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Tighten the wheel nuts in a star/cross pattern. Tighten to....................................................................
...............................................................................................................................135 Nm (100 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. For additional information, refer to Wheel Bearing and
Wheel Hub See: Wheel Bearing/Service and
Repair/Front Suspension.
2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub.
- Discard the wheel stud.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6292
Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Suspension
Wheel Studs
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Suspension fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital
components and systems and their failure may result in major service expense. New parts must be
installed with the same part numbers or equivalent part, if replacement is necessary. Do not use a
replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified
during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
NOTICE: Never use a hammer to remove a wheel stud. Damage to the wheel hub may result.
1. Remove the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
2. Using the C-Frame and Screw Installer/Remover, remove the wheel stud.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use washers that have an ID that is larger than the OD of the wheel stud
serrations. Use enough washers (approximately 4) to
allow the wheel stud to fully seat against the hub flange.
Position the new wheel stud in the wheel hub, aligning the serrations in the wheel hub flange made
by the original wheel stud.
- Place approximately 4 washers over the outside end of the wheel stud and thread a standard
wheel nut onto the wheel stud with the flat side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Front Suspension > Page 6293
against the washers.
- Tighten the wheel nut until the wheel stud head seats against the back side of the wheel hub
flange.
4. Remove the wheel nut and washers.
5. Install the brake shoes. For additional information, refer to Drum Brake System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6300
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6301
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Temperature Blend Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6302
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver > Page 6303
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Locations Mode Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Mode Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6306
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6307
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6308
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Air Inlet Mode Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Diagrams > Mode Door Actuator > Page 6309
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagrams Temperature Blend Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator > Page 6312
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Blend Door Actuator
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Blend Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator > Page 6313
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Air Inlet Door Actuator
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Air Inlet Door Actuator
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the
instrument panel.
1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6316
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6317
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC),
the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On
vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend
door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle.
1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
2. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct screw.
4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct
screw.
5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of
the Audio Control Module (ACM).
Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6318
1. Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer.
2. Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw.
6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer
above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
8. NOTICE: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the
plenum chamber when removing the
screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to
jam, or may cause noise concerns.
NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the
RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door > Page 6319
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles
equipped with Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator.
For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH See: Temperature Blend Door
Actuator - RH.
1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6328
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 6329
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6335
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins
> All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6336
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Air Duct: Removal and Replacement
Footwell Duct - Rear
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly.
1. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever.
2. Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6339
5. NOTE: Position the carpet to gain access to the floor ducts.
Separate the wiring harness from the LH floor duct and position aside.
6. Remove the LH floor duct.
7. Remove the RH floor duct pin-type retainer.
8. Remove the RH floor duct.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6340
Air Duct: Overhaul
Instrument Panel Air Distribution Ducts
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6341
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the passenger airbag module. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
2. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Accessories and
Optional Equipment.
3. Remove the Instrument Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel,
Gauges and Warning Indicators.
4. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier
&/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the defroster duct adapter.
6. Remove the 4 Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) screws and the FDIM.
- Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws.
8. Remove the 4 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws.
9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket nuts.
10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 6342
11. Remove the 2 glove compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker.
12. Remove the lower center instrument panel trim screw.
13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument panel trim screws.
14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical connectors.
15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws.
16. Remove the 2 lower corner instrument panel trim screws.
17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct screws.
18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the LH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly.
19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel
support to access the RH duct assembly upper center
screw.
Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly.
20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6351
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents >
Page 6352
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents
Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents > Page 6358
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From
Dash Vents > Page 6359
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side
Register - Passenger Side
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring will
damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the passenger side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side > Page 6362
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center
Register - Center
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish
panel assembly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Register - Passenger Side > Page 6363
Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side
Register - Driver Side
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim
ring. Prying on the register trim ring will
damage the register assembly.
Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while
working around the perimeter of the register.
2. Remove the driver side register.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6367
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6368
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6369
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair
Auxiliary Coolant Flow Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System.
3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield.
4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose.
5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts.
- To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in).
8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly.
9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other
detergents.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6373
- Fill the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6379
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6380
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6381
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6382
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6383
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6384
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6385
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6386
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6387
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6388
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6389
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6390
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6391
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6392
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6393
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6394
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6395
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6396
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6397
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 6398
Blower Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6399
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector.
2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged
from the heater core and evaporator core housing.
3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower
motor.
Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower
motor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6403
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6404
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor Resistor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6408
Blower Motor Resistor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6409
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6410
Blower Motor Resistor: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Blower Motor Resistor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6411
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Resistor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor resistor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6415
Blower Motor Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6416
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6417
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
A cabin air filter is available for this vehicle as a dealer installed accessory. The accessory cabin air
filter will be located in the air inlet under the RH side of the cowl panel grille, if installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6424
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6425
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown, in-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6428
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Adjustments
Compressor Clutch: Adjustments
Air Conditioning (A/C) Clutch Air Gap Adjustment
1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C
clutch pulley.
2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers
between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft
until the clearance is within specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Adjustments > Page 6433
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
Clutch and Clutch Field Coil - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal
1. Remove the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air
Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
1. Using a suitable spanner-type wrench, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub.
2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Adjustments > Page 6434
3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacer(s).
4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring.
5. NOTICE: Do not use air tools. Damage to the Air Conditioning (A/C) clutch pulley or A/C
compressor may result.
Remove the A/C compressor pulley.
1. Install the A/C Compressor Shaft Protector.
2. Install a suitable 3 jaw puller on the A/C compressor shaft protector and A/C compressor pulley.
3. Remove the A/C compressor pulley.
6. Remove the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws.
7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil.
Installation
NOTE: A new A/C compressor may come equipped with a clutch and pulley. If not, the A/C clutch
components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found.
1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for
damage.
- Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to
excessive heat.
- Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor
pulley that is more than fingernail depth.
- Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing.
2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces.
3. Install the A/C clutch field coil.
4. Install the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws.
5. NOTICE: The Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor must be positioned on the press so that only
the flat part of the A/C compressor
housing is contacting the base with the A/C compressor shaft aligned with the center of the press
shaft. If the A/C compressor is not installed correctly on the press, the A/C compressor and/or A/C
compressor pulley will be damaged.
Install the A/C compressor pulley.
1. Install the A/C compressor on a suitable press.
2. Position the A/C compressor pulley on the A/C compressor.
3. Install the A/C Clutch Installer on the A/C compressor pulley.
4. Using the press, install the A/C compressor pulley.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component
Information > Adjustments > Page 6435
6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out.
7. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline
opening.
8. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub.
9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub bolt.
1. Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with a suitable spanner-type wrench.
2. Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (177 lb-in).
10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers.
11. Install the A/C compressor. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor - 2.5L See: Service and Repair or Air
Conditioning (A/C) Compressor - 3.0L (4V) See: Service and Repair.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams
Compressor Clutch Coil: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 6439
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6443
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 6444
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
A/C Condenser
The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of
the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes
to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled.
On non-hybrid vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the condenser
is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6448
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
Condenser Core - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is
removed from the vehicle.
All vehicles
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6449
5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets.
6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Vehicles with automatic transmission
7. NOTE: The transmission cooler hose inlet (upper tube) attaches to the transmission outlet line
(passenger side front of transmission). The
transmission cooler outlet (lower tube) attaches to the transmission inlet line (driver side of
transmission).
Release the 2 transmission cooler line clamps and disconnect the lines from the A/C condenser.
All vehicles
8. Remove the 2 condenser bolts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
9. Remove the condenser core.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair
Control Assembly: Service and Repair
Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) Module
Removal and Installation
NOTE: When installing a new HVAC module on vehicles equipped with Electronic Manual
Temperature Control (EMTC), the Programmable Module Installation (PMI) procedure must be
carried out to configure the new module to the vehicle. Refer to Information Bus.
1. Remove the middle center instrument panel finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws.
3. Remove the HVAC module.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
HVAC Module-EMTC
Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6457
Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6460
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6461
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams >
HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6462
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Coupler HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Coupler HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant Line Fittings
NOTICE: Use only a plastic or nonmetallic tool for removing O-ring seals and gasket seals from the
refrigerant line fittings. Use of a metallic tool will create scratches on the sealing surface of the
fitting that can result in refrigerant system leaks.
Whenever a refrigerant line fitting is disconnected, the fitting must be cleaned of any foreign
material and new O-ring seals and/or gasket seals must be installed. Use only the O-ring seals and
gasket seals specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent.
If a refrigerant system line fitting must remain disconnected for an extended period of time, it
should be capped to avoid contamination of the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6469
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents
Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents > Page 6478
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash
Vents > Page 6479
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents
Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents
TSB 09-21-6
11/02/09
WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS
FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge
2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX
MERCURY:
2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower
motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the
evaporator core.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes
WARNING
MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED
EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY
SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA).
^ Avoid inhaling dust.
^ Avoid contact with eyes.
^ Store away from acids.
^ Wash thoroughly after handling.
^ Avoid release to the environment.
NOTE
THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST
MASK IS RECOMMENDED.
Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through
the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening.
NOTE
THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS.
NOTE
WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH
AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY
START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT.
Clean A/C Ducts:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents > Page 6485
1. Remove floor duct trim.
2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver
side.
3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings.
4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop
air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the
blowgun using a worm clamp.
5. Close all instrument panel registers.
6. Set temperature setting to full cold.
7. Place mode in floor / panel.
8. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air
through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each
register before moving on to the next register.
10. Change mode to floor I defrost.
11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds.
12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to
move between each change.
13. Turn off vacuum cleaner.
Clean Evaporator Core:
1. Change mode to full floor.
2. Ensure temperature is full cold.
3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412.
4. Turn on vacuum cleaner.
5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5
minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action.
6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side.
NOTE
ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE
EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR.
7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412.
8. Open all registers.
9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the
temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is
achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached.
10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times.
11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not
come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present
continue to Step 12.
12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct.
13. Reassemble floor duct trim.
14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing
From Dash Vents > Page 6486
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs.
2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid,
2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use
With Any Other Labor Operations)
092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs.
Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
19860 49
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6487
Evaporator Core: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Core
The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator
core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core
through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the
evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower
motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service
Bulletins > Page 6488
Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Evaporator/Condenser Core - On-Vehicle Leak Test
1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery,
Evacuation and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
attached to the evaporator core) or condenser core from
the A/C system.
3. Clean the fittings.
4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator
core/TXV tube connections.
5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to
the test fittings. If available, use hoses without
shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to
the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off
valve does not open.
Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the
evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump.
6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for
a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low
pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove
any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not
completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant
leak.
7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the
gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum
pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure
rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set
connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core.
8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump.
Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the
101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101
kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated.
- If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge.
- If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an
additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or
condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum.
- If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check
for vacuum loss.
9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser
core.
If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and
recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator
core or condenser core. Test the system for normal operation.
If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the
evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. Test the system for
normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on non-hybrid vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle
the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below
acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 6492
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
Air Conditioning
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV)
The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the
engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the
high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure
sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes
through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the
temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type
valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases
the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the
amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) > Page 6497
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation A/C Pressure Transducer
Air Conditioning
A/C Pressure Transducer (Non-Hybrid Only)
The A/C pressure transducer monitors the compressor discharge pressure and communicates with
the PCM. The PCM will interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event that the A/C pressure
transducer indicates high system discharge pressures. It is also used to sense low charge
conditions. If the pressure is below a predetermined value for a given ambient temperature, the
PCM will not allow the clutch to engage.
The A/C pressure transducer is located on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the
refrigerant before removing the A/C pressure transducer.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6498
Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Service and Repair
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant
for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the
hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and
contaminate the refrigerant system.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV.
- Discard the O-ring seals.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of
any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will
damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6499
- If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten
the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled.
- Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals.
- Add the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid) to the
refrigerant system.
5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core
1. NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the
Plugged Heater Core component test before the heater
core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as
follows:
Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant
leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in
the heater core.
2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of
non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the
heater hose connection and damage the heater core.
Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 6504
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Plugged
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Plugged
1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level.
2. Start the engine and turn on the heater.
3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet
hoses to see if they are hot.
4. If the outlet only is not hot:
- the heater core may have an air pocket.
- the heater core may be plugged.
5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 6505
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Pressure Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Pressure Test
Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test.
1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing.
Drain the coolant from the cooling system.
2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core.
3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube.
4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter
BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater
hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps.
5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the
heater core.
7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes.
8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the
heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the
vehicle.
9. Carry out the Bench Test. See: Heater Core - Bench Test
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Heater Core > Page 6506
Heater Core: Testing and Inspection Heater Core - Bench Test
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Heater Core - Bench Test
1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle.
2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core.
3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then
connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter.
4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water.
5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Page 6507
Heater Core: Service and Repair
Heater Core
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
NOTE: Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. For additional information, refer to Cooling
System &/or Engine Block Heater.
1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. For additional information, refer to Heater
Core And Evaporator Core Housing See:
Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
2. Remove the dash panel seal.
3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the heater core.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information >
Service and Repair
High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Pressure Relief Valve - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service
part.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system.
5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line
Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line - 2.5L
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6515
6. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring and gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6516
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Condenser to Receiver Drier Line
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant
for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the
hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and
contaminate the refrigerant system.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the DC/DC converter. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
3. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6517
4. Remove the evaporator-to-compressor suction line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
8. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line.
9. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of
any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will
damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Add the correct amount of clean electric A/C compressor oil to the refrigerant system.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6518
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line
Evaporator Inlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Remove the evaporator inlet line.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6519
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line
Evaporator Outlet Line - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield.
4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line.
6. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 6520
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
7. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket.
8. Remove the evaporator outlet line.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Replacement
Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement
Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system lubricant
for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the
hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and
contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater
core is removed.
1. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System &/or Engine Block
Heater.
2. Recover the refrigerant.
3. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier
&/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
4. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seals.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6525
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core.
6. Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing in the following sequence.
1. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs.
2. Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle
while pulling the housing toward the RH door
opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct.
3. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing.
8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed.
9. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of
any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will
damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Install new gasket seals.
- Add the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid) or electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid) to the
refrigerant system.
10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system. For additional information, refer to Cooling System
&/or Engine Block Heater.
11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6526
Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul
Heater Core And Evaporator Core Housing
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6527
Disassembly and Assembly
Plenum chamber
1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber.
3. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6528
4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator.
5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
6. Remove the plenum chamber.
Air inlet duct
7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct.
8. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator.
Complete disassembly
10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness.
11. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor.
13. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal.
14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
15. Remove the heater core.
16. Remove the Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) dash panel seal.
17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal.
18. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped).
19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped).
20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core
and evaporator core housing.
21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor.
22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Receiver/Drier
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier
shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete
loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure
for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present
in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed.
The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.5L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at
the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser
core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from
the refrigerant.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6532
Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair
Receiver Drier - 2.5L, 3.0L (4V)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the
receiver/drier and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not
necessary to install a new receiver/drier.
NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the A/C system, except
when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the
receiver/drier. Damage to the receiver/drier includes leaks, physical damage to the receiver/drier
shell or desiccant, or moisture contamination. Moisture contamination results only from a complete
loss of refrigerant, and equalization of the refrigerant system pressure with atmospheric pressure
for a period longer than one hour. If even a slight amount of positive refrigerant pressure is present
in the refrigerant system before repairs are carried out, a new receiver/drier should not be installed.
1. Recover the refrigerant.
2. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
3. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
4. Disconnect the A/C pressure transducer electrical connector.
5. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Page 6533
- Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal.
6. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket clip.
7. Remove the 2 receiver/drier nuts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. Remove the receiver/drier.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals.
- Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil.
10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity.................................
..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08
kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity
Specifications > Page 6538
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...............................................Non-Hybrid 0.71 kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Fill Capacity.................................
..........................................................................................................................................Hybrid 1.08
kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb)
Item..............................................................................................................................R-134a
Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) Specification...........................................
......................................................................................................................................................WS
H-M17B19-A Fill Capacity....................................................................................................................
...................................................Hybrid Only 0.91 kg (32 oz) (2 lb)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6539
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Refrigerant Identification Testing
Refrigerant Identification
1. NOTE: A Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer must be used to identify gas samples taken
directly from the refrigeration system or storage
containers prior to recovering or charging the refrigerant system.
Follow the instructions included with the Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer to obtain the
sample for testing.
2. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer will display one of the following:
- If the purity level of R-134a is 98% or greater by weight, the green PASS LED will light. The
weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22, hydrocarbons and air will be displayed on the digital
display.
- If refrigerant R-134a does not meet the 98% purity level, the red FAIL LED will light and an alarm
will sound alerting the user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22
and hydrocarbons will be displayed on the digital display.
- If hydrocarbon concentrations are 2% or greater by weight, the red FAIL LED will light,
"Hydrocarbon High" will be displayed on the digital display, and an alarm will sound alerting the
user of potential hazards. The weight concentrations of R-134a, R-12, R-22 and hydrocarbons will
also be displayed on the digital display.
3. The percentage of air contained in the sample will be displayed if the R-134a content is 98% or
greater. The Refrigerant Blend Identifier with
Printer eliminates the effect of air when determining the refrigerant sample content because air is
not considered a contaminant, although air can affect A/C system performance. When the
Refrigerant Blend Identifier with Printer has determined that a refrigerant source is pure (R-134a is
98% or greater by weight) and air concentration levels are 2% or greater by weight, it will prompt
the user if an air purge is desired.
4. If contaminated refrigerant is detected, repeat the refrigerant identification test to verify that the
refrigerant is indeed contaminated.
Contaminated Refrigerant Handling
NOTICE: If contaminated refrigerant is detected, DO NOT recover the refrigerant into R-134a
recovery/recycling equipment. Recovery of contaminated refrigerant will contaminate the recovered
refrigerant supply and may damage the recovery/recycling equipment.
NOTE: A new suction accumulator or receiver/drier must be installed as directed by the A/C system
flushing procedure.
1. Recover the contaminated refrigerant using suitable recovery-only equipment designed for
capturing and storing contaminated refrigerant only.
- If this equipment is not available, contact an A/C service facility in the area with the correct
equipment to carry out this service.
2. Determine and correct the cause of the customer's initial concern.
3. Flush the A/C system.
4. Dispose of the contaminated refrigerant in accordance with all federal, state and local
regulations.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging
Refrigerant System Recovery
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6542
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTICE: An Air Conditioning (A/C) refrigerant analyzer must be used before the recovery of any
vehicle's A/C refrigerant. Failure to do so puts the shop's bulk refrigerant at risk of contamination. If
the vehicle's A/C refrigerant is contaminated, refer the customer to the service facility that carried
out the last A/C service. If the customer wishes to pay the additional cost, use the A/C recovery
equipment that is designated for recovering contaminated A/C refrigerant. All contaminated A/C
refrigerant must be disposed of as hazardous waste. For all equipment, follow the equipment
manufacturer procedures and instructions.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends the use of R-134a refrigerant management equipment
that meets the requirements of the SAE J2788 standard.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not available, refrigerant
system recovery may be accomplished using a separate recovery station.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Prior to recovering, the purity of the refrigerant must be verified. For additional information, refer
to Refrigerant Identification Testing See:
Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Refrigerant Identification
Testing.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Recover the refrigerant from the system following the operating instructions provided by the
equipment manufacturer. Note the amount of oil
removed during the refrigerant recovery (if any). Add that same amount back into the system once
repairs are complete.
4. Once the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine has recovered the refrigerant, switch OFF
the power supply.
5. Allow the system to set for about 2 minutes, and observe the system vacuum reading. If the
vacuum is not lost, disconnect the recovery equipment.
6. If the system does lose vacuum, repeat Steps 3 through 5 until the vacuum level remains stable
for 2 minutes.
7. Carry out the required repairs.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out recovery, evacuation and charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant
Management Machine is not available, evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum
Pump and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low- and high-pressure service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
2. Evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least 99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of
vacuum and as close to 101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible.
Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45 minutes.
3. Turn OFF the Vacuum Pump. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that
the system vacuum is held. If vacuum is not held for
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6543
5 minutes, leak test the system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Evacuation Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Vacuum Pump
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out evacuation of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system evacuation may be accomplished using a separate Vacuum Pump
and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak in
vacuum that may be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is
necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly
basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. Connect the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the low-side and high-side service gauge port
valves.
2. Connect the center (yellow) hose from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the suction port on the
Vacuum Pump.
3. Open all valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and both service gauge port valves.
4. Turn on the Vacuum Pump and evacuate the system until the low-pressure gauge reads at least
99.4 kPa (29.5 in-Hg) of vacuum and as close to
101.1 kPa (30 in-Hg) as possible. Continue to operate the Vacuum Pump for a minimum of 45
minutes.
5. Close the high-side and low-side valves on the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set (not the service
gauge port valves) and turn OFF the Vacuum Pump.
6. Observe the low-pressure gauge for 5 minutes to make sure that the system vacuum is held. If
vacuum is not held for 5 minutes, leak test the
system, repair the leak and evacuate the system again.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all
refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks
are present.
1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition
of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant
system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and
Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or
electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil
Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Connect a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to the low-side and high-side service
gauge port valves following the operating instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
3. Set the refrigerant charge amount, and charge the refrigerant system following the instructions
provided by the equipment manufacturer.
Refrigerant System Charging Using a R-134a Manifold Gauge Set and Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter
NOTE: Ford Motor Company recommends use of a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine to
carry out charging of the refrigerant system. If a R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine is not
available, refrigerant system charging may be accomplished using a separate Automatic
Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a Manifold Gauge Set.
NOTE: Leaks in refrigerant system service equipment, hoses or gauges can cause a leak that may
be misinterpreted as a problem with the vehicle's
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6544
refrigerant system. It is necessary to leak-test all refrigerant system service equipment, hoses and
gauges on a weekly basis to verify that no leaks are present.
1. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition
of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant
system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and
Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or
electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil
Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
2. Assemble the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set, Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter and R-134a
supply tank following the Automatic Refrigerant
Charging Meter operating instructions.
3. Charge the refrigerant system following the Automatic Refrigerant Charging Meter operating
instructions.
4. If the refrigerant flow stops before the refrigerant charge is complete, start the engine, select
MAX A/C operation and allow the refrigerant charge
to complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6545
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C)
Compressor Installation
Refrigerant System Filtering Following Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Installation
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant
Oil Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
NOTICE: On vehicles being serviced for an internal compressor or desiccant failure, a new
Thermostatic Expansion Valve (TXV) and any hoses containing mufflers must be installed prior to
filtering the Air Conditioning (A/C) system. Internal plumbing of these devices makes it impossible
to correctly remove any foreign material/debris. These components are typically discarded after
A/C system contamination. Hoses without mufflers can normally be reused unless they are clogged
with foreign material. The F8VZ-19E773-AB filter is intended for use on one vehicle only.
All vehicles
1. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting.
- Discard the gasket seal.
2. NOTICE: The flexible extension adapters included in the A/C Flush Adapter Kit (219-00074) are
designed for low-pressure flushing and
are not designed for use with a charged refrigerant system. Do not make the condenser fitting
connections using the flexible extension adapters or damage to the adapters and loss of refrigerant
will occur.
NOTE: Use flexible refrigerant hose of 17,238 kPa (2,500 psi) burst rating.
Using the correct adapters and service hoses, install the pancake filter between the condenser and
the condenser outlet fitting.
3. NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition
of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant
system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor and contaminate the refrigerant
system. For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil Adding See: Service and
Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil (non-hybrid vehicles) or
electric A/C compressor oil (hybrid vehicles). For additional information, refer to Refrigerant Oil
Adding See: Service and Repair/Refrigerant Oil Adding.
4. Evacuate and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning
(A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Service and Repair > Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging > Page 6546
Non-hybrid vehicles
5. Provide adequate airflow to the front of the vehicle (with a fan, if necessary). Start the engine
and allow it to idle briefly. Select A/C operation and
set the blower speed to HI. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly.
6. Gradually bring the engine up to 1,200 rpm by running it at lower rpms for short periods (first at
800 rpm, then at 1,000 rpm). Set the engine at
1,200 rpm and run it for one hour with the A/C system operating.
7. Stop the engine.
Hybrid vehicles
8. Start the vehicle and select A/C operation. Verify that the A/C is operating correctly.
9. Run the A/C system for one hour.
All vehicles
10. Recover the refrigerant. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System
Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See: Service and
Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
11. Remove the pancake filter, hoses and adapters from the vehicle.
12. Install a new gasket seal and connect the condenser outlet fitting.
13. Install a new receiver/drier.
14. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation
and Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity.....................................
..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid
325 ml (11 fl oz)
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification.......................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......- Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................................
.............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz)
Refer to the Refrigerant Oil Adding / Procedures. See: Service and Repair
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications >
Capacity Specifications > Page 6551
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Item.........................................................................................................................................PAG
Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D Specification...............................................
..................................................................................................................................................WSHM1C231-B Fill Capacity........................................................................................................................
..........................................................Non-hybrid 148 ml (5 fl oz) Fill Capacity.....................................
..................................................................................................................................................Hybrid
325 ml (11 fl oz)
Item.......................................................................................................................................................
...Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil YN-32 Specification.......................................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......- Fill Capacity.................................................................................................................................
.............................................Hybrid only 130 ml (4.4 fl oz)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6552
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
Refrigerant Oil Adding
Refrigerant Oil Adding
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTICE: During normal Air Conditioning (A/C) operation, oil is circulated through the system with
the refrigerant, and a small amount is retained in each component. If certain components of the
system are removed, some of the refrigerant oil will go with the component. To maintain the original
total oil charge, it is necessary to compensate for the oil lost by adding oil to the system with the
new part.
1. Refer to the chart below for refrigerant oil adding amounts and methods of installation.
a If an excessive amount of refrigerant oil is lost due to a hose rupture/separation or other damage,
the total system refrigerant oil capacity must be
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6553
added.
b The amount specified may be used for one or multiple O-ring leak repairs. Do not multiply the
refrigerant oil amount by the number of O-ring leaks being repaired.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After A/C Compressor Replacement - Non-Hybrid
NOTE: Service A/C compressors are shipped without refrigerant oil.
1. Rotate the old A/C compressor shaft 8 to 10 full rotations (clockwise) while collecting the PAG oil
in a clean measuring cup.
- Add the same amount plus the amount collected during refrigerant recovery.
Adding Refrigerant Oil After Electric A/C Compressor Replacement - Hybrid
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTICE: Do not use the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine built-in oil injection system to
inject Motorcraft Electric A/C Compressor Oil to the refrigerant system on hybrid vehicles equipped
with an electric Air Conditioning (A/C) compressor if it has been previously used to inject PAG oil.
For hybrid vehicles, use only clean manual injection tools. Injection of Motorcraft Electric A/C
Compressor Oil into a hybrid vehicle with equipment previously used with PAG oil will contaminate
and damage the hybrid A/C system.
NOTE: Service electric A/C compressors are shipped with 60 ml (2 fl oz) of electric A/C
compressor oil already installed.
1. Drain the oil from the old electric compressor into a clean measuring cup.
- If the amount of oil drained is less than or equal to 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the amount of oil collected
by the R-134a Refrigerant Management Machine during refrigerant recovery to the low-side service
port after the new electric A/C compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated.
- If the amount of oil drained is greater than 60 ml (2 fl oz), add the difference between the amount
collected and 60 ml (2 fl oz), plus the amount collected by the R-134a Refrigerant Management
Machine during refrigerant recovery, to the low-side service port after the new electric A/C
compressor is installed and the system has been evacuated.
Oil Injection Using a Dye/Lubricant Injector
NOTICE: Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor Oil only must be used as a refrigerant system
lubricant for hybrid vehicles. Addition of any oil other than Motorcraft(R) Electric A/C Compressor
Oil to the hybrid vehicle refrigerant system will damage the electric Air Conditioning (A/C)
compressor and contaminate the refrigerant system.
NOTICE: Do not add liquid based R-134a Leak Detection Dye to the refrigerant system on hybrid
vehicles equipped with an electric A/C compressor. Liquid based dyes are mixed with PAG oil, and
will contaminate and damage the hybrid refrigerant system. Dye can only be added to hybrid
vehicles by installing a new receiver/drier which includes a fluorescent dye "wafer" which will
dissolve after approximately 30 minutes of continued A/C operation.
NOTE: The dye/lubricant injector is included as part of the 219-00069 R-134a Loop/Add On
Injector Kit-Set.
NOTE: If fluorescent leak detection dye is also to be added during A/C charging, the dye may be
added to the dye/lubricant injector along with the refrigerant oil.
1. Evacuate the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air Conditioning (A/C)
System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging See:
Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging.
2. Assemble the dye/lubricant injector using the correct adapters to match the amount of refrigerant
compressor oil to be injected.
3. Verify that all the valves on the dye/lubricant injector are closed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Page
6554
4. Fill the dye/lubricant injector with the correct amount of new refrigerant compressor oil.
5. Install the dye/lubricant injector between the low-side service gauge port valve and the
refrigerant service station or manifold gauge set.
6. Open all valves and charge the refrigerant system. For additional information, refer to Air
Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging See: Service and Repair/Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and
Charging.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6558
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6559
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Blower Motor Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6564
Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 6565
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Compressor Clutch Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6569
Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6570
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC
Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > HVAC Module-EMTC > Page 6575
Control Module HVAC: Locations HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-DATC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6578
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6579
Control Module HVAC: Diagrams HVAC Module-EMTC
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC >
Component Information > Diagrams > HVAC Module-DATC > Page 6580
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6585
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6586
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor /
Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6587
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
Ambient Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Blower Motor Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6591
Blower Motor Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6592
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6593
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
Blower Motor Speed Control
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws.
- To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in).
4. Remove the blower motor speed control.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6597
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6598
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Climate Control System
Component Tests
In-Vehicle Temperature Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity
Sensor
In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor
NOTE: In-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor shown, in-vehicle temperature sensor similar.
Removal and Installation
1. NOTICE: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel
enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature
sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is
positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument
cluster finish panel could result.
Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow
access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor.
2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and
humidity sensor.
3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor
electrical connector.
4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing.
5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel.
6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor.
7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing
for installation. When installing the venturi, it
must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to
indicated that it is correctly attached.
Remove the venturi (if needed).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor /
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > In-Vehicle Temperature and Humidity Sensor > Page 6601
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper.
2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature
Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6605
Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this
thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The
HVAC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor
and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air
temperature.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and
prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the
A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on non-hybrid vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle
the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below
acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the
evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels.
The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core
housing behind the glove compartment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature
Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 6609
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
Air Conditioning (A/C) Evaporator Discharge Air Temperature Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Lower the glove compartment.
2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away
from the evaporator discharge air temperature
sensor.
3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector.
4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6613
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor /
Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 6614
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations
Solar Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6618
Solar Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation
Air Conditioning
Service Gauge Port Valves
The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line.
The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line.
NOTE: Different valve cores are used for different engine applications. Use only the valve core
listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent for the vehicle and fitting being serviced.
The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component.
- Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports.
- A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the
service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core
can be installed if the seal leaks excessively.
- The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent
leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten
the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations
Solar Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations >
Page 6625
Solar Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After
a Collision
Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision
1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware
must be inspected by an authorized
dealer to verify correct function: Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not
become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been
subjected to severe stress.
Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected
for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must
be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity.
Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See:
Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision > Page 6631
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After
a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
Inspection and Repair After a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment
WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools
are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and
possibly violate vehicle safety standards.
NOTE: After diagnosing or repairing a Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the restraint system
diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road.
NOTE: Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in
various combinations depending on the impact event.
NOTE: Always refer to the appropriate diagnostic/repair information procedures prior to carrying
out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system.
NOTE: The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being
installed.
When any deployable device or combination of devices have deployed and/or the Restraints
Control Module (RCM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the
repair of the vehicle SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of
new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors and the removal and
installation of a new RCM. DTCs must be cleared from all required modules after repairs are
carried out.
Vehicles with Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
2. NOTE: After installation of new Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components, carry out the
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System
Reset procedure as instructed in the diagnostic/repair information. Refer to the appropriate
diagnostic/repair information for OCS system removal and installation procedure.
When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the Occupant Classification System Module
(OCSM) has DTC B1231/B1193:00 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include
the following procedures for the specified system: For rail-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as
necessary. Install new OCS system rails. Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231 cannot be
cleared.
- For weight sensor bolt-type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and
repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS system weight sensor bolts. DTC must be
cleared from the OCSM before carrying out Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) System Reset.
Do not install a new OCSM unless DTC B1231/B1193:00 cannot be cleared.
- For bladder-type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an
OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed.
All vehicles
3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred,
repair or install new mounting points and mounting
hardware as needed.
4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed.
5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height
adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is
involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt
pretensioners. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components:
- Steering column (deployable column if equipped)
- Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points
- Instrument panel braces and brackets
- Instrument panel and mounting points
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Procedure After a Collision > Page 6632
- Seats and seat mounting points
- Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. For additional information, refer to
Restraint Systems
- SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors
7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new
components as needed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6638
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6639
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6640
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6641
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6642
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6643
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6648
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6649
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6650
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6651
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6652
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information >
Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6653
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Locations Driver Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 6658
Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 6659
Air Bag: Locations Side Air Bag Module, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver
Air Bag Module > Page 6660
Air Bag: Locations Passenger Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6663
Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6664
Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6665
Air Bag: Diagrams Safety Canopy, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Side Air
Bag Module, Left > Page 6666
Air Bag: Diagrams Safety Canopy, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Air Bag: Service and Repair Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not use any sharp tools to separate the passenger air bag module trim cover from
the passenger air bag module canister. Sharp tools may damage the passenger air bag module.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not unpack or unroll the passenger air bag module soft pack. If the soft pack
becomes unpacked or unrolled, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not manipulate or compromise the passenger air bag module hooks during the
removal or installation procedure. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the passenger air
bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a
crash.
1. Remove the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag
Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module.
2. Place a mark on top of the passenger air bag module canister for correct installation.
3. Carefully lift the passenger air bag module cover from the bottom of the air bag module canister,
separating the windows from the canister hooks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6669
4. NOTE: Place an X mark on the old air bag cover to avoid reinstalling.
Remove the passenger air bag cover from the canister, separating the top windows from the
canister hooks.
Installation
1. Place the passenger air bag cover on a clean work surface once it is removed from the shipping
package.
2. WARNING: Carefully inspect the passenger air bag trim cover, canister and soft pack before
assembly. If any foreign objects are found,
remove them before attaching the passenger air bag trim cover to the canister. If the canister or
soft pack is damaged, install a new passenger air bag module assembly. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in the passenger air bag module deploying incorrectly, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Match the number of cover windows to the number of canister hooks before attaching the
passenger air bag cover to the canister.
3. Match the top of the passenger air bag cover with the canister mark from the removal procedure.
4. Position the canister onto the passenger air bag cover and engage the bottom hooks into the air
bag cover windows.
5. Push the top of the passenger air bag cover to engage the top canister hooks.
6. Inspect the passenger air bag cover windows-to-canister hooks to verify that every window has a
hook installed and the sides are not tucked or
folded against the air bag canister.
7. Install the passenger air bag module. For additional information, refer to Passenger Air Bag
Module See: Passenger Air Bag Module.
8. NOTE: The video procedure utilizes a Fusion/Milan passenger air bag module assembly. It also
applies to vehicles with similar passenger air bag
module designs.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6670
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
Driver Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole
on the underside of the steering wheel.
3. NOTICE: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are
released from the steering wheel wire
clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering wheel.
Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging
the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6671
4. Disconnect the horn and 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air
bag module.
Installation
1. Connect the driver air bag module and horn electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Make sure the wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module hooks during
installation.
NOTE: Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and seat the 3 driver air bag module
hooks.
- When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated, gently pull outward at the corners of the
driver air bag module to make sure all 3 hooks are fully seated. Check the driver air bag module
and trim cover for correct movement when pressing the horn.
3. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6672
Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module
Passenger Air Bag Module
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTICE: Do not install a new passenger air bag module assembly due to a damaged or discolored
passenger air bag cover. The passenger air bag cover can be serviced separately from the
passenger air bag module assembly. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Trim Cover Passenger See: Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Through the glove compartment opening, remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
3. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the passenger
air bag cover. Failure to follow these
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6673
instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the passenger air bag cover
clips are fully seated into the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module passenger air bag
cover clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
4. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
5. NOTICE: During installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip
is attached to the passenger air bag
module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6674
Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module
Safety Canopy Module
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: Always carry or place a live Safety Canopy(R), or side air curtain module, with the
module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in
serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6675
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the headliner.
3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar.
4. Remove the A-pillar tether bolt.
- If the vehicle is equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, note the
roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose position and routing for
installation purposes.
5. Remove the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
6. Disconnect the Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector and detach the connector from the
D-pillar.
7. Detach the Safety Canopy(R) module wiring clip from the roof panel brace.
8. Remove the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts near the inflator (between the C- and D-pillars).
9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, disconnect the drain hose.
10. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position the hose
aside.
11. Remove the remaining 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1
between the B- and C-pillars).
12. Lift to unhook the Safety Canopy(R) module from the C-pillar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6676
13. Move the Safety Canopy(R) module forward and release the rear hook.
Installation
WARNING: Before installing a Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for
any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural
integrity. Install new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the Safety Canopy(R) or
side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) or side
air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in
a crash.
WARNING: Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a Safety Canopy(R)
module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the Safety Canopy(R) or
side air curtain module from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R) in
the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly
and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. WARNING: Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the Safety Canopy(R)
in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is
mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in the Safety Canopy(R) module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install new Safety Canopy(R) module J-nuts.
2. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of
correct roof opening panel drain hose and/or rear
window solvent hose routing.
Position the Safety Canopy(R) module and insert the rear hook into the sheet metal cavity.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6677
3. Hook the Safety Canopy(R) module into the C-pillar.
4. Install the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar.
6. NOTE: If equipped with a roof opening panel and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch
the front roof opening panel drain hose and/or
rear window washer solvent hose.
Install the A-pillar tether bolt.
- Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
7. Install the 2 Safety Canopy(R) module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and
C-pillars.
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
8. If equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the hose clip.
9. If equipped with a roof opening panel, connect the roof opening panel rear drain hose.
10. Connect the Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector and attach the connector to the
D-pillar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6678
11. Install the Safety Canopy(R) module wiring clip to the roof panel brace.
12. Install the remaining 2 rear Safety Canopy(R) module bolts near the ignitor (between the Cand D-pillars).
- Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
13. Install the headliner.
14. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6679
Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Air Bag Module
Side Air Bag Module
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. For
additional information, refer to front seat backrest disassembly and assembly procedure in Seats.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6680
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
1. Remove the rear screw.
- For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws.
2. Push the side shield forward to release.
3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring
harness could become damaged when
the seat is moved.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach
the 3 wiring harness routing retainers.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar
support cable.
5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob.
All seats
6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip.
The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from
the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully
separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module.
9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6681
10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module.
12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame.
13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2
side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag
module.
Installation
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage and may cause system failure.
All seats
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6682
1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module.
4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips.
7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat
cushion.
8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Air Bag Trim Cover - Passenger > Page 6683
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
9. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
All seats
10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical
connector and attach it to the seat track.
11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw.
12. Install the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6687
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6688
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6689
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6690
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6691
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Always make sure the correct Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component is being
installed. Parts released for other vehicles may not be compatible even if they appear physically
similar. Check the part number listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent to make
sure the correct component is being installed. If an incorrect SRS component is installed, DTCs
may set.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with the SYNC(R) feature which contains the 911 assist option.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. For additional
information, refer to Information Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6692
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6693
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6694
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI). For additional information, refer
to Information Bus.
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel
center finish panel.
1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator
electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. Lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical connector.
- Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams
Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 6701
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6705
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
Clockspring
Removal
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
3. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle.
4. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the
straight-ahead position.
Remove the steering wheel.
5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an
assembly.
Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly.
6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever
and remove the lower steering column shroud.
7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 screws and clockspring.
Installation
1. NOTICE: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the
steering wheel is installed. If the
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6706
anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be
centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Install the clockspring and 2 screws.
2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector.
3. Install the lower steering column shroud and 3 screws.
4. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud.
5. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt,
repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the
clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal
connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system
failure.
If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to Step
7. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the
steering wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner
rotor counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight
resistance. Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point.
6. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate
the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to
center the clockspring. Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4
revolutions: the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the
window.
- the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock
position.
- the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position.
7. NOTICE: To prevent damage to the clockspring, make sure the road wheels are in the 12 o'clock
position to install the steering wheel.
Install the steering wheel.
8. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6707
9. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag
Module.
10. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6712
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6713
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6714
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6715
Impact Sensor: Locations
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6716
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6717
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6718
Front Impact Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6719
Front Impact Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations >
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6720
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6723
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6724
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6725
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6726
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6727
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Front Impact Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams >
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6728
Front Impact Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean
and free of foreign material before installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6731
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6732
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6736
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6740
Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6743
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a
new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM)
must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6744
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6745
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6746
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Do not prove out the SRS within the seat
installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to
carry out the system reset procedure.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
See: Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound
in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6747
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6748
Removal
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM
electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6749
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat
cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6750
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the correct seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6751
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Do not prove out the SRS within the seat
installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to
carry out the system reset procedure.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6752
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations
Seat Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6756
Seat Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information >
Locations > Page 6757
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
Side Air Bag Module
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. For
additional information, refer to front seat backrest disassembly and assembly procedure in Seats.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6761
1. Remove the rear screw.
- For driver seat, remove the front and rear screws.
2. Push the side shield forward to release.
3. NOTICE: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring
harness could become damaged when
the seat is moved.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Detach
the 3 wiring harness routing retainers.
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar
support cable.
5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob.
All seats
6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip.
The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from
the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully
separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module.
9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6762
10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module.
12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame.
13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Remove the 2
side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag
module.
Installation
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage and may cause system failure.
All seats
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6763
1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module.
4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module
seat backrest foam opening.
5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and
seat backrest frame.
6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips.
7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat
cushion.
8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 6764
Seats with manual lumbar adjust
9. Install the manual lumbar control knob.
All seats
10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Connect the side air bag module electrical
connector and attach it to the seat track.
11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw.
12. Install the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations
Air Bag Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6769
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6770
Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6771
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6772
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6773
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
Restraints Control Module (RCM)
Removal
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Always make sure the correct Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component is being
installed. Parts released for other vehicles may not be compatible even if they appear physically
similar. Check the part number listed in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent to make
sure the correct component is being installed. If an incorrect SRS component is installed, DTCs
may set.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with the SYNC(R) feature which contains the 911 assist option.
NOTE: Carrying out Programmable Module Installation (PMI) will not enable the 911 assist option
that is disabled.
1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for PMI. For additional
information, refer to Information Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6774
2. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
3. Remove 2 front LH floor console screws and position the carpet to access the RCM bolts.
4. Remove the RCM access cover.
- Remove the scrivet.
- Pull forward to release the 2 retainer hooks and remove the RCM access cover.
5. Disengage the lock tab, press and disconnect the small RCM electrical connector.
6. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector.
1. Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it
stops.
2. Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector.
7. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM.
Installation
1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting
to connect the connector.
3. NOTICE: Putting the large Restraints Control Module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM
on an angle can cause bad electrical
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6775
connections and damage components.
Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM.
- NOTICE: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light
pressure is needed to get the connector into position on the Restraints Control Module (RCM)
before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
component damage and/or system failure.
With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle
audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt.
4. Connect the RCM electrical connector.
- Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the
RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place.
5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector and push the lock tab in.
6. Install the RCM access cover.
- Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace.
- Install the scrivet.
7. Position the carpet into place and install the 2 front LH floor console screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6776
8. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. For additional information, refer to
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures.
9. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete Programmable Module
Installation (PMI). For additional information, refer
to Information Bus.
10. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification
Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 6780
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6786
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6787
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and
Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6788
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6789
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6790
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System
Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6791
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and
Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6796
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6797
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and
Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6798
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6799
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6800
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Arming and Disarming > System Information
> Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6801
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and
Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment >
Component Information > Service and Repair
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair
Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover
first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end.
2. Remove the bolt and child safety seat tether anchor.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to
follow this instruction may result in the
child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death to the child in a sudden stop or crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent.
Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from
the safety belt when deployed. When the pretensioner deploys, the buckle moves downward,
removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts.
If the vehicle is involved in a crash that results in pretensioner deployment, a new safety belt buckle
and pretensioner must be installed.
For safety belt buckle and pretensioner diagnosis and disposal information, refer to Restraint
Systems.
Second row safety belt buckles
The second row safety belt buckles can be serviced separately. After any crash, new safety belt
systems components (including retractors and buckles) must be installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information >
Description and Operation > Page 6809
Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification
Functional Test - Safety Belt Buckle and Tongue
The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching
function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female
portion).
1. Verify the following during the latching sequence:
- Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort.
- A click is heard when the safety belt buckle latches the tongue.
2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the safety belt webbing.
3. Unlatch the safety belt by fully depressing the safety belt buckle release button and allowing the
safety belt to release and retract.
4. Verify the following during the unlatching process:
- Push-button depression does not require excessive effort.
- The tongue can be removed easily from the buckle.
5. Repeat the above steps 3 times.
6. If the functional test reveals a concern(s), install a new safety belt buckle or safety belt retractor
as required.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner
Power Seat (Driver Only)
Manual Seat
NOTE: Passenger seat shown, driver similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6812
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Remove the screws and inboard seat cushion side shield.
3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle and pretensioner electrical connectors.
4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for correct installation.
Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle and
pretensioner.
5. For the driver seat, remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt
buckle and pretensioner.
6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat
track and detach the wiring harness pin-type
retainer.
7. Remove the bolt and safety belt buckle and pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
9. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 6813
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
Safety Belt Buckle - Rear
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat
cushion forward.
Remove the bolt and rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
2. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6818
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6821
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair
Safety Belt Shoulder Height Adjuster
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the
bottom.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 6825
2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel.
3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information
> Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool.
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The
Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already
disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation,
however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R)
once again reverts to the disabled state.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool.
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The
Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already
disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation,
however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R)
once again reverts to the disabled state.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent.
Safety Belt Retractors
- Safety belt retractors with pretensioners (front only)
- Dual locking mode Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
- Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) (all except driver seat)
- BTS (front passenger only)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position. The ALR mode is
automatically activated when the safety belt webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then
allowed to retract. As the safety belt webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking
sound is made indicating the safety belt retractor is in ALR mode and the safety belt webbing will
not pull back out of the safety belt retractor. To disengage the ALR mode, allow the safety belt
webbing to fully retract back onto the spool. For testing, refer to the appropriate Functional Test
procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics.
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
The ELR is a vehicle-sensitive feature designed to activate and lock the safety belt webbing during
braking hard, cornering hard or in an impact of approximately 24 km/h (15 mph). The ELR feature
helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. For testing, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety Belt System See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor
The safety belt retractor must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the safety belt
webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions.
1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions.
2. Verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding.
3. Install a new safety belt retractor if any concern is found or the complaint has been verified.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6837
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode
1. Position the seat backrest fully upright (if adjustable).
2. Position the safety belt shoulder height adjuster (if equipped) in the full down or up position.
3. Fasten the safety belt.
4. Pull out the safety belt webbing until the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature is activated.
5. Allow the safety belt webbing to retract until it stops.
6. Pull on the safety belt webbing to check that the safety belt retractor has remained in the ALR
mode. If the safety belt retractor is not locked,
install a new safety belt retractor.
7. Unfasten the safety belt and allow the safety belt webbing to retract to its stowed position.
8. Pull out and retract the safety belt webbing to verify the safety belt retractor has converted
automatically out of ALR mode. If the safety belt
retractor remains locked in the ALR mode, install a new safety belt retractor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6838
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test
Inspection
Safety Belt System
Component Test
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Carry out the appropriate Functional Test(s) as determined in Inspection and Verification. See:
Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Inspection and Verification
Functional Test - Safety Belt Retractor, Road Test Inspection
WARNING: The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the
safety belt retractor does not lock. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTE: Make sure there is no excessive slack in the safety belt webbing across the torso during
testing.
NOTE: Do not jerk on the safety belt webbing when carrying out this test.
1. Test the safety belts in the following sequence:
1. Fasten the safety belts and proceed to a safe area.
2. Attain a speed of 24 km/h (15 mph).
3. WARNING: Apply maximum brake force only on dry concrete or equivalent hard surface,
NEVER on wet pavement or gravel.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
Grasp the shoulder harness, lean forward and apply the brakes, making a maximum braking
application without a skid.
4. The safety belts should lock up with minimum webbing extension.
5. If there is a lockup of all safety belt retractors being tested, the safety belt retractors are
functioning correctly. If any safety belt retractor fails
to lock up, install a new safety belt retractor(s).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor
Safety Belt Retractor
NOTE: Passenger side shown, driver similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6841
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental
deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the
risk of serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Restraint Systems.
2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed,
install a new D-ring cover and bolt.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the
cover out at the bottom.
3. Remove the bolt and D-ring.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
5. For passenger retractor, disconnect the Belt Tension Sensor (BTS) electrical connector.
6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
7. Remove the bolt and safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
8. Disconnect the pretensioner electrical connector.
9. Unhook and remove the safety belt retractor.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
11. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and
Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6842
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6843
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Remove the head restraints.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover.
4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws.
5. Remove the seat latch release lever.
1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever.
- To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod.
2. Remove the seat latch release lever.
6. Remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield.
7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip.
8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper.
9. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Pull up and remove the 4 head restraint guides.
- Note the alignment tab position for correct installation.
10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the
hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the
seat backrest foam pad.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6844
Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover.
11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
12. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor.
13. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
14. Remove the nut and safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
16. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6845
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
Safety Belt Retractor - Rear
NOTE: RH side shown, LH similar.
Removal and Installation
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel.
2. Remove the cover and D-ring bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
4. Remove the bolt and rear safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor > Page 6846
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. For additional information, refer to the
appropriate Functional Test procedure in Safety
Belt System See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6854
Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Passenger Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6855
Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6856
Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information >
Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 6857
Seat Belt Tensioner: Diagrams Seat Belt Tensioner, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams
Air Bag Deactivation Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6862
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6867
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6868
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6869
Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6870
Impact Sensor: Locations
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6871
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6872
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6873
Front Impact Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6874
Front Impact Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Locations > Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1 > Page 6875
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6878
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6879
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6880
Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6881
Impact Sensor: Diagrams
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1
Side Impact Sensor, Driver 2
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6882
Side Impact Sensor, Passenger 2
Front Impact Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Diagrams > Side Impact Sensor, Driver 1 > Page 6883
Front Impact Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor
Front Impact Severity Sensor
Removal and Installation
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector.
3. Remove the nut and front impact severity sensor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean
and free of foreign material before installation.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6886
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar
NOTE: RH shown, LH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free
of foreign material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 6887
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar
NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Removal
WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the
impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting
areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether
or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the bolt and side impact sensor.
- Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
5. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact
sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque.
Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of
personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign
material.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
6. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag
Systems/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6892
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Locations Seat Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 6895
Seat Belt Buckle Switch: Diagrams Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation
Safety Belt System
WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must
be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function:
- Retractors
- Buckles
- Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped)
- Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped)
- Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped)
- Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies
- Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only)
If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the
Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any
safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to
its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be
installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk
of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt
pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors,
buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases
the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
When replacing safety belt buckles and/or retractor assemblies, use only the replacement parts
specified in the Ford Catalog Advantage(TM) or equivalent.
Belt Tension Sensor (BTS)
The BTS operates as part of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system on the front
passenger seat. To diagnose the BTS, refer to Restraint Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Occupant Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6902
Seat Occupant Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6905
Removal
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM, are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an
assembly. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a
new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and OCSM)
must be installed as an assembly.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical
connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the
wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat
cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6906
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Remove the seat cushion foam pad.
7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
8. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
9. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
10. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as
an assembly with the bladder.
Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct
seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components.
Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6907
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover
to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips.
9. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat backrest.
10. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
3. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan.
4. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6908
12. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Do not prove out the SRS within the seat
installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to
carry out the system reset procedure.
13. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
14. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
See: Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit.
16. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound
in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault
discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6909
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6910
Removal
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system service kit,
inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the OCSM
electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat
wiring harness OCSM connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left
unplugged and secured by a tie strap.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the passenger seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused.
Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release
the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the
seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
3. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
4. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and may cause system failure.
Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat.
5. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip, or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion
trim cover.
6. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6911
7. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the
rivets. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in component damage and/or system failure.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion pan.
8. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion pan opening.
Installation
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new cushion heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not
serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an
Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be
installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system.
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
2. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and
support assembly for any foreign objects
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Route the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat
cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage
and/or system failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6912
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the correct seat cushion pan opening.
3. NOTE: When installing an OCS service kit, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion pan bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan.
5. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion pan and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS)
assembly, be careful not to damage any of
the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or
system failure.
Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track.
- To aid in installation, recline the seat.
6. Install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
7. NOTE: Do not tie-strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6913
Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical
connector.
2. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan.
3. If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the
wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion
pan, and connect the 2 cushion heater mat electrical connectors.
4. Tie-strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
5. Tie-strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside.
8. Install the front passenger seat and repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Do not prove out the SRS within the seat
installation procedure. Proceed to the next step after seat installation and repowering the SRS to
carry out the system reset procedure.
9. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before the carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
10. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit.
12. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag warning indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured).
The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has
been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 6914
13. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS.
The serial number for the new part and the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company.
Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete
inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder,
OCSM, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part
OCS only).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations
Seat Position Sensor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6918
Seat Position Sensor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6919
Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Seat Position Sensor
NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Remove the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
2. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
3. Push the tab ends inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip.
Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket and remove the seat
position sensor.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the driver seat. For additional information, refer to Seats.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Accessory Delay Relay: Locations
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6925
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 6926
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM
Antenna Cable - AM/FM
NOTE: View shown from behind instrument panel for clarity.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control
Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio
Control Module (ACM).
2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna.
3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers.
Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers.
4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 6933
Antenna Cable: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio
Removal
Upper cable
1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel.
2. Remove the RH sun visor.
3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical
connector.
- Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Antenna, Radio > Antenna Cable >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna Cable - AM/FM > Page 6934
4. Remove the RH instrument panel side finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument
Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
- Disconnect the upper-to-lower satellite radio antenna electrical connector.
Lower cable
5. Remove the RH Instrument panel side finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument
Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
- Disconnect the upper-to-lower satellite radio antenna electrical connector.
6. Remove the glove compartment. For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel - Exploded
View in Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
7. Remove the ACM. For additional information, refer to Audio Control Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control
Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio Control Module (ACM). Disconnect the lower satellite radio antenna electrical connector from the ACM.
All cables
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter
> Component Information > Service and Repair
Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Transceiver
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening cover. For additional information, refer to Instrument Panel
- Exploded View in Instrument Cluster / Carrier
&/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud.
3. Disconnect the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) transceiver electrical connector.
4. Using a suitable tool (such as a dentist pick), release the tabs and remove the PATS transceiver.
5. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be
programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) again.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams
Alarm System Transponder: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System
Transponder > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6942
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6947
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6948
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming
Programming a Personal Entry Code
NOTE: The system allows 3 personal codes to be programmed.
NOTE: Multiple personal codes can be programmed in one step. When programming multiple
codes in one step, each code must be programmed by entering each button within 5 seconds of
each other. If 5 seconds elapse between any button press, programming mode is exited.
NOTE: If only a single personal code is desired or unable to program multiple codes in one step,
each personal code can be programmed individually by repeating Steps 1-5 for each code desired.
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad to activate the programming mode.
3. Enter the new personal 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within
5 seconds of each other.
4. After entering the new personal code, press a 6th button to program each new code.
- Pressing 1/2 stores the first personal code.
- Pressing 3/4 stores the second personal code.
- Pressing 5/6, 7/8 or 9/0 stores the third personal code.
5. The door locks lock and unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button for 2 seconds.
4. All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5-digit code works.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6949
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Keypad
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the keypad retaining clip.
4. Remove the keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during
the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems or Antitheft and Alarm Systems to
program the IKT. See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and
the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed
RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and
press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that
no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 6954
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle
the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock
is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 6955
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle
the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button
twice.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless
Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming > Page 6956
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
Stepped Unlock Programming
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6966
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6967
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6968
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6969
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6970
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6971
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6972
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6973
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Cellular Phone Microphone: > 10-25-12 > Dec
> 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6974
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-25-12 Date: 101223
SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality
TSB 10-25-12
12/23/10
SYNC - CALL SOUND QUALITY/BACKGROUND NOISE ISSUES AND/OR VOICE
RECOGNITION DIFFICULTIES WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2009 Fusion, Taurus X, Taurus 2008-2011 Focus 2008-2010 Edge, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer 2009-2010 F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex 2009-2011 Escape, Expedition
LINCOLN: 2008-2009 MKZ 2009-2011 MKS 2008-2010 MKX 2009-2011 Navigator
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Milan, Sable 2008-2010 Mountaineer 2009-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-8-4 to update the vehicle model years, Service Procedure and the
Part List. The new SYNC service Microphone kit now includes a voltage filter incorporated into the
jumper harness.
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2011 SYNC equipped vehicles may express concern with their
call sound quality while using the SYNC microphone, complaints of excessive background noise
during a phone call and/or issues with voice recognition accuracy while driving.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT102512 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual
Performed As Actual Time. Time
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17700 42
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6980
The following procedure involves updating the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level and installing an external alternate SYNC microphone attached to the headliner.
NOTE
THIS PROCEDURE DOES NOT APPLY TO VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH HEADLINER
MICROPHONE OR DEALER-INSTALLED SYNC SYSTEMS.
Go to Step 2 if the vehicle is already equipped with SYNC 3.0 Traffic and Directions or has already
been upgraded to latest available consumer interface processor (CIP) level 9L3T-14D544-AE
without E911/VHR, 9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later versions. To determine the current
APIM software level, Refer to the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website, enter the VIN in
OASIS, click the GO button and select the SYNC button.
1. Reprogram the APIM to CIP software level 9L3T-1 4D544-AE without E9 11 /VHR,
9L2T-14D544-BE with E911/VHR or later version. For
additional information Refer to other SYNC TSB's and WSM, Section 418-01. Service Pack files
may also be obtained at www.syncmyride.com.
When diagnosing a concern related to voice recognition (VR) difficulties, instruct the customer to
test VR functionality while the vehicle is parked. If customer concerns are still present, this
procedure will not yield an improvement and the service procedure should not be performed.
Instead, refer to the SYNC supplement guide and www.syncmyride.com for additional VR tips to
assist customer.
The VR experience can be improved with user training and making improvements to the phone
book entries (longer entries make the system more robust). Ensure the customer does not try to
speak too loud or slow and remove any objects hanging on the rear view mirror as this will reduce
system effectiveness.
When diagnosing a concern related to call sound quality, expect marginal improvements for calls
described as speaking in a tunnel, chamber, etc. Expect substantial improvements for complaints
where the call audio seems to drop out intermittently.
NOTE
THIS REPAIR WILL CHANGE THE APPEARANCE OF THE VEHICLE INTERIOR. REFER TO
THE PHOTOGRAPHS FOR THE APPLICABLE VEHICLE LOCATED IN THIS PROCEDURE. DO
NOT PERFORM THIS REPAIR WITHOUT CUSTOMER APPROVAL PRIOR TO PROCEEDING
WITH MICROPHONE INSTALLATION.
2. Install SYNC microphone service kit. Installing the kit includes mounting an external microphone
directly to the headliner and splicing in a jumper
harness to the vehicle's existing wiring harness. The existing SYNC microphone will no longer be
functional. The jumper harness is equipped with a voltage filter. The filter will need to be wrapped
in soft foam 164-R4901 or flock tape 164-R4903 from the Rotunda squeak and rattle kit 164-R4900
to prevent interior squeak/rattle noise.
a. Refer to the appropriate vehicle line and microphone illustration(s) below for microphone
installation and wire splicing locations. Refer to
Wiring Diagram (WD), Section 5-1 for recommended splicing methods.
b. Ensure the SYNC microphone wires are secure and do not interfere with vehicle operation or
functionality.
c. The microphone is directional. Make sure the microphone is always positioned so wire length is
minimized from view. When installing the
microphone adjacent to trim, place the microphone as close to trim as possible to help minimize
visible wire.
Edge / MKX
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 1)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6981
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 210 and 211 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C211. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C210. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Escape / Mariner
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration (Figures 2 and 3). Firmly
press the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead
console trim (if equipped) or positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an
overhead console. Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6982
5. Gain access to connector 214 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C214. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two of the three black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD182 from C214. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD1 82. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Navigator / Expedition
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figures 4 and 5)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim (if equipped) or
positioned directly above A-pillar on headliner if not equipped with an overhead console.
^ Proceed to Step 5 if not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 298 located behind the dash panel on passenger side. Refer to online
WD, Section 124 for links to location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMN07, RMNO7 and DMN07 (shield) from C298. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17C712 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMNO7 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C298. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Explorer / Explorer Sport Trac / Mountaineer
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 6)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6983
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 248 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMNO7, RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield) from C248 (Sport Trac uses C260). Cut
the three circuits on the female side of the
connector (14334 harness). These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then
splice the yellow jumper harness wire to VMNO7 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness
wires to RMNO7 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the
connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer
used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO5 and GD143 from C248. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO5 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD143. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-150
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the
microphone. (Figure 7)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim or front lamp.
2. Lower the overhead console or front lamp. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional
information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and temporarily tuck excess wire
into headliner to the rear of the console or lamp.
4. Install overhead console or front lamp; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console or
front lamp trim directly behind microphone as
shown.
5. Gain access to connectors 314 and 315 in roof panel near left hand side. Refer to online WD,
Section 124 for links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C314. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14358 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 from C315 and GD133 from C314. This is power and ground for both the
new microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in
the blue jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133.
Ensure that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within
the rear view mirror and in the roof.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6984
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
F-Super Duty
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 8)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
c. This repair is not recommended for vehicles not equipped with an overhead console.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 264 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C264. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C264. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Flex
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6985
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 9)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Focus
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 10) Firmly press
the microphone into place. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to the interior lamp trim.
2. Lower the interior lamp assembly. Refer to WSM, Section 417-02 for additional information.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6986
3. Route microphone cable up through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger
side A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop
headliner to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install interior lamp assembly; ensure microphone cable enters the interior lamp trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 934 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD for location and connector
views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C934. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CPL6O and GD161 from C934. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CPL6O and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD161. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Fusion / Milan / MKZ
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 11)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the passenger side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner
to run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 913 in the right A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMM13, RMM13 and DMM13 (shield) from C913. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (14334 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMM13 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMM13 and
DMM13 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBPO2 and GD139 from C913. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBPO2 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD139. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time proceed to Final Test / Service Steps.
Taurus / Sable / Taurus X
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6987
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 12)
^ Firmly press the microphone into place.
^ Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and over to the driver side
A-pillar. It may be necessary to slightly drop headliner to
run microphone cable. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05 for additional information.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 925 in the left A-pillar. Refer to online WD, Section 124 for links to
location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMN02 and DMN07 (shield) from C925. Cut the three circuits on the
female side of the connector (17K745 harness).
These are the microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper
harness wire to VMN02 and any two (of the three) black jumper harness wires to RMN02 and
DMNO7 (shield). Only splice into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off
and secure the cut wire ends heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C925. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
MKS
1. Remove the protective backing from the adhesive on the microphone and attach the microphone
as shown in the illustration. (Figure 13)
a. Firmly press the microphone into place.
b. Ensure the microphone is parallel and adjacent to overhead console trim.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Cellular Phone Microphone >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Cellular Phone Microphone: >
10-25-12 > Dec > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Poor Cell Phone Audio Quality > Page 6988
2. Lower the overhead console. Refer to WSM, Section 501-12 for additional information.
3. Route microphone cable through existing hole in the headliner and out the front of the headliner
above the rear view mirror.
4. Install overhead console; ensure microphone cable enters the overhead console trim directly
behind microphone as shown.
5. Gain access to connector 911 at the rear view mirror. Refer to the online WD, Section 124 for
links to location and connector views.
6. Identify circuits VMN02, RMNO2 and DMN07 (shield) from C911. Pull back the black harness
sleeve and cut the three circuits near C911 or if
equipped with a headlamp control module-2 (HCM-2), remove the HCM-2 access cover and cut
circuits under trim cover. Refer to WSM Section 417-01 for additional information. These are the
microphone positive, negative and shield circuits. Then splice the yellow jumper harness wire to
VMNO2 and remaining black jumper harness wires to RMNO2 and DMNO7 (shield). Only splice
into the cut wires heading in the direction of the connector. Tape off and secure the cut wire ends
heading up the A-pillar as they are no longer used.
7. Identify circuits CBP41 and GD133 from C911. This is power and ground for both the new
microphone and the existing mirror. Splice in the blue
jumper harness wire to CBP41 and the remaining black jumper harness wire to GD133. Ensure
that the original circuits remain intact and connected as this is power for other items within the rear
view mirror and in the roof.
8. Do not plug in the microphone at this time, proceed to Final Test I Service Steps.
Final Test / Service Steps
1. After splicing/soldering is complete, apply power to the vehicle and confirm the voltage at the
jumper inline connector before connecting the
microphone.
^ Jumper blue wire equal 12V positive.
^ Jumper black wire equal ground reference.
^ Jumper yellow wire equal microphone return signal circuit less than IV.
2. Turn off ignition and attach the microphone connector to the jumper harness connector. Make
sure that the connector tabs have locked together after
connecting. Reversing this connector would cause a failure of the microphone.
3. Bundle and tuck the remainder of the microphone cable over the front of the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 >
Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module:
> 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Locations Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7004
Communications Control Module: Locations Audio Control Module (ACM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7007
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7008
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7009
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7010
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7011
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7012
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7013
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) > Page 7014
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7017
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after Step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7018
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The satellite radio receiver ESN displays on the screen.
3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Audio Systems With Navigation
1. Turn the ACM on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7019
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7020
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Without Navigation
With Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7021
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Programmable
Module Installation (PMI) in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
6. Remove the ACM.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is
being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7022
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. For additional
information, refer to Information Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Parking
Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space
Recognition
TSB 09-26-4
01/04/10
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built
on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize
a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for
a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module
(PAM) prior to performing this procedure.
a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2.
b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B.
2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking
Space Recognition
TSB 09-26-4
01/04/10
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built
on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize
a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for
a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module
(PAM) prior to performing this procedure.
a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2.
b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B.
2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7037
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7038
Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7039
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7040
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7045
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7046
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7047
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7048
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations
Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7049
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7050
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7051
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7052
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7053
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7056
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7057
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7058
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7059
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7060
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7061
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams
Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7062
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7063
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7064
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7065
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7066
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7067
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7068
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7069
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left > Page 7070
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7071
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Active Park Assist Sensor
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal
1. Remove the fender splash shield screws and lower bolts.
2. Position the fender splash shield aside and disconnect the electrical connector.
3. With a suitable tool (such as a flat-blade screwdriver) gently pry the retaining tabs to remove the
active park assist sensor(s).
- Remove the active park assist sensor(s) from the front bumper cover.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. After installing the sensor(s), use the scan tool to verify that the active park assist sensor PIDs
responding correctly. Carry out the Azimuth System
Check See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist.
If the active park assist sensor does not respond correctly, refer to Active Park Assist. See: Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7075
Parking Assist Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7076
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Active Park Assist Switch
Removal
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the active park assist switch from the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems >
Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7080
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
NOTE: Bumper shown removed for clarity.
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Using a suitable tool, (such as a flat-blade screwdriver), gently pry the retaining tabs and remove
the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Using the scan tool, verify that the parking aid sensor PIDs read no object present and that the
parking aid sensor attenuation PIDs read between 0.8-1.6 ms.
- Carry out the azimuth and elevation system check to verify the sensor(s) are operating correctly.
For additional information, refer to Azimuth System Check See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Azimuth System Check and Elevation System Check
See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Elevation
System Check.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Rear
Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams
Rear Vision Camera: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Rear
Vision Camera > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7084
Rear Vision Camera: Service and Repair
Video Camera
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the license plate housing. For additional information, refer to Auxiliary Step / Running
Board.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the video camera screw.
4. Remove the video camera bracket and camera from the license plate lamp housing.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7088
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7089
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure
Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 7092
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement
Message Center Switch
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7097
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio Input Jack
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair Audio Input Jack
Audio Input Jack
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips.
Remove the instrument panel lower panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio Input Jack > Page 7100
Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Cable and Port
Floor Console Trim Panels
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port and Cable
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The original equipment Universal Serial Bus (USB) port and cable is part of the wiring
harness. It can only be serviced by overlaying a new USB port and cable.
1. Remove the transmission selector level bezel by pulling straight up.
2. NOTE: Open the floor console storage bin door.
Remove the floor console finish panel by pulling straight up.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack,
Entertainment System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Audio Input Jack > Page 7101
- Disconnect the electrical connector, if necessary.
3. Remove the center instrument panel lower panel by pulling straight back.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
4. Remove the USB cable and port.
- Disconnect the cable from the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM).
- Cut the USB port and cable ends and secure them to prevent NVH concerns.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Secure the new USB port and cable, as necessary, to prevent NVH concerns.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) is
being installed.
Upload the FDIM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back.
3. Remove the 4 FDIM screws.
4. Remove the FDIM.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the FDIM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 7106
Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM)
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an
assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center
instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be
replaced. For additional information on installing a new middle instrument panel center finish panel,
refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
1. Remove the Audio Control Module (ACM). For additional information, refer to Audio Control
Module (ACM) See: Cellular
Phone/Communications Control Module/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Audio
Control Module (ACM).
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Specifications
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Specifications
Switch Settings
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Specifications > Page 7110
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation
Universal Transmitter
The universal transmitter uses the Lear Car2U(R) System. It is identified by the lack of a symbol,
but with 3 red indicator lights. Each of the 3 buttons has a red indicator light located behind the 3
buttons.
The universal transmitter is an integral part of the LH sun visor and provides a convenient way to
substitute up to 3 hand-held transmitters with a single built-in device. The universal transmitter can
transmit the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters.
The universal transmitter:
- operates garage doors, gates and home/office lighting and security systems.
- transmits the radio frequency of up to 3 hand-held transmitters from any of the systems
mentioned above.
- is powered by the vehicle battery and charging system.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Universal Transmitter
Inspection and Verification
Universal Transmitter
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the correct programing procedure was used. Refer to Universal Transmitter Programming
See: Programming and Relearning. If necessary,
contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support
website at www.learcar2u.com.
2. Verify the customer concern.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
5. If the cause is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See:
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7113
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Universal Transmitter
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7114
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Pinpoint Tests
Universal Transmitter
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Universal Transmitter is Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 89 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Interior Lamps
for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The universal transmitter receives voltage through the battery saver relay power output circuit. The
power and ground circuits are shared with the LH vanity mirror lamp.
When a programmed button is pressed on the universal transmitter, a wireless signal is sent to the
receiver unit. If the device does not operate the garage door, it may be due to an incorrect
programming procedure being carried out. Refer to Universal Transmitter Programming See:
Programming and Relearning to verify the universal transmitter was correctly programmed. If
necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer
support website at www.learcar2u.com .
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Interior lighting concerns
- Universal transmitter
- Receiver unit
PINPOINT TEST A: THE UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER IS INOPERATIVE
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE LH SUN VISOR VANITY MIRROR
OPERATION
- Check the illumination of the LH sun visor vanity mirror lamps.
- Do the vanity mirror lamps illuminate?
Yes
GO to A2.
No
REFER to Lighting and Horns to continue diagnosis of the vanity mirror lamps.
------------------------------------------------- A2 PROGRAM A HAND-HELD TRANSMITTER INTO THE
UNIVERSAL TRANSMITTER
- Program the universal transmitter. Refer to Universal Transmitter Programming See:
Programming and Relearning.
- Does the universal transmitter program successfully?
Yes
The universal transmitter is OK. VERIFY the receiver unit operates correctly by attempting to
operate the device.
No
INSTALL a new LH sun visor assembly. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7115
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Programming and Relearning
Universal Transmitter Programming
Universal Transmitter Programming (Rolling Code)
WARNING: To avoid the risk of serious injury from the door closing, make sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door opener or security device that is being programmed. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage.
NOTE: Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Lear Car2U(R) System.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have an assistant when programming the
universal transmitter. Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time-sensitive
actions. Read the entire procedure before beginning so the procedure can be carried out in a timely
manner. If the time-sensitive actions are not carried out in a timely manner, the device times out
and the procedure needs to be repeated.
NOTE: Make sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as
for future Lear Car2U(R) System programming. It is only needed for fixed code device
programming.
NOTE: To determine if you have a fixed code or a rolling code device, open the garage door
opener transmitter and if there is a panel of coded dip switches present, the device is a fixed code
device. For additional information, refer to Universal Transmitter Programming (Fixed Code). If
there are no coded dip switches present, the device is a rolling code device and this procedure
should be followed. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R) Customer Service Center at
866-572-2728, or the customer support website at www.learcar2u.com .
1. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
2. Firmly press the 2 outside Lear Car2U(R) System buttons (at the same time) for 1-2 seconds,
then release the buttons.
3. NOTE: Step 4 must be initiated within 30 seconds of pressing and releasing the "learn" or
"smart" button.
At the garage door opener receiver (the motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or
"smart" button. This can usually be found near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit; or it may be under the light bulb cover of the motor-head unit. Press and release
the "learn" or "smart" button. For technical assistance, refer to the Owner's Literature. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R)
Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at
www.learcar2u.com.
4. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and hold the desired universal transmitter button for 5-20
seconds to program. During this time, the selected
button red indicator light blinks slowly. Once the garage door begins to move, within one second,
release the button. With the button released, the red indicator light begins to blink rapidly until
programming is complete. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence a second time and depending
on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this
sequence a third time to complete the programming process.
5. After successful programming, the Lear Car2U(R) System operates the garage door opener
using the button that was programmed. The red
indicator light behind the programmed button illuminates to confirm the Lear Car2U(R) System is
responding (and is programmed) to the button command.
Erasing the Lear Car2U(R) System Buttons (Rolling Code)
1. To erase the rolling code programming from the Lear Car2U(R) System, turn the ignition key to
the ON position, firmly press and hold the 2
outside Lear Car2U(R) System buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the 3
red indicator lights begin to blink rapidly.
2. When the 3 red indicator lights begin to blink, release the buttons. The codes for all of the 3
buttons are erased.
Universal Transmitter Programming (Fixed Code)
WARNING: To avoid the risk of serious injury from the door closing, make sure that people and
objects are clear of the garage door opener or security device that is being programmed. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside of the garage.
NOTE: Do not use the Lear Car2U(R) System with any garage door opener that does not have a
"stop and reverse" feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April
1, 1982.
NOTE: Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Lear Car2U(R) System.
Because of the steps involved, it may be helpful to have an assistant when programming the
universal transmitter.
NOTE: Make sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as
for future Lear Car2U(R) System programming. It is only needed for fixed code device
programming.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7116
NOTE: To determine if you have a fixed code or a rolling code device, open the garage door
opener transmitter and if there is a panel of coded dip switches present, the device is a fixed code
device. If there are no coded dip switches present, the device is a rolling code device. If there are
no coded dip switches present, refer to Universal Transmitter Programming (Rolling Code).
NOTE: To program a fixed code device, paper and a pen (or pencil) is necessary. Make a copy of
the Switch Settings chart in Specifications to use as a note pad.
1. Open the battery cover of the universal transmitter to reveal the coded dip switches and their
associated settings.
2. NOTE: When a coded dip switch is in the Up, +, or On position, circle "Left" on the chart under
the correct switch position number. When a
switch is in the Middle, 0 or Neutral position, circle "Middle" on the chart. When a switch is in the
Down, -, or Off position, circle "Right" on the chart.
Record the dip switch settings on the copy of the switch settings chart by circling the setting under
the correct switch position number. Do this from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches (the number of
switches varies between transmitter manufacturers. For additional information, refer to the chart
below or to the Switch Settings chart in Specifications.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7117
3. Turn the ignition to the ON position.
4. To input the dip switch settings into the Lear Car2U(R) System, press (at the same time) all 3
Lear Car2U(R) System buttons for a few seconds
and then release to put the device into the programming mode. The 3 red indicator lights blink
slowly. Within 2.5 minutes, enter the corresponding dip switch settings from left to right (starting
with number 1) into the Lear Car2U(R) System by pressing and releasing the buttons
corresponding to the settings you circled. For example, if the dip switch settings were switch 1 (Right), switch 2 (Right), switch 3 (Left), switch
4 (Middle) etc., press and release the right Lear Car2U(R) System button, then the right button,
then the left button, then the middle button, etc.
5. After inputting the dip switch settings, press and release (at the same time) all 3 Lear Car2U(R)
System buttons. The 3 red indicator lights are
turned on continuously.
6. Press and hold the Lear Car2U(R) System button chosen to control the garage door.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Garage Door Opener Transmitter > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7118
7. Once the garage door starts to move, within one second, release the button. During this time,
the selected button indicator light blinks slowly. Do
not release the button until the garage door moves, which may take anywhere from 5-55 seconds,
depending on the make/model of the garage door opener.
8. The 3 red indicator lights begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete. If the garage door
opener does not operate, repeat Steps 1-6.
- For technical assistance, refer to the Owner's Literature. If necessary, contact the Lear Car2U(R)
Customer Service Center at 866-572-2728, or the customer support website at
www.learcar2u.com.
9. After successful programming, the Lear Car2U(R) System operates the garage door opener
using the button that was programmed. The red
indicator light behind the programmed button turns on to confirm the Lear Car2U(R) System is
responding (and is programmed) to the button command.
Erasing the Lear Car2U(R) System Buttons (Fixed Code)
1. To erase the fixed code programming from the Lear Car2U(R) System, turn the ignition key to
the ON position, firmly press and hold the 2 outside
Lear Car2U(R) System buttons at the same time for approximately 20 seconds until the 3 red
indicator lights begin to blink rapidly.
2. When the 3 red indicator lights begin to blink, release the buttons. The codes for all of the 3
buttons are erased.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R)
System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn
Directions
TSB 10-13-4
07/19/10
SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT
VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010
FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic,
directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions
and/or unable to pin point vehicle location.
ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using
IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr.
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10E893 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 >
SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - No
Turn-By-Turn Directions
TSB 10-13-4
07/19/10
SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT
VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010
FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic,
directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions
and/or unable to pin point vehicle location.
ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using
IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr.
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10E893 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System
Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System
Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 > Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7151
Global Positioning System Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7152
Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7153
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Global Positioning System
Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7154
Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Module (GPSM)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
2. Release the clip and remove the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various
Navigation/Audio Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
TSB 10-6-3
04/12/10
SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with
Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN
number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not
delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT.
a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010.
b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes:
(1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD.
(2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD.
(3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS.
2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT.
NOTE
IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr.
System
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various
Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7164
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various
Navigation/Audio Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio
Concerns
TSB 10-6-3
04/12/10
SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with
Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN
number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not
delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT.
a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010.
b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes:
(1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD.
(2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD.
(3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS.
2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT.
NOTE
IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr.
System
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various
Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7170
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-21-9 > Nov > 10 > A/T
Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift Flare/Harsh Engagement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T Control - Harsh Shift/Upshift
Flare/Harsh Engagement
TSB 10-21-9
11/08/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - HARSH 2-3 UPSHIFT - 3-4 UPSHIFT FLARE - HARSH ROLLING
ENGAGEMENT
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit harsh 2-3 upshift after cold soak and/or 3-4 upshift flare after
cold soak. Vehicles may also exhibit harsh rolling engagements if vehicle is shifted into reverse or
drive before coming to a complete stop.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 69.04 and higher. This
new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.9 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at
the website.
2. The fluid level must also be set to the top hole (top of the cross hatch) on the dip stick, the fluid
must be at operation temperature of 185-200 °F
(85-93 °C) before the fluid level can be checked or set.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102109A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Reprogram The PCM, Includes Time To Check And Adjust
Transmission Fluid Level After Bringing Transmission Fluid Up To Operating Temperature (Do Not
Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Navigation Module > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Navigation Module: > 10-12-12 > Jul > 10 >
Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th Gear/DTC's Set
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine, A/T Controls - MIL/Stuck In 5th
Gear/DTC's Set
TSB 10-12-12
07/05/10
6F35 TRANSMISSION - 5TH GEAR ONLY - AFTER USING GRADE ASSIST ON STEEP
DOWNGRADE- DTC GROUPING P072F, P073A, P073B OR P07A8, P07A9, P07AA, P0731,
P0732
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission may exhibit a malfunction indicator light (MIL) on and 5th gear drive away
(Transmission Failsafe) after using the Grade Assist option on a steep downgrade and have a
group of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) P072F, P073A, P073B or P07A8, P07A9, PO7AA,
P0731, P0732.
ACTION Reprogram the powertrain control module (PCM) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 67.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.5 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101212A 2009-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner 2010 Fusion, Milan: Check For DTCs And Reprogram Them PCM (Do Not Use With Any
Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECALEM 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier
Amplifier: Diagrams Subwoofer Amplifier
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7194
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7195
Amplifier: Diagrams Audio Amplifier
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7196
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7197
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Diagrams > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7198
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier
Amplifier: Service and Repair Subwoofer Amplifier
Subwoofer Amplifier
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the battery. For additional information, refer to Battery.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector.
4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound
System > Component Information > Service and Repair > Subwoofer Amplifier > Page 7201
Amplifier: Service and Repair Audio Amplifier
Audio Amplifier
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the audio amplifier electrical connectors.
2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access.
Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the audio amplifier.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations
Radio/Stereo: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7205
Radio/Stereo: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7206
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control,
Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair
Remote Control: Service and Repair
Steering Wheel Controls
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the driver air bag module during this procedure.
Using a suitable tool, pry the steering wheel controls out of the steering wheel.
2. NOTE: Do not allow the electrical connector to fall back into the steering wheel.
Remove the steering wheel controls.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front
Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7214
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7215
Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7216
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7217
Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7218
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7219
Speaker: Diagrams Speaker, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Diagrams > Speaker, Left Front > Page 7220
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Door
Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker - Door
Speaker - Door
NOTE: Front door shown, rear door similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the door trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Speaker - Door > Page 7223
Speaker: Service and Repair Speaker - Subwoofer
Speaker - Subwoofer
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete
assembly.
1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel.
2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations
Accessory Delay Relay: Locations
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7229
Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7230
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest
for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode'
Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To
'Privacy Mode'
TSB 10-2-8
02/15/10
SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES
FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape,
Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex
LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their
SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be
able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their
personal device.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation.
2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is
still present, the device is the concern. Continue with
normal WSM Diagnostics.
NOTE
PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY
MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO
SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN
THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE.
WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM)
Communications Control Module: Locations Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7246
Communications Control Module: Locations Audio Control Module (ACM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM)
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7249
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7250
Communications Control Module: Diagrams Audio Control Module (ACM)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7251
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7252
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7253
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7254
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7255
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams > Accessory Protocol Interface Module
(APIM) > Page 7256
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Communications Control Module: Procedures
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check
NOTE: This procedure applies to checking the Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software level. To program the APIM, refer to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Programming in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accessory Protocol
Interface Module (APIM) Programming Using the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
3. Connect one end of the Universal Serial Bus (USB) male-A to male-A cable to the scan tool.
4. Connect the other end of the USB male-A to male-A cable to the vehicle USB port.
5. From the technician service publication website, run On-Line Automotive Service Information
System (OASIS) using Quick Start or by manually
entering the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
6. From the OASIS tab, select the "Sync/APIM" bullet.
7. Select the "Read APIM" button to verify the current APIM software level.
- The display shows both the Vehicle Interface Processor (VIP) and Consumer Interface Processor
(CIP) software levels.
8. The scan tool displays the following information:
- Last Recorded State - Hardware VIN: vehicle identification number associated with the current APIM
- Installed date: date the APIM was installed
- Radio: currently identified ACM in the vehicle
- HW Part No.: APIM hardware part number
- Un-installed date: date (if any) the APIM was uninstalled
- S/N: APIM serial number
- Last Recorded State - Software Date/Time: date and time of last recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7259
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- History - Software Date/Time: date and time of any recorded software installation
- VIP: VIP software that was installed at that time
- CIP: CIP software that was installed at that time
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
- Available Software for Programming Select: allows the software package to be selected
- Lineage: the original software release, if the software available is a revision
- VIP: VIP software level that is available with the selection
- CIP: CIP software level that is available with the selection
- Description: a description of the content of the software revision
9. Click a CIP software level to view the device compatibility list associated with the CIP software
level, if desired.
10. To exit the APIM software level check, disconnect the scan tool from the DLC and the USB
port, or exit the OASIS screen.
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Control Module (ACM) Self-Diagnostic Mode
Audio Systems Without Navigation
1. Turn the Audio Control Module (ACM) on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after Step
3 by turning the ACM off.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, carry out any of the following actions:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7260
5. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, turn the ACM off.
Satellite Digital Audio Receiver System (SDARS) Module Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval
- Vehicles Without Navigation
1. Operate the audio system in satellite radio mode.
2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously.
- The satellite radio receiver ESN displays on the screen.
3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN.
4. Turn the audio system off.
Audio Systems With Navigation
1. Turn the ACM on.
2. Operate the audio system in radio tuner (AM/FM) mode.
3. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds until the speaker walk test begins.
- The display indicates each speaker as it is tested.
4. NOTE: If the speaker walk test is the only test required, this procedure can be stopped after this
step, or by allowing the speaker walk test to
complete on its own.
Before the speaker walk test is complete, press the "End Test" selection.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7261
5. The following tests are available through the "BEZEL DIAGNOSTICS" menu:
6. To exit the self-diagnostic mode, press the "Exit Diagnostics" selection from the "BEZEL
DIAGNOSTICS" menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7262
Communications Control Module: Removal and Replacement
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Audio Control Module (ACM)
Without Navigation
With Navigation
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new ACM is being installed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7263
Upload the ACM configuration to the scan tool. For additional information, refer to Programmable
Module Installation (PMI) in Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
2. Remove the middle instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
3. Remove the 4 ACM screws.
- To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in) (navigation).
- To install, tighten to 1 Nm (9 lb-in) (all except navigation).
Navigation
4. Disconnect the antenna and electrical connectors.
All except navigation
5. NOTE: Only carry out this step if installing a new ACM.
Remove the 2 ACM brackets.
All vehicles
6. Remove the ACM.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the ACM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: It is necessary to record the current Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM)
software and hardware level when a new APIM is
being installed to make sure that the new component is the same version as the component being
replaced.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7264
Retrieve and record the current APIM software and hardware level. For additional information, refer
to Accessory Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check See: Procedures/Accessory
Protocol Interface Module (APIM) Software Level Check.
2. Remove the floor console. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or
Interior Moulding / Trim.
3. Disconnect the APIM electrical connector and the Universal Serial Bus (USB) cable electrical
connector.
4. Remove the 3 screws and the APIM.
- Slide the APIM upward to release the locator clips.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- If a new APIM is being installed, program the APIM to the correct software level. For additional
information, refer to Information Bus.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer
Interest for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn Directions
Global Positioning System Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn
Directions
TSB 10-13-4
07/19/10
SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT
VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010
FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic,
directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions
and/or unable to pin point vehicle location.
ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using
IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr.
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10E893 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical
Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System Module: > 10-13-4 > Jul > 10 > SYNC(R) System - No Turn-By-Turn
Directions
Global Positioning System Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - No
Turn-By-Turn Directions
TSB 10-13-4
07/19/10
SYNC NON-NAVIGATION - NO TURN-BY-TURN DIRECTIONS AND/OR UNABLE TO PIN POINT
VEHICLE LOCATION - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/14/2010
FORD: 2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport
Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2010 MKS, MKZ, MKX, Navigator
MERCURY: 2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2010 vehicle in the US market equipped with SYNC non-navigation - traffic,
directions, information and built on or before 6/14/2010 may exhibit no turn-by-turn directions
and/or unable to pin point vehicle location.
ACTION Reprogram the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM) to the latest calibration using
IDS release 67.01 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2010.5 DVD.
Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101304A Reprogram The GPSM (Do 0.3 Hr.
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
10E893 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7278
Global Positioning System Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7279
Global Positioning System Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7280
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Global Positioning System Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7281
Global Positioning System Module: Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Module (GPSM)
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
2. Release the clip and remove the Global Positioning System Module (GPSM).
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
Navigation Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio
Concerns
TSB 10-6-3
04/12/10
SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with
Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN
number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not
delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT.
a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010.
b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes:
(1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD.
(2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD.
(3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS.
2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT.
NOTE
IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr.
System
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Navigation Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7290
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation
Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
Navigation Module: Customer Interest Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns
TSB 10-6-3
04/12/10
SIRIUS RADIO AND NEXT GENERATION NAVIGATION CONCERNS - BUILT BEFORE 3/8/2010
FORD: 2010 Fusion, Mustang, Taurus 2009-2010 E-Series, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer
Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-Super Duty, Flex
LINCOLN: 2009-2010 MKS 2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner, Mountaineer
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 vehicles built on or before 3/8/2010 and equipped with Sirius Radio with
Navigation, may exhibit repeated traffic incident warnings every 2 minutes in some areas, VIN
number displayed in the Navigation system does not match the vehicle's VIN, Juke box can not
delete or shuffle songs and the MKZ (without THX(R)) speakers fade incorrectly.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Locate the upgrade kit, FCS-21 099-KIT.
a. These kits were shipped to the dealership in Mid-March 2010.
b. This kit (FCS-21099-KIT) includes:
(1) 1 CD - FCS-21099-CD.
(2) 1 DVD - FCS-21099-DVD.
(3) 1 Instruction Sheet - FCS-21099-INS.
2. Update the Navigation system using FCS-21099-KIT.
NOTE
IF ADDITIONAL UPGRADE KITS ARE NEEDED, CONTACT HELM INC. AT 1-800-390-4717.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
100603A Update The Navigation 0.3 Hr.
System
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 42
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Navigation Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation
Module: > 10-6-3 > Apr > 10 > Navigation Radio - Various Navigation/Audio Concerns > Page 7296
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition
Parking Assist Control Module: Customer Interest Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space
Recognition
TSB 09-26-4
01/04/10
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built
on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize
a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for
a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module
(PAM) prior to performing this procedure.
a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2.
b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B.
2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Parking Assist Control Module: > 09-26-4 > Jan > 10 > Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking Space Recognition
Parking Assist Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Parking Assist - Incorrect Parking
Space Recognition
TSB 09-26-4
01/04/10
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST - ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/6/2009 SOFTWARE UPDATE
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with Active Park Assist (APA) and built
on or before 8/6/2009, when using the parking space search feature the system may not recognize
a parking space as being sufficiently large for the vehicle to park in and will continue searching for
a larger parking space. A software update is available to correct this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure Steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 413-13B APA to diagnose and correct any diagnostic
trouble codes (DTC) in the Parking Aid Module
(PAM) prior to performing this procedure.
a. If no DTCs are present continue to Step 2.
b. If DTCs are present follow WSM, Section 413-13B.
2. Reprogram the Parking Aid Module (PAM) to the latest calibration using Integrated Diagnostic
System (IDS) release 64.06 and higher. This new
calibration is not included in the VCM 2009.11 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the
website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092604A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Check DTCs And Reprogram The PAM
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
RECAL 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7310
Parking Assist Control Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7311
Parking Assist Control Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7312
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7313
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Module (PAM)
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Module configuration is only required if a new Parking Aid Module (PAM) is being
installed.
Upload the PAM configuration information to the scan tool.
2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel.
3. If replacing the parking aid speaker only, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Disengage the clips.
- Remove the parking aid speaker.
4. If replacing the PAM, proceed as follows:
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Remove the 2 screws.
- Remove the PAM.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Download the configuration information to the PAM. For additional information, refer to PMI in
Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7319
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7320
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7321
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7322
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Locations
Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7323
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7324
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7325
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7326
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7327
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7330
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7331
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7332
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7333
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7334
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7335
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Diagrams
Active Park Assist Sensor, Left
Active Park Assist Sensor, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7336
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7337
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7338
Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7339
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7340
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7341
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7342
Parking Aid Sensor, Inner Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7343
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Active Park Assist Sensor, Left >
Page 7344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7345
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
Active Park Assist Sensor
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal
1. Remove the fender splash shield screws and lower bolts.
2. Position the fender splash shield aside and disconnect the electrical connector.
3. With a suitable tool (such as a flat-blade screwdriver) gently pry the retaining tabs to remove the
active park assist sensor(s).
- Remove the active park assist sensor(s) from the front bumper cover.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. After installing the sensor(s), use the scan tool to verify that the active park assist sensor PIDs
responding correctly. Carry out the Azimuth System
Check See: Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist. If the active park assist sensor does not
respond correctly, refer to Active Park Assist. See: Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Active Park Assist
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Assist Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7349
Parking Assist Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional
Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7350
Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair
Active Park Assist Switch
Removal
1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. For additional information, refer to
Instrument Cluster / Carrier &/or Interior Moulding /
Trim.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. Remove the active park assist switch from the lower instrument panel center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines
TSB 09-20-13
10/19/09
6F35 TRANSMISSION - RECREATIONAL TOWING - VEHICLE WITH ALL 4 WHEELS ON THE
GROUND - EXPANDED GUIDELINES TO PREVENT TRANSMISSION DAMAGE
FORD: 2010 Fusion 2009-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Milan 2009-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2009-2010 Escape, Mariner, 2010 Fusion and Milan vehicles equipped with a 6F35
automatic transmission, may experience transmission shift concerns after towing the vehicle with
all 4 wheels on the ground (Flat tow) such as behind a motor home or a truck. The transmission
shift concern may be caused by heat build up in the transmission due to the transmission fluid level
being too high, towing speeds above 65 MPH (105 Km/h) and/or not stopping to run the engine at
idle for 5 minutes every six hours or less, to cool the transmission.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
There are specific instructions listed in the Owner Guide that must be followed to recreational
tow/flat tow/tow a vehicle with all 4 tires on the ground.
Advise customers of the following expanded recreational towing guidelines.
1. Transmission fluid level must be checked at operating temperature of 185 °F - 200 °F (85 °C - 93
°C), per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
307-01. At this temperature, adjust fluid level between minimum line and the minimum hole at the
bottom of the hash marks on dipstick. This level is within the safe operating fluid level and does not
require the customer to have the fluid level readjusted after flat tow operation. (Figure 1)
2. Maximum towing speed is 65 MPH (105 Km/h).
3. Do not flat tow the vehicle for greater than 6 hours at a time.
4. Start and run the engine for:
a. 5 minutes before towing each day
b. 5 minutes every 6 hours or less.
c. While running the engine at idle for 5 minutes, with foot on the brake, shift through all gears.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Towing Information > System
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > A/T - Vehicle Flat Towing Guidelines > Page 7356
These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to the transmission due to overheating.
If setting the fluid level for a customer that will be recreational (flat) towing the vehicle, set the level
between minimum line and the minimum hole at the bottom of the hash marks on dipstick (Figure
1) per WSM Section 307-01.
NOTE
THERE IS A SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE IN TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK READINGS BETWEEN
A COLD TRANSMISSION AND A TRANSMISSION AT OPERATING TEMPERATURE. FAILURE
TO CHECK TRANS FLUID LEVEL AT TRANS OPERATING TEMPERATURE, PER WSM
SECTION 307-01 MAY RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.
If the vehicle is a 2009 Escape or Mariner and built on or before 10/28/2008 the dipstick does not
have Minimum - Maximum lines outside of hash marks, then replace dipstick.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
MT092013 Use SLTS Operations If Actual
Available; Claim Additional Time
Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time.
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7000 42
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7361
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7362
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7363
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7364
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7365
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7366
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7367
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7368
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7369
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7370
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7371
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7372
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7373
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7374
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7375
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7376
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7377
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7378
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7379
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7380
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7381
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Trailer Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7384
Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Trailer Lamps
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7385
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through a dedicated ground circuit. This circuit is the
shared ground for all of the trailer lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: ALL THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW GROUND CIRCUITS FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7386
Normal Operation
The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays.
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE THROUGH THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to Z2.
------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay.
- Substitute a know good relay.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7387
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3.
------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
STOP/TURN RELAY COIL
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn
relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
STOP/TURN RELAY
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7388
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST
the system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
STOP/TURN RELAY USING THE RELAY GROUND
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3,
circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), BJB face side.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3,
circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), BJB face side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an
open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are
illuminated. The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking
lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed
to the trailer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7389
tow connector.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to AA2.
------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay.
- Substitute a known good relay.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3.
------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7390
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA4.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL USING THE RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7391
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Lamp
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are
illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7392
GO to AB2.
No
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn) or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking
lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7397
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7398
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7401
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7402
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7403
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7404
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 7405
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
Smart Junction Box (SJB)
Removal
NOTICE: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges,
damage may result.
NOTE: Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration
information to a scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new Smart Junction Box
(SJB) after installation. For additional information, refer to Information Bus. In the event that
As-Built data is required (SJB does not communicate), all Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) devices
must be programmed to the new SJB. A minimum of 2 RKE devices are necessary to complete the
configuration and turn off the flashing interior lights. The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
functionality is integral to the SJB.
NOTE: The steps included in the SJB removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the
vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB is delivered
in a manufacturing mode with 8 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the 8 DTCs,
successful configuration of the SJB must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and
a successful self-test. The 8 pre-set DTCs are as follows:
- B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured)
- B2477 (Module Configuration Failure)
- B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault)
- B2A21 (One or More Configuration Files Missing or Corrupt)
- C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > Body Control Module > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 7411
1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB is being replaced.
Upload the module configuration information from the SJB. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
2. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel.
3. Remove the floor console SJB cover.
4. Remove the floor console finish panel.
5. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors.
6. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB.
Installation
1. Install the SJB.
- Install the 2 bolts.
- Connect the 7 electrical connectors.
2. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel.
3. NOTE: If the SJB was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary.
Install the floor console SJB cover.
4. NOTE: When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB operation and
clears DTCs B106D, B2477 and B2A21. The
clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new
SJB.
NOTE: The RKE transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) key is
automatically transferred during Programmable Module Installation (PMI). Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) programming is not necessary. If As-Built data is required during PMI, all remote
transmitters (IKT or fob) must be programmed to the new SJB. Cycling the ignition to run for 6
seconds with each IKT programs the RKE function of the IKT key. For additional information, refer
to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks for the remote transmitter (fob only) programming
instructions, if necessary.
NOTE: DTC B2276 may be set, indicating there are less than 2 transmitters programmed to the
SJB. For additional information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Download the SJB configuration information from the scan tool. For additional information, refer to
Information Bus.
5. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing
of these DTCs indicates the SJB has recognized
the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure.
Train the tire pressure sensors. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
6. NOTE: DTC C2780 does not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB. When successful,
this step clears DTC C2780.
Carry out the SJB self-test (must include an on-demand self-test) and then repeat the self-test to
confirm all DTCs have been cleared.
7. Rotate the instrument panel dimmer switch from the full dim position to the dome ON position.
This makes sure that all displays are visible under
all lighting conditions.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
Running Board
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Release the running board trim bezel push clips and remove the running board trim bezel.
3. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. Remove the body-to-running board bracket screw.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
Tab Repair - Bumper
1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of
quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor
and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the
bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps.
NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives
or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air.
4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area.
5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the
tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be
affected and damaged by excessively
high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F).
Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C
(140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake
durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to
placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7421
Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
Bumper Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover
and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 6 pushpins from inside the front splash shield (3 each side).
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center pushpins from the front bumper cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors.
7. If equipped, disconnect the auto-park long range sensor electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front bumper cover upper bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
9. Unclip the front bumper cover from the from the front bumper mounting brackets and remove the
front bumper cover.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Position the front bumper cover.
- Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until the
bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures
Tab Repair - Bumper
1. NOTE: Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of
quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor
and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the
bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps.
NOTE: The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives
or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly.
Remove the affected bumper. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover.
3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with
compressed air.
4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area.
5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the
tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately
51 mm (2 in) from original tab.
6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected
area.
- Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape.
7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme
care to not sand through the exterior surface.
8. NOTICE: The High Voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) in a Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) can be
affected and damaged by excessively
high temperatures. The temperature in some body shop paint booths can exceed 60°C (140°F).
Therefore, during refinishing operations, the paint booth temperature must be set at or below 60°C
(140°F) with a bake time of 45 minutes or less. Temperatures in excess of 60°C (140°F) or bake
durations longer than 45 minutes will require the HVTB be removed from the vehicle prior to
placing in the paint booth. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems.
Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint
systems.
9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information
> Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7427
Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement
Bumper Cover - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws.
2. Remove the 2 rear splash shields.
- Remove the 4 splash shield pin-type retainers (2 each side).
- Remove the 4 splash shield bolts (2 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side).
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
5. If equipped, disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear bumper cover.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides.
- Transfer all necessary components.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7444
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7450
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7451
Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7452
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7453
2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7454
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7455
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7456
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Front Door
Handle See: Exterior Front Door Handle.
2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the actuating rods.
- If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle
reinforcement.
- Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle
reinforcement actuating rod.
5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
7459
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
7460
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Front Door Handle
Exterior Front Door Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior front door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
4. Remove the exterior front door handle bezel.
1. Pull the exterior front door handle open.
2. Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle bezel and remove.
5. Remove the exterior front door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
7461
6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front > Page
7462
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches Exploded View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
> Page 7467
Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair Interior Door Handle - Front
Interior Door Handle - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and remove the interior front door handle.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Front Door Hinge: Adjustments
Door Alignment - Front
All alignments
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar.
1. Remove the door latch striker plate.
Front door in and out, up and down alignment
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
3. Remove the front fender.
4. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
5. Remove the front door scuff plate.
6. Partially remove the front door weatherstrip.
7. Remove the lower cowl trim panel.
- Remove the pin-type retainer.
- Remove the lower cowl trim panel.
8. Remove the front door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside A-pillar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 7471
9. Position the weather shield aside and loosen, but do not remove, the front door lower hinge nut.
10. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower front door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
All alignments
11. Adjust the door.
12. Tighten the door fasteners.
- Tighten the front door hinge-to-front door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the front door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
13. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary.
- Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Upper, Front
Door Hinge - Upper, Front
1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster / Carrier
&/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
3. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Hinge > System
Information > Service and Repair > Door Hinge - Upper, Front > Page 7474
Front Door Hinge: Service and Repair Door Hinge - Lower, Front
Door Hinge - Lower, Front
1. Remove the front door. For additional information, refer to Door See: Service and Repair.
2. Remove the scuff plate trim panel pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the scuff plate trim panel.
4. Pull outward to release the cowl trim panel clips and remove the cowl trim panel.
5. Remove the hinge-to-body bolts and remove the hinge.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Front Door Latch: Procedures
Latch Lubrication
1. Open the door.
2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (2 clicks).
3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle.
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7479
Front Door Latch: Removal and Replacement
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Front Door Latch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7480
Front Door Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See: Front
Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior,
Front.
4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector.
6. Remove the front door latch.
- Slide the front door latch toward the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
Door Trim Panel - Front
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Remove the door sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector.
2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
- Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7484
3. Remove the door handle screw.
4. Remove the door pull cup screw cover.
5. Remove the door pull cup screw.
6. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws.
7. Remove the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 7494
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 7495
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
> Page 7500
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 7506
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 7507
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7512
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass >
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door > Page 7515
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door >
Page 7523
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door
Window Regulator - Front Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front
door window glass screws.
7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector.
11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window
Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door >
Page 7524
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not
Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior
Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7535
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0
Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 7541
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7542
Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7543
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7544
2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7545
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214
Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush
TSB 09-24-7
12/14/09
EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN
RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an
exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when
opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle
bezel.
ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-14.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7546
2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the
bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is
any damage present? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart
pinpoint test T.
b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section
501-14.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C
Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And
Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New
Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door
Exterior Handle: > Page 7547
Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A
Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7822404 30
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised.
1. Remove the exterior rear door handle. For additional information, refer to Exterior Rear Door
Handle See: Exterior Rear Door Handle.
2. Disconnect the door latch carrier.
1. Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside.
2. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw.
3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch.
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle
reinforcement actuating rod.
5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
7550
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Exterior Rear Door Handle
Exterior Rear Door Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the rear window channel bolt and position the window channel aside.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement.
5. Remove the exterior rear door handle bezel.
1. Pull the exterior rear door handle open.
2. Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle bezel and remove.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
7551
6. Remove the exterior rear door handle.
- Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear > Page
7552
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded
View
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear
Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair
Interior Door Handle - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and remove the rear interior door handle
from the door trim panel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments
Rear Door Hinge: Adjustments
Door Alignment - Rear
NOTE: Driver side shown, passenger side similar.
All alignments
1. Remove the door latch striker plate.
Rear door in and out, up and down alignment
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
Front door fore, aft and tilt alignment
3. Loosen, but do not remove, the upper rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
4. Remove the front door scuff plate.
5. Remove the rear door scuff plate.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Hinge > System
Information > Adjustments > Page 7559
6. Position aside the lower B-pillar trim panel.
7. Loosen the rear door hinge-to-body bolts inside at the inside B-pillar.
8. Loosen, but do not remove, the lower rear door hinge-to-body fasteners enough to allow door
alignment.
All alignments
9. Adjust the door.
10. Tighten the door fasteners.
- Tighten the rear door hinge-to-rear door fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
- Tighten the rear door hinge-to-body fasteners to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
11. Install and adjust the door striker as necessary.
- Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft).
- To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Rear Door Latch: Procedures
Latch Lubrication
1. Open the door.
2. Using a screwdriver, fully close the latch (2 clicks).
3. Spray the multi-purpose grease into the opening on the door latch for approximately 5 seconds.
4. Open the latch using either the interior or exterior door handle.
5. Open and close the door several times to circulate the lubricant inside the latch.
6. Wipe off any excess grease.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7564
Rear Door Latch: Removal and Replacement
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Rear Door Handles, Locks and Latches - Exploded View
Rear Door Latch
Rear Door Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System
Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7565
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Rear See: Rear
Door Handle/Rear Door Exterior Handle/Service and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior,
Rear.
4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector.
6. Remove the rear door latch.
- Slide the rear door latch toward the front of the vehicle.
- Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating
cable.
7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
Door Trim Panel - Rear
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel.
2. Remove the door handle screw.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System
Information > Service and Repair > Page 7569
3. Remove the door pull cup screw cover.
4. Remove the door pull cup screw.
5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws.
6. Remove the door trim panel.
- Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel.
- Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
7579
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear
Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page
7580
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 7586
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service
Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass
Scratched > Page 7587
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Rear Door Window
Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass >
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear >
Page 7590
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 7598
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door
Window Regulator - Rear Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear
door window glass screws.
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator
> System Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 7599
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch
Hood Latch
Removal
1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut.
Loosen the hood latch nut.
2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts.
Remove the 2 hood latch bolts.
3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable.
1. Release the cable conduit.
2. Disconnect the cable.
4. Remove the hood latch.
5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever.
Installation
1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch.
1. Connect the cable.
2. Engage the cable conduit.
2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket.
3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the
latch is installed and aligned correctly.
Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts.
- Tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 7605
4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Hood Latch > Page 7606
Hood Latch: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Hood Latch and Components - Exploded View > Page 7611
Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair Hood Latch Release Handle
Hood Latch Release Handle
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the hood latch. For additional information, refer to Hood Latch See: Hood Latch/Service
and Repair/Hood Latch.
2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides.
- Note the routing of the hood latch release cable.
3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
4. NOTE: Breaking the tab does not require handle assembly replacement.
Using a suitable tool, push up on the tab to snap it off and then slide the handle off the instrument
panel.
5. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl
panel into the passenger compartment.
Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly.
- Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 >
Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
Liftgate Window Glass: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
TSB 11-2-9
02/07/11
BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may
experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are
present.
ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage.
a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure.
b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design.
Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms.
a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7842006 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 >
Feb > 11 > Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
Liftgate Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
TSB 11-2-9
02/07/11
BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may
experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are
present.
ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage.
a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure.
b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design.
Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms.
a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7842006 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass >
Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7626
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Liftgate
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders.
1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 7630
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7634
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the release switch electrical connector.
3. Press the tab and remove the liftgate release switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 7637
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7641
Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7642
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Handle >
Component Information > Diagrams
Trunk / Liftgate Handle: Diagrams
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim
Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair
Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair
Liftgate Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws.
3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel retaining clips.
4. NOTE: If equipped with a rear wiper, the rear glass must be open.
Remove the liftgate trim panel.
5. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the liftgate trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach to the liftgate trim panel
before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 7653
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch
Liftgate Latch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors.
3. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. Remove the liftgate latch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View > Page 7654
Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch
Liftgate Window Latch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position.
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector.
3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch
bolts.
Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned
correctly.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System
Information > Diagrams
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Diagrams
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7661
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7662
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7666
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7667
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information >
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Bracket > Component Information >
Service and Repair
License Plate Bracket: Service and Repair
License Plate Housing
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector.
3. Remove the license plate housing nuts.
4. Release the license plate housing pin-type retainers from the liftgate and remove the license
plate housing.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair > Fender Splash Shield
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Fender Splash Shield
Fender Splash Shield
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
4. Remove the fender splash shield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service
and Repair > Fender Splash Shield > Page 7681
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair Front End Body Panels - Exploded View
Front End Body Panels - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation
Subframe and Mounting Systems
Front Subframe
The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms.
- provide a mounting point for the engine isolators.
- provide the mounting surface for the steering gear.
- provide the mounting surface for the sway bar.
Rear Subframe
The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to:
- aid in structural support.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms.
- provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential All-Wheel Drive (AWD).
Welding Precautions
The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal
Inert Gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean
and free of foreign materials.
- Do not weld on the subframe.
- The correct protective clothing should always be worn.
- Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases.
- A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample.
- Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of
weld being used.
- Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. Refer to Battery.
- On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
- Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical
currents when welding.
- Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through
painted surfaces or E-coat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring
Corrosion Protection Following Repair.
Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the
suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening
concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and
body misalignment.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7695
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7696
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7702
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7703
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7704
Front Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7705
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7706
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7707
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7708
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 7709
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7710
Front Subframe: Service and Repair
Subframe - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar.
NOTE: Escape and Mariner only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7711
NOTE: Escape Hybrid only.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7712
All vehicles
NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of
vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the
same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement
part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during
reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts.
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key.
Hybrid vehicles
3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive
Systems.
4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. For additional information, refer to
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission
Control Systems.
All vehicles
5. Remove the front tires. For additional information, refer to Wheels and Tires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7713
6. NOTICE: Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and
washers or damage to the vehicle may
occur.
NOTICE: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap
straps or damage to the vehicle may occur.
NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing.
Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft).
- Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard
the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft).
7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). For additional
information, refer to Exhaust System &/or Catalytic
Converter.
9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield.
10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts.
- To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft).
Hybrid vehicles only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7714
12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket.
All vehicles
13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
All vehicles except hybrid
14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt.
- To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
All vehicles
15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt.
- To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft).
16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle.
18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and
installing the stabilizer link nut.
Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts.
- To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft).
19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and
the bolts.
- To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7715
20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe.
21. NOTE: Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing.
NOTE: When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear
bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification.
Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts.
- To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft).
22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts.
- To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft).
23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same
time the subframe is lowered.
With an assistant, remove the front subframe.
24. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer the components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7724
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7725
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7731
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7732
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7733
Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7734
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7735
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7736
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7737
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 7738
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7747
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises > Page 7748
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7754
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear
Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7755
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7756
Rear Subframe: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7757
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7758
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7759
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7760
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 7761
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7762
Rear Subframe: Service and Repair
Subframe - Rear
Removal
All vehicles
1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance
of vital parts and systems and their
failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed
if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute
design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct
retention of these parts.
With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist.
Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
2. Remove the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or
Axle Shaft Assembly.
All vehicles
3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside.
5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Page 7763
6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe.
Installation
All vehicles
1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts.
- To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
- To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe.
3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts.
Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe.
- Loosely install the bolts.
4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
Vehicles with AWD
5. Install the rear axle assembly. For additional information, refer to Differential Assembly &/or Axle
Shaft Assembly.
All vehicles
6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts.
- Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 7772
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises >
Page 7773
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak
Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7779
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame
- Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 7780
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments Illumination Variation/Flickering
Power Distribution Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7786
Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7787
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7788
Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122
Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises
TSB 10-22-8
11/22/10
FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS
CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY
FORD: 2001-2011 Escape
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7789
MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years.
ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak
or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the
noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 1)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts.
NOTE
DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER
CONTROL ARM BUSHING.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 2)
NOTE
THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7790
(3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
NOTE
WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT
SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE
TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION.
(4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00.
(5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise:
1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these
specific locations? (Figure 3)
a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04.
b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body.
(1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts.
(2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge
of the locating hole. (Figure 4)
NOTE
NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES.
THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED
FORWARD IN VEHICLE.
(3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00.
(4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And
D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Adjust
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 7791
Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do
Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs.
2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To
Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With
Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
5035 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
Radiator Grille
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to Bumper.
Escape only
2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7795
3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts.
4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia.
Mariner only
5. Push outward on the 12 radiator grille clips to release the radiator grille from the bumper cover
and remove the radiator grille.
All vehicles
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Console: Service and Repair
Console - Floor
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transmission
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
All vehicles
3. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 floor console rear bolts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
4. Position the seats rearward.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
5. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transmission
6. Disengage the gear shift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7800
7. Remove the floor console storage bin.
8. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Remove the 8 floor console bolts and remove the floor console.
10. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7806
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7807
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7808
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7809
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7810
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7811
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7816
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7817
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7818
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7819
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7820
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt Arming
and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering > Page 7821
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair
Headliner
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to A-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/A-Pillar Trim Panel.
2. Remove the LH and RH B-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to B-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/B-Pillar
Trim Panel.
3. Remove the LH and RH C-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to C-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair/C-Pillar
Trim Panel.
4. Remove the LH and RH D-pillar trim panels. For additional information, refer to D-Pillar Trim
Panel See: Trim Panel/Service and
Repair/D-Pillar Trim Panel.
5. Open the overhead console door.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7825
6. NOTE: The overhead console is also supported by a retaining clip.
Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips.
- Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips.
- Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner.
9. Remove the interior lamp assembly.
- Pull straight downward to release pushpins.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
10. Remove the cargo lamp.
- Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
11. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers.
12. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors.
- To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft).
13. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and
have no gaps or overlaps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Page 7826
If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring.
14. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers.
15. Remove the headliner.
16. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer parts as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View
Trim Panel: Service and Repair Interior Trim - Exploded View
Interior Trim - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7831
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7832
Trim Panel: Service and Repair A-Pillar Trim Panel
A-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal
All trim panels
1. Position the LH or RH front door weatherstrips aside.
Passenger side only
2. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screw covers.
3. Remove the A-pillar assist handle screws and remove the assist handle.
All trim panels
4. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips.
Driver side only
5. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar
tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether is
being installed.
Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel.
- Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip.
- Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards.
All trim panels
6. Remove the A-pillar trim panel.
Installation
All trim panels
1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel.
Driver side only
2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does
not fasten correctly. During a side air
curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel.
- Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully
seated.
3. NOTICE: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will
occur.
NOTICE: To avoid damage to the A-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body and
attach them to the A-pillar trim panel before installing.
NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel
tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel.
Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar.
Passenger side only
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7833
4. Install the A-pillar assist handle and install the screws.
5. Install the A-pillar assist handle screw covers.
All trim panels
6. Install the LH or RH front door opening weatherstrips.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7834
Trim Panel: Service and Repair B-Pillar Trim Panel
B-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
Upper
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover
out at the bottom.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Position the front and rear door opening weatherstrips aside.
4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt.
Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
Lower
5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel.
6. Remove the 2 pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel.
7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel.
All vehicles
8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the B-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the B-pillar trim
panel before installing.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7835
Trim Panel: Service and Repair C-Pillar Trim Panel
C-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not
remain in place, install a new cover.
Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover.
2. Remove the safety belt bolt.
- To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
3. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel .
4. Position the rear door opening weatherstrip aside.
5. Release the C-pillar coat hook by inserting a small flat screwdriver in the slot at the base of the
coat hook.
6. Remove the coat hook.
- For LH coat hook, twist clockwise.
- For RH coat hook, twist counterclockwise.
7. Remove the C-pillar trim panel bolt.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
8. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the C-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the C-pillar trim
panel before installing.
Remove the C-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and
Repair > Interior Trim - Exploded View > Page 7836
Trim Panel: Service and Repair D-Pillar Trim Panel
D-Pillar Trim Panel
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Quarter Trim Panel .
2. NOTICE: To avoid damage to the D-pillar trim panel, remove any retaining clips from the body
and attach them to the D-pillar trim
panel before installing.
Remove the D-pillar trim panel by pulling straight outward to release the retaining clips.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component
Information > Diagrams
Utility Storage Compartment: Diagrams
Instrument Panel - Exploded View
Instrument Panel
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Utility Storage Compartment > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 7840
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder
and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair
package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key
code of the vehicle.
1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. For additional information, refer to Door
Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front See:
Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Exterior Handle/Service
and Repair/Door Handle Reinforcement - Exterior, Front.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
1. Release the clips.
2. Remove the door lock cylinder.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
Key: Testing and Inspection Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
NOTE: This procedure only works if 2 or more programmed ignition keys (they do not have to be
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) keys) are present. If 2 programmed Passive Anti-Theft
System (PATS) keys are not available, refer to Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key
Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and
Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment.
NOTE: The Instrument Cluster (IC) PID SPAREKEY must be enabled for this procedure to operate.
If this PID is not enabled, refer to Key Programming Switch State Control See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Switch State Control,
in order to enable the customer spare key programming PID. The PID SPAREKEY is set to
ENABLE when the vehicle is built.
NOTE: If the programming procedure is successful, the new key(s) starts the vehicle and the
anti-theft indicator proves-out for approximately 3 seconds. If the programming procedure is not
successful and the new key(s) does not start the engine, leave the key in the ON position for at
least 3 seconds, then turn the key off. Repeat the key programming procedure from Step 1. If the
failure repeats, refer to Anti-Theft See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection in the Diagnosis and Testing to review the DTCs and carry out the
appropriate pinpoint tests.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the IC before the vehicle starts. If the
MyKey(TM) function is enabled, one or both of the keys must be administrator (admin) keys.
NOTE: If the vehicle is in unlimited key mode, this spare key programming procedure still functions.
Any 2 keys that can start the vehicle can be used to program an additional unlimited key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, and the remaining keys are with the customer, or
are not available, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for instructions on
programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE.
NOTE: If the steps are not carried out as outlined, the programming procedure ends.
NOTE: Ignition keys must have a correct mechanical key cut for the vehicle and must be PATS
encoded keys (contain a transponder). The key does not have to be an IKT key.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
NOTE: A maximum of 8 ignition keys can be programmed to a PATS vehicle, of which up to 4 can
be IKTs. If an attempt to program more than 4 IKTs occurs, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the
IC set a memory full DTC (B1138), and the additional IKTs will not have any Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) function capability. If the vehicle is equipped with a message center, the IC displays the
message INT KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM. The PATS portion of the additional key will function,
but the RKE transmitter function will be inoperative.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode (after the first 2 keys have been programmed to the
vehicle), the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how many keys are programmed to
the vehicle.
1. Insert a programmed PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional PATS key) into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF
position to the ON position.
2. Leave the first key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the first key to the OFF position and remove the first key.
4. Within 10 seconds of turning the first key to the OFF position, insert a second programmed
PATS ignition key (can be an IKT or a conventional
PATS key) into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
5. Leave the second key in the ON position for 3 seconds, but not longer than 10 seconds.
6. Turn the second key to the OFF position and remove the key.
7. Within 20 seconds of turning the second key to the OFF position, insert the unprogrammed
PATS ignition key (new PATS or IKT key) into the
ignition lock cylinder and turn the new key from the OFF position to the ON position. Leave the key
in the ON position for a minimum of 6
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7850
seconds (this additional 3 second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place, if
programming an IKT key).
8. NOTE: The new key will now start the vehicle and will also operate the RKE functions, if there
are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed to the
vehicle.
Start the vehicle with the new key. If it is an IKT key, verify the RKE functions.
9. If additional programmed keys are desired, repeat Steps 1-7.
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs keys programmed into the system and
does not have 2 programmed ignition keys available. This procedure is also useful when a
programmed ignition key(s) is lost or the ignition lock cylinder is replaced, and it is desired to erase
key code(s) from the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) memory.
NOTE: This procedure erases all programmed ignition keys from the vehicle memory and the
vehicle does not start until 2 keys are programmed to the vehicle. This procedure also erases the
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) identification codes (TICs) from the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), preventing the erased IKT from operating the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functions on the
vehicle.
NOTE: A minimum of 2 PATS keys must be programmed into the Instrument Cluster (IC) before
the vehicle starts.
NOTE: Two PATS encoded (contains a transponder) IKT keys (or standard PATS keys) with the
correct mechanical cut must be available to carry out this procedure. One or both of them can be
the customer's original keys. One or both of them can be an IKT or a standard PATS key.
NOTE: If additional keys are to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the remaining keys are with the customer and are
not available with the vehicle, instruct the customer to refer to the Owner's Literature for
instructions on programming the remaining keys. In this case, the IC PID SPAREKEY must be
enabled.
NOTE: This procedure is not necessary if only the PATS transceiver was replaced. Replacement of
the transceiver does not erase the PATS key codes in the IC.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
3. From the scan tool menu select: "Ignition Key Code Erase". Follow all IDS on-screen instructions
until the key erase procedure completes. The
scan tool also instructs to program 2 keys to complete the process.
4. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. NOTE: The RKE data transfer takes place between the key and the IC first. After both keys are
programmed into the IC, the RKE data transfers
from the IC to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Until the final data transfer takes place into the SJB,
the RKE function does not operate.
NOTE: IKT keys require a 6-second programming time frame for the RKE data transfer to take
place, while standard PATS keys only require a minimum of 3 seconds.
Turn the first PATS key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3 second
time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7851
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
a minimum of 6 seconds (this additional 3
second time frame allows for the RKE data transfer to take place).
8. The vehicle should now start with both ignition keys and the RKE transmitter portion of an IKT
should function.
9. If it is desired to program additional key(s) (only up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the
IC, of which only 4 can be IKT keys), refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key
that needs to be programmed.
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) Parameter Reset
NOTE: A minimum of 2 Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys must be programmed into the
Instrument Cluster (IC) to complete this procedure and allow the vehicle to start.
1. Turn the key from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, follow the on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For
additional information, refer to Anti-Theft Security
Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics .
3. From the scan tool, select: Parameter Reset and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. NOTE: If the IC or the IC and the PCM were replaced, updated or reconfigured, follow Steps 4-9.
All vehicle keys are erased during the
parameter reset procedure. Verify at least 2 vehicle keys are available prior to carrying out the
PATS parameter reset. If only the PCM was replaced, go to Step 9.
From the scan tool, select: Ignition Key Code Erase and follow the on-screen instructions.
5. Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool.
6. Turn the key to the ON position for 6 seconds.
7. Turn the key to the OFF position and remove the key.
8. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
6 seconds.
9. Both keys now start the vehicle.
10. If more keys are required to be programmed, refer to Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys.
11. Program the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter portion of the Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter (IKT) PATS keys. For additional
information, refer to Doors, Hood and Trunk &/or Locks.
Key Programming Switch State Control
Key Programming Switch State Control
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7852
NOTE: The spare key programming switch is a programmable switch which provides the capability
to enable/disable the normal customer spare key programming procedure detailed in the Owner's
Literature. It must read ENABLE if more than 2 keys need to be programmed into the Instrument
Cluster (IC). For additional information, refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. This programmable switch is provided as a
convenience for rental company fleets or other fleet purchasers who may not want the spare key
programming procedure available to the vehicle driver.
NOTE: The spare key programming switch state can be viewed with the IC SPAREKEY PID.
NOTE: If the SPAREKEY PID reads ENABLE, up to 8 keys total can be programmed into the IC
using Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys. If the SPAREKEY PID reads DISABLE, the
Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure does not function. This PID only
affects the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure.
1. NOTE: The key used in this step does not have to be an Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
key. A conventional Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) key can also be used, as long as it has first been successfully programmed to this vehicle.
Insert a programmed PATS IKT key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF
position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: The default setting on delivery of all new vehicles is ENABLE, when viewing the IC
SPAREKEY PID.
From the scan tool menu select: "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" and follow the IDS
on-screen instructions in order to complete the procedure. "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable" - spare key programming procedure is accessible.
- "Customer Spare Key Programming Disable" - spare key programming procedure is not
accessible.
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Spare Key Programming - Unlimited Key Mode
Enabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: Unlimited key mode is intended for use by those customers who need more than 8 keys for
their vehicle.
NOTE: If unlimited key mode is enabled, a maximum of 4 Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT)
keys can be programmed to the vehicle for Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) functionality. If more keys
are required, they should be standard Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys. If more than 4 IKT
keys are programmed to the vehicle, the Smart Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC)
will set DTC B1138 (memory full) and only 4 IKT keys will have RKE functionality, however, all of
them will start the vehicle, if programmed correctly.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key(s) must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition
lock cylinder.
NOTE: The unlimited key mode is set up by creating a special, unique unlimited transponder
security key code and programming this key code into all
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7853
of the vehicle keys so they contain the same key code.
NOTE: When in the unlimited key mode, the N_KEYCODE PID will always read 2, no matter how
many keys are programmed to the vehicle (after the first 2 keys have been programmed).
1. The customer must choose an 8-digit number (except for 00000000 or 00000001) to be
programmed to all of their vehicles. All customer vehicles
need to use the same number. Valid digits are 0-9 and the letters A-F.
2. NOTE: If the PID UNL_KEY_ID is not available, unlimited key mode is turned on and must be
turned off before viewing the stored code. At this
time, unlimited keys can be programmed to the vehicle. To view/change the stored code, follow the
procedure for disabling the unlimited key mode below.
Monitor the PID UNL_KEY_ID and compare its value against the code chosen in Step 1. It should
not be the same key code.
3. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
4. Once in security access, select: "program unlimited key code" and follow the IDS on-screen
instructions. Enter the 8-digit code chosen by the
customer in Step 1 of this procedure and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
5. Select: "unlimited key mode ON" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
6. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
7. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition key to OFF (the key does not need to be removed
at this time).
8. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if
it is an IKT key).
9. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
10. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position
for 3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
11. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation.
12. If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
Disabling Unlimited Key Mode
NOTE: By disabling the unlimited key mode, the previous access code no longer operates the
vehicle.
1. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
2. Select: "unlimited key mode OFF" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
3. Select: "Ignition Key Code Erase" and follow the IDS on-screen instructions.
4. Disconnect the scan tool and turn the ignition switch to OFF (the key does not need to be
removed at this time).
5. Turn the first PATS key in the ignition lock cylinder to the ON position for 3 seconds (6 seconds if
it is an IKT key).
6. Turn the first PATS key to the OFF position and remove the key from the ignition lock cylinder.
7. Insert the second PATS key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position for
3 seconds (6 seconds if it is an IKT key).
8. Start the vehicle with both PATS keys to verify their correct operation.
9. NOTE: With the unlimited key mode turned off, a maximum of 8 keys can be programmed into
the IC using the Key Programming Using Two
Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to
ENABLE.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7854
If it is desired to program additional key(s), refer to Key Programming Using Two Programmed
Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys for each additional key that needs to be programmed.
The IC PID SPAREKEY must be set to ENABLE.
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
Spare Key Programming - Using Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: This procedure is used when a customer needs to have an additional key programmed into
the vehicle without erasing stored key codes, but does not have 2 programmed keys available. This
procedure is also useful when attempting to determine if an ignition key is defective, as a new key
can be programmed without erasing keys or without having 2 programmed keys available.
NOTE: Before programming, the new key must have the correct mechanical cut for the ignition lock
cylinder.
NOTE: If 8 keys are already programmed, this procedure does not allow any more ignition keys to
be programmed. The number of keys that are programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS) can be determined by viewing the Instrument Cluster (IC) PID N_KEYCODE.
1. Turn the new key to be programmed from the OFF position to the ON position.
2. From the scan tool, enter TOOLBOX. Select: BODY - SECURITY - PATS Functions and follow
the Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS)
on-screen instructions to ENTER SECURITY ACCESS. For additional information, refer to
Anti-Theft Security Access See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics.
3. NOTE: Make sure the selection made is "Program additional ignition key". If the "Ignition Key
Code Erase" selection is made, all of the keys will
be erased from the system.
From the scan tool menu select: "Program additional ignition key".
4. NOTE: The 20-second delay is to allow sufficient time for the module to exit its diagnostic mode.
Turn the key to the OFF position and disconnect the scan tool (wait 20 seconds).
5. Start the vehicle with the new PATS key. The vehicle will now start with the new PATS key and
also with the original PATS keys. If it is an IKT
key, verify the RKE functions (if there are 4 or fewer IKT keys programmed).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7855
Key: Testing and Inspection MyKey(TM)
MyKey(TM) Programming
Program a MyKey(TM)
NOTE: After a MyKey(TM) has been programmed, the remaining standard key(s) (the key[s] that is
not programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature) is referred to as an "administrator key(s)" or "admin"
key(s). There must always be at least one admin key. The Instrument Cluster (IC) does not allow
the last admin key to be programmed into a MyKey(TM) restricted key. Both the admin key and the
MyKey(TM) restricted key can be used to see how many MyKey(TM) and admin keys are
programmed to the vehicle, and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey(TM)
feature active (using the message center). The MyKey(TM) is the one with the restricted status.
The admin key does not have any restrictions.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was programmed.
Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted
MyKey(TM) status. If the key has been cycled, an admin key is required to disable the MyKey(TM)
programming.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature can only be configured or disabled with an admin key.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) feature allows you to program/configure a restricted driving mode on one
(or more) standard key(s) supplied with the vehicle or any (Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS))
programmed spare key(s) to promote good driving habits. All but one of the keys that are
programmed to the vehicle can be programmed to a MyKey(TM) restricted key status. The
MyKey(TM) is a restricted key for consecutive key cycles until the MyKey(TM) feature is disabled.
When the MyKey(TM) feature is programmed, several features are modified/or can be modified:
NOTE: The standard restricted features below cannot be configured in any way.
Standard Restricted Features
- Belt-Minder(R) chimes periodically with the audio system muted until the driver safety belt is
buckled. If Belt-Minder(R) has been disabled when the admin key is in the ignition lock cylinder,
Belt-Minder(R) still functions for the MyKey(TM) driver. Belt-Minder(R) cannot be disabled by the
MyKey(TM) driver.
- Audible (chime) and visual (message center message) low fuel warnings are issued when the
Distance To Empty (DTE) value is reached (typically 75 miles).
- The parking aid system (if equipped) cannot be turned off.
NOTE: The optional restricted features below can be configured to the customer preferences.
Refer to Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features.
Optional Restricted Features
- If configured, the audio system limits the volume to 45% of the maximum volume. The message
MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is displayed if an attempt is made to exceed the volume limit of 45%.
- If configured, vehicle maximum speed can be limited to 130 km/h (80 mph). Audible (chime) and
visual (message center message) warnings are issued when the vehicle speed of 130 km/h (80
mph) is attained. The PCM automatically limits the vehicle speed to not exceed 130 km/h (80 mph).
- If configured, audible (chime) and visual (message center message) warnings are issued when
the preselected vehicle speed of 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph) is attained.
- If configured, the AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature can be configured to on or off. If configured
to always on, the traction control cannot be disabled by the MyKey(TM) driver when a MyKey(TM)
is being used to operate the vehicle.
NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do
not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure
to clear the key of any restricted MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message
Center in the Description and Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators for MyKey(TM) system checks and system warnings displays.
1. NOTE: The key that is being programmed with the MyKey(TM) feature must first already be
programmed into the Passive Anti-Theft System
(PATS).
Insert a programmed PATS ignition key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key from the OFF
to the ON position. This key must be the one that is being programmed to the MyKey(TM)
restricted status.
2. Using the message center buttons:
1. Press the SETUP button until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY appears in the message
center display.
2. Press and release the RESET button. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY is displayed.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7856
3. Press and hold the RESET button (for approximately 2 seconds) until MARK THIS KEY AS
RESTRICTED is displayed.
4. Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed, then release the RESET button.
3. The MyKey(TM) feature (standard restricted features) is successfully programmed into this
particular key. Make sure it is labeled for easy
identification. To customize the MyKey(TM) with the audio volume limited, maximum speed limit,
speed alert chimes, and AdvanceTrac(R) on/off restrictions, refer to Configuring MyKey(TM)
Optional Restricted Features. If the vehicle is equipped with remote start, also refer to Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start
Systems.
Configuring MyKey(TM) Optional Restricted Features
NOTE: The following features can be restricted on a MyKey(TM):
- audio volume level set to a pre-determined level (45% of the maximum volume)
- maximum speed limit of 130 km/h (80 mph) on or off
- speed alert chimes set for 75, or 90 or 105 km/h (45, or 55 or 65 mph)
- AdvanceTrac(R) always on feature turned on or off
1. NOTE: If programming or configuring a MyKey(TM), but then decide to clear the key instead, do
not turn the key to the OFF position. Follow
the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure to clear the key of any restricted
MyKey(TM) status. If necessary, refer to Information and Message Center in the Description and
Operation portion of Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators for MyKey(TM) system
checks and system warnings displays.
To configure the MyKey(TM) optional restricted features listed directly above, carry out the
following:
1. Using an admin key that has not been programmed as a MyKey(TM), turn the key to the ON
position.
2. Press and hold the SETUP button until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed.
3. Press and release the RESET button to display the MyKey(TM) setup menus. The first
programmable feature is: MYKEY MAX MPH [80
MPH] OFF. To change the status of a feature that appears, press SETUP to accept the current setting and the
message center displays the next feature.
- To change the status of the feature that is displayed, press RESET to turn a feature on/off (or
toggle between choices). After the feature selection has been made, press and release SETUP to
accept and the message center displays the next feature.
4. Repeat the process for the next features:
- MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 [OFF] (choose the desired speed for the chime to sound)
- MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT [ON] OFF (choose the audio volume to be limited to 45%)
- MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON [OFF] (choose for the AdvanceTrac(R) to be automatically locked
on or able to be turned on or off by the MyKey(TM) driver)
Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features
1. NOTE: This procedure is used to disable the MyKey(TM) feature on all of the keys that are
programmed to the vehicle. All of the keys then
operate as normal (admin) keys with no restrictions.
Insert an admin key into the ignition lock cylinder and turn the key to the ON position.
2. Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY appears.
3. Press and hold RESET until HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR and ALL KEYS ARE
CLEARED is displayed.
- A MyKey(TM) can also be cleared during the same key cycle that it was programmed by following
Steps 2 and 3 of this procedure.
Check MyKey(TM) System Status
1. The vehicle system check provides the status of the following MyKey(TM) parameters:
- MYKEY DISTANCE - This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey(TM) is used. If mileage
does not accumulate, the intended MyKey(TM) is not being used or the IC is at fault. The only way
to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling the MyKey(TM). If this odometer is lower than the last
time it was checked, the MyKey(TM) system has been cleared. If desired, it may be necessary to
program the MyKey(TM) restricted features into the key.
- # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many MyKeys(TM) are programmed to the vehicle.
It can also be used to determine if a MyKey(TM) has been disabled.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Key > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Anti-Theft
- Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) > Page 7857
- # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED - Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to the
vehicle. It can also be used to determine if an additional spare key has been programmed to the
vehicle.
Using MyKey(TM) with Remote Start System
NOTE: The # MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or the # ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED messages that
may be displayed in the message center includes the remote start system as an additional key in
the total count, depending on whether or not it was programmed as a MyKey(TM). Refer to the
Check MyKey(TM) System Status to determine if this is the case.
NOTE: The MyKey(TM) system is not compatible with non-Ford approved aftermarket remote start
systems. If a Ford approved remote start system is installed on the vehicle and it is started using
the remote start, the vehicle stalls if a door is opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. The driver
must insert their key into the ignition lock cylinder, cycle the ignition to the ON position and drive
the vehicle with the MyKey(TM) restrictions that are programmed into their MyKey(TM). If the
remote start system is a non-Ford approved system, the vehicle may not stall when a door is
opened or if the vehicle is shifted into gear. If the remote start system has not been programmed as
a MyKey(TM) and the driver is a MyKey(TM) driver, the driver could possibly drive the vehicle using
the remote start system as an admin key with no MyKey(TM) restrictions. To resolve this
incompatibility, it is necessary to either recycle the MyKey(TM) before the vehicle is driven or
program the non-Ford approved remote start system as a MyKey(TM).
NOTE: It is possible to program all of the keys as MyKeys(TM), with the remote start system being
the lone remaining admin key. In this particular case, it may be necessary to use the remote start
system to clear all MyKeys(TM) and turn them into admin keys. In order to do this, carry out the
following:
- Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
- Remote start the vehicle using the remote start fob.
- Follow Steps 1-3 of the Disable MyKey(TM) Restricted Features procedure.
1. When using a Ford approved remote start system, the standard restricted features recognize the
remote start system as an additional admin key. If
the remote start system is not Ford approved, it may not operate correctly. If a Ford approved
remote start system is installed on the vehicle, the remote start system can be programmed as a
MyKey(TM), in addition to the key that is also programmed as a MyKey(TM). To program the
remote start system as a MyKey(TM), follow the steps below:
1. Enter the vehicle and close all doors.
2. Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob.
3. Follow Steps 1-3 of the Program a MyKey(TM) procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7862
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7863
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Keypad Code Programming
Programming a Personal Entry Code
NOTE: The system allows 3 personal codes to be programmed.
NOTE: Multiple personal codes can be programmed in one step. When programming multiple
codes in one step, each code must be programmed by entering each button within 5 seconds of
each other. If 5 seconds elapse between any button press, programming mode is exited.
NOTE: If only a single personal code is desired or unable to program multiple codes in one step,
each personal code can be programmed individually by repeating Steps 1-5 for each code desired.
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad to activate the programming mode.
3. Enter the new personal 5-digit keyless entry keypad code. Each number must be entered within
5 seconds of each other.
4. After entering the new personal code, press a 6th button to program each new code.
- Pressing 1/2 stores the first personal code.
- Pressing 3/4 stores the second personal code.
- Pressing 5/6, 7/8 or 9/0 stores the third personal code.
5. The door locks lock and unlock to confirm the new code is programmed.
Erasing a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory set 5-digit keyless entry keypad code.
2. Within 5 seconds, press the 1/2 button on the keypad and release.
3. Within 5 seconds, press and hold the 1/2 button for 2 seconds.
4. All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5-digit code works.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information >
Locations > Page 7864
Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair
Keyless Entry Keypad
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH front door trim panel.
2. Position the water shield aside.
3. Remove the keypad retaining clip.
4. Remove the keypad from the door.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
Programming
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming
NOTE: This procedure is for programming conventional keyfobs only. The Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter of the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) is programmed automatically during
the Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) programming. For additional information, refer to Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Key Programming
Using Diagnostic Equipment in Antitheft and Alarm Systems or Antitheft and Alarm Systems to
program the IKT. See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Key
Programming Using Two Programmed Keys See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft
and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Anti-Theft - Passive
Anti-Theft System (PATS)/Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (IKT) Key Programming Using
Diagnostic Equipment
NOTE: All RKE transmitters must be programmed at the same time.
NOTE: Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and
the transmitters will not be programmed.
1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10
seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN.
If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors.
3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the
programming sequence ends (the doors lock and
unlock to confirm that programming is complete).
Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock
and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each
RKE transmitter.
4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs:
- The key transitions to the OFF position
- 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was
programmed
- The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed
5. Check the operation of the RKE transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed
RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and
press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Handles, Locks, Latches and
Entry Systems See: Power Locks/Testing and Inspection. (Make sure that no more than the
maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7869
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock and Auto-Unlock Programming
Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle
the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp
once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the
autolock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button.
5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock
is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp
followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled.
Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The autolock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for
the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature.
1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the
ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7870
doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed.
Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position.
3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds.
Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF.
6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times.
7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the
enable/disable mode.
8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle
the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will
chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long
chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to
indicate the procedure is complete.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position.
2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass.
3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad.
4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While
holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button
twice.
5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn
chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the
auto-unlock feature has been enabled.
Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped)
NOTE: The auto-unlock feature is not available on vehicles equipped with a manual transmission.
1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP
control for the current display mode.
2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information
> Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter Programming > Page 7871
Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming
Stepped Unlock Programming
1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals flash twice to indicate the mode change.
2. Repeat Step 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear
Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Locations > Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear > Page 7877
Power Door Lock Actuator: Locations Door Lock Actuator, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7880
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit, Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7881
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information
> Diagrams > Door Lock Unit, Driver Side Front > Page 7882
Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 7887
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7890
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7891
Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 7892
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7893
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7894
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 7895
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Trunk / Liftgate Lock > System Information > Diagrams
Trunk / Liftgate Lock: Diagrams
Liftgate Handle, Lock and Latch - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair
Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Motor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. For additional information, refer to Exterior Mirror Glass See:
Service and Repair/Exterior Mirror Glass.
2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw.
3. With a flat-blade tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs.
4. Remove the exterior mirror motor.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7906
Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7907
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7908
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7909
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7910
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page
7911
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7916
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Control Module >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7917
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay
Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7922
Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7925
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7926
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 7927
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7930
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7931
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component
Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 7932
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 7936
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7940
Trunk / Liftgate Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 7941
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7948
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Motor
Roof Opening Panel Motor
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the roof opening panel motor electrical connector.
3. Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws and the roof opening panel motor.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7952
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7953
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7954
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7955
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7960
Sunroof / Moonroof Track: Service and Repair Trough Assembly
Trough Assembly
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Glass See: Sunroof / Moonroof Panel/Service and
Repair/Roof Opening Panel Glass.
2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws and the drain channel.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Diagrams
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Diagrams
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7968
Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Frame
Roof Opening Panel Frame
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses.
3. Release the wire harness locators.
4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening panel frame.
- To install tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel glass is centered and aligned correctly. For additional
information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 7972
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7977
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass
Roof Opening Panel Glass
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Position the roof opening panel to the CLOSED position.
2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass screws and the roof opening panel glass.
- To install tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof /
Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel - Exploded View > Page 7978
Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield
Roof Opening Panel Shield
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The roof opening panel motor must be initialized when repairs are carried out on any part of
the roof opening panel system, including: whenever the roof opening panel motor has been
removed from the roof panel system, the roof opening panel glass has been removed from the roof
opening panel system, the roof opening panel assembly has been removed from the vehicle, a new
roof opening panel motor has been installed, a new roof opening panel glass has been installed or
a new roof opening panel assembly has been installed. For additional information, refer to Roof
Opening Panel Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
1. Remove the roof opening panel drain trough. For additional information, refer to Trough
Assembly See: Sunroof / Moonroof Track/Service and
Repair/Trough Assembly.
2. Slide the roof opening panel shield forward halfway.
3. Disengage the roof opening panel shield guide feet.
- Lift the front portion of the roof opening panel shield upward at center until able to disengage one
of the front guide feet.
4. With one of the guide feet released, carefully rotate the roof opening panel shield in a clockwise
manner to disengage the remaining guide feet.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the glass screws. For
additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel Alignment See: Adjustments.
- Initialize the roof opening panel motor. For additional information, refer to Roof Opening Panel
Motor Initialization See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Motor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views
Power Seat Motor: Exploded Views
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views > Page 7985
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views > Page 7986
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views > Page 7987
Power Seat Motor: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded
Views > Page 7988
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views
Power Seat Switch: Exploded Views
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views > Page 7994
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views > Page 7995
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views > Page 7996
Power Seat Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams >
Exploded Views > Page 7997
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7998
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page
7999
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Seat Back: Removal and Replacement
Seat Backrest - Front
Seat Backrest - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat Front.
2. Remove the recliner handle.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the outboard side shield forward. Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip.
- For driver seat, remove the 3 screws. If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the inboard side shield.
- For driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws.
- For passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook.
5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer
from the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track.
- Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion.
7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover.
9. NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket.
Damage to the wire harness may occur.
Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector.
- Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track
bolts (manual seat) and backrest.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
11. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Seat Backrest - Rear
Seat Backrest - Rear
Removal
NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest
(60 percent).
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Rear.
Both rear seat backrests
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8004
1. Position both rear seat cushions forward.
2. Route the safety belt buckles from the elastic straps.
3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
LH rear seat backrest
4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt.
5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
Both rear seat backrests
6. Release and position both rear backrests downward.
7. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside.
8. Remove the bolt cover.
9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard
backrest-to-floor bolt.
10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest.
LH rear seat backrest
11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
12. Lift and remove the LH rear seat backrest.
Installation
NOTE: The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest
(40 percent).
NOTE: The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure.
NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
LH rear seat backrest
1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle.
2. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time.
RH rear seat backrest
3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8005
4. Install the inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Install the bolt cover.
6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Both rear seat backrests
7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers.
9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests.
10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt.
- Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft).
RH rear seat backrest
12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt.
- Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps.
14. Position both rear seat cushions in place.
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8006
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8007
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8008
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8009
Seat Back: Overhaul
Seat Backrest - Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger similar.
Disassembly
WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim
cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the
deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment.
1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See:
Removal and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8010
2. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Seat
Backrest Cover - Front.
3. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers.
4. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module.
5. Remove the backrest foam pad.
6. If equipped, remove the lumbar assembly.
- Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjuster.
- Release the lumbar assembly from the backrest frame wires and remove.
Assembly
WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly:
- Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material.
- Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat
backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad.
- Install new parts if damaged.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which
increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign
material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new
components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may
result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTICE: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air
bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur.
1. If equipped, install the lumbar assembly.
- Install the lumbar assembly to the backrest frame wires.
- Install the lumbar adjuster and 2 screws.
2. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket.
- Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame.
4. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame.
5. Install the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Front
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Seat Backrest
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8011
Cover - Front.
6. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Removal
and Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front.
Seat Backrest - Rear
Seat Backrest - Rear
NOTE: LH (60 percent) shown, RH (40 percent) similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8012
Disassembly and Assembly
Both rear seat backrests
1. Remove the seat backrest cover. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
See: Seat Cover/Service and Repair/Seat
Backrest Cover - Rear.
2. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame.
Sixty percent seat backrest
3. Release the seat latch cable from the center safety belt retractor.
- For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode after installation. For additional information, refer to Restraint Systems.
4. Remove the 2 nuts and safety belt guide.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove the nut and center safety belt retractor.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Both rear seat backrests
6. Remove the 2 bolts and backrest latch.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8013
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
7. Remove the bolt and inboard pivot bracket.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
8. Remove the bolt and outboard pivot bracket.
- To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft).
9. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8018
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8019
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8020
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Front
Seat Backrest Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if
the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair
the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag
deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags
cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the
risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag
module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
2. Press the buttons and remove the head restraint.
3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides.
4. If equipped, remove the lumbar adjust knob.
5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the front seat backrest cover.
6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the
elastic loop in the backrest trim cover.
7. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or
the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam.
Partially invert the backrest cover up to the side air bag.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8021
- Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip.
9. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute
must not be repaired. If there is any
damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be
installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest
foam pad. Note positioning of the deployment chute for correct installation.
10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover.
11. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and
closed, the seat side air bag module may not
deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module
deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
12. Repower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering in the General
Procedures portion of Restraint Systems. See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8022
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover - Front
Seat Cushion Cover - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion; it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to
Restraint Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
All seats
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and
Repair/Seat - Front.
2. Remove the front seat cushion. For additional information, refer to Seat Cushion - Front See:
Seat Cushion/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Seat Cushion - Front.
3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover.
- Separate the hook-and-loop strips.
- If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation.
4. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
5. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
6. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8023
the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset.
7. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
8. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Restraint Systems.
9. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS
fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning
indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8024
Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
Seat Backrest Cover - Rear
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Rear See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Rear.
1. Remove the rear seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Rear See:
Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Seat Backrest - Rear.
2. Remove the head restraint(s).
3. NOTE: The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable.
Pull up and remove the 2 or 4 head restraint guide sleeves.
- Note the alignment tab position for correct installation.
4. Remove the 2 screws and latch cover.
5. Remove the 2 seat latch release handle screws.
6. Remove the seat latch release handle.
1. Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release handle.
- To aid removal and installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before disconnecting
and connecting the latch rod.
2. Remove the seat latch release handle.
7. Release the backrest cover J-clip.
8. Unzip the backrest cover zipper.
9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and safety belt shield.
10. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip
or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn
from the seat backrest foam pad.
Separate the hook-and-loop strips, invert and remove the seat backrest cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Exploded View, Front > Page 8025
11. NOTE: Before installation, make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts
and buckles are accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement
Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement
Seat Cushion Cover - Rear
Seat Cushion Cover - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
2. Unzip the cushion cover zipper.
3. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Invert and remove the cushion cover.
4. NOTE: Make sure the safety belt webbing is not twisted and the safety belts and buckles are
accessible to the occupants.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Seat Cushion - Front
Seat Cushion - Front
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
All seats
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8030
1. Remove the front seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and
Repair/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
2. NOTE: To identify between a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system and a
service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the Occupant
Classification System Module (OCSM) electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service
kit) has the electrical connector glued to the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or
altered.
NOTE: If removing a production OCS system or an OCS system service kit, refer to the appropriate
procedure in Restraint Systems.
Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical
connectors.
- For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from
the service part OCS electrical connector.
Heated seat
3. Disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector.
- Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest cover.
4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
5. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion
frame.
All seats
6. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame.
- Note wiring harness routing for correct installation.
7. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
8. Remove the seat cushion.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat - Front.
Passenger seat
11. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
12. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8031
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
13. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Restraint Systems.
14. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the Restraints Control Module
(RCM) to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS
fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning
indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8032
Seat Cushion: Overhaul
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side
NOTE: Seat equipped with a production Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system shown. For
OCS system service components, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit procedure
in Restraint Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8033
Disassembly
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, it is necessary to carry out the Occupant Classification Sensor
(OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover
installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system
reset command.
NOTICE: Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable
separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an Occupant
Classification Sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to
Restraint Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure.
NOTE: Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad,
bladder with pressure sensor and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM), are calibrated
to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be
installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are
needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and
OCSM) must be installed as an assembly.
All seats
1. Remove the seat. For additional information, refer to Seat - Front See: Service and Repair/Seat Front.
2. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front.
3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation.
Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8034
5. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
6. If equipped, disconnect the heated seat system components.
- Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
- Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector.
Seat with original equipment Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
7. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the
kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS
system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash.
NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit),
inspect the electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the OCSM
electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the electrical connector glued to
the OCSM. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered.
Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips.
1. Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
- Detach the wiring harness retainers and wiring harness from the cushion frame.
8. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover.
9. Remove the cushion foam pad.
10. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
11. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8035
12. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame.
13. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove
as an assembly with the bladder.
Seat with OCS system service kit
14. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips in the following sequence.
1. Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS
electrical connector.
2. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame.
15. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips
or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release all cushion cover retainers and remove the cushion cover.
16. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the
bracket.
17. NOTICE: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the
rivets.
Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame.
18. Remove the OCS.
- Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors)
through the seat cushion frame opening.
Assembly
All seats
1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8036
Seat with original equipment OCS system
2. NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through
the correct seat cushion support opening
can cause component failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat
cushion frame.
3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame.
4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame.
5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the Restraints Control Module (RCM).
7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame.
8. NOTICE: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects,
before installing the seat cushion trim cover to
the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these
instructions may result in incorrect operation of the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system
and may cause system failure.
Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the cushion frame.
9. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame
bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8037
10. Install the wiring harness.
1. Connect the OCSM electrical connector.
2. Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector.
- Attach the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
Seat with OCS system service kit
11. NOTICE: Inspect the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and
support assembly for any foreign objects,
before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign objects are found, remove them.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may
cause system failure.
NOTICE: Failure to route the seat Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) components through the
correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure.
NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS), be
careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Route the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and
connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion frame.
12. NOTE: When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical
connector is not used.
NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation.
Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion frame.
1. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is
completely engaged.
- When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to
be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab.
2. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket.
- The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a
DTC in the RCM.
3. Install the rivets.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8038
13. Install the cushion cover and attach the retainers to the seat cushion frame.
14. NOTICE: While positioning the seat cushion frame and Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS),
be careful not to damage any of the
components. Failure to do so can result in component failure.
Position the seat cushion assembly to the seat track and install the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame
bolts.
- Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
15. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose.
- Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system
electrical connector.
- Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame.
- Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside.
- Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside.
All seats
16. If equipped, connect the heated seat components.
- Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame.
- Connect the heated seat relay electrical connector.
- Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and attach to the cushion frame.
17. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track.
18. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors.
- Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame.
- Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
19. Install the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front.
20. Install the seat. Do not prove out the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) at this time. For
additional information, refer to Seat - Front See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Front.
21. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached
components (head restraint, seat side shield,
etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out
the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the
occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or
death in a crash.
WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete
assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result
in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death
in a crash.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8039
NOTICE: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out
the Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM) is above 8 volts and
less than 18 volts.
- Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when
initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot
temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C
(42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes.
- Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset
and nothing is placed on the seat during the process.
- Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON
before carrying out the OCS system reset process.
Carry out the OCS system reset.
22. If the first system reset attempt was unsuccessful, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the
following and repair any concerns found.
- OCS system connector and wiring for damage
- Pressure sensor hose for kinks and/or damage
- Seat-related wiring harness and body wiring harness terminals and connectors for damage
23. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset.
Carry out a second OCS system reset. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, install a new OCS
system service kit. For additional information, refer to Occupant Classification System Service Kit in
Restraint Systems.
24. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually
monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning
indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS
fault is detected, the air bag warning indicator will: - fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the
testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime
will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any
SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and OCSM using a scan tool.
Seat Cushion - Rear
Seat Cushion - Rear
NOTE: RH (40 percent) shown, LH (60 percent) similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8040
Disassembly and Assembly
1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
- Position the seat cushion forward.
- Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward.
2. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Unzip the cushion cover zipper.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8041
3. Invert and remove the cushion cover.
4. Remove the 2 bolts and cushion pivot upper link.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Seat Cushion - Driver
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Removal and Replacement > Page 8042
Disassembly
1. Remove the seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See: Seat
Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front.
2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector(s).
- Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track.
4. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector.
6. NOTICE: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or
the hook-and-loop strips may be torn
from the seat cushion foam pad.
Release the all the retainers and remove the cushion cover.
7. Remove the cushion foam pad.
- If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for correct installation.
8. If equipped, release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the
cushion frame.
- Disconnect the relay electrical connector.
9. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8047
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8048
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8049
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8050
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8051
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8052
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8053
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8054
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8055
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8056
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8057
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8058
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8059
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8060
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8061
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8062
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8063
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8064
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8065
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8066
Seat Heater: Exploded Views
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8067
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8068
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8069
Seat Heater: Connector Views
Backrest and Cushion Heater Mats, Driver Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8070
Backrest and Cushion Heater Mats, Passenger Side Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8071
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8072
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8073
Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
119-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8074
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams
Seat Heater Control Module: Diagrams
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 8078
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Control Module > Component Information > Diagrams >
Page 8079
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seats Relay
Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated
Seats Relay > Page 8084
Seat Heater Relay: Locations Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Driver
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8087
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8088
Seat Heater Relay: Diagrams Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated
Seat Relay, Driver > Page 8089
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seats Relay
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seats Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8092
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8093
Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and
Inspection > Heated Seats Relay > Page 8094
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8099
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8100
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
> Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8101
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track
Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat Track
Seat Track
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the front seat backrest. For additional information, refer to Seat Backrest - Front See:
Seat Back/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Seat Backrest - Front.
2. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner.
- Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors
from the seat track.
- Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer.
- Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame.
3. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track.
- If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector.
- If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector.
- Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. Note wiring harness routing for correct installation.
4. Remove the 4 seat track-to-cushion frame bolts.
- To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 8106
Seat Track: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 8107
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat
Track > Page 8108
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side > Page 8114
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Driver Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8117
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8118
Power Door Lock Switch: Diagrams Door Lock Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Switch, Driver Side > Page 8119
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8120
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8121
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8122
Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair
Door Lock Control Switch
NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front interior door handle. For additional information, refer to Interior Door Handle Front See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Handle/Front Door Interior Handle/Service and Repair/Interior Door Handle Front.
2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8126
Power Mirror Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8127
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8128
Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8129
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8130
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8131
Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair
Exterior Mirror Control Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the LH sail panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch.
- Press the 2 retaining tabs.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views
Power Seat Switch: Exploded Views
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8137
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8138
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8139
Power Seat Switch: Connector Views
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 8140
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8141
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component
Information > Diagrams > Page 8142
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8146
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch
Liftgate Release Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Disconnect the release switch electrical connector.
3. Press the tab and remove the liftgate release switch.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock
Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 8149
Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the liftgate trim panel.
2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
- Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector.
- Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat - Exploded View, Front
Seat Backrest - Front
NOTE: Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar.
Seat Cushion - Driver
NOTE: Power seat track shown, manual seat track similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8154
Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8155
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Seat - Exploded View, Front > Page 8156
Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair Seat Control Switch
Seat Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: For component identification and locations, refer to Seat - Exploded View, Front See:
Seats/Service and Repair/Seat - Exploded View, Front.
1. Remove the recliner handle cover.
2. Remove the seat control switch knob.
3. Remove the outboard side shield.
- Remove the 3 screws and detach the side shield.
- Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the knob and seat control switch.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8160
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8161
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8162
Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8163
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8167
Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8168
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8172
Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8173
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Insulation
Insulation
Insulation is used as a sound-deadener to reduce exterior road and powertrain noises from the
interior of the vehicle. Mastic insulators are also used as insulation. For information on the location
of the mastic insulators, refer to Sound Deadeners and Insulators. Insulation is installed:
- under the roof.
- above and below the instrument panel.
- at the cowl side panels.
- over the front and rear floor pans.
- inside the A-, B-, D-pillar sections.
- behind the rear quarter trim panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation > Page 8178
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation Sound Deadeners and Insulators
Sound Deadeners and Insulators
WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear
protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and
chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal
injury.
NOTICE: Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out
welding procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic
material to burn.
NOTICE: Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied.
Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur.
NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and
insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component.
NOTE: The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad)
locations. Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the
illustration.
Floor Pan Sound Deadeners
NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and
insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in
this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Insulation > Page 8179
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and
Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
Cowl Panel Grille
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts.
- To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft).
2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers.
4. Remove the cowl end caps.
5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper and Washer Systems.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8194
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8195
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec
> 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8200
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8206
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8207
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 8212
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 8215
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Window Glass/Service and Repair/Window Glass - Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8224
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb >
11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8225
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8231
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: >
11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 8232
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Rear Door/Rear Door Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 8235
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page
8240
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Page
8241
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Description and
Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8244
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and
Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise
Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch
NOTE: Non-hybrid shown, hybrid similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cruise control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Cruise
Control Switch > Page 8252
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Deactivator Switch
Cruise Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the cruise control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the cruise control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the cruise control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the cruise control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8257
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8258
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8261
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Clutch Switch: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a
low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low
through the signal return (SIG RTN) circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction
in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations.
Typical Cluch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Switch
Cruise Control Switch
NOTE: Non-hybrid shown, hybrid similar.
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cruise control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Cruise Control Switch > Page 8269
Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Cruise Control Deactivator Switch
Cruise Control Deactivator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Rotate the cruise control deactivator switch counterclockwise one-quarter turn.
3. Remove the cruise control deactivator switch.
4. NOTE: When installing the cruise control deactivator switch, it is automatically self-adjusting to
the correct position. Do not pull up or push down
on the pedal during installation. Initial installation of the cruise control deactivator switch allows for
one adjustment. If additional adjustments are necessary, install a new switch.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair
Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) Indicator
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE: The Passenger Air Bag Deactivation (PAD) indicator is part of the upper instrument panel
center finish panel.
1. NOTE: The ignition must be in the OFF position before disconnecting the PAD indicator
electrical connector. Otherwise, a DTC will be set in the
Restraints Control Module (RCM) memory and must be cleared before releasing the vehicle to the
customer.
Turn the ignition OFF and wait at least one minute.
2. Lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the PAD indicator electrical connector.
- Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector.
3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the instrument panel upper center finish panel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions
Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8278
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8279
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8280
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8281
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8282
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8283
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8284
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8285
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8286
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8287
Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8288
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8289
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8290
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8291
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8292
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8293
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8294
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8295
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8296
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8297
Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
44-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information
> Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 8298
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Description and Operation
Compass: Description and Operation
Electronic Compass
The compass display is on with the key in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned
to the ON or START position, there is a momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the
compass display illuminates. If the battery saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or
START, the momentary delay before the compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds.
The compass display turns off as soon as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC position.
With Navigation
The compass display is incorporated into the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM). Refer to
Accessories and Optional Equipment.
The compass signal originates from the Global Positioning System (GPS) antenna. No calibration
or zone adjustment is available, as the compass heading is based on the GPS signal. Refer to
Accessories and Optional Equipment.
The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the upper RH side of the
FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW).
Without Navigation
The compass display is incorporated into the FDIM. The compass signal originates from the
compass module, which is integrated into the interior rear view mirror. Refer to Mirrors.
The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the lower LH side of the
FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The
compass continuously re-calibrates due to changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate
during most driving conditions.
The Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) buttons that allow the driver to operate (change) the
calibration and zone setting procedures are located below the FDIM.
Compass Accuracy
Without Navigation
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily
change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects,
calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration.
Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the
northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes
noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error. Refer
to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment.
With Navigation
Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures have no effect on the
compass heading.
Compass calibration and compass zone setting procedures are not required if the vehicle is
equipped with navigation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Electronic Compass
Inspection and Verification
Electronic Compass
Inspection and Verification
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from
the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8304
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the FDIM and the
Instrument Cluster (IC).
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to
the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in
Body Control Systems. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions See: Body and Frame/Body
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8305
Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions
Electronic Compass
DTC Charts Instrument Cluster (IC) DTC Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8306
Compass: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Electronic Compass
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8307
Compass: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
Electronic Compass
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative
NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to
Accessories and Optional Equipment.
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 124 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Power Mirrors
for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 130 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Audio
System/Navigation for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery
voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A). The compass module (integral to the
interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which
sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN). The FDIM displays the compass direction according to the information that has been
provided by the compass module to the IC.
- DTC B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the IC attempts a self-test of the compass
module and its associated circuits and a failure results.
- DTC U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the IC does not receive any
communications from the compass module.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse(s)
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Compass module
- FDIM (compass display)
- IC
PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- A1 CHECK THE COMPASS DISPLAY
- Ignition ON.
- Check the compass display.
- Does the compass display illuminate?
Yes
If the compass display illuminates with only 2 bars, GO to A3.
If the compass display turns on, but it does not display all directions, or indicates CAL, GO to
Pinpoint Test B. See: Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
No
GO to A2.
------------------------------------------------- A2 CHECK THE VEHICLE CONFIGURATION
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8308
- Verify the vehicle is equipped with the compass feature.
- Is the vehicle equipped with the compass feature?
Yes
REFER to Accessories and Optional Equipment to diagnose the FDIM display.
No
RETURN the vehicle to the customer and ADVISE them the vehicle is not equipped with a
compass display feature.
------------------------------------------------- A3 CHECK THE INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR POWER
CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012 (Without Camera Mirror, Without SYNC), C9030
(Without Camera Mirror, With SYNC) or C9039 (With Camera Mirror, With SYNC).
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to A4.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 41 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR the circuit. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring
Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit short. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
------------------------------------------------- A4 CHECK THE INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR GROUND
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8309
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to A5.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- A5 CHECK THE COMPASS (+) COMMUNICATION
CIRCUIT FOR AN OPEN OR A SHORT TO GROUND
- Disconnect: IC C220.
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and the IC, harness
side; and between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8310
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and ground?
Yes
GO to A6.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
------------------------------------------------- A6 CHECK THE COMPASS (-) COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN OR SHORT TO GROUND
- Measure the resistance between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and the IC, harness
side; and between the interior rear view mirror, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms between the interior rear view mirror and the IC, and greater
than 10,000 ohms between the interior
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8311
rear view mirror and ground?
Yes
GO to A7.
No
REPAIR the circuit. CONNECT the negative battery cable. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the
self-test.
------------------------------------------------- A7 CHECK FOR DTC U2013
- Connect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Connect: IC C220.
- Connect: Interior Rear View Mirror C9012 (Without Camera Mirror, Without SYNC), C9030
(Without Camera Mirror, With SYNC) or C9039 (With Camera Mirror, With SYNC).
- Ignition ON.
- Clear the DTCs.
- Ignition OFF.
- Ignition ON.
- Wait 10 seconds.
- Retrieve the IC DTCs.
- Is DTC U2013 present?
Yes
INSTALL a new compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). REFER to Interior Rear
View Mirror in Mirrors. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See:
Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass
Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to A8.
------------------------------------------------- A8 CHECK FOR CORRECT IC OPERATION
- Disconnect the IC connector.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect the IC connector and make sure it seats correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new IC. REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. RESET the
parameters in both the IC and the PCM. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm Systems. PROGRAM the
Passive Anti-Theft System (PATS) keys into the new IC. REFER to Antitheft and Alarm Systems.
CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector. CLEAR the DTCs. CYCLE the ignition. REPEAT the self-test. TEST the
system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
Electronic Compass
Pinpoint Tests
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8312
Pinpoint Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate
NOTE: This pinpoint test is for vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with navigation, refer to
Accessories and Optional Equipment.
Normal Operation
The compass display (located in the Front Display Interface Module (FDIM)) receives battery
voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A). The compass module (integral to the
interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the Instrument Cluster (IC), which
sends the compass information to the FDIM over the Medium Speed Controller Area Network
(MS-CAN). The FDIM displays the compass direction according to the information that has been
provided by the compass module to the IC.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Compass zone setting
- Compass calibration
- Compass module
PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- B1 CHECK THE COMPASS ACCURACY
- Set the zone. Refer to Compass Zone Adjustment See: Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment.
- Calibrate the compass. Refer to Compass Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration.
- Position the vehicle and observe the compass display as follows:
- Does the compass display as indicated?
Yes
The compass is OK. The concern may have been caused by an incorrect zone setting or the
compass was out of calibration.
No
INSTALL a new compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). REFER to Interior Rear
View Mirror in Mirrors. ADJUST the zone setting. REFER to Compass Zone Adjustment See:
Adjustments/Compass Zone Adjustment. CALIBRATE the compass. REFER to Compass
Calibration See: Adjustments/Compass Calibration. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment
Compass Zone Adjustment
NOTE: This procedure is only applicable to vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with
navigation, there is no compass zone adjustment.
1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the
geographic location of the vehicle.
2. With the ignition in the ON position, press and hold the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) 7
and 9 buttons (for approximately 5 seconds)
until the compass display shows the current zone setting (ZONE XX). Release the 7 and 9 buttons.
3. NOTE: After the FCIM 7 and 9 buttons have been released for approximately 5 seconds, the
compass display exits the zone setting mode.
Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the 7
and 9 buttons to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the
vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map.
4. Release the FCIM 7 and 9 buttons for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information >
Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 8315
Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration
Compass Calibration
NOTE: This procedure is only applicable to vehicles without navigation. For vehicles with
navigation, there is no compass calibration.
1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects
or structures such as bridges, steel buildings,
etc. Switch off all non-essential electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map
lamps, and wipers) and make sure all doors are closed.
Start the vehicle.
2. NOTE: The vehicle remains in the CAL mode until the compass has been successfully
calibrated.
NOTE: While holding the Front Controls Interface Module (FCIM) 7 and 9 buttons down, the
compass display first enters the ZONE setting mode (after 5 seconds) and then after another 5
seconds (approximately 10 seconds total), the compass display enters the CAL mode.
Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the FCIM 7 and 9 buttons until the CAL indicator
appears in the display, then release the buttons.
3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times,
repeat the procedure.
Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until the CAL indicator
disappears from the display and the compass heading is shown.
4. If the CAL message does not turn off after driving in a circle at least 5 times (and the procedure
has been repeated at least once), install a new
compass module (integral to the interior rear view mirror). For additional information, refer to
Interior Rear View Mirror in Mirrors.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8321
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8322
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8323
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8324
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8325
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8326
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8331
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8332
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8333
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8334
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8335
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8336
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster
/ Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Door Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8343
Door Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8344
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8348
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8349
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Reset Procedure
Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Reset Procedure > Page 8352
Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Removal and Replacement
Message Center Switch
Removal and Installation
All vehicles
1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel.
Hybrid vehicles
2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside.
All vehicles
3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Check Fuel Cap Indicator
The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM
sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the
EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly.
This is detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank after a fueling event.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the
FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP
module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve
located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A
flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the
fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 8360
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8363
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8364
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8365
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page 8366
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8372
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8373
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8374
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8375
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8376
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8377
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering
Depowering Procedure
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices.
Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
3. At the Smart Junction Box (SJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover
and RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB. For
additional information, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams
By Number
4. Turn the ignition ON and monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air
bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously
(no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not
remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front
or side air bag supplemental restraint
system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking
components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby
components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood
latches.
Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Restraint Systems for location of the RCM and
impact sensor(s).
To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least
1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped).
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an
accidental deployment.
Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information, refer
to Battery.
Repowering Procedure
1. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON.
2. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB and install the cover.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8382
3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of
any air bag module when the battery is
connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of
an accidental deployment.
Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
4. Prove out the SRS as follows:
Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition back ON and monitor the
air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light
continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the
air bag indicator will:
- fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash.
The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition has been turned from
the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the
SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of
5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must
be diagnosed and repaired.
Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM and Occupant Classification System Module (OCSM)
using a scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8383
Seat Belt Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Deactivation and Reactivation
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation
Deactivation
WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Never disassemble or tamper with safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or
adaptive load limiting retractors or probe the electrical connectors. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting
retractors which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, Safety Canopy(R) or side air curtain
modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these
modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the
restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure
to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the Safety Canopy(R) and
cause serious personal injury or death.
NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the correct Restraints Control Module
(RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition is ON.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults
before releasing the vehicle to the customer.
1. Depower the SRS. For additional information, refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Depowering and Repowering See: Air Bag(s)
Arming and Disarming/Service and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering.
2. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
3. Open and lower the glove compartment door.
4. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
5. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment
door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear
bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the instrument panel.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8384
6. Remove the passenger air bag module.
1. Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module.
7. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag
module electrical connector locking clip, and then
release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector.
8. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
9. Disconnect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
10. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Separate the weatherstrip.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8385
2. Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel.
11. Disconnect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
12. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module
electrical connector locking clip, and then release
the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector.
13. Install RCM fuse 31 (10A) to the SJB.
14. Connect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
Reactivation
1. Remove RCM fuse 31 (10A) from the SJB.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. For additional information,
refer to Battery.
3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the
seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip.
4. Connect the driver side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8386
5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
6. Connect the passenger side Safety Canopy(R) module electrical connector.
7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel.
1. Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel.
2. Install the D-pillar trim panel.
3. Install the weatherstrip.
8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage
the seat side air bag electrical connector locking
clip.
9. NOTICE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag
module wire harness routing clip is attached to
the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness
damage.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Seat Belt
Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering
and Repowering > Page 8387
NOTICE: The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed
when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the
keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger
air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector
damage.
Install the passenger air bag module.
1. Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors.
2. Attach the wire harness routing clip.
10. NOTICE: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the
deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure.
NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are
fully seated into the instrument panel.
NOTE: Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel. The
passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the instrument panel.
Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door
clips into the instrument panel.
11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts.
- To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in).
12. Close the glove compartment door.
13. Install the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Driver Air Bag Module See:
Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air
Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air Bag Module.
14. Repower the SRS. Refer to Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and
Repowering See: Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming/Service
and Repair/Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel
Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument
Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Reset
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator >
Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Life Reset > Page 8405
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Oil Life Start Value
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Start Value
NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of
approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by
10% increments down to 10%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %.
3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence
over again beginning at 100%.
Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center
displays the newly desired percent.
4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL)
The MIL notifies the driver the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board
diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD
diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets.
- The MIL is located in the instrument cluster (IC) and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol.
- The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds.
- The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists.
- the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL
controlled through the communication link).
- the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS).
- The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster
concern is present.
- To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3
consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern.
- For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
- If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist.
- If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low.
- The MIL flashes after a period of time with the ignition in the RUN position (engine not running) if
DTC P1000 is set.
Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation
Information And Message Center
Setup Displays
The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of
the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or
metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or
to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life.
On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the
appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the
autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver
selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK ON [OFF]. For
additional information on configurable items, refer to the Owner's Literature.
The setup display modes are:
- Reset to English (if set in another language)
- System check
- Oil life reset/oil life starting value
- Units English/metric
- Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped)
- Autolock on/off
- Auto-unlock on/off
- Language
Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value
The oil life is displayed in percentages and is preset to a maximum of 12,070 km (7,500 miles)/180
days (non-hybrid) or 12,070 km (7,500 miles) one year (hybrid). The oil life start value is used to
increase or decrease the starting point of the oil life. The value can be changed back to the
maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to
lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. Each 10% reduction lowers the oil life in both
mileage and the days.
For example, if the oil life start value is lowered to 50%, the maximum mileage is 6,035 km (3,750
miles)/90 days (non-hybrid) or 6,035 km (3,750 miles) 6 months (hybrid). The oil life remains at the
selected setting (50% in this example) until the driver changes the oil life start value. When the oil
life (not oil life start value) is reset back to 100% following an oil change, the oil life resets to 6,035
km (3,750 miles). For configuration of the oil life and oil life start value, refer to Message Center
Configuration See: Driver/Vehicle Information Display/Service and Repair/Reset Procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Description and Operation > Page 8412
Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Message Center Configuration
Oil Life Reset
NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,070 km (7,500 miles) or 180
days.
NOTE: The XXXs in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number
in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%.
1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX%
HOLD RESET = NEW.
2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%.
3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations
Oil Pressure Sender: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8416
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8417
Oil Pressure Sender: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8418
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8419
Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair
Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the 5 bolts, pin-type retainer (not shown) and the RH splash shield.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector.
4. Remove the EOP switch.
- To install, tighten to 15 Nm (133 lb-in).
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Apply thread sealant to the EOP switch threads.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8423
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair
Parking Aid Sensor
NOTE: Bumper shown removed for clarity.
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Using a suitable tool, (such as a flat-blade screwdriver), gently pry the retaining tabs and remove
the parking aid sensor(s).
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Using the scan tool, verify that the parking aid sensor PIDs read no object present and that the
parking aid sensor attenuation PIDs read between 0.8-1.6 ms.
- Carry out the azimuth and elevation system check to verify the sensor(s) are operating correctly.
For additional information, refer to Azimuth System Check See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Azimuth System Check and Elevation System Check
See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Parking Aid/Elevation
System Check.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8427
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8428
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8429
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument
Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel >
Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins
for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 10-16-3 > Aug > 10 > Instruments - Illumination Variation/Flickering
Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Illumination
Variation/Flickering
TSB 10-16-3
08/30/10
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INFORMATION DISPLAY ILLUMINATION VARIATION/FLICKER BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/4/2010
FORD: 2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/4/2010 may exhibit interior
backlighting variation when the headlamp switch is in the park lamp, headlamp or autolamp
positions during daytime and/or dusk/dawn conditions. The instrument cluster backlighting and the
information displays in the instrument cluster and instrument panel may appear to flicker if the
vehicle enters/exits lower ambient light areas like tunnels bridges, viaducts and shaded areas.
ACTION Reprogram the Smart Junction Box (SJB) to the latest calibration using Integrated
Diagnostic System (IDS) release 68.03 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM
2010.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101603A 2010 Escape, Mariner: 0.3 Hr.
Reprogram The Smart Junction Box (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
15604 04
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool.
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The
Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already
disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation,
however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R)
once again reverts to the disabled state.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair
Belt-Minder(R) Deactivating/Activating
Preparation
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) deactivating/activating can also be carried out using a scan tool.
1. Apply the parking brake before deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R).
2. Place the gear selector lever in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or NEUTRAL (N) (manual
transaxle).
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
4. Close all the vehicle doors.
5. Unbuckle the driver and passenger safety belts.
Deactivating/Activating
NOTE: The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) are deactivated/activated independently.
When deactivating/activating one seating position, do not buckle the other position.
NOTE: The Belt-Minder(R) cannot be deactivated using a MyKey(TM) programmed key. The
Belt-Minder(R) can only be deactivated using an administrator key. If the Belt-Minder(R) is already
disabled, driving the vehicle with a MyKey(TM) programmed key overrides the deactivation,
however, when the vehicle is subsequently operated using an administrator key, the Belt-Minder(R)
once again reverts to the disabled state.
1. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. (Do not start the engine.)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning lamp turns off (approximately 1 minute).
3. NOTE: Step 3 must be completed within 50 seconds after the safety belt warning indicator turns
off.
For seating position to be disabled, at a moderate rate, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 3
times, ending with the safety belt in the unbuckled state.
- After this step, the air bar warning indicator illuminates for 3 seconds.
4. Within 7 seconds after the air bar warning indicator turns off, at a moderate rate, buckle then
unbuckle the safety belt.
- This disables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
- This enables the Belt-Minder(R) feature for that seating position, if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning indicator flashes 4 times per second for 3 seconds followed by
another flash sequence of 4 times per second for 3 seconds.
5. After confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is complete.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster
/ Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
Door Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8457
Door Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8458
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module
The FP module contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the
FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP
module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve
located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A
flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the
fuel pump during the initial fill.
Typical Electronic Returnless FP Module
Typical Mechanical Returnless FP Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Fuel Pump (FP) Module > Page 8463
Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir
The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check
valve that maintains the system pressure after the ignition has been turned off to minimize starting
concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low
tank fill levels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View
Fuel Tank Filler Pipe Assembly
Fuel Tank and Fuel Pump (FP) Module
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
8466
Fuel Tank Supports
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
8467
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
8468
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair Fuel Pump Module
Fuel Pump Module
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working
on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be
ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio
equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable
mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components,
relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system
remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction
may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: When handling fuel, always observe fuel handling precautions and be prepared in the
event of fuel spillage. Spilled fuel may be ignited by hot vehicle components or other ignition
sources. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Always disconnect the battery ground cable at the battery when working on an
evaporative emission (EVAP) system or fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are
always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious
personal injury.
1. Release the fuel system pressure. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction.
2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. For additional information, refer to Battery.
3. Remove the Fuel Pump (FP) module access cover.
4. NOTE: Clean the FP module connections, couplings, flange surfaces and the immediate
surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material.
Disconnect the FP module electrical connector.
5. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spillage.
Disconnect the fuel tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For additional information, refer to
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction.
6. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect coupling. For
additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and
Air Induction.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Service and Repair > Fuel Tank and Filler Pipe - Exploded View > Page
8469
7. NOTE: For initial draining on vehicles with a full tank of fuel, it is required to remove the fuel
through the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube
port on the FP module.
Connect the Fuel Storage Tanker hose to the fuel tank filler pipe recirculation tube port on the FP
module and remove approximately one-fourth of the fuel from a completely full tank (approximately
4 gallons), lowering the fuel level below the FP module mounting flange.
8. NOTICE: Carefully install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench to avoid damaging the Fuel Pump
(FP) module when removing the lock
ring.
NOTE: When installing the FP module, install a new O-ring seal.
Install the Fuel Tank Sender Unit Wrench and remove the FP module lock ring.
9. NOTICE: The Fuel Pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float
arm.
NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the FP module. Carefully drain into a suitable container.
Completely remove the FP module from the fuel tank.
10. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank O-ring seal contact surfaces.
Do not polish or adjust the O-ring seal contact
area of the fuel tank flange or the fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the O-ring seal
contact area is bent, scratched or corroded.
NOTE: To install, apply clean engine oil to the O-ring seal.
Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal.
11. NOTE: Make sure to install a new FP module O-ring seal.
To install, reverse the removal procedure. Make sure the alignment tabs on the FP module and the fuel tank meet prior to tightening the FP
module lock ring.
- Tighten the FP lock ring until it meets the stop tabs on the fuel tank.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8473
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8474
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel >
Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8475
Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair
Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt.
- To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector.
3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch.
- To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Training
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training
NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep
mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the
latest tire pressure information to the Smart Junction Box (SJB). For additional information, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Training procedure must be done on a single
vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by
electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters
and portable entertainment equipment.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not
recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and
the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire
procedure must be repeated.
NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain
F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the
sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for
front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal.
2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
3. Press and release the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN
position.
- The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered
successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE.
6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Activation Tool must remain in
place at the valve stem.
Place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the LF tire sidewall at the valve stem. Press and
release the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool. The horn will sound briefly to
indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB.
7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool on the RF
tire sidewall at the valve stem and press and
release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 8481
8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out
and the entire procedure must be repeated.
Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires.
The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is
complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles
not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be
verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn
sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not
successful.
9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor identifiers trained to the SJB and
document them on the applicable warranty claim.
10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing
mode and to make sure there are no other concerns
with a newly programmed SJB.
If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and carry out
the SJB On-Demand Self Test.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure
Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training >
Page 8482
Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor
Activation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation
NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a "sleep mode" when a vehicle is stationary to
conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode. It will be
necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Position the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool against the LF tire sidewall at the tire valve
stem.
3. NOTE: The Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing
green light and a beep sound for each
successful response from a tire pressure sensor. This feedback may not always be present, do not
rely on it as a confirmation that the module heard a particular sensor.
NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool, move the vehicle
to rotate the wheels at least one-fourth of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. If
the sensor still does not respond, attempt to activate the same sensor again using the customer
activation tool (if available). If the sensor still fails to train, attempt to train the sensor with the
vehicle doors open.
Press the test button on the Tire Pressure Monitor Activation Tool to activate the sensor. Activate
the sensor at least 2 times.
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires.
5. If the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and
activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom
Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic
Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T >
Component Information > Description and Operation
Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Transmission Control Indicator lamp (TCIL)
The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the
engagement or disengagement of overdrive.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp
Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp
Sensor > Page 8491
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp/Sunload Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp
Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp
Sensor > Page 8494
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp/Sunload Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8495
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8500
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations
> Page 8501
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8505
Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8506
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8511
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8512
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8513
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8514
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8515
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8516
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8517
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8518
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8519
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8520
Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8521
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8522
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8523
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8524
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8525
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8526
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8527
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8528
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8529
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8530
Brake Lamp: Connector Views
Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8531
Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8532
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8533
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8534
Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8535
90-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Stoplamps
Inspection and Verification
Stoplamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8538
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs,
refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Principles of Operation
Stoplamps
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The SJB monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is applied, voltage is
routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies voltage to the rear
stoplamps.
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection
Field-Effect Transistor (FET) is a type of transistor that when used with module software can be
used to monitor and control current flow on module outputs. The FET protection strategy is used to
prevent module damage in the event of excessive current flow.
The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, a headlamp
output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short
circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault
event is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at the fault event and a cumulative counter is
started.
When the demand for the output is no longer present, the module resets the FET circuit protection
to allow the circuit to function. The next time the driver requests a circuit to activate that has been
shut down by a previous short (FET protection) and the circuit remains shorted, the FET protection
shuts off the circuit again and the cumulative counter advances.
When the excessive circuit load occurs often enough, the module shuts down the output until a
repair procedure is carried out. Each FET protected circuit has 3 predefined levels of short circuit
tolerance based on the harmful effect of each circuit fault on the FET and the ability of the FET to
withstand it. A module lifetime level of fault events is established based upon the durability of the
FET. If the total tolerance level is determined to be 600 fault events, the 3 predefined levels would
be 200, 400 and 600 fault events.
When each tolerance level is reached, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure
cannot be cleared by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module does not allow this
code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful self-test proves that
the fault has been repaired. After the self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs
present), DTC B106E and the associated continuous DTC (the DTC related to the shorted circuit)
automatically clear and the circuit function returns.
When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC (associated with the short circuit)
sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs can be cleared using the module on-demand self-test,
then the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool (if the on-demand test shows the fault corrected).
The module never resets the fault event counter to zero and continues to advance the fault event
counter as short circuit fault events occur.
If the number of short circuit fault events reach the third level, then DTCs B106F and B1342 set
along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be
replaced.
The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are the LH and RH rear stop/turn
lamp output circuits.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8539
Brake Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Stoplamps
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8540
Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test I: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage from the Smart Junction Box (SJB). When the brake pedal
is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp.
The SJB provides voltage to the rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch
indicating that the brake pedal is applied.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Stoplamp switch
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST I: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- I1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278.
- Measure the voltage between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side
and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to I2.
No
VERIFY the SJB fuse 2 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to I3. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
------------------------------------------------- I2 BYPASS THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD),
harness side and the stoplamp switch C278-4, circuit CCB08 (VT/WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8541
- Are the stoplamps illuminated?
Yes
REMOVE the jumper wire. INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See:
Brake Light Switch/Service and Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- I3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the stoplamp switch C278-1, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness
side and the SJB C2280d-13, circuit SBP02 (YE/RD), harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to I4.
No
REPAIR SBP02 (YE/RD) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- I4 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8542
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test J: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box
(SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp. When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB
provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps.
NOTE: SJB fuse 6 (20A) supplies voltage for both combination rear stop/turn lamps and both front
turn lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- High mounted stoplamp
- Bulb holder
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST J: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Due to varying wattage ratings and resulting current draw, certain trailer accessory kits can
cause the SJB to shut down the short circuit protection, resulting in the stoplamps becoming
inoperative. Verify that the trailer accessory kit is Ford authorized. If the accessory kit is not Ford
authorized, disconnect the trailer accessory kit from the vehicle and inform the operator of the
correct type of accessory kit required for the vehicle and trailer tow lighting to operate correctly.
Run the SJB on-demand self-test (required to clear certain DTCs and reset the SJB). Test the
system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J1 DETERMINE THE INOPERATIVE STOPLAMP
- Ignition OFF.
- Apply the brake pedal and observe the stoplamps.
- Are all the stoplamps inoperative?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8543
Yes
GO to Pinpoint Test H See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection/Pinpoint Tests/Autolamps/Pinpoint
Test H: The Autolamps Are On Continuously
No
For the high mounted stoplamp, GO to J2.
If only one side (the LH or RH rear stoplamp) is inoperative, GO to J6.
If both sides (LH and RH rear stoplamps) are inoperative, VERIFY the SJB fuse 6 (20A) is OK. If
OK, GO to J4. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible causes of the circuit
short. After the repair:
If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the
stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system
for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J2 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED
STOPLAMP
- Disconnect: High Mounted Stoplamp C475.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp
C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/GY), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J3.
No
REPAIR CCB08 (VT/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE HIGH MOUNTED
STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the high mounted stoplamp
C475-1, circuit CCB08 (VT/GY), harness side and the high mounted stoplamp C475-2, circuit
GD149 (BK/GY), harness side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new high mounted stoplamp. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8544
No
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE LH STOPLAMP
- Disconnect: LH Rear Lamp C4035.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to J5.
------------------------------------------------- J5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE SJB
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the SJB C2280b-40, circuit CCB08
(VT/WH), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J6 USE THE RECORDED DTCs FROM THE SJB
SELF-TEST
- Clear the DTCs and repeat the on-demand self-test.
- Is DTC B2045 or DTC B2047 present?
Yes
GO to J7.
No
GO to J10.
------------------------------------------------- J7 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE BULB HOLDER
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8545
- Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp.
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to J8.
No
GO to J9.
------------------------------------------------- J8 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE INOPERATIVE
STOPLAMP USING THE CONNECTOR GROUND
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and the LH rear lamp C4035-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness
side; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the RH rear
lamp C4032-1, circuit GD149 (BK/GY), harness side.
Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
No
REPAIR circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- J9 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Measure the resistance between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side
and the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side; or between the RH rear lamp
C4032-3, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG),
harness side.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8546
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. CLEAR the DTCs. REPEAT the self-test.
------------------------------------------------- J10 CHECK THE BULB HOLDER FOR A SHORT TO
GROUND
- Disconnect: Inoperative Rear Lamp.
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Self-Test.
- Clear the DTCs and repeat the self-test (required to enable the stoplamp output driver if DTC
B106E is present).
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the LH rear lamp C4035-3, circuit
CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and ground; or between the RH rear lamp C4032-3, circuit CLS19
(VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
INSTALL a new bulb holder. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to J11.
------------------------------------------------- J11 CHECK THE SJB STOPLAMP OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR
A SHORT TO GROUND
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Disconnect: LH and RH Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relays.
- Measure the resistance between the SJB C2280d-25, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), harness side and
ground; or between the SJB C2280d-26, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), harness side and ground.
- Is the resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Yes
GO to J12.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) (LH rear stoplamp) or circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) (RH rear stoplamp)
for a short to ground. After the repair:
If no DTCs are present, TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106E is present, CLEAR the DTCs and REPEAT the self-test (required to enable the
stoplamp output driver if DTC B106E is present). TEST the system for normal operation.
If DTC B106F is present, INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system
for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- J12 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8547
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Stoplamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test K: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 90 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Turn
Signal/Stop/Hazard Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the Smart Junction Box
(SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, and the PCM. When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied,
the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is
also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay.
- DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit.
- DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
- DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB
detects a short to voltage from the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Stoplamp switch
- PCM
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST K: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
------------------------------------------------- K1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE
ILLUMINATED
- Ignition OFF.
- Observe the stoplamps with the brake pedal released.
- Are all of the stoplamps illuminated?
Yes
GO to K3.
No
GO to K2.
------------------------------------------------- K2 CHECK THE STOPLAMPS VOLTAGE SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8548
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
If the LH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) for a short to voltage.
TEST the system for normal operation.
If the RH rear lamp continues to illuminate, REPAIR circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) for a short to voltage.
TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to K7.
------------------------------------------------- K3 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH
- Disconnect: Stoplamp Switch C278.
- Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
GO to K4 .
No
INSTALL a new stoplamp switch. REFER to Stoplamp Switch See: Brake Light Switch/Service and
Repair. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- K4 CHECK THE PCM
- Disconnect: PCM C175b.
Do the stoplamps continue to illuminate?
Yes
GO to K5.
No
GO to K6.
------------------------------------------------- K5 CHECK THE STOPLAMP SWITCH OUTPUT CIRCUIT
FOR A SHORT TO VOLTAGE
- Disconnect: SJB C2280b.
- Does the high mounted stoplamp continue to illuminate?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CCB08 (VT/WH) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
GO to K7.
------------------------------------------------- K6 CHECK FOR CORRECT PCM OPERATION
- Disconnect all the PCM connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the PCM connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8549
Yes
INSTALL a new PCM. REFER to Computers and Control Systems. TEST the system for normal
operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
------------------------------------------------- K7 CHECK FOR CORRECT SJB OPERATION
- Disconnect all the SJB connectors.
- Check for: corrosion
- damaged pins
- pushed-out pins
- Connect all the SJB connectors and make sure they seat correctly.
- Operate the system and verify the concern is still present.
- Is the concern still present?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
The system is operating correctly at this time. The concern may have been caused by a loose or
corroded connector.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8553
Brake Light Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8554
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8557
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation
> Page 8558
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch can occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Cargo Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8562
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8563
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8564
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams
Center Mounted Brake Lamp: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Interior Light Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8572
Interior Light Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8573
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Interior Light Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8574
Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle
3. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
5. Remove the floor console storage bin.
6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8579
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8580
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8581
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8582
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8583
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8584
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8585
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8586
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8587
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8588
Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8589
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8590
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8591
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8592
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8593
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8594
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8595
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8596
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8597
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8598
Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
97-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8599
97-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Inspection and Verification
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
3. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
4. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
6. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the PCM, the Smart
Junction Box (SJB) and the Instrument Cluster (IC).
8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems
Information or Body Control Systems.
9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Principles of Operation
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8602
The SJB controls the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) by using various inputs to determine whether
or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include:
- Ignition switch position
- Headlamp switch position
- Headlamps on or off
- Transmission gear selection (automatic transaxle)
- Parking brake applied or released (manual transaxle)
When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam
headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity.
The SJB can be configured to turn the DRL on for this vehicle. Refer to Information Bus for
additional information on this programmable parameter.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8603
Daytime Running Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8604
Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AC: The Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Are Inoperative
Normal Operation
When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp
system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic
transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the Smart Junction Box (SJB)
provides a pulse-width modulated voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the
headlamps at a reduced intensity.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Exterior lighting system input/output
- SJB configuration
- Ignition switch input
- Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle)
- Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle)
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST AC: THE DRL ARE INOPERATIVE
------------------------------------------------- AC1 VERIFY THE DRL OPERATION
- Ignition ON.
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- If equipped with an automatic transaxle, place the gear selector lever in any gear other than
PARK (P).
- If equipped with a manual transaxle, release the parking brake.
- Do the DRL illuminate?
Yes
The system is operating correctly. INFORM the customer of the conditions required for the DRL to
operate correctly.
No
GO to AC2.
------------------------------------------------- AC2 CHECK FOR RECORDED SJB DTCs
- Review the recorded results from the SJB self-test.
- Are any DTCs present?
Yes
REFER to Body Control Systems.
No
GO to AC3.
------------------------------------------------- AC3 CHECK THE OPERATION OF THE HEADLAMPS
- Place the headlamp switch in each of its positions (including autolamps if equipped) and observe
the headlamps.
- Do the headlamps and autolamps (if equipped) operate correctly?
Yes
GO to AC4.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8605
No
REFER to Headlamps See: Headlamp/Testing and Inspection or Autolamps See:
Headlamp/Testing and Inspection.
------------------------------------------------- AC4 CHECK THE IGNITION SWITCH INPUT
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: DataLogger.
- Monitor the SJB ignition switch PIDs (IGN_A_ECU, IGN_O_ECU, IGN_R_ECU) while cycling the
ignition switch through all positions (states).
- Do the PIDs agree with the ignition switch positions?
Yes
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle, GO to AC5.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle, GO to AC6.
No
REFER to Steering Column.
------------------------------------------------- AC5 CHECK THE TRANSAXLE GEAR INPUT
- Ignition ON.
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: PCM DataLogger.
- Monitor the PCM transaxle gear status PID (TR) while placing the gear selector lever through all
its positions.
- Does the PID agree with the gear selection?
Yes
GO to AC7.
No
REFER to Automatic Transmission/Transaxle &/or Transmission Control Systems.
------------------------------------------------- AC6 CHECK THE BRAKE WARNING INDICATOR
OPERATION
- Ignition ON.
- Apply and release the parking brake while observing the brake warning indicator.
- Does the brake warning indicator operate correctly?
Yes
GO to AC7.
No
REFER to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators.
------------------------------------------------- AC7 CHECK THE SJB FOR DRL CONFIGURATION
- Enter the following diagnostic mode on the scan tool: SJB Module Programming.
- Check the SJB configuration and make sure the DRL feature is enabled.
- Is the SJB DRL configuration enabled?
Yes
INSTALL a new SJB. REFER to Body Control Systems. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection
> Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8606
ENABLE the DRL configuration. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument cluster finish panel. For additional information, refer to Instrument Cluster
/ Carrier &/or Interior Moulding / Trim.
2. NOTE: The instrument panel dimmer switch is removed by releasing the tabs and pulling from
behind.
Release the tabs and remove the instrument panel dimmer switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Dome Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair
Dome Lamp: Service and Repair
Interior Lamp
Removal and Installation
1. Open the overhead console storage door to access the screws.
- Remove the 2 screws.
2. Pull the overhead console down and remove the console from the headliner retainer.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations
Door Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8616
Door Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8617
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Fog Lamp Bulb
Mariner
Escape
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb
is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector.
Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
All vehicles
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information >
Service and Repair > Page 8622
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
Escape
2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
- Position the fender splash shield aside.
4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector.
5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp.
Mariner
6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
All vehicles
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8627
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8628
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8629
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8630
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8631
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8632
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8633
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8634
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8635
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8636
Hazard Warning Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8637
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8638
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8639
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8640
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8641
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8642
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8643
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8644
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8645
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8646
Hazard Warning Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
90-1
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8647
90-2
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Headlamp Bulb
Removal and Installation
WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is
scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass
envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury.
NOTICE: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new
bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb
performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and
reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed.
NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position.
1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector.
2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Locations > Page 8655
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8658
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8659
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Illumination Dimmer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8660
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8661
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8662
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information >
Diagrams > Page 8663
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8667
Headlamp Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8668
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8669
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8670
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations
Horn Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations
Interior Lighting Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page
8678
Interior Lighting Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module > Component Information > Locations > Page
8679
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle
3. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
5. Remove the floor console storage bin.
6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8684
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8685
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8686
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8687
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8688
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8689
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8690
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8691
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8692
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8693
License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8694
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8695
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8696
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8697
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8698
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8699
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8700
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8701
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8702
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8703
License Plate Lamp: Connector Views
License Plate Lamp, Left
License Plate Lamp, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8704
License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8705
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8710
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8711
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8712
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8713
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8714
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8715
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8716
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8717
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8718
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8719
Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8720
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8721
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8722
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8723
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8724
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8725
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8726
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8727
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8728
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8729
Marker Lamp: Connector Views
Side Lamp, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8730
Side Lamp, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8731
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8732
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8733
Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8734
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8735
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair
Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Side Lamp (Escape)
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8736
Removal and Installation
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector.
2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and
remove from the headlamp assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside.
7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove
from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions
Parking Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8741
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8742
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8743
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8744
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8745
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8746
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8747
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8748
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8749
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8750
Parking Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8751
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8752
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8753
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8754
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8755
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8756
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8757
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8758
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8759
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8760
Parking Lamp: Connector Views
Park/Turn Lamp, Left Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8761
Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8762
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8763
Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8764
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8765
Park/Turn Lamp, Right Front
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8766
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8767
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8768
Parking Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram
Information and Instructions > Page 8769
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Parking Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Inspection and Verification
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible)
before proceeding to the next step.
4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release.
If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the Data Link Connector (DLC).
5. NOTE: The Vehicle Communication Module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground
from the DLC are provided to the VCM.
If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM:
- Check the VCM connection to the vehicle.
- Check the scan tool connection to the VCM.
- Refer to Information Bus, No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no power to the scan tool.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8772
6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle:
- Verify the ignition key is in the ON position.
- Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle.
- Refer to Information Bus to diagnose no response from the PCM.
7. Carry out the network test.
- If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information
Bus.
- If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs.
8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB.
9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
See: Testing and Inspection. For all other DTCs,
refer to the Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart in Body Control Systems. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code
Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart
10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures
Principles of Operation
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Principles of Operation
NOTE: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) is also known as the Generic Electronic Module (GEM).
The SJB monitors the headlamp switch position by sending voltage signals on multiple circuits to
the headlamp switch. There is one circuit for each headlamp switch position. At any given time, one
of the signal circuits is routed to ground.
If the SJB does not detect any of the inputs to the headlamp switch are active (routed to ground) for
5 seconds, the SJB turns on the exterior lights and keeps them on for 10 minutes after the ignition
switch is turned off (or 10 minutes from the time the SJB does not detect any headlamp switch
input if the ignition switch was already off). Additionally, if the SJB detects multiple circuits short to
ground, the SJB implements a planned strategy depending on the multiple inputs received. Based
on the multiple inputs received, the autolamps, the headlamps and/or parking lamps are turned on.
If either situation occurs, the SJB cannot be ruled immediately as being at fault. This is normal
behavior of the SJB design as it has detected a fault with the inputs from the headlamp switch.
When the SJB receives an input from the headlamp switch indicating a request for the parking
lamps, the SJB energizes the parking lamp relay, which supplies voltage to the exterior lamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8773
Parking Lamp: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8774
Parking Lamp: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative
Parking, Rear and License Plate Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test P: One Or More Parking, Rear or License Plate Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 92 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Parking, Rear
and License Lamps for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical
Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Normal Operation
When the headlamp switch is placed in the PARKING LAMPS ON position, the Smart Junction Box
(SJB) energizes the parking lamp relay (integrated into the SJB). When the parking lamp relay is
energized, voltage is routed to the rear and front parking lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Bulb holder
- SJB
PINPOINT TEST P: ONE OR MORE PARKING, REAR OR LICENSE PLATE LAMPS ARE
INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- P1 DETERMINE IF ALL THE PARKING LAMPS ARE
INOPERATIVE
- Ignition OFF.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Are all the parking lamps inoperative?
Yes
VERIFY the SJB fuse 22 (15A) is OK. If OK, GO to P6. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to
identify the possible causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
No
If all the front parking lamps are inoperative, GO to P2.
If all the rear parking and license plate lamps are inoperative, GO to P3.
For all others, GO to P4.
------------------------------------------------- P2 BYPASS THE SJB (FRONT LAMPS)
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Disconnect: SJB C2280e.
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the SJB C2280e-1, circuit CDC34 (WH/OG), harness side
and the SJB C2280e-6, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8775
- Ignition ON.
- Do the front parking lamps illuminate?
Yes
REMOVE the jumper wire. GO to P6.
No
REMOVE the jumper wire. REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for
normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- P3 BYPASS THE SJB (REAR LAMPS)
- Disconnect: SJB C2280d.
- Connect a fused jumper wire between the positive battery terminal and the SJB C2280d-20,
circuit CLS30 (VT/WH), harness side.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8776
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8781
Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8782
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations
Interior Lighting Module: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8786
Interior Lighting Module: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Interior Lighting Module >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8787
Interior Lighting Module: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Module
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle
3. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
5. Remove the floor console storage bin.
6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Remove the 2 screws and the ambient lighting module.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8792
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8793
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8796
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8797
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8798
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8799
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8800
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 8806
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations Autolamp/Sunload Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 8809
Ambient Light Sensor: Diagrams Autolamp/Sunload Sensor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8810
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Light Sensor
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Backup Lamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8814
Backup Lamp Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8815
Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
Reversing Lamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector.
2. Remove the reversing lamp switch.
- To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft).
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8819
Brake Light Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8820
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch
The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal
to the PCM indicating the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and mounted on
the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as
follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive (B+) voltage when the brake pedal is applied.
- to the anti-lock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is
then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM.
- to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ASS module interprets the BPP switch
input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application
(DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users.
Typical BPP Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch > Page 8823
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation Brake Pressure Switch
ENGINE CONTROL COMPONENTS
Brake Pressure Switch
The brake pressure switch is used for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch
supplies battery positive (B+) voltage to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the
brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM.
On some applications the normally closed brake pressure switch, along with the normally open
BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile
learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs
to the PCM is not changing states as expected, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM
strategy.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch >
Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 8824
Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair
Stoplamp Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTICE: Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch
otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch can occur.
1. Disconnect the stoplamp switch electrical connector.
2. Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately one-eighth turn and remove the stoplamp
switch.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Door Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8828
Door Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8829
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8833
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Multifunction Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8836
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8837
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Diagrams Illumination Dimmer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 8838
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8839
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8840
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Page 8841
Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Headlamp Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8845
Headlamp Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8846
Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8847
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8848
Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair
Headlamp Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel.
2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind.
Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component
Information > Locations
Horn Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Interior Light Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8855
Interior Light Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8856
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Interior Light Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8857
Interior Light Switch: Service and Repair
Ambient Lighting Switch
Removal and Installation
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
1. Depress the parking brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL (N).
Vehicles with an automatic transaxle
3. Remove the selector lever trim ring.
Vehicles with a manual transaxle
4. Disengage the gearshift boot trim ring.
All vehicles
5. Remove the floor console storage bin.
6. Remove the floor console finish panel.
- Disconnect the electrical connectors.
7. Squeeze the retaining tabs and remove the ambient lighting switch.
8. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Make sure to align the trim panel retaining clips to the retaining clip holes in the floor console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8861
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8862
Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8863
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Page 8864
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8869
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8870
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8871
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8872
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8873
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8874
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8875
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8876
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8877
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8878
Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8879
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8880
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8881
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8882
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8883
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8884
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8885
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8886
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8887
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8888
Tail Lamp: Connector Views
Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8889
Park/Stop/Turn Lamp, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8890
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8891
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8892
Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
92-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8893
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
Introduction
Note
All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is
important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent
components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of
wire is treated no differently in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to
aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has
been simplified.
Complete Circuit Operation
Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are
connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation.
Current Flow (1)
Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition
switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the
bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution
from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full
representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution
Diagrams.
Switch Positions (2)
Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF).
Splices (3)
Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution
diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be
seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference
is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed.
Component Referencing (4)
Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it
is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component.
Component Names (5)
Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible.
Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram
where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component
is listed in parentheses next to or under a component.
Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6)
Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located
within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number
under the component name.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8898
Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7)
Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit
Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System
(NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by
the wire color.
The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly
from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The
colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4
"Symbols".
Fuse and Relay Information
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8899
Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and
relays are identified, numbered and named. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the
indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to
illustrate proper orientation.
Power Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8900
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is
shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by
each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown.
Ground Distribution
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8901
Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for
each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting
several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices,
connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection
details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible.
Component and Connector Information
Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity
sides are shown separately as if the connector were disconnected. The color of the connector
housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is
located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are
located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location
Charts.
Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found
on the vehicle.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8902
Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will helps the user find where the
various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written
description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views.
WARNINGS
- Always wear safety glasses for eye protection.
- Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle.
- Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by
the procedure.
- Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in
PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL.
- Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide.
- Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running.
- To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust
manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler.
- Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the
battery set. An explosion could occur.
- Do not smoke when working on a vehicle.
- To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose
clothing.
Symbols
Symbols (Part 1)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8903
Symbols (Part 2)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8904
Symbols (Part 3)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8905
Symbols (Part 4)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8906
Symbols (Part 5)
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8907
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns
The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create
intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical
evaluation as shown in each illustration.
NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to
the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated
terminal.
Terminal not properly seated
1 = Locked terminal
2 = Male half
3 = Female half
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal)
7 = Seal
Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8908
Defective insulation stripping
1 = Proper crimp
2 = Insulation not removed
3 = Wire strands missing
4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation
Partially mated connectors
1 = Seal
2 = Displaced tab
3 = Female half
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8909
4 = Seal
5 = Intermittent contact
6 = Male half
7 = Intermittent contact
Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock.
Deformed (enlarged) female terminals
1 = Enlarged
2 = Normal
Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent
signal.
Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8910
Electrical short inside the harness
1 = Solder coated wire to ground
2 = Harness protective tape
3 = Intermittent short
Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit
4 = Grounding foil
Electrical short within the harness
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8911
Splice tape removed 1
= Intermittent short
Splice covered 2
= Wire strand
3 = Splice tape
4 = Harness tape
Broken wire strands in harness
1 = Wiring harness tape
2 = Wiring strand
3 = Broken strands intermittent signal
4 = Circuit insulation
Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break.
Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8912
3. Install heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together.
NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder.
- Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice.
6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line.
NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires.
7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair.
NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8913
8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat
shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable.
Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter)
1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end,
taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing.
NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire
splice.
4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping
chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the
wire size
stamped on the butt splice.
NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8914
6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to
place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the
wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases.
10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice.
11. Check for acceptable crimp.
a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt
splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices.
12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat
the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect
battery ground cable.
This chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle
harness.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8915
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8916
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8917
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number
sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected.
95-1
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams
can be found at Diagrams By Number. See:
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information
and Instructions > Page 8918
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams
can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Special Tools Used With Diagnostics
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
Trailer Lamps
Principles of Operation
The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn
relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay. They are energized to correspond with the exterior
lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the
trailer lamps.
Inspection and Verification
Trailer Lamps
Inspection and Verification
1. Verify the customer concern.
2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the
appropriate pinpoint test.
3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage.
Visual Inspection Chart
4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8921
Trailer Lamps: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Trailer Lamps
Symptom Chart
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8922
Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Y: All The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow connector receives ground through a dedicated ground circuit. This circuit is the
shared ground for all of the trailer lamps.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Y: ALL THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
NOTE: Failure to disconnect the battery when instructed will result in false resistance readings.
Refer to Battery.
------------------------------------------------- Y1 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW GROUND CIRCUITS FOR
AN OPEN
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Disconnect: Negative Battery Cable.
- Measure the resistance between the trailer tow C439-4, circuit RAT08 (WH), harness side and
ground.
- Is the resistance less than 5 ohms?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
REPAIR circuit RAT08 (WH) or circuit GD149 (BK/GY) for an open. TEST the system for normal
operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test Z: The Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp Is Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8923
Normal Operation
The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow
stop/turn relays.
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow stop/turn relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP IS INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- Z1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE THROUGH THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to Z2.
------------------------------------------------- Z2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RELAY
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Relay.
- Substitute a know good relay.
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-2, circuit CAT06 (YE), harness side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8924
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, while applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between
the trailer tow C439-1, circuit CAT09 (GN), harness side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow stop/turn relay. TEST the system for
normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to Z3.
------------------------------------------------- Z3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
STOP/TURN RELAY COIL
- While applying the brake pedal, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay
pin 2, circuit CLS18 (GY/BN), BJB face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn
relay pin 2, circuit CLS19 (VT/OG), BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to Z4.
No
REPAIR the circuit in question for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- Z4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
STOP/TURN RELAY
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB
face side and ground; or between the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay pin 3, circuit SBB14 (BN/RD),
BJB face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8925
Yes
GO to Z5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 14 (15A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB14 (BN/RD) for an open. TEST
the system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- Z5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
STOP/TURN RELAY USING THE RELAY GROUND
- For the LH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3,
circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), BJB face side.
- For the RH trailer stop/turn lamp, measure the voltage between the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 3,
circuit SBB14 (BN/RD), BJB face side and the trailer tow LH turn relay pin 1, circuit GD120
(BK/GN), BJB face side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH trailer stop/turn) or circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH trailer stop/turn) for an
open. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AA: The Trailer Parking Lamps Are Inoperative
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are
illuminated. The Battery Junction Box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking
lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed
to the trailer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8926
tow connector.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Fuse
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow parking lamp relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER PARKING LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- AA1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
No
GO to AA2.
------------------------------------------------- AA2 CHECK THE TRAILER TOW PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow Parking Lamp Relay.
- Substitute a known good relay.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow C439-3, circuit CAT11 (BN), harness side and
ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REMOVE the known good relay. INSTALL a new trailer tow parking lamp relay. TEST the system
for normal operation.
No
REMOVE the known good relay. GO to AA3.
------------------------------------------------- AA3 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL
- Place the headlamp switch in the PARKING LAMPS ON position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 2, circuit CLS30 (VT/WH),
BJB face side and ground.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8927
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA4.
No
REPAIR circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------- AA4 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
PARKING LAMP RELAY
- Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position.
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and ground.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
GO to AA5.
No
VERIFY the BJB fuse 8 (20A) is OK. If OK, REPAIR circuit SBB08 (VT/RD) for an open. TEST the
system for normal operation. If not OK, Refer to the Wiring Diagrams to identify the possible
causes of the circuit short. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number
------------------------------------------------- AA5 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE TO THE TRAILER TOW
PARKING LAMP RELAY COIL USING THE RELAY GROUND CIRCUIT
- Measure the voltage between the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 3, circuit SBB08 (VT/RD), BJB
face side and the trailer tow parking lamp relay pin 1, circuit GD120 (BK/GN), BJB face side.
- Is the voltage greater than 10 volts?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT11 (BN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8928
No
REPAIR circuit GD120 (BK/GN) for an open. TEST the system for normal operation.
------------------------------------------------Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Trailer Lamps
Pinpoint Tests
Pinpoint Test AB: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously
Refer to Wiring Diagram Set 95 (Escape/Mariner, Escape Hybrid/Mariner Hybrid), Trailer/Camper
Adapter for schematic and connector information. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By
Number
Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Stop/Turn Lamp
The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is
illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
Trailer Tow Parking
The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage when the vehicle parking lamps are
illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow
connector.
This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following:
- Wiring, terminals or connectors
- Trailer tow relay
- Trailer
PINPOINT TEST AB: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY
NOTICE: Use the correct probe adapter(s) when making measurements. Failure to use the correct
probe adapter(s) may damage the connector.
------------------------------------------------- AB1 CHECK FOR VOLTAGE AT THE TRAILER TOW
CONNECTOR
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Trailer Tow C439.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 8929
GO to AB2.
No
The vehicle is operating correctly. SEND the trailer to an authorized camper/trailer repair facility.
------------------------------------------------- AB2 CHECK THE SUSPECT RELAY
- Ignition OFF.
- Disconnect: Suspect Trailer Tow Relay.
- Ignition ON.
- Measure the voltage the between trailer tow connector, harness side and ground as follows:
- Is any voltage present?
Yes
REPAIR circuit CAT06 (YE) (LH turn), circuit CAT09 (GN) (RH turn) or circuit CAT11 (BN) (parking
lamps) for a short to voltage. TEST the system for normal operation.
No
INSTALL a new turn trailer tow relay. TEST the system for normal operation.
-------------------------------------------------
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow
Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow
Right Turn Relay > Page 8934
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Locations > Trailer Tow
Right Turn Relay > Page 8935
Trailer Lighting Relay: Locations Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8938
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8939
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Left Turn Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8940
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8941
Trailer Lighting Relay: Testing and Inspection Trailer Tow Park Lamp Relay
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lighting Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection >
Trailer Tow Right Turn Relay > Page 8942
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
Side Lamp/Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
Side Lamp (Escape)
Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb
NOTE: Escape shown, Mariner similar.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 8948
Removal and Installation
Front turn signal lamp
1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector.
2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and
remove from the headlamp assembly.
- Separate the bulb from the bulb holder.
Side lamp
3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers.
6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside.
7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove
from the headlamp assembly.
8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder.
Front turn signal lamp or side lamp
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations
Turn Signal Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8952
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8953
Turn Signal Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8954
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations >
Page 8955
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left
Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 8960
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 8961
Vanity Lamp: Diagrams Vanity Mirror Lamp, Right
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp,
Left > Page 8962
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8968
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component
Information > Locations > Page 8969
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations
Heated Glass Element Relay: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8974
Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay
> Component Information > Locations > Page 8975
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8981
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8982
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Locations > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8983
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8986
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8987
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8988
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8989
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8990
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8991
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8994
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8995
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8996
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8997
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 8998
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch >
Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 8999
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Front Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Front Door Window Motor: Diagrams
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Rear Door Window Motor >
Component Information > Diagrams
Rear Door Window Motor: Diagrams
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Locations Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9012
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9013
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9014
Power Window Switch: Locations Window Control Switch, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9017
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9018
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9019
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9020
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9021
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams
> Master Window Control Switch > Page 9022
Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Control Switch, Right Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Control Switch
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9025
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9026
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Passenger Side
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9027
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9028
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Control Switch, Left Rear
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Master Window Control Switch > Page 9029
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing
and Inspection > Page 9030
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair
Window Control Switch
Removal and Installation
NOTE: LH front window control switch shown, all others similar.
NOTE: The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar.
1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel.
2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel.
3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9041
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9042
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior
Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page
9047
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9053
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9054
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window
Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
TSB 10-25-4
12/23/10
FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP
DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010
12/23/10
FORD: 008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the
front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be
due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM),
Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View.
2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar
(obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the
center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1)
3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass,
Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Replace One
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed
> Page 9059
Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other
Labor Operations)
102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door > Page 9062
Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Front
Door Glass Top Run - Front
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door window glass. For additional information, refer to Window Glass - Front
Door See: Service and Repair/Window Glass Front Door.
2. Remove the front door interior sail panel.
- If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector.
3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts.
- To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Remove the front door glass top run.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 > Body Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
Liftgate Window Glass: Customer Interest Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
TSB 11-2-9
02/07/11
BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may
experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are
present.
ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage.
a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure.
b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design.
Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms.
a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7842006 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Liftgate Window Glass: > 11-2-9 > Feb > 11 >
Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
Liftgate Window Glass: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Liftgate Window Glass Breakage
TSB 11-2-9
02/07/11
BROKEN LIFTGATE WINDOW GLASS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/15/2010
FORD: 2010-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2010-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-22-10 to update the Part List and Service Procedure.
ISSUE Some 2010-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 10/15/2010 may
experience the liftgate window glass breaking, typically when colder ambient temperatures are
present.
ACTION Follow the service procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. The liftgate should be closely inspected for any signs of impact or external damage.
a. If evidence of damage is present, do not continue with procedure.
b. If no evidence of damage is found, proceed to Step 2.
2. Replace the liftgate window glass. The new glass includes a revised through-bolt striker design.
Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section
501-11, Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms.
a. The new wiper arm cover is to be used in place of the original liftgate window glass handle.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110209A 2010-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Window Glass (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7842006 01
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component
Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9076
Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Liftgate
Removal and Installation
1. Open the liftgate window glass.
2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers.
3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector.
4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector.
5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders.
1. Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket.
2. Disconnect the socket from the ball stud.
6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step.
Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Transfer components as necessary.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
Window Glass - Rear Quarter
Removal
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the pinch weld
area.
- Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air.
3. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when
cutting.
4. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise
damage the pinch weld during glass
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9080
removal.
NOTE: Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The
new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins.
Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window
glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter
window glass.
5. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease
pencil.
2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld primer, glass primer
and urethane adhesive.
Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in)
base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld.
3. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around the
existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign
material or water that may have entered during glass removal.
4. If installing the original rear quarter window glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive.
5. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass with glass cleaner.
6. NOTICE: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane
glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of
the window assembly.
NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and glass
primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane adhesive and glass primer. For additional
information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
If installing a new rear window glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
7. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component
Information > Service and Repair > Page 9081
8. NOTE: The rear quarter glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane
adhesive.
NOTE: Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins
on the glass surface.
NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear
quarter window glass to specification, making sure there are no gaps in the bead.
9. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane
adhesive manufacturer's curing directions.
Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTICE: Before positioning the rear quarter window glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air
pressure of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond.
Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
11. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window
glass.
12. Install the headliner.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window
Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9091
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 9092
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door
Window Noise/Glass Scratched
TSB 11-2-15
02/28/11
WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR
BEFORE 8/13/2010
FORD: 2008-2011 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List.
ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a
front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass
scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Fully lower the affected window glass.
2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11
(Exploded View).
3. Fully raise the window glass.
4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of
the window glass. Is the distance within specification
range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)?
a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5.
b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5.
5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present?
a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to
WSM, Section 501-11.
b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11.
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And
Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9098
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use
With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door
11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors
110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door
110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs.
Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass
Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
7821453 41
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched >
Page 9099
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Door Glass Top Run - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door window regulator. For additional information, refer to Window Regulator Rear Door See: Window Regulator/Rear Door
Window Regulator/Service and Repair/Window Regulator - Rear Door.
2. Position the rear door window glass to the full DOWN position.
3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel.
4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip.
5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip.
6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward.
8. Remove the rear door glass top run.
9. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door
Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Glass Top Run - Rear > Page 9102
Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms Exploded View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Front Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9108
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Front Door
Window Regulator - Front Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the front door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket.
3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly.
4. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front
door window glass screws.
7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
9. Support the front door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector.
11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Front Door > Page 9109
12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
14. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded
View, Rear Door
Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9114
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair Window Regulator - Rear Door
Window Regulator - Rear Door
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear door trim panel.
2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket.
3. NOTE: Do not touch the adhesive surface during removal or installation of the watershield, as
re-bonding will be impaired. If additional adhesive
is required during installation, apply seam sealer as necessary to completely seal the watershield
to the inner door.
Position the watershield aside.
4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector.
5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear
door window glass screws.
6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector.
7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws.
- To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in).
8. Support the rear door window glass in the full UP position with tape.
9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector.
10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System
Information > Service and Repair > Glass, Frames and Mechanisms - Exploded View, Rear Door > Page 9115
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor.
- To install, tighten to 11 Nm (97 lb-in).
13. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
Windshield: Procedures
Glass Reseal - Windshield
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
6. Remove the cowl panel grille.
7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
9. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
NOTE: Make sure there are no gaps in the urethane adhesive bead.
Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle.
- Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle.
10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the
urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary.
11. Install the cowl panel grille.
12. Position the front portion of the headliner.
13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
> Page 9120
15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
> Page 9121
Windshield: Removal and Replacement
Windshield Glass
Removal
1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
> Page 9122
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the interior rear view mirror. For additional information, refer to Mirrors.
5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors.
6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material.
7. Remove the cowl panel grille.
8. Before cutting the urethane adhesive, remove dirt and other foreign material from the windshield
pinch weld area.
- Use a clean shop towel or oil-free, compressed air.
9. Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool when
cutting.
10. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp
edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury.
NOTICE: To avoid rust formation, use extreme care not to scratch the paint or primer or otherwise
damage the pinch weld during glass removal.
NOTE: Insert the blade into the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool so that the flat side is against the
glass. This will leave the entire urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld and allow a dry fit of the
replacement windshield glass.
Insert the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool at the upper center of the windshield glass and work
toward the bottom corners.
11. Using The Pumper, distance the windshield glass from the body.
12. Using the Deluxe Windshield Removal Tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove
the windshield glass.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
> Page 9123
13. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld.
Installation
1. Dry-fit the new windshield glass on the existing urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld.
- Position the windshield glass on the pinch weld.
- Center the windshield glass in the opening.
- Adjust the windshield glass stop blocks (if equipped) as needed for best fit.
- Make alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil (preferably at the windshield glass
stop blocks if equipped) on the windshield glass and the body.
2. After the dry-fit alignment, remove the glass from the windshield opening and place on a stable
work surface with the interior side of the glass
facing up.
3. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural
component of the vehicle. Corrosion left
unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may
result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTE: Avoid scratching the pinch weld. Repair all minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch
weld following manufacturer's instructions. Use the same brand pinch weld, glass primer and
urethane adhesive.
Using an appropriate tool, trim the urethane adhesive leaving a 1 mm to 2 mm (0.04 in to 0.08 in)
base of original equipment urethane adhesive on the pinchweld.
4. Using a clean shop towel, brush or oil-free, compressed air, clean the pinch weld area around
the existing urethane adhesive. Remove any foreign
material or water that may have entered during windshield removal.
5. If reinstalling the same windshield glass, remove the windshield moulding and remaining
urethane adhesive from the glass leaving a thin layer to
bond with the new urethane adhesive bead.
6. Clean the inside of the new windshield glass with glass cleaner.
7. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the urethane adhesive and
glass primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane
adhesive and glass primer. For additional information, refer to the Material Chart in this procedure.
If installing a new windshield glass, apply glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions.
Allow at least 6 minutes to dry.
8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification.
9. NOTE: The windshield glass must be positioned within 10 minutes of applying the urethane
adhesive.
NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane
adhesive with less effort and a continuous bead.
Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld,
starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center, make sure there are no gaps in
the bead.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures
> Page 9124
10. WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane adhesive seal has cured. Follow urethane
adhesive manufacturer's curing directions.
Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane adhesive seal will adversely affect glass retention.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s).
NOTICE: Before positioning the windshield glass, open vehicle windows to prevent the air pressure
of closing doors from affecting the urethane adhesive bond.
Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made.
11. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and
water leaks.
After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where
needed.
12. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield
glass.
13. Install the cowl panel grille.
14. Reposition the front portion of the headliner.
15. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connectors.
16. Install the interior rear view mirror. For additional information, refer to Mirrors.
17. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws.
- If equipped, connect the electrical connector.
18. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings.
19. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid
Onto Hood
Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical
Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto
Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9143
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9144
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9145
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9146
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9147
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield
Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9148
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9152
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9153
Wiper Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9154
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9155
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9156
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper
Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9157
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and
Repair
Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair
Washer Hose Repair
NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking,
a new washer hose must be installed.
1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose.
2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose.
3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose.
4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required.
Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and
clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Motor: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9164
Windshield Washer Motor: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations >
Page 9165
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump
Washer Pump
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional
information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
washer pump removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. For additional information, refer to C-Lock Coupler See:
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair.
5. NOTICE: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet.
Remove the washer pump.
6. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow these instructions may
result in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9170
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair C-Lock Coupler
C-Lock Coupler
Disconnect
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the coupler, do not use hand tools to disconnect/connect the
C-lock coupler.
NOTE: Do not remove the lock ring from the C-lock coupler.
1. NOTE: Hold the female side of the coupler at the hose connection to prevent the coupler from
rotating internally.
Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
2. NOTICE: The female side of the C-lock coupler contains an o-ring seal. Use care not to lose the
o-ring.
Slide the C-lock coupler apart from the component fitting.
3. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the unlocked position. This will weaken the lock ring and
will prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original locked position.
Connect
1. Verify the C-lock coupler lock ring is in the locked position.
2. NOTE: The lock ring flexes open slightly to allow the male fitting to enter the C-lock coupler.
NOTE: The lock ring can be heard as it snaps into the lock position.
Insert the male fitting into the C-lock coupler.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9171
3. Gently pull on the C-lock coupler to verify the coupler is seated correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service
and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 9172
Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
Washer Pump and Reservoir
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional
information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. For additional information, refer to C-Lock Coupler See:
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair.
5. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow this instruction may result
in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair > C-Lock Coupler
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair C-Lock Coupler
C-Lock Coupler
Disconnect
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the coupler, do not use hand tools to disconnect/connect the
C-lock coupler.
NOTE: Do not remove the lock ring from the C-lock coupler.
1. NOTE: Hold the female side of the coupler at the hose connection to prevent the coupler from
rotating internally.
Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
2. NOTICE: The female side of the C-lock coupler contains an o-ring seal. Use care not to lose the
o-ring.
Slide the C-lock coupler apart from the component fitting.
3. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the unlocked position. This will weaken the lock ring and
will prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original locked position.
Connect
1. Verify the C-lock coupler lock ring is in the locked position.
2. NOTE: The lock ring flexes open slightly to allow the male fitting to enter the C-lock coupler.
NOTE: The lock ring can be heard as it snaps into the lock position.
Insert the male fitting into the C-lock coupler.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair > C-Lock Coupler > Page 9177
3. Gently pull on the C-lock coupler to verify the coupler is seated correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service
and Repair > C-Lock Coupler > Page 9178
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir
Washer Pump and Reservoir
Removal and Installation
1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Vehicle
Jacking and Lifting.
2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield.
3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector.
4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL
INFORMATION seek medical
advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional
information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in serious personal injury.
NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before
removal.
Disconnect the washer pump hoses. For additional information, refer to C-Lock Coupler See:
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle/Service and Repair.
5. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir.
- To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
6. NOTICE: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure
to follow this instruction may result
in premature pump failure.
To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak
Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 >
Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer
Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood
TSB 10-13-1
07/19/10
WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING
FORD: 2008-2010 Escape
MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner
This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List
ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking
washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition.
ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse
washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included
in the kit.
Parts Block
WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits
are determined by the identified causal part.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME
101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr.
Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do
Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations)
DEALER CODING
CONDITION
BASIC PART NO. CODE
17K605 07
Disclaimer
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information >
Technical Service Bulletins > Page 9192
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Service and Repair
C-Lock Coupler
Disconnect
NOTICE: To prevent damage to the coupler, do not use hand tools to disconnect/connect the
C-lock coupler.
NOTE: Do not remove the lock ring from the C-lock coupler.
1. NOTE: Hold the female side of the coupler at the hose connection to prevent the coupler from
rotating internally.
Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees.
2. NOTICE: The female side of the C-lock coupler contains an o-ring seal. Use care not to lose the
o-ring.
Slide the C-lock coupler apart from the component fitting.
3. NOTICE: Do not leave the lock ring in the unlocked position. This will weaken the lock ring and
will prevent it from correctly locking in
place when reassembled, resulting in a leak.
Rotate the lock ring back to the original locked position.
Connect
1. Verify the C-lock coupler lock ring is in the locked position.
2. NOTE: The lock ring flexes open slightly to allow the male fitting to enter the C-lock coupler.
NOTE: The lock ring can be heard as it snaps into the lock position.
Insert the male fitting into the C-lock coupler.
3. Gently pull on the C-lock coupler to verify the coupler is seated correctly.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
Windshield Washer Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9196
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9197
Windshield Washer Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9198
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9199
Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9200
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations
> Page 9201
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Steering Column Multifunction Switch
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the steering column opening trim.
2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws.
3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds.
4. Remove the 2 multifunction switch screws.
5. Disconnect the multifunction switch electrical connector and remove the switch.
6. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield
1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers.
2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position.
3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from
returning to the fully parked position.
NOTE: A suitable 2 jaw puller may be necessary to remove the wiper arms.
If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them
to the correct locations.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper
Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 9206
Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear
1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper.
2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position.
3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct
location. For additional information, refer to
Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See: Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper
Removal and Installation
1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar.
Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts.
- To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft).
2. NOTE: A suitable 2 jaw puller may be necessary to remove the wiper arms.
Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms.
3. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arms. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm
Adjustment - Windshield See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9209
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the cowl panel grille.
2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield
wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in).
3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector.
4. Remove the wiper motor assembly. For additional information, refer to Wiper Motor - Windshield
See: Wiper Motor/Service and Repair/Wiper
Motor - Windshield.
5. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 9210
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear
Removal and Installation
1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover.
2. Remove the pivot arm nut.
- To install, tighten to 12 Nm (106 lb-in).
3. NOTE: A suitable 2 jaw puller may be necessary to remove the wiper arms.
Remove the wiper pivot arm.
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
- Adjust the wiper pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm
Adjustment - Rear See: Adjustments/Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair
Wiper Blade: Service and Repair
Wiper Blade - Rear
Removal
NOTICE: Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm
or the wiper arm heel.
NOTICE: Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass.
1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the
arm to its maximum angle.
2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand close to the wiper arm and
wiper blade pivot joint.
3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the
blade from the arm.
Installation
1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Locations Windshield Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 9218
Wiper Motor: Locations Rear Wiper Motor Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor
Wiper Motor: Diagrams Windshield Wiper Motor
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield
Wiper Motor > Page 9221
Wiper Motor: Diagrams Rear Wiper Motor Assembly
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield
Wiper Motor - Windshield
Removal and Installation
NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed.
1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. For additional information, refer to
Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft See:
Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft.
2. NOTICE: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the arm
is removed, the wiper arms may not
park in the correct location.
Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
- Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper
mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly.
3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor.
- To install, tighten to 13 Nm (115 lb-in).
4. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair >
Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 9224
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window
Wiper Motor - Rear Window
Removal and Installation
1. Remove the rear pivot arm. For additional information, refer to Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear See:
Wiper Arm/Service and Repair/Wiper Pivot Arm Rear.
2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover.
3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut.
- To install, hand-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in).
4. Open the liftgate window.
5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel.
6. Remove the rear wiper motor.
1. Disconnect the electrical connector.
2. Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts.
- To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in).
3. Remove the rear window wiper motor.
7. To install, reverse the removal procedure.
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations
Wiper Switch: Locations
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9228
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9229
Wiper Switch: Diagrams
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9230
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9231
Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection
Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (L4-2.5L (2010))
Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 9232